VOLUME 3 OF 4 - Green-Simmons · VOLUME 3 OF 4 DIVISION 14 ... ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM...

VOLUME 3 OF 4

THIS IS A TOTAL SMALL BUSINESS (SB) SET-ASIDE

SOLICITATION NO: W91278-17-R-0010

CADD CODE: M015ES13

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

FY-16 CYBER MISSION FORCES (CMF) ADD TO 39 IOS FACILITY

(FTEV123007)

HURLBURT FIELD, FLORIDA (OKALOOSA COUNTY)

“GOOD ENGINEERING RESULTS IN A BETTER ENVIRONMENT”

U.S. ARMY ENGINEER DISTRICT, MOBILE 109 St. Joseph St

Mobile, Alabama 36602

This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.

FY-16 CYBER MISSION FORCES (CMF) ADD TO 39 IOS FACILITY W91278-17-R-0010 HURLBURT FIELD, FLORIDA M015ES13

Table of Contents Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 4 CHECKLIST FOR PREPARATION OF OFFERS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Contract Clauses STANDARD FORM 1442 - SOLICITATION, OFFER, AND AWARD BIDDING SCHEDULE EXPLANATION OF BID ITEMS STANDARD FORM 24 - BID BOND STANDARD FORM 28 - AFFIDAVIT OF INDIVIDUAL SURETY STANDARD FORM LLL - DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 11 00 PROPOSAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS 00 12 00 EVALUATION CRITERIA AND BASIS OF AWARD 00600 REPRESENTATIONS & CERTIFICATIONS 00700 CONTRACT CLAUSES 00800 SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS CESAM FORM 1151, PROMPT PAYMENT CERTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 ADDITIONAL SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS PROJECT SIGNS DD FORM 1354

DD FORM 1354 CHECKLIST WAGE RATES

01 00 01 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SUBMITTAL REGISTER FORM 4025

01 33 29 LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION FOR GOVERNMENT VALIDATION 01 33 29 TABLE 1 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00.10 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)

SAM FORM 696 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 54 00 GREEN PROCUREMENT AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT REPORTING FORM 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION HURLBURT STANDARD 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 91 00.00 COMMISSIONING



VOLUME 2 OF 4 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 20 00 MASONRY DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 05 23.13 10 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION OF WELDMENTS 05 05 23.16 STRUCTURAL WELDING 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 30 00 STEEL DECKS 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS 05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 41 16.00 10 LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK 06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 05 23 PRESSURE TESTING AN AIR BARRIER SYSTEM FOR AIR TIGHTNESS 07 13 53 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 21 13 BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION 07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 07 27 10.00 10 BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 07 27 26 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR / MOISTURE BARRIER 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 81 00 SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 44 00 CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES 08 44 13 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES



08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE SETS 08 81 00 GLAZING 08 91 00 METAL WALL AND DOOR LOUVERS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE 09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 68 00 CARPETING 09 69 13 RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 10 14 02 INTERIOR SIGNAGE 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 22 19 DEMOUNTABLE MOVABLE PARTITIONS 10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 73 16 CANTILEVERED ENTRANCE CANOPY DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 70 00 COMPREHENSIVE INTERIOR DESIGN VOLUME 3 OF 4 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC



23 52 00 HEATING BOILERS 23 64 10 WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 23 81 23.00 20 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS 26 41 00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 16 01.00 10 SMALL INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM 28 20 00.00 20 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 31 16.13 CHEMICAL TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 01 16.17 COLD MILLING OF BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS 32 01 19 SILICONE SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT 32 11 23 GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS 32 12 16 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS 32 13 13.06 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE FACILITIES 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS 32 17 24.00 10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 31 13.53 HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 92 23 SODDING 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND



VOLUME 4 OF 4 APPENDICES APPENDIX A BORING LOGS APPENDIX B UFC 4-010-05 SENSITIVE COMPARTMENTED INFORMATION FACILITIES PLANNING, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION (1 FEB 2013, CHANGE 1, 1 OCT 2013) APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION AND MANAGEMENT OF SENSITIVE COMPARTMENTED INFORMATION FACILITIES (VERSION 1.3) IC TECH SPEC-FOR ICD/ICS 705 (10 SEPTEMBER 2015) APPENDIX D FURNITURE & EQUIPMENT (CID) PACKAGE

--End of Project Table of Contents--

FY-16 CYBER MISSION FORCES (CMF) ADD TO 39 IOS FACILITY W91278-17-R-0010HURLBURT FIELD, FLORIDA M015ES13

SECTION 14 24 00

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS08/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016) Structural Welding Code - Steel

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME A17.1/CSA B44 (2013) Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

ASME A17.2 (2010) Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks Includes Inspection Procedures for Electric Traction and Winding Drum Elevators, Hydraulic Elevators, and Escalators and Moving Walks

ASME B16.11 (2011) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.9 (2012) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A106/A106M (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

NATIONAL ELEVATOR INDUSTRY, INC. (NEII)

NEII-1 (2000; R thru 2010) Building Transportation Standards and Guidelines, including the Performance Standards Matrix for New Elevator Installation

SECTION 14 24 00 Page 1


NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 2013; AMD 2 2013) National Electrical Code

NFPA 72 (2016) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders

36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Provide a pre-engineered elevator system, by manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of elevator systems, that complies with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and ASME A17.2 in their entirety, and additional requirements specified herein.

1.2.1 Miscellaneous Requirements

Submit one set of wiring diagrams, in plastic or glass cover, framed and mounted in elevator machine room for revised building electrical system, if needed, to make supplied elevator system function as specified. Deliver other sets to Contracting Officer. Coded diagrams are not acceptable unless adequately identified. Submit calculations for the Reaction Loadsimposed on the building by elevator systems that comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and for total anticipated Heat Loads generated by all the elevator machine room equipment. Calculations shall be certified by a Registered Professional Engineer. Do not fabricate materials nor perform construction until approved.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Passenger Elevators; GField Quality Control Plan; GLogic Control; G

SD-05 Design Data

Reaction Loads; GHeat Loads; G



SD-06 Test Reports

Field Tests Reports; G

SD-07 Certificates

Welders' Qualifications; G

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Operation and Maintenance Manuals; GMaintenance and Diagnostic Tools; GMaintenance and Diagnostic SoftwareMaintenance and Repair Action Plan; GOperation and Maintenance Training; G

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 Elevator Specialist

Perform work specified in this section under the direct guidance of the Elevator Specialist who is regularly engaged in the installation and maintenance of the type and complexity of elevator system specified in the contract documents, and who served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 24 months. Provide endorsement letter from the elevator manufacturer certifying that the Elevator Specialist is acceptable to manufacturer. The Elevator Specialist oversees the acceptance inspections and tests, signs and certifies the successful results. Provide the Elevator Specialist's written certification that the installation is in accordance with the contract requirements, after completion of the acceptance inspections and tests. Bring any discrepancy to the attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is discovered.

1.4.2 Elevator Inspector

a. The Elevator Inspector shall be certified in accordance with the requirements of ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and licensed by the State of Florida in elevator repair. The Certified Elevator Inspector shall inspect the installation of the elevator(s) to ensure that the installation conforms with all contract requirements. The Elevator Inspector shall be directly employed by the Prime Contractor and be independent of the Elevator System Manufacturer and the Elevator Specialist, shall witness the acceptance inspections and tests, approve all results and shall sign and certify the successful results. The Elevator Inspector, after completion of the acceptance inspections and tests, shall certify in writing that the installation is in accordance with the contract requirements. Bring any discrepancy to the attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is discovered.

1.4.3 Welders' Qualifications

Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 4 Qualification. Provide certified copies of welders' qualifications. List welders'names with corresponding code marks to identify each welder's work. Submit a letter, no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed, providing the name and Statement of Qualifications, including ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Certificate and all required



state and local licenses of the individual who will perform the duties specified herein for the Elevator Inspector. A letter of endorsement from the elevator manufacturer certifying that the Elevator Specialist is acceptable to manufacturer, no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed, providing the name and Statement of Qualifications of the individual who will perform the duties specified herein for the Elevator Specialist. Copies of certified welders' qualifications, demonstrating compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 4; list welders' names with corresponding code marks.

1.4.4 Detail Drawings

Submit detail drawings, including dimensioned layouts in plan and elevation showing the arrangement of elevator equipment, accessories, supporting systems, anchorage of equipment, clearances for maintenance and operation; and details on hoistway, doors and frames, operation and signal stations, controllers, motors, guide rails and brackets, cylinder and plunge unit, and points of interface with normal power fire alarm system HVAC or exhaust systems and interface with emergency power systems. Provide drawings to show any revised building electrical system required to make supplied elevator system function as specified. Prepare drawings with complete wiring diagrams showing electrical connections and other details required to demonstrate sequence of operations and functions of system devices. Include the appropriate sizing of electrical protective devices on the drawings, which are frequently different from National Electrical Code standard sizes.

1.5 SCHEDULING

Every six months, test systems for Emergency Power Operation, and Firefighters' Service. Schedule to not interfere with building operations. For Firefighters' Service, test monthly in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section 8.6.10.1. Provide written results of each test operation to the Contracting Officer. Document all inspection and testing. Maintain copy of documentation in machine room.

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide routine warranty service in accord with manufacturer's warranty requirements, for a period of 12 months after the date of acceptance by Contracting Officer. Perform work during regular working hours. During the warranty service period, include 24-hour emergency service, with 4 hour response time, without additional cost to the Government. Include adjustments, greasing, oiling, and cleaning. Provide routine inspection and tests of elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Section 8.11.3 and ASME A17.2. Provide supplies and parts to keep elevator system in operation. Perform service only by factory trained personnel. Maintain a maintenance log of all service orders performed during the warranty period and submit it to the Contracting Officer 21 days prior to the end of the warranty period.

1.7 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTION PLAN

Provide plan of action prepared by the Elevator Specialist for emergency and routine maintenance in accordance with paragraph titled WARRANTY. Provide a list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all maintenance and diagnostic tools provided by paragraph "Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools", to the Contracting Officer.



1.7.1 Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools

Provide all special tools and software necessary to service and maintain each elevator delivered at time of final acceptance. Provide one of each tool per group of elevators. Include solid state or microprocessor diagnostic tools unavailable on the open market. Provide necessary diagnostic software in cases where the solid state or microprocessor diagnostic tools are available on the open market

1.7.2 Keys for Elevator Key Switches

Provide a minimum of twelve keys per unique cylinder used on all key switches for single elevator. If there is more than one elevator, additional keys are not required unless there are additional unique cylinders. Provide keys with brass or fiberglass tags marked 'PROPERTY OF THE U.S. GOVERNMENT' on one side with function of key or approved code number on other side.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PASSENGER ELEVATORS

2.1.1 Basic Requirements

Submit information on motor, pump, gages, piston and cylinder, piping and valves, hall station, and buffer on elevators and accessories. For elevator supporting systems, include information on car control and emergency power systems. On data sheets, provide document identification number or bulletin number, published or copyrighted prior to the date of contract bid opening. These requirements apply to Freight Elevators also.

a. Rated Load: 3500 lbs.

b. Rated Speed: 125 fpm.

c. Travel Length: 16 ft.-8 in.

d. Number of Stops: 2

e. Number of Hoist Way Openings: 1 Front; 0 Rear

f. Car Inside Dimensions: 6ft.-8in. wide, 5ft.-5in. deep and 7ft.-4in. high.

h. Car Door Types: Single-speed center opening Horizontal sliding, 3ft-6in wide by 7ft-0in high.

2.1.2 Cab Enclosures and Door Finishes

Provide finishes as indicated in Section 09 06 90.

a. Floor; Porcelain tile.

b. Walls; laminated plastic on particleboard. Provide each cab wall with equally spaced and equally sized wall panels. Conceal all fasteners. Wall trim; stainless steel. Accessories; hand rails.

c. Interior face of door(s); stainless steel (satin) finish.



d. Ceilings; stainless steel (polished) frameless.

e. Hoistway Doors and Frame Finishes; provide finishes on exterior of hoistway as follows:

(1) Frame; stainless steel (satin finish).(2) Exterior face of door; stainless steel.

2.2 SPECIAL OPERATION AND CONTROL

Provide all special operations and control systems in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Provide special operation key switches with 7 pin cylinder locks with removable cores an a key control lock for each operation system.

2.2.1 Firefighters' Service

Provide equipment and signaling devices. The designated level for Firefighters' key operated switch is the ground floor.

2.2.2 Smoke Detectors

a. Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be provided in each elevator lobby and in the elevator machine room. Smoke detectors shall be connected to the building fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72.

b. Provide listed control relays within 3 feet of the elevator controller to provide a supervised interface between the fire alarm system and the elevator controller as required by NFPA 72. The wiring between the control relays and the fire alarm control unit shall be monitored for integrity as required by NFPA 72.

c. Activation of any elevator machine room or lobby smoke detector shall activate the building fire alarm system and send the affected elevators to the designated floor.

d. Activation of a lobby smoke detector must cause the Firefighter's Service visual signal to constantly illuminate in any elevator cab that serves the affected lobby. Activation of an elevator machine room smoke detector must cause the Firefighter's Service visual signal to illuminate intermittently (flash) in any elevator cab which has equipment located in the affected machine room, as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

2.2.3 Fire Sprinklers

a. Provide sprinkler(s) with sprinkler guard(s) in the machine room(s). Provide a supervised shut-off valve, check valve, flow switch, and test valve in the sprinkler line supplying the machine room(s). These items shall be located outside of and adjacent to the machine room(s). Actuation of the flow switch shall remove power to the elevator(s), served by that machine room, by shunt trip breaker operation, in compliance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section 2.8.2, and send a signal to fire alarm control panel to indicate water flow condition. The flow switch must have no time delay.

b. Provide a sidewall sprinkler(s) with sprinkler guards in the pit for hydraulic elevators. Locate the sprinkler no more than 2 feet above the pit floor. Provide a supervised shut-off valve in the sprinkler



line supplying the pit. Locate the valve outside of and adjacent to the pit. Actuation of the pit sprinkler shall not disconnect power to the elevator.

c. Provide inspector's test connection for each water flow switch associated with the elevator machine room sprinklers. Locate the test connection outside the rated enclosure. Route test connection piping to a floor drain location that can accept full flow or where water may be discharged without property damage. Discharge to a floor drain may be permitted only if the drain is sized to accommodate full flow. Discharge to janitor sinks or similar plumbing fixtures is not permitted.

2.2.4 Top-of-Car Operating Device

Provide operating device mounted on or from car crosshead, to permit operation of car at 150 fpm maximum for adjustment, maintenance, testing, and repair. Include integral or remote safety device, continuous pressure "UP" and "DOWN" switches or buttons, emergency stop switch, and inspection switch.

2.2.5 Hoistway Access Switches

Provide key-operated hoistway access switch to permit limited movement of car at terminal floors for car positioning, operative only when "INSPECTION" switch in car operating panel is in the "INSPECTION" position. Locate switch 6 feet above floor level, within 12 inches of hoistway entrance frame or with only ferrule exposed when located in entrance frame.

2.2.6 Independent Service

Provide exposed key-operated switch in car operating panel to enable independent service and simultaneously disable in-car signals and landing-call responses. Provide indicator lights that automatically illuminate during independent service.

2.2.7 Elevator Operation

2.2.7.1 Single, Two-Stop, Automatic Operation

Provide Single Two-Stop Automatic Operation. Provide illuminating push buttons.

2.2.8 Access Control

Provide elevator controls in cab with key pad/proximity card reader device (KP/CR) to control use of elevator. KP/CR device to match other KP/CR device for use and integration with the primary access control system.

2.3 ELEVATOR DRIVE SYSTEM

Provide hydraulic elevator drive system, including pump unit, piping, cylinder/plunger assembly, and associated equipment, which will operate at a maximum working pressure of 500 psi or less. Provide complete elevator system that meets or exceeds the NEII-1.



2.3.1 Hydraulic Pump Unit

Provide self-contained pump unit, including oil-hydraulic elevator pump, electric motor, suction-line oil strainer, oil-tight drip pan, and structural steel outer base with tank supports and isolation pads. Provide oil tank capacity for full plunger displacement plus at least 10 gallons. Provide means to maintain oil temperature between 80 and 120 degrees F regardless of ambient temperature. Limit acoustic output in elevator machine room to 80 dbA.

2.3.1.1 Pump Motor

Provide intermittent-duty pump motor rated at 120 starts/hour. Provide motor that is sized so that the motor amperage does not exceed the motor data tag amperage in any operating condition, exclusive of acceleration and deceleration. Provide minimum of one megohm insulation resistance between conductors and motor frame. Provide motor and pump nameplate and data tags permanently mounted on the outside of the pump unit frame, with all data viewable without the use of mirrors or other tools.

2.3.2 Hydraulic Controls and Equipment

Provide control valve, overspeed (rupture) valve, blowout-proof muffler, and hydraulic pump discharge strainer in the hydraulic oil supply line. Provide 1/4 turn, manual shutoff ball-valves in the elevator machine room and in the hoistway pit. Provide scavenger pump in hoistway pit.

2.3.2.1 Hydraulic Control Valve

Provide constant-velocity, down-speed regulated, control valve. Down-speed regulated control valve allows the car to travel at the same speed in the down direction, regardless of the load on the elevator. In addition, the hydraulic control valve shall have built-in adjustment capability to operate the elevator at 140 percent of rated speed in the down direction to facilitate periodic testing of the overspeed safety valve.

2.3.2.2 Hydraulic Overspeed Safety Valve

Provide overspeed safety valve in hydraulic oil supply line, directly adjacent to the hydraulic cylinder. Provide threaded pipe connections between the hydraulic cylinder and the overspeed valve. Provide valve equipped with manufacturer's manual shutoff feature. Overspeed valve shall not be equipped with a manual lowering feature. Provide adjustable valve with means to seal adjustment after inspection and testing by certified elevator inspector.

2.3.2.3 Hydraulic Oil Scavenger Pump

Provide a scavenge oil reservoir with strainer and transfer pump. Provide a manual-reset pit flood switch to prevent pump operation if pit is flooded. Anchor pump and reservoir to pit floor.

2.3.3 Hydraulic Piping and Accessories

Provide ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, Schedule 80, black steel piping with ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11 fittings for supply piping. Extend schedule 80 piping from the pump control valve body, inside the pump unit, to the hydraulic cylinder in the hoistway. Provide welded or threaded forged pipe fittings for all fittings and components of the hydraulic oil supply line.



For direct plunger cylinders, provide dielectric union or isolation couplings at each end of the hydraulic oil supply line. Provide hangers or supports for all piping and components.

2.3.3.1 Containment of Hydraulic Oil Supply Line

Protect all portions of hydraulic oil supply line that are installed below ground, including portions encapsulated in concrete or covered by construction, with continuous, Schedule 80, PVC. Inside diameter of PVC shall be 3 inches larger than the outside diameter of the hydraulic oil supply line pipe and couplings.

2.3.4 Hydraulic Elevator Type

Provide a direct plunger type hydraulic elevator. Do not utilize telescopic or inverted cylinder-plunger units. Telescopic and inverted jacks are not acceptable. Do not utilize roped-hydraulic elevator design.

2.3.4.1 Cylinder-Plunger (Jack) Unit

Provide a single-stage plunger of seamless steel construction. Provide cylinder with self-stabilizing mount that will support and hold cylinder plumb without the need for stabilization means at the bottom of the cylinder. Provide a threaded, 1/4 inch bleeder valve at the top of the cylinder, just below packing gland.

2.3.5 Cylinder Well System

For direct plunger type hydraulic elevator, the cylinder well system consists of a sealed, dry well casing and a PVC liner.

2.3.5.1 Well Casing

Locate and drill well for the cylinder well system. Line well with steel casing, minimum 1/4 inch wall with welded 1/2 inch steel bottom. Set casing plumb. Provide a dry, sealed well casing.

2.3.5.2 PVC or HDPE Cylinder Liner

Provide Schedule 80 PVC or HDPE pipe liner with bottom cap and couplings; joints sealed watertight using pipe manufacturer's recommended adhesive or heat welding methods. Provide liner inside diameter not less than 3 inches larger than elevator cylinder maximum outside diameter. Liner shall extend above hoistway pit finish floor. Liner may be provided as a cylinder manufacture's applied liner or as a separate component. For separate liner, set liner plumb in well casing, located as necessary for cylinder installation. Provide dry, salt-free sand below and around liner to top of well casing.

2.3.5.3 Cylinder Installation

Remove all moisture from inside of cylinder liner. Install cylinder plumb, inside liner. Provide a 1/4 inch copper evacuation tube inside the PVC liner. The bottom of the evacuation tube, shall be within 6 inch of the bottom of the liner. Top of evacuation tube shall extend at least 6 inch above liner. Provide top of test tube with removable cap to exclude foreign matter. Provide separate air pressure fitting in liner to facilitate pressure test of liner as specified in paragraph PRESSURE TEST OF PVC LINER/CYLINDER ASSEMBLY. Secure Liner/Cylinder Assembly as



recommended by cylinder manufacturer.

2.3.5.4 Pressure Test of PVC Liner/Cylinder Assembly

Perform 8 psig pressure test of liner/cylinder assembly. Perform the test of liner/cylinder assembly as a sealed unit. Provide safety relief valve, set to relieve at 10 psig. Provide 4.5 inch diameter dial pressure gage scaled for 0 to 50 psig and calibrated to 0.5 percent accuracy and an air pressure admission throttle and shutoff valve. For safety, pressure test shall only be performed when liner and cylinder are fully inserted and assembled in the well casing. Perform the test from remote location outside of the elevator pit. Perform test in the presence of, and witnessed by, a NAVFAC Certified Elevator Inspector.

2.3.5.5 Cylinder Liner Water and Oil Sensor System

Provide moisture sensor system designed to detect water and/or oil in the bottom of the cylinder liner. Water and oil sensors shall be located inside the cylinder liner and within 6 inches of the bottom of the liner. Water and oil senor system shall include a control and alarm panel, located in the elevator machine room. System shall provide automatic actuation of audible and visual alarms upon detection of either water or oil inside the cylinder liner.

2.3.5.6 Seal Top of Well Casing

Upon successful test and certification of PVC Liner/Cylinder assembly, seal gap between steel well casing and PVC liner with foam insert strong enough to retain and support final grouting. Provide 3000 psi grout to a minimum of 4 inch thickness and level top of final grouting with pit floor.

2.4 CONTROL EQUIPMENT

2.4.1 Motor Control Equipment

Provide elevator motor controller with electronic, soft-start motor starter. Enclose control equipment in factory-primed and baked-enamel coated sheet-metal cabinets with removable or hinged doors with ventilation louvers.

2.4.1.1 Electrical Isolation Protection

Provide individual isolation transformers and individual choke reactors for each individual motor. Provide filtering to maintain harmonic distortion below IEEE standards as measured at the elevator machine room disconnect.

2.4.2 Logic Control Equipment

Provide a non-proprietary microprocessor controller for each individual elevator and group controller. Store all programming in non-volatile memory. Provide a microprocessor control system that includes all hardware and software required to service and maintain the elevator and a technical support service that is routinely provided to any elevator service provider.

2.4.2.1 On-Board Diagnostic Panel

a. Provide, for each individual elevator microprocessor controller, an



on-board diagnostic control and LCD display panel that allows unrestricted access to the comprehensive range of adjustable parameters necessary to perform installation, adjusting, service, maintenance, and testing of the elevator.

b. For each elevator group control, provide a separate on-board diagnostic control and LCD display panel that allows unrestricted access to the comprehensive range of options and adjustments necessary to perform installation, adjusting, service, maintenance, and testing of the elevator group.

c. For both individual and group controllers, provide fault log capability to store all fault logs for up to 1 year of elevator service history. The on-board LCD display shall provide the capability to display and monitor any and all fault logs, trouble calls, and fault history for up to 1 year of elevator service history. The on-board LCD display shall also provide the capability to display and diagnose trouble calls, faults, and shutdowns.

2.4.2.2 External Port

For each individual elevator microprocessor controller, and elevator group microprocessor controller, provide a USB port or an RS 232 port that allows connection to an on-site or a remote portable laptop computer. Provide unrestricted access as specified in paragraph ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC PANEL.

2.4.2.3 Maintenance and Diagnostic Software

Provide three copies of the manufacturer's maintenance and service diagnostic software, with complete software documentation, that shall enable the same level of unrestricted access to all controllers of the same make and model, regardless of the installation date or location. Provide signed certification, from the manufacturer's corporate headquarters, that guarantees that the microprocessor software and access system will not terminate the unlimited and unrestricted access at any future date.

2.4.2.4 Acceptable Controller Suppliers

Provide microprocessor controller from one of the following controller manufacturers:

Elevator Controls Corporation3525 La Grande BoulevardSacramento, CA 95823

G.A.L. Manufacturing Corporation50 East 153rd StreetBronx, New York 10451

Motion Control Engineering, Inc.11354 Whiterock RoadRancho Cordova, CA 95742-6522

Virginia Controls, Inc.2513 Mechanicsville TurnpikeRichmond, Virginia 23223



2.5 OPERATING PANELS, SIGNAL FIXTURES, AND COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS

2.5.1 Capacity and Data Plates

Attach faceplates with spanner security screws. On car panel, provide stainless steel capacity and data plates, with name of elevator manufacturer.

2.5.2 Car and Hall Buttons

Provide recessed tamper-proof push buttons of minimum 3/4 inch size satin-finish stainless steel, with illuminating jewel center.

2.5.3 Hall Station Door Operating Buttons

Identical in size and design to hall call buttons, but not illuminating.

2.5.4 Passenger Car-Operating Panel

Provide each car with one car operating panel that contains operation controls and communication devices. Provide exposed, flush mounted buttons for the controls that must be passenger accessible. Provide service cabinet or keyed switches for those switches that should not be passenger accessible. Allow maximum 48 inch height between car floor and center line of top operating buttons. Allow 35 inch height between car floor and center line of bottom button. Use engraving and backfilling or photo etching for button and switch designations. Do not use attached signs.

2.6 PASSENGER CONTROLS

2.6.1 Passenger Car-Operating Panel

a. Illuminating operating call buttons identified to correspond to landings served by elevator car.

b. "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" buttons.

c. Keyed "STOP" switch in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, rule 2.26.2.

d. "ALARM" button in compliance with UFAS, ADA, and ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Rule 2.27.1. Furnish a red alarm button with engraved legend "ALARM." Allow alarm button to illuminate when pushed. Locate "ALARM" button at panel bottom.

e. "FIRE DEPARTMENT" key switch, with "OFF-HOLD-ON" positions, in that order with key to be removable in all positions. Provide fire sign or jewel, and audible signal device, in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Section 2.27.3. Both visual and audible signals are activated when Phase I key switch in hall is activated or when smoke detector activates return of elevator(s) to main fire response floor. Keep visual and audible signal activated until car has reached main or designated alternate fire response floor. Upon arrival at fire response floor visual signal remains illuminated and audible signal becomes silent.

f. Emergency two-way communication. Provide momentary pressure, single illuminating pushbutton operated communication device that complies with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, UFAS, and the Americans with Disabilities Act.



2.6.1.1 Service Controls

a. Inspection switch that transfers car control to top-of-car inspection operating controls and prevents car operation from in-car control panel.

b. Independent service switch.

c. Two car light switches, one for light in car and one for lights on top and bottom of car frame.

d. Fan switch, two-speed.

e. 120-volt ac 60 Hz single-phase duplex electrical outlet of ground-fault-circuit-interrupt (GFCI) design.

f. Device for communication between car and elevator machine room.

2.6.1.2 Certificate Window

Provide 4 inch high by 6 inch wide certificate window in car operating panel for elevator inspection certificate.

2.6.2 Switches and Devices

Provide elevator manufacturer's standard grade for switches and devices on car operating panel. Legibly and indelibly identify each device and its operating positions. Locate car dispatching buttons in identical positions in car operating panels for corresponding floors.

2.6.3 In-Car Position and Direction Indicator and Signal

Include in-car direction indicator in the in-car position indicator fixture.

2.6.3.1 In-Car Position Indicator and Signal

Provide horizontal electrical or electronic digital position indicator located minimum of 84 inch above car floor. Arrange indicator to show floor position of car in hoistway and its traveling direction. Indicate position by illuminating of numeral or letter corresponding to landing at which car is passing or stopping. Provide audible signal to alert passenger that elevator is passing or stopping at a floor. Provide audible signals exceeding ambient noise level by at least 20 dbA with frequency not higher than 1500 Hz.

2.6.3.2 In-Car Direction Indicator and Signal

Provide visual and audible car direction indicators in car, indicating car traveling direction. For visual directional signal, provide arrow of minimum 2-1/2 inch in size. Use equilateral triangles for arrows, green for upward direction and red for downward direction. Provide audible signal that sounds once for upward direction and twice for downward direction.

2.6.4 Landing Position and Direction Indicator and Signal

Provide a single fixture containing the landing position and direction indicator.



2.6.4.1 Landing Position Indicator and Signal

Provide an electrical or electronic digital position indicator similar to the car position indicator. Arrange position indicator in wall horizontally above the door frame or vertically at the side of the door frame. Indicators to show floor position of car in hoistway. Indicate position by illumination of numeral or letter corresponding to landing at which car is passing or stopping.

2.6.4.2 Landing Direction Indicator and Signal

Provide landing direction indicator with visual and audible signal devices. Provide single direction indicator at terminal floors; "UP" and "DOWN" direction indicator at intermediate floors. Provide equilateral triangles minimum 2-1/2 inch in size, green for upward direction and red for downward direction. Provide electronic audible device that sounds once for upward direction and twice for downward direction. Provide audible signals exceeding ambient noise level by at least 20 decibels with frequency not higher than 1500 Hz.

2.7 HOISTWAY AND CAR EQUIPMENT

2.7.1 Guide Rails and Fastenings

Paint rail shanks with one coat black enamel. Only T-section type rail is acceptable.

2.7.2 Car Buffers

Provide buffer data plate on each buffer.

2.7.3 Pit Equipment

2.7.3.1 Pit "STOP" Switch

Provide push/pull type pit "STOP" switch for stopping elevator motor, independent of regular operating device. Locate on same side of hoistway as ladder.

2.7.3.2 Ladders

Provide galvanized steel ladder conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27 with minimum 7 inch distance between rung and wall. Locate ladder on hoistway side wall closest to hoistway door opening.

2.7.3.3 Lighting of Pits

Locate pit light not less than 6 feet above pit floor. Locate switch on same side of hoistway as ladder. Provide GFCI duplex receptacle in each pit.

2.8 TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES

Provide each elevator with a terminal stopping device.

2.8.1 Wiring and Traveling Cables

Suspend traveling cables by means of self-tightening webbed devices.



2.8.2 Emergency Signaling Device

Provide audible signaling device, operable from Car Operating Panel button marked "ALARM". Mount the audible signaling device in hoistway.

2.9 PASSENGER CAR AND HOISTWAY DOOR ACCESSORIES

ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Sections 2.12, 2.13, 2.14, and 3. Provide infra-red curtain unit (ICU) with multiple infra-red beams that protect to the full height of the door opening. Extend minimum coverage from 2 inches off the floor to 70 inch above floor level. Door operation must meet the requirements of ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Rule 2.27.1 and 2.13.5. Provide high-speed electric operator, safety interlocks for car and hoistway doors, and electric safety contact to prevent car operation unless doors are closed.

2.10 PASSENGER ELEVATOR GUIDES, FRAME, PLATFORM, AND ENCLOSURE

2.10.1 Roller Guides

Provide roller guide assemblies in adjustable mountings on each side of car in accurate alignment at top and bottom of car frame.

2.10.2 Car Enclosure, Car Door, and Car Illumination

Provide natural and forced ventilation, stainless steel hooks, with fire retardant pads.

2.10.2.1 Return Panels, Entrance Columns, Cove Base, and Transom

Provide 14 gauge minimum non perforated steel. Apply sound-deadening mastic on car shell and all exterior components.

2.10.2.2 Car Top

Provide reinforced 12 gauge minimum steel with hinged emergency exit openable by hand from car top only. Provide electrical contact which prevents operation of elevator when emergency exit is open. Provide sound-deadening mastic on all exterior components.

2.10.2.3 Car Door

Provide 16 gauge minimum steel, sandwich construction without binder angles. Provide a minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one guide at leading and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill groove their entire length of travel.

2.10.2.4 Car Entrance Sill

Provide one piece cast white bronze or nickel silver entrance sill. Set sills level and flush with floor finish. Use same material for hoistway and car entrance sills.

2.11 PASSENGER ELEVATOR HOISTWAY DOORS AND ENTRANCES

Provide hoistway entrance assemblies which have a minimum 1-1/2 hour fire rating.



2.11.1 Hoistway Entrance Frames

Frame of 14 gauge thick stainless steel. Solidly grout uprights of entrances to height of 5 feet.

2.11.2 Hoistway Entrance Sills

Provide one-piece cast solid white bronze or nickel silver entrance sills. After sill is set level and flush with finished floor height, solidly grout under full length of sill. Use same material for hoistway and car door sills.

2.11.3 Hoistway Entrance Doors

Provide hoistway entrance door constructed with hollow metal non-vision construction with flush surfaces on car and landing sides. Provide a minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one guide at leading edge and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill groove the entire length of travel.

2.11.4 Entrance Fascias and Dust Covers

Provide sheet metal hoistway door track dust covers at each landing. Dust covers must cover door locks and door roller tracks and extend the full width of the door track and associated hardware.

2.11.5 Hoistway Ventilation

Provide hoistway ventilation directly to outside air by fixed louver through side wall of hoistway at top of hoistway. The net size of the louver shall be a minimum of 3.5 percent of the cross section of hoistway.

2.12 HANDICAPPED ACCESS

2.12.1 Provision For Handicapped

Refer to 36 CFR 1191, Sections 4.10 for Elevators, 4.30 for Signage, and 4.31 for Telephones.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ASME A17.1/CSA B44, 36 CFR 1191, and NFPA 70.

3.1.1 Traveling Cables

Do not allow abrupt bending of traveling cables.

3.1.2 Automatic Shutoff Valve

Locate in supply-return line, as close as possible to cylinder-plunger unit.

3.1.3 Structural Members

Do not cut or alter. Restore any damaged or defaced work to original condition.



3.1.4 Safety Guards

Completely enclose selector cables or tapes exposed to possibility of accidental contact in machine room with 16 gage thick sheet metal or expanded metal guards, both horizontally and vertically. Protect exposed gears, sprockets, and selector drums from accidental contact in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

3.1.5 Other Requirements

Include recesses, cutouts, slots, holes, patching, grouting, and refinishing to accommodate elevator installation. Use core drilling to drill all new holes in concrete. Finish work to be straight, level, and plumb. During installation, protect machinery and equipment from dirt, water, or mechanical damage. At completion, clean all work, and spot paint. Completion of firefighters' service includes installation and wiring of all smoke detectors in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section 2.27.3.2. Coordinate smoke detector installation for firefighters' service.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

a. After completing elevators system installation, notify Contracting Officer that elevator system is ready for final inspection and acceptance test. In conjunction with the notification submit a plan detailing the testing procedures 60 days prior to performing the elevator tests.

b. Perform all required tests and demonstrate proper operation of each elevator system and prove that each system complies with contract requirements and ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Inspection procedures in ASME A17.2 form a part of this inspection and acceptance testing. Conduct all testing and inspections in the presence of both the Elevator Specialist and the Elevator Inspector. Demonstrate the proper operation of all equipment at various date settings, selected by the Elevator Inspector, ranging from the date of contract award through 1 January 2099.

c. The Elevator Inspector shall complete, sign and post the results of all tests and inspection results after successful completion of inspection and testing. The Contractor is responsible for all costs involved with reinspection and retesting required to correct discrepancies discovered during testing and the subsequent retesting required.

3.2.1 Testing Materials and Instruments

Provide testing materials and instruments required for final inspection. Include calibrated test weights, tachometer, 600-volt megohm meter, volt meter and ammeter, three Celsius calibrated thermometers, door pressure gage, spirit level, stop watch, hydraulic pressure test gauge, and a 100 foot tape measure.

3.2.2 Field Tests

Submit Field Tests Reports after completing each of the specified tests, as required in the Submittals paragraph.



3.2.2.1 Endurance Tests

Test each elevator for a period of one hour continuous run, with specified rated load in the car. Restart the one hour test period from beginning, following any shutdown or failure. During the test run, stop car at each floor in both directions of travel for standing period of 10 seconds per floor. The requirements for Rated Speed, Leveling, Temperature Rise, and Motor Amperes testing specified herein must be met throughout the duration of the Endurance test.

3.2.2.2 Automatic Shutoff Valve Tests

Test the automatic shutoff valve twice. Once at beginning of acceptance test and again at conclusion of one-hour Endurance test to ensure consistent performance of shutoff valve, regardless of temperature of equipment and oil.

3.2.2.3 Speed Tests

Determine actual speed of each elevator in both directions with rated load and with no load in elevator car. Make Speed tests before and immediately after Endurance test. Determine speed by tachometer reading, excluding accelerating and slow-down zones in accordance with ASME A17.2, Section 2.22.4. Minimum acceptable speed is the Rated Speed as specified. Maximum acceptable elevator speed is 110 percent of Rated Speed.

3.2.2.4 Leveling Tests

Test elevator car leveling devices for landing accuracy of plus or minus 1/4 inch at each floor with no load in car, symmetrical load in car, and with rated load in car in both directions of travel. Determine accuracy of floor landing both before and immediately after endurance tests.

3.2.2.5 Pressure Tests

Check operating pressure at pump and cylinder head under no load and rated load. Test pressure at which relief valve operates.

3.2.2.6 Insulation Resistance Tests

Perform tests to ensure wiring systems free from short circuits and grounds. Minimum acceptable insulation resistance for electrical conductors is one megohm between each conductor and ground and between each conductor and other conductors. Prior to megohm meter test, make provision to prevent damage to the electronic devices.

3.2.2.7 Temperature Rise Tests

Determine the temperature rise of the hydraulic pump motor during the full load test run for a minimum of one hour. Under these conditions, do not exceed maximum acceptable temperature rise indicated on the manufacturer's data plate. Start test only when equipment is within 5 degrees C of ambient temperature.

3.2.2.8 Motor Ampere Tests

Measure and record motor amperage when motor is running and elevator is lifting at rated load and speed. Measure and record motor amperage at the beginning and the end of Endurance test.



3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING

The Elevator Specialist shall instruct Government personnel in care, adjustment, and maintenance of elevator equipment for a period of not less than 5 working days immediately following acceptance of system. Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, three Operation and Maintenance Manuals, 28 days prior to the Operation and Maintenance Training, proposed Onsite Training schedule, submitted concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Include a list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all tools required for operation and maintenance.

-- End of Section --



SECTION 21 13 13.00 10

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION05/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C104/A21.4 (2013) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C110/A21.10 (2012) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

AWWA C111/A21.11 (2012) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C151/A21.51 (2011) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied


ASME B16.1 (2015) Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250


ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300

ASME B16.4 (2011) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and 250


ASME B18.2.2 (2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts


ASTM A135/A135M (2009; R2014) Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 1


ASTM A183 (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

ASTM A449 (2014) Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use

ASTM A47/A47M (2003; R 2012) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings


ASTM A536 (1984; R 2014) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A795/A795M (2013) Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use

ASTM F436 (2011) Hardened Steel Washers

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-71 (2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends


NFPA 101 (2015; ERTA 2015) Life Safety Code

NFPA 13 (2016) Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 1963 (2014) Standard for Fire Hose Connections

NFPA 24 (2016) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

UFC 3-600-01 (2013) Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities, Change 3

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 668 (2004; Reprint Dec 2012) Hose Valves for Fire-Protection Service

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 2


UL Bld Mat Dir (2015) Building Materials Directory

UL Fire Prot Dir (2015) Fire Protection Equipment Directory


Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. Install sprinkler system over and under ducts, piping and platforms when such equipment can negatively effect or disrupt the sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage. Provide wet pipe sprinkler system in all areas of the building. Except as modified herein, the system shall be designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13 and UFC 3-600-01. Pipe sizes which are not indicated on drawings or not specified herein, shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Design any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated on the drawings including locating sprinklers, piping and equipment, and size piping and equipment. The design of the sprinkler system shall be based on hydraulic calculations, and the other provisions specified herein.

1.2.1 Hydraulic Design

Hydraulically design the system to discharge minimum densities as indicated on the drawings. The minimum pipe size for branch lines in gridded systems shall be 1 1/4-inch. Hydraulic calculations shall be in accordance with the Area/Density Method of NFPA 13.

1.2.1.1 Hose Demand

Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 250 gallons per minute to the sprinkler system demand for Hazard Category 1 and 2 at the fire hydrant closest to the facility.

1.2.1.2 Basis for Calculations

The design of the sprinkler system for 39th IOS Addition shall be based upon a water supply test conducted on June 8, 2016, behind the existing 39th IOS building, with a static pressure of 68 pounds per square inch, and a flow of 1,031 gallons per minute at a residual pressure of 50 pounds per square inch. Water supply shall be presumed available at the point of connection to existing water distribution system. The contractor shall perform a fire hydrant flow test to verify adequate flow and pressure is available prior to design of the system. Hydraulic calculations shall be based upon the Hazen-Williams formula with a "C" value of 120 for steel piping, 140 for new cement-lined ductile iron piping, and 100 for existing underground piping.

1.2.1.3 Hydraulic Calculations

Submit hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic reference points and pipe segments and as outlined in NFPA 13, except that calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended specifically for fire protection system design using the design data shown on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch lines is not acceptable. Calculations shall be based on the fire hydrant flow test performed by the contactor prior to design of the system to substantiate that the design area used in the calculations is the most demanding hydraulically. Water supply curves and system requirements shall be

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 3


plotted on semi-logarithmic graph paper so as to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation. Provide a summary sheet listing sprinklers in the design area and their respective hydraulic reference points, elevations, actual discharge pressures and actual flows. Elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes) shall be indicated. Documentation shall identify each pipe individually and the nodes connected thereto. Indicate the diameter, length, flow, velocity, friction loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe, equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient for each pipe. The hydraulic calculations shall include a 12-pound per inch loss through the backflow prevention device. For gridded systems, calculations shall show peaking of demand area friction loss to verify that the hydraulically most demanding area is being used. Also for gridded systems, a flow diagram indicating the quantity and direction of flows shall be included. A drawing showing hydraulic reference points (nodes) and pipe designations used in the calculations shall be included and shall be independent of shop drawings.

1.2.2 Sprinkler Coverage

Sprinklers shall be uniformly spaced on branch lines. In buildings protected by automatic sprinklers, sprinklers shall provide coverage throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces. Coverage per sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not exceed 130 square feet for Hazard Category 2 occupancies and 225 square feet for Hazard Category 1 occupancies. Exceptions are as follows:

a. Sprinklers may be omitted from small rooms which are exempted for specific occupancies in accordance with NFPA 101.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Fire Protection Related SubmittalsMaterials and Equipment; GSpare PartsPreliminary Tests; GFinal Acceptance Test; GOnsite Training; GFire Protection Specialist; GSprinkler System Installer; G

SD-05 Design Data

Sway Bracing; GHydraulic Calculations; G

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 4


SD-06 Test Reports

Preliminary Test ReportFinal Acceptance Test Report

SD-07 Certificates

Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist


Operating and Maintenance Manuals; G

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

As-Built Drawings


Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification governs. Interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist

Perform work specified in this section under the supervision of and certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is an individual registered professional engineer who has passed the fire protection engineering written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveys (NCEES). Submit the name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system drawings and hydraulic calculations. The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare and submit a list of the fire protection related submittals, no later than 14 days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist, from the Contract Submittal Register that relate to the successful installation of the sprinkler systems(s). The submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to the Government. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in the design and installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.

1.4.2 Sprinkler System Installer

Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System Installer who is regularly engaged in the installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the contract documents, and who has served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months. Submit the name and documentation of certification of the proposed Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire Protection Specialist Qualifications.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 5


1.4.3 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Submit three copies of the sprinkler system shop drawings, no later than 21 days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation. Drawings shall include plan and elevation views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with clearance for installation and maintenance. Each set of drawings shall include the following:

a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed in sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols, nomenclature, and conventions used.

b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which clearly show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, inspector's test connections, drains, and other applicable details necessary to clearly describe the proposed arrangement. Each type of fitting used and the locations of bushings, reducing couplings, and welded joints shall be indicated.

c. Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on branch lines and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to adjacent walls; from walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed mains, cross mains and branch lines to finished floor and roof or ceiling. A detail shall show the dimension from the sprinkler and sprinkler deflector to the ceiling in finished areas.

d. Longitudinal building sections showing typical branch line and cross main pipe routing.

e. Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; restraint of underground water main at point-of-entry into the building, and electrical devices and interconnecting wiring.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall either be capped or plugged until installed.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1-year and 3 years of service. Include a list of special tools and test equipment required for maintenance and testing of the products supplied.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 6


2.2 NAMEPLATES

All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.

2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE

Provide Materials and Equipment that have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and are listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory Mutual and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification section, such shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. Submit manufacturer's catalog data included with the sprinkler system drawings for all items specified herein. The data shall be highlighted to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a complete equipment list that includes equipment description, model number and quantity.

2.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

2.4.1 Pipe

Piping from a point 6 inches above the floor to a point 5 feet outside the building wall shall be ductile iron with a rated working pressure of 175 pounds per square inch conforming to AWWA C151/A21.51, with cement mortar lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall comply with Section 33 11 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING. The use of Ames series IBR In-Building Riser Assembly, or an approved equal, shall be permitted.

2.4.2 Fittings and Gaskets

Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10 with cement mortar lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4. Gaskets shall be suitable in design and size for the pipe with which such gaskets are to be used. Gaskets for ductile iron pipe joints shall conform to AWWA C111/A21.11.

2.4.3 Gate Valve and Indicator Posts

Gate valves for underground installation shall be of the inside screw type with counter-clockwise rotation to open. Where indicating type valves are shown or required, indicating valves shall be gate valves with an approved indicator post of a length to permit the top of the post to be located 3 feet above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator posts shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE.

2.5 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

Aboveground piping shall be steel.

2.5.1 Steel Piping Components

2.5.1.1 Steel Pipe

Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be black as permitted by NFPA 13 and shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A795/A795M, ASTM A53/A53M, or ASTM A135/A135M. All pipe shall be Schedule 40 and be

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 7


UL-listed or FM-approved for fire protection use. The use of flexible sprinkler drops is prohibited. Pipe shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe, and ASTM designation.

2.5.1.2 Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe

Fittings shall be cast iron conforming to ASME B16.4, steel conforming to ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11, or malleable iron conforming to ASME B16.3. Fittings into which sprinklers, drop nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are screwed shall be threaded type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall not be used.

2.5.1.3 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings

Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 pounds per square inch service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer; segmented welded fittings shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A183 and shall be cadmium plated or zinc electroplated.

2.5.1.4 Flanges

Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16-inch thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.

2.5.1.5 Bolts, Nut, and Washers

Bolts shall be conform to ASTM A449, Type 1 and shall extend no less than three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque. Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2. Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F436. Flat circular washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.

2.5.2 Pipe Hangers

Hangers shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE and of the type suitable for the application, construction, and pipe type and sized to be supported.

2.5.3 Valves

2.5.3.1 Control Valve and Gate Valve

Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) type and shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM APP GUIDE. Butterfly-type control valves shall not be used.

2.5.3.2 Check Valve

Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM APP GUIDE. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the swing type with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall have a clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for Type 3 or 4.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 8


2.5.3.3 Hose Valve

Valve shall comply with UL 668 and shall have a minimum rating of 300 pounds per square inch. Valve shall be non-rising stem, all bronze, 90 degree angle type, with 2 1/2-inch American National Standard Fire Hose Screw Thread (NH) male outlet in accordance with NFPA 1963. Hose valves shall be equipped with lugged cap with drip drain, cap gasket and chain. Valve finish shall be polished brass.

2.5.3.4 Automatic Air Relief Valve

An automatic air relief valve shall be installed at the high point of all automatic sprinkler system branch lines and cross mains to exhaust any trapped air in the system during filling. Valve shall be piped directly to the exterior of the building.

2.6 ALARM CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY

Assembly shall include an alarm check valve, standard trim piping, pressure gauges, bypass, retarding chamber, testing valves, main drain, and other components as required for a fully operational system.

2.7 WATERFLOW ALARM

Mechanically operated, exterior-mounted, water motor alarm assembly shall be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Water motor alarm assembly shall include a body housing, impeller or pelton wheel, drive shaft, striker assembly, gong, wall plate and related components necessary for complete operation. Minimum 3/4-inch galvanized piping shall be provided between the housing and the alarm check valve. Drain piping from the body housing shall be minimum 1-inch galvanized and shall be arranged to drain to the outside of the building. Piping shall be galvanized both on the inside and outside surfaces.

2.8 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES

2.8.1 Sprinkler Waterflow Indicator Switch, Vane Type

Switch shall be vane type with a pipe saddle and cast aluminum housing. The electro-mechanical device shall include a flexible, low-density polyethylene paddle conforming to the inside diameter of the fire protection pipe. The device shall sense water movements and be capable of detecting a sustained flow of 10 gallons per minute or greater. The device shall contain a retard device adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds to reduce the possibility of false alarms caused by transient flow surges. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain two SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing cover, and shall be equipped with a silicone rubber gasket to assure positive water seal and a dustproof cover and gasket to seal the mechanism from dirt and moisture.

2.8.2 Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch

Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing cover or closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 9


2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

Fire department connection shall be remote and freestanding type with cast brass body, matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2 1/2-inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per NFPA 1963.

2.10 SPRINKLERS

Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Temperature classification shall be ordinary. Sprinklers in high heat areas including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit heaters shall have temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used.

2.10.1 Concealed Sprinkler

Concealed sprinkler shall be white polyester, quick-response type and shall have a nominal 1/2-inch or 17/32-inch orifice.

2.10.2 Recessed Sprinkler

Recessed sprinkler shall be white polyester, quick-response type and shall have a nominal 1/2-inch or 17/32-inch orifice.

2.10.3 Pendent Sprinkler

Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb type, recessed, quick-response type with nominal 1/2-inch or 17/32-inch orifice. Pendent sprinklers shall have a polished chrome finish.

2.10.4 Upright Sprinkler

Upright sprinkler shall be quick-response type with a brass finish and shall have a nominal 1/2-inch or 17/32-inch orifice.

2.10.5 Sidewall Sprinkler

Sidewall sprinkler shall have a nominal 1/2-inch orifice. Sidewall sprinkler shall have a brass finish. Sidewall sprinkler shall be the quick-response type.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

2.11.1 Sprinkler Cabinet

Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of each type required shall be provided. A list of all sprinklers installed on the property shall be posted in spare sprinkler cabinet in accordance with NFPA 13.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 10


2.11.2 Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon

Escutcheon shall be two-piece, semi-recessed and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.

2.11.3 Pipe Escutcheon

Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.

2.11.4 Sprinkler Guard

Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers located within 7 feet of the floor or where subject to mechanical damage.

2.11.5 Identification Sign

Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024-inch aluminum with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background. Wording of sign shall include, but not be limited to "main drain", "auxiliary drain", "inspector's test", "alarm test", "alarm line", and similar wording as required to identify operational components.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and publications referenced therein.

3.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST

Prior to ceiling installation and concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler system is installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test Reports. The Fire Protection Specialist shall: 1) inspect the sprinkler system periodically during the installation to assure that the sprinkler system is being provided and installed in accordance with the contract requirements, 2) witness the preliminary and final tests, and sign the test results, 3) after completion of the system inspections and a successful final test, certify in writing that the system has been installed in accordance with the contract requirements. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is discovered.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 11


3.4 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

3.4.1 Piping in Exposed Areas

Install exposed piping without diminishing exit access widths, corridors or equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, shall be installed to provide maximum headroom.

3.4.2 Piping in Finished Areas

In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.

3.4.3 Pendent Sprinklers

Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist of minimum 1-inch pipe with a reducing coupling into which the sprinkler shall be threaded. Hangers shall be provided on armovers to drop nipples supplying pendent sprinklers when the armover exceeds 24 inches for steel pipe. Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the reducing coupling shall not extend more than 1-inch below the underside of the ceiling. On pendent sprinklers installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed 4 inches. Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be installed such that the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's listed range and shall be of uniform depth throughout the finished area. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a minimum of 6 inches from ceiling grid.

3.4.4 Upright Sprinklers

Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler. Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.

3.4.5 Pipe Joints

Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Welded joints will be permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13 at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings, fittings and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 12


3.4.6 Reducers

Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2-inch.

3.4.7 Pipe Penetrations

Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate the walls of secured areas shall be properly grounded. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13. The space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors, pipes shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.

3.4.8 Escutcheons

Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls. Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through which piping passes.

3.4.9 Inspector's Test Connection

Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1-inch pipe connected to the remote branch line; a test valve located approximately 7 feet above the floor; include a site glass; a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a painted metal identification sign affixed to the valve with the words "Inspector's Test". The discharge orifice shall be located outside the building wall directed so as not to cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow discharge. A concrete splash block shall be provided at the test connection discharge point.

3.4.10 Drains

Main drain piping shall be provided to discharge to an 8-inch by 8-inch concrete splash block located at exterior grade. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13. Drain piping shall terminate no more than 18 inches above grade.

3.4.11 Installation of Fire Department Connection

Connection shall be freestanding and mounted adjacent to and on the sprinkler system side of the backflow preventer. Connection shall be at a height no less than 36 inches above the finished grade and no more than 48

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 13


inches above the finished grade. The piping between the connection and the check valve shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and arranged to drain to the outside.

3.4.12 Identification Signs

Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently engraved and permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.

3.5 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

The fire protection water main shall be laid, and joints anchored, in accordance with NFPA 24. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet. The supply line shall terminate inside the building with a flanged piece, the bottom of which shall be set not less than 6 inches above the finished floor. A blind flange shall be installed temporarily on top of the flanged piece to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the supply line. A concrete thrust block shall be provided at the elbow where the pipe turns up toward the floor. In addition, joints shall be anchored in accordance with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods from the elbow to the flange above the floor and from the elbow to a pipe clamp in the horizontal run of pipe. Buried steel components shall be provided with a corrosion protective coating in accordance with AWWA C203. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall meet the requirements of Section 33 11 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING.

3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK

Except as modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM. All wiring for supervisory and alarm circuits shall be minimum #16 AWG solid copper installed in metallic tubing or conduit. Wiring color code shall remain uniform throughout the system.

3.7 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING

Color code mark piping as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.8 PRELIMINARY TESTS

The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and components function as intended. Submit proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests and proposed date and time to begin the preliminary tests. The underground and aboveground interior piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Upon completion of specified tests, submit three copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later than 7 days after the completion of the Tests. The Report shall include both the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 14


3.8.1 Underground Piping

3.8.1.1 Flushing

Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24. This includes the requirement to flush the lead-in connection to the fire protection system at a flow rate not less that the calculated maximum water demand rate of the system.

3.8.1.2 Hydrostatic Testing

New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 24. The allowable leakage shall be measured at the specified test pressure by pumping from a calibrated container. The amount of leakage at the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints, regardless of pipe diameter.

3.8.2 Aboveground Piping

3.8.2.1 Hydrostatic Testing

Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 13 at not less than50 pounds per square inch in excess of maximum system operating pressure and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or portion being tested.

3.8.2.2 Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test

Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand, including all applicable hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13. Provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete forward flow test, including 2.5-inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, calibrated pressure gauges, pitot tube gauge, plus all necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand flow, the pressure readings and pressure drop (friction) across the assembly shall be recorded. Provide a metal placard on the backflow prevention assembly that lists the pressure readings both upstream and downstream of the assembly, total pressure drop, and the system test flow rate. The pressure drop shall be compared to the manufacturer's data.

3.8.3 Testing of Alarm Devices

Each alarm switch shall be tested by flowing water through the inspector's test connection. Each water-operated alarm device shall be tested to verify proper operation.

3.8.4 Main Drain Flow Test

Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test shall be made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual pressures shall be recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS. In addition, a main drain test shall be conducted each time after a main control valve is shut and opened.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 15


3.9 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST

Begin the Final Acceptance Test only when the Preliminary Test Report has been approved. Submit proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Test, no later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests, and proposed date and time to begin the Test, submitted with the procedures. Notification shall be provided at least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the test. Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material & Test Certificates. The fire protection contactor shall perform the Final Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the open position. The Fire Protection Specialist shall witness the Final Acceptance Test. Submit as-built shop drawings, at least 14 days after completion of the Final Tests, updated to reflect as-built conditions after all related work is completed. Drawings shall be on reproducible full-size media. In addition, the representative shall have available copies of as-built drawings and certificates of tests previously conducted. The installation shall not be considered accepted until identified discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly completed and received. Submit three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Test Report no later than 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist.

3.10 ONSITE TRAINING

The Fire Protection Contractor shall conduct a training course for operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting Officer. Submit proposed schedule, at least 14 days prior to the start of related training. Training shall be provided for a period of 4 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and after the Final Acceptance Test. Submit six Operating and Maintenance Manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14 days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone number) for each item of equipment. The Onsite Training shall cover all of the items contained in the approved manuals.


SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 16


SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

AHRI 1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1 (2009; Addenda A 2009; Addenda B 2011) Gas Water Heaters Vol. I, Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu Per Hour or Less

ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 (2015) Gas Water Heaters Vol.III, Storage Water Heaters With Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu Per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous

ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (2015) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 189.1 (2011) Standard for the Design of High-Performance Green Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2010) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

ASSE 1001 (2008) Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2009)

ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010)

ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters (ANSI approved 2004)

ASSE 1011 (2004; Errata 2004) Performance



Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2004)

ASSE 1012 (2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009)

ASSE 1013 (2011) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers - (ANSI approved 2010)

ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable Water Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002

ASSE 1019 (2011) Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type (ANSI Approved 2004)

ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved 2004)


AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2010) Liquid Chlorine

AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied

AWWA C651 (2014) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA C652 (2011) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities

AWWA C700 (2015) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case

AWWA C701 (2012) Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type for Customer Service

AWWA D100 (2011) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage


AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

AWS B2.2/B2.2M (2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification




ASME A112.1.2 (2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected Receptors)

ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2012) Backwater Valves

ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 (2013) Standard for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals

ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 (2008; R 2013) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures

ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2012) Cleanouts

ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2012) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use

ASME A112.6.3 (2016) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains

ASME B1.20.1 (2013) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.15 (2013) Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.22 (2013) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.34 (2013) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End

ASME B16.5 (2013) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard

ASME B16.50 (2013) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Braze-Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B31.1 (2014; INT 1-47) Power Piping

ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components

ASME B40.100 (2013) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments

ASME BPVC SEC IV (2010) BPVC Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers

ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications

ASME CSD-1 (2016) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers




ASTM A105/A105M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

ASTM A193/A193M (2016) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A515/A515M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service

ASTM A516/A516M (2010; R 2015) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service

ASTM A733 (2013) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples

ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM B32 (2008; R 2014) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B370 (2012) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

ASTM B42 (2015a) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B813 (2016) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

ASTM B828 (2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

ASTM B88 (2014) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM B88M (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)

ASTM C564 (2014) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM C920 (2014a) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)



Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D2665 (2014) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2822/D2822M (2005; R 2011; E 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement

ASTM D2855 (2015) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D3311 (2011; R 2016) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns

ASTM E1 (2014) Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers

ASTM F1760 (2001; R 2011) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content

ASTM F891 (2010) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe with a Cellular Core

COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

CDA A4015 (2010) Copper Tube Handbook

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO)

IAPMO UPC (2003) Uniform Plumbing Code

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

ICC A117.1 COMM (2009) Standard And Commentary and Usable Buildings and Facilities

ICC IPC (2015) International Plumbing Code


MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-25 (2013) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions

MSS SP-58 (1993; Reaffirmed 2010) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves

MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or



Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

MSS SP-80 (2013) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE SP0169 (2015) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA 250 (2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

NEMA MG 1 (2014) Motors and Generators

NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors


NFPA 31 (2016) Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment

NFPA 54 (2015) National Fuel Gas Code

NFPA 90A (2015) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSF 372 (2011) Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content

NSF/ANSI 61 (2015; ERTA 2016) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)

PPFA Fire Man (2010) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive Construction

PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

PDI WH 201 (2010) Water Hammer Arresters Standard

SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System (FEMP)



U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA SM 9223 (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test

PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act


10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products

21 CFR 175 Indirect Food Additives: Adhesives and Components of Coatings

40 CFR 141.80 National Primary Drinking Water Regulations; Control of Lead and Copper; General Requirements

PL 109-58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Fixtures

List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate.

Flush Valve Water Closets

Flush Valve Urinals

Undercountertop Lavatories

Kitchen Sinks

Drinking-Water Coolers; G

Water Heaters; G

Pumps; G

Backflow Prevention Assemblies; G

Welding

A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.

Vibration-Absorbing Features; G



Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests, Flushing and Disinfection

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies; G.

Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended. The Contractor shall provide written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the tests.

SD-07 Certificates

Materials and Equipment

Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and installation shall conform to the code.

Bolts

Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the specified requirements.


Plumbing System; G

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.


Water-Efficient Products; S

Energy-Efficient Water Heaters; S


Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of



equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.

1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.3.2 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.3.4 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.3.4.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.




Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1 Welding

Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record.

1.5.2 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding

Cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems shall be in accordance with .

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC. Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 - IP

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.



1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA

For products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by performance criteria, provide and document the following:

2.1.1 Water-Efficient Products

Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING that the following products meet water efficiency requirements as outlined in this section and when applicable, that they are EPA WaterSense labeled products:

a. Fixtures

b. Flush valve water closets

c. Flush valve urinals

d. Undercountertop lavatories

e. Kitchen sinks

f. Service sinks

g. Drinking-water coolers

h. Water heaters

i. Pumps

2.1.2 Energy-Efficient Water Heaters

Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING that the following products meet energy efficiency requirements as outlined in this section and when applicable, that they are Energy Star certified or FEMP-designated products:

a. Gas Water Heaters (Commercial)

2.2 Materials

Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe



couplings and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or equipment containing a weighted average of greater than 0.25 percent lead shall not be used in any potable water system intended for human consumption, and shall be certified in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex G or NSF 372. In line devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums.

2.2.1 Pipe Joint Materials

Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following:

a. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.

b. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.

c. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32.

d. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to ASTM B813, Standard Test 1.

e. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.

f. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.

g. Flanged fittings including, but not limited to, flanges, bolts, nuts and bolt patterns shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M. Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM A515/A515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M.

h. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B88, Type K, L or M.



2.2.2 Miscellaneous Materials

Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:

a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be diaphragm or piston type.

b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370.

c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M.

d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.

e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.

f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.

g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.

h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203.

i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.

j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.

k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100.

l. Thermometers: ASTM E1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.

2.2.3 Pipe Insulation Material

Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

2.3 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS

Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58.

2.4 VALVES

Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:

Description Standard



Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67

Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

MSS SP-72

Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-110

Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves

MSS SP-80

Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends

ASME B16.34

Backwater Valves ASME A112.14.1

Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003

Water Heater Drain Valves ASME BPVC SEC IV, Part HLW-810: Requirements for Potable-Water Heaters Bottom Drain Valve

Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems

ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Automatically Fired Hot Water Boilers

ASME CSD-1Safety Code No., Part CW, Article 5

2.4.1 Wall Faucets

Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with 3/4 inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose connection. Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.

2.4.2 Wall Hydrants (Frostproof)

ASSE 1019 with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall have a nickel-brass or nickel-bronze wall plate or flange with nozzle and detachable key handle. A brass or bronze operating rod shall be provided within a galvanized iron casing of sufficient length to extend through the wall so that the valve is inside the building, and the portion of the hydrant between the outlet and valve is self-draining. A brass or bronze valve with coupling and union elbow having metal-to-metal seat shall be



provided. Valve rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of the hydrant. The hydrant shall have 3/4 inch exposed hose thread on spout and 3/4 inch male pipe thread on inlet.

2.4.3 Relief Valves

Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated according to ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have 3/4 inch minimum inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall have 1 inch minimum inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.

2.4.4 Thermostatic Mixing Valves

Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves, thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze, corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F of any setting.

2.5 FIXTURES

Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ASHRAE 189.1 Section 6.3.2.1 (Plumbing fixtures and Fittings). Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4. Vitreous China, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush valves and flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains shall be copper alloy with all visible surfaces chrome plated.



2.5.1 Flush Valve Water Closets

ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches for wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Provide white solid plastic elongated open-front seat.

Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed 1.28 gallons per flush. Water closets must meet the EPA WaterSense product definition specified in http://www.epa.gov/watersense/partners/product_program_specs.html and must be EPA WaterSense labeled products.

Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls.

2.5.2 Flush Valve Urinals

ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, ,wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Provide urinal with the rim 17 inches above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination shall not exceed 0.125 gallons per flush. Urinals must meet the specifications of http://www.epa.gov/watersense/partners/product_program_specs.html and must be EPA WaterSense labeled products. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture.

2.5.3 Undercountertop Lavatories

ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, ,undermount, minimum dimensions of 19 inches wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets. Furnish template and mounting kit by lavatory manufacturer. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi. Lavatory faucets and lavatory faucet accessories must meet the EPA WaterSense product definition specified in http://www.epa.gov/watersense/partners/product_program_specs.html and must be EPA WaterSense labeled products. Mount counter with the top surface 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches minimum clearance from bottom of the counter face to floor. Provide top mounted washerless centerset lavatory faucets.

2.5.4 Kitchen Sinks

ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting rim for flush installation, minimum dimensions of 33 inches wide by 21 inches front to rear, two compartments, with undersides fully sound deadened, with supply openings for use with top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray, and with 3.5 inch drain outlet. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a



flowing water pressure of 60 psi. Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless steel cup strainers. Provide separate 1.5 inch P-trap and drain piping to vertical vent piping from each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray.

2.5.5 Drinking-Water Coolers

AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair carriers.

2.5.6 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler

AHRI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 27 inch minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch maximum spout height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by push levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on front and both sides of the cabinet.

2.5.7 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks

Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 3000 psi minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.

2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Backflow prevention devices must be approved by the State or local regulatory agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements, the backflow prevention devices must be listed by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research, or any other approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention devices and assemblies.

Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be meet the above requirements.

Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.



2.7 DRAINS

2.7.1 Floor Drains

Floor drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar. Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection. Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping. Primer shall meet ASSE 101.

2.8 TRAPS

Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be without a cleanout. Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.

2.9 WATER HEATERS

Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater shall have replaceable anodes. Each primary water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 90 to 160 degrees F. Each gas-fired water heater and booster water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 120 to 180 degrees F. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall be tied into building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall conform to TABLE III for each type of water heater specified. The only exception is that storage water heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 500 gallons storage capacity need not meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated to R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater. Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use



on potable water systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water temperature and 150 psi working pressure. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be as indicated.

2.9.1 Automatic Storage Type

Heaters shall be complete with control system, temperature gauge, and pressure gauge, and shall have ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve. Automatic storage type heaters must meet the Energy Star product definition specified inhttps://www.energystar.gov/products/spec and must be Energy Star certified.

2.9.1.1 Gas-Fired Type

Gas-fired water heaters shall conform to ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1 when input is 75,000 BTU per hour or less or ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for heaters with input greater than 75,000 BTU per hour.

2.9.2 Phenolic Resin Coatings for Heater Tubes

The phenolic resin coating system shall be applied at either the coil or coating manufacturer's factory in accordance with manufacturer's standard proven production process. The coating system shall be a product specifically intended for use on the material the water heating tubes/coils are made of and shall be acceptable for use in potable water systems. The coating system shall be capable of withstanding temperatures up to 400 degrees F dry bulb; and meet the requirements of 21 CFR 175.

The entire exterior surface and the first 5 to 8 inches inside the tubes of each coil shall be coated with phenolic resin coating system.

2.9.2.1 Standard Product

Provide a phenolic resin coating system that is a standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of a similar material, design and workmanship.

Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar applications of similar size for at least two years before bid opening.

Prior to this two year period, these standard products were sold on the commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers' catalogs or brochures. These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures shall have been copyrighted documents or be identified with a manufacturer's document number.

2.10 HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS

Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME stamped for the working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME) registration. The tank shall be cement-lined or glass-lined steel type in accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss shall conform to TABLE III as determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Each tank shall be equipped with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E1, Type I, Class 3, Range C, style and form as required for the installation, and with 7 inch scale. Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable for a 3/4 inch tapped opening. Tanks shall be equipped with a pressure gauge 6 inch minimum diameter face. Insulation shall be as specified in



Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Storage tank capacity shall be as shown.

2.11 PUMPS

2.11.1 Circulating Pumps

Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven, single-stage, centrifugal, with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended service. Pump and motor shall be close-coupled with an overhung impeller, or supported by the piping on which it is installed. The shaft shall be one-piece, heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smooth-surfaced housing of bronze.

Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient horsepower for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in cover.

2.11.2 Flexible Connectors

Flexible connectors shall be provided at the suction and discharge of each pump that is 1 hp or larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene, rubber, or braided bronze, with Class 150 standard flanges. Flexible connectors shall be line size and suitable for the pressure and temperature of the intended service.

2.12 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER

Cold water meters 2 inches and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to AWWA C700. Cold water meters 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be turbine type conforming to AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or straight reading type, indicating gpm. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator, remote readout register and all necessary wiring and accessories.

Meters shall be connected to the base wide energy and utility monitoring and control system using the installation's advanced metering protocols and the DDC system.

2.13 ELECTRICAL WORK

Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. In addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings, including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.



Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.

Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS

2.14.1 Escutcheon Plates

Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.

2.14.2 Pipe Sleeves

Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Sleeves are not required where supply, drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.

2.14.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete

Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.

2.14.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete

Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.

2.14.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)

Provide MSS SP-58 Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping.



2.14.4 Nameplates

Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.

2.14.5 Labels

Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following information on each label:

a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with written description.

b. Range of the sensor.

c. Battery replacement schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA Fire Man. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless otherwise indicated. A full port ball valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches below the finish grade or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.

3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections

3.1.1.1 Utilities

The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.



3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing

The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.

3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment

Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment.

3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts

Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.

3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains

Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable seat and full port ball valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4 inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.

3.1.1.6 Expansion and Contraction of Piping

Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions such as offsets and changes in direction where indicated and required. Risers shall be securely anchored as required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and



risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer.

3.1.1.7 Thrust Restraint

Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks.

3.1.1.8 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters

Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.

3.1.2 Joints

Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended.

3.1.2.1 Threaded

Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.

3.1.2.2 Unions and Flanges

Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.

3.1.2.3 Copper Tube and Pipe

a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M, ASME B16.50, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of



copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.

b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver.

c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC.

3.1.2.4 Other Joint Methods

3.1.3 Dissimilar Pipe Materials

Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.

3.1.4 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings

Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding. The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with . Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer.

3.1.5 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing

Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.

3.1.5.1 Sleeve Requirements

Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements:

Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors.



A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.

Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.

Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic.

Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C920 and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.

Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and wall as specified above. Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.5.2 Flashing Requirements

Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be



sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.

3.1.5.3 Waterproofing

Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange shall be sealed.

3.1.5.4 Optional Counterflashing

Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following:

a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.

b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.

3.1.5.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors

Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs FLASHING REQUIREMENTS and WATERPROOFING, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.1.5.6 Pipe Penetrations

Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.

3.1.6 Fire Seal

Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.



3.1.7 Supports

3.1.7.1 General

Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.

3.1.7.2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing

Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material used for supports shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.1.7.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 except as modified herein.

a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.

b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.

c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.

d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-58 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.

f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.

g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.

h. Type 40 shields shall:

(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.

(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.

(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density



inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.

i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-58 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:

(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.

l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.

m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.

n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.

3.1.7.4 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.



3.1.8 Welded Installation

Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.

3.1.9 Pipe Cleanouts

Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than 18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron.

3.2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS

3.2.1 Relief Valves

No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank. The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater.



3.2.2 Installation of Gas-Fired Water Heater

Installation shall conform to NFPA 54 for gas fired and NFPA 31 for oil fired. Storage water heaters that are not equipped with integral heat traps and having vertical pipe risers shall be installed with heat traps directly on both the inlet and outlet. Circulating systems need not have heat traps installed. An acceptable heat trap may be a piping arrangement such as elbows connected so that the inlet and outlet piping make vertically upward runs of not less than 24 inches just before turning downward or directly horizontal into the water heater's inlet and outlet fittings. Commercially available heat traps, specifically designed by the manufacturer for the purpose of effectively restricting the natural tendency of hot water to rise through vertical inlet and outlet piping during standby periods may also be approved.

3.2.3 Heat Traps

Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an upward direction.

3.2.4 Connections to Water Heaters

Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges.

3.2.5 Expansion Tank

A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve. The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.

3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS

Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.

3.3.1 Fixture Connections

Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided. Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and fixture used.



3.3.2 Flushometer Valves

Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the flushometer spud.

3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor

Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor. Wall-hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim 42 inches above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim 28 inches above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1 COMM.

3.3.4 Fixture Supports

Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.

3.3.4.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction

Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall.

3.3.4.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction

Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.

3.3.4.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions

Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to these studs.

3.3.5 Backflow Prevention Devices

Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in



accordance with IAPMO UPC at all other locations necessary to preclude a cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a standard commercial unit.

3.3.6 Access Panels

Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.3.7 Traps

Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D3311. Traps for acid-resisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.

3.4 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES

Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors.

3.5 WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER

The remote readout register shall be mounted at the location indicated or as directed by the Contracting Officer.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

3.6.1 Identification Tags

Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.



3.6.2 Pipe Color Code Marking

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.6.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components

Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling. The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the approximate dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed, the color code symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. The color code board shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room.

3.7 ESCUTCHEONS

Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.

3.8 PAINTING

Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.8.1 Painting of New Equipment

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.8.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.



The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3.9 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

3.9.1 Plumbing System

The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with IAPMO UPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor must submit a testing procedure and reasons for choosing this option in lieu of the smoke test to the Contracting Officer for approval.

a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.

b. Building Sewers Tests.

c. Water Supply Systems Tests.

3.9.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies

Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies.

Backflow prevention assembly test gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements, gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the requirements of University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14), or any other approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention assembly test gauges. Report form for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following:

Data on Device Data on Testing Firm

Type of Assembly Name

Manufacturer Address

Model Number Certified Tester

Serial Number Certified Tester No.

Size Date of Test

Location



Test Pressure Readings Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges

If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested.

3.9.2 Defective Work

If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.

3.9.3 System Flushing

3.9.3.1 During Flushing

Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14 day period.

3.9.3.2 After Flushing

System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 141.80 (c)(1). The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed inside the building.

3.9.4 Operational Test

Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and



functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system:

a. Time, date, and duration of test.

b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.

c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.

d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.

e. Pump suction and discharge pressures.

f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.

g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.

h. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.

i. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including pump start pressure and stop pressure.

3.9.5 Disinfection

After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material, entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed.

Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump until the entire system is completely filled.

Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.

After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated system.

Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period,



each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.

Take additional samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial examination, at locations specified by the Contracting OfficerTest these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with EPA SM 9223. The testing method used shall be EPA approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state requirements.

Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.

3.10 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS

Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.

3.11 PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT

Standard rating condition terms are as follows:

EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.

ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.

SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 70 degrees F temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements.

V = Rated volume in gallons

Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)

3.11.1 Storage Water Heaters

3.11.1.1 Gas

a. Storage capacity of 50 gallons or less shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.67 or higher per FEMP requirements.

b. Storage capacity of 20 gallons - or more and input rating of 75,000 Btu/h or less: minimum EF shall be 0.62 - 0.0019V per 10 CFR 430.

c. Rating of less than 22980 W: (75,000 Btu/h) ET shall be 80 percent; maximum SL shall be (Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)), per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3



3.12 TABLES

TABLE I

PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS

Item#

Pipe and Fitting Materials

SERVICE A

SERVICE B

SERVICE C

SERVICE D

SERVICE E

SERVICE F

1 Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665, ASTM F891, (Sch 40) ASTM F1760

X X X X

SERVICE: A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings C - Underground Vent D - Aboveground Vent E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground * - Hard Temper

TABLE II

PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

Item #

Pipe and Fitting Materials SERVICE A

SERVICEB

SERVICE C SERVICE D

1 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B42 X X X

2 Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, ASTM B88M

X** X** X** X***

3 Cast bronze threaded fittings, ASME B16.15

X X X

4 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings, ASME B16.22

X X X X

5 Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings, ASME B16.18

X X X X



TABLE II

PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

Item #

Pipe and Fitting Materials SERVICE A

SERVICEB

SERVICE C SERVICE D

6 Fittings: brass or bronze; ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18 ASTM B828

X X

7 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A733 X X X

SERVICE: A - Cold Water Service Aboveground B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground C - Compressed Air Lubricated D - Cold Water Service Belowground Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses. ** - Type L - Hard *** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper without joints in or under floors **** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints



TABLE III

STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATERHEATING EQUIPMENT

FUEL STORAGE CAPACITY GALLONS

INPUT RATING TEST PROCEDURE

REQUIRED PERFORMANCE

A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS

Gas 50 max. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.67

Gas 20 min. 75,000 Btu/h max.

10 CFR 430 EF = 80-0.0019V min.

Gas 1,000 (Btu/h)/gal max.

75,000 Btu/h ANSI Z21.10.3/ET = 80 percent min. SL = 1.3+38/V max.

TERMS:

EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.SL = Standby loss is maximum Btu/h based on a 70 degree F temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements.V = Rated storage volume in gallonsQ = Nameplate input rate in Btu/h




SECTION 23 00 00

AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS08/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 1 2002; Addendum 2 2005; Addendum 3 2011) Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils


ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 1 2013; INT 1 2014; ADD A, B, AND D SUPP 2015; INT 3 2015; Errata 2 2015; ADD C 2015; ADD E, F 2016) Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size

ASHRAE 62.1 (2010) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

ASHRAE 70 (2006; R 2011) Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets

ASHRAE 84 (2013; Addenda A 2013) Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers


ASME A13.1 (2015) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems


ASTM A123/A123M (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A167 (2011) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,



Welded and Seamless

ASTM A924/A924M (2016) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process


ASTM B766 (1986; R 2015) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium

ASTM C1071 (2012) Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)

ASTM C553 (2013) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications

ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

ASTM D3359 (2009; E 2010; R 2010) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment

ASTM E2016 (2015) Standard Specification for Industrial Woven Wire Cloth



NEMA MG 10 (2013) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors



NFPA 701 (2015) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films


SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (SMACNA)

SMACNA 1819 (2002) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, 5th Edition



SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition

SMACNA 1972 CD (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual - 2nd Edition

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System (FEMP)


40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone

PL 109-58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)


UL 181 (2013) Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors

UL 555 (2006; Reprint May 2014) Standard for Fire Dampers

UL 586 (2009; Reprint Sep 2014) Standard for High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units

UL 6 (2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

UL 900 (2015) Standard for Air Filter Units

UL Bld Mat Dir (2015) Building Materials Directory

UL Electrical Constructn (2015) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory

UL Fire Resistance (2014) Fire Resistance Directory


Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to provide a complete installation. Coordinate the work of the different trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other components, required to install the work as indicated and specified.

1.2.1 Mechanical Equipment Identification

The number of charts and diagrams shall be equal to or greater than the number of mechanical equipment rooms. Where more than one chart or diagram per space is required, mount these in edge pivoted, swinging leaf, extruded aluminum frame holders which open to 170 degrees.



1.2.1.1 Charts

Provide chart listing of equipment by designation numbers and capacities such as flow rates, pressure and temperature differences, heating and cooling capacities, horsepower, pipe sizes, and voltage and current characteristics.

1.2.1.2 Diagrams

Submit proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related testing. provide neat mechanical drawings provided with extruded aluminum frame under 1/8-inch glass or laminated plastic, system diagrams that show the layout of equipment, piping, and ductwork, and typed condensed operation manuals explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. After approval, post these items where directed.

1.2.2 Service Labeling

Label equipment, including fans, air handlers, terminal units, etc. with labels made of self-sticking, plastic film designed for permanent installation. Labels shall be in accordance with the typical examples below:

SERVICE LABEL AND TAG DESIGNATION

Air handling unit Number AHU - _____

Exhaust Fan Number EF - _____

VAV Box Number VAV - _____

Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures. Where pressures could exceed 125 pounds per square inch, gage, include the maximum system pressure in the label. Label and arrow piping in accordance with the following:

a. Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.

b. Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.

c. In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point required to clarify service or indicated hazard.

d. In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight of each other not to exceed 75 feet. All labels shall be visible and legible from the primary service and operating area.

For Bare or Insulated Pipes

for Outside Diameters of Lettering

1/2 thru 1-3/8 inch 1/2 inch



For Bare or Insulated Pipes

for Outside Diameters of Lettering

1-1/2 thru 2-3/8 inch 3/4 inch

2-1/2 inch and larger 1-1/4 inch

1.2.3 Color Coding

Color coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct RunoutsDuct ConnectorsDuct Access Doors; GFire DampersManual Balancing Dampers; GDiffusersRegisters and GrillesAir Handling Units; GVariable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units; GReheat Units; GEnergy Recovery Devices; GTest ProceduresDiagrams; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Damper Acceptance Test; G

SD-07 Certificates

BoltsOzone Depleting Substances

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Manufacturer's Installation InstructionsOperation and Maintenance Training




Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G

Fire Dampers; GManual Balancing Dampers; GAir Handling Units; GVariable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units; GReheat Units; GEnergy Recovery Devices; G


Energy Efficient Equipment; SReduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC); SIndoor Air Quality During Construction; SOzone Depleting Substances for Refrigerants; S


Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based on manufacturer's published data.

a. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the standards of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing with reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories requirements. In lieu of such label or listing, submit a written certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and that the units conform to the specified requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the specified agencies.

b. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM International (ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other standards, a manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is acceptable as proof of compliance.

c. Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from compliance with other requirements of these specifications.

d. Where products are specified to meet or exceed the specified energy efficiency requirement of FEMP-designated or Energy Star certified product categories, equipment selected shall have as a minimum the efficiency rating identified under "Energy-Efficient Products" at http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/procurement.

These specifications conform to the efficiency requirements as defined in Public Law PL 109-58, "Energy Policy Act of 2005" for federal procurement of energy-efficient products. Equipment having a lower efficiency than Energy Star or FEMP requirements may be specified if the designer determines the equipment to be more life-cycle cost effective using the life-cycle cost analysis methodology and procedure in 10 CFR 436.

1.4.1 Prevention of Corrosion

Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment



enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected to dissimilar metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers, and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance with ASTM B766 for interior locations. Provide written certification from the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the requirements of this specification. Include illustrations of product markings, and the number of each type of bolt to be furnished in the certification.

1.4.2 Asbestos Prohibition

Do not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.

1.4.3 Ozone Depleting Substances Used as Refrigerants

Minimize releases of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) during repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances containing ODS's by complying with all applicable sections of 40 CFR 82 Part 82 Subpart F. Any person conducting repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of equipment containing refrigerants must comply with the following:

a. Do not knowingly vent or otherwise release into the environment, Class I or Class II substances used as a refrigerant.

b. Do not open appliances without meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 82 Part 82.156 Subpart F, regarding required practices for evacuation and collection of refrigerant, and 40 CFR 82 Part 82.158 Subpart F, regarding standards of recycling and recovery equipment.

c. Only persons who comply with 40 CFR 82 Part 82.161 Subpart F, regarding technician certification, can conduct work on appliances containing refrigerant.

In addition, provide copies of all applicable certifications to the Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to initiating maintenance, repair, servicing, dismantling or disposal of appliances, including:

a. Proof of Technician Certification

b. Proof of Equipment Certification for recovery or recycling equipment.

c. Proof of availability of certified recovery or recycling equipment.

1.4.4 Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than Refrigerants

The use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses include:

a. Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled by a chlorofluorocarbon

b. Any cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays.



c. Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is manufactured with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open cell foam, open cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell extruded polystyrene sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and closed cell polypropylene foam except for flexible or packaging foam used in coaxial cabling.

d. Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66 Subpart C.

Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited material is necessary to achieve project goals. Submit the waiver request in writing to the Contracting Officer. The waiver will be evaluated and dispositioned.


Submit detail drawings showing equipment layout, including assembly and installation details and electrical connection diagrams; ductwork layout showing the location of all supports and hangers, typical hanger details, gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and static pressure and seal classifications. Include any information required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and functions properly as a unit on the drawings and show equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance. Submit drawings showing bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts prior to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations. Submit function designation of the equipment and any other requirements specified throughout this Section with the shop drawings.

1.4.6 Test Procedures

Submit proposed test procedures and test schedules for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests of systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.


Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.1.1 Energy Efficient Equipment

Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT that the following products meet energy efficiency requirements as outlined in this section:

a. Air Handling Unitsb. Energy Recovery Devices



2.1.2 Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for sealants, coatings or adhesives

Low or no VOC's and no added urea formaldehyde for duct sealants, coatings or adhesives, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph REDUCE VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC).

2.1.3 Ozone Depleting Substances for Refrigerants

Do not use any Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) as Refrigerants per requirements in 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES.


Provide components and equipment that are "standard products" of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of a similar material, design and workmanship. "Standard products" is defined as being in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years before bid opening, including applications of components and equipment under similar circumstances and of similar size, satisfactorily completed by a product that is sold on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year field service record are acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION PLATES

In addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each piece of mechanical equipment. Identification plates are to designate the function of the equipment. Submit designation with the shop drawings. Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-black, engraved to show white letters on black background. Letters shall be upper case. Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and smaller shall be 1/16-inch thick, with engraved lettering 1/8-inch high; identification plates larger than 1-1/2-inches high shall be 1/8-inch thick, with engraved lettering of suitable height. Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and larger shall have beveled edges. Install identification plates using a compatible adhesive.

2.4 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS

Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with insulation of a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard.

2.5 ELECTRICAL WORK

a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide manual or automatic control and



protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown. For packaged equipment, include manufacturer provided controllers with the required monitors and timed restart.

b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system , and that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance with NEMA MG 10.

d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

e. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers are allowed to accomplish the same function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.

2.6 ANCHOR BOLTS

Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates. Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.

2.7 PAINTING

Paint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's standards unless specified otherwise. Field retouch only if approved. Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.

2.8 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.

2.9 DUCT SYSTEMS

2.9.1 Metal Ductwork

Provide metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and components, that complies with SMACNA 1966, as supplemented and modified by this specification .



a. Provide radius type elbows with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the width or diameter of the duct where space permits. Otherwise, elbows having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of the duct or square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes are allowed.

b. Provide ductwork that meets the requirements of Seal Class A. Provide ductwork in VAV systems upstream of the VAV boxes that meets the requirements of Seal Class A.

c. Provide sealants that conform to fire hazard classification specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS and are suitable for the range of air distribution and ambient temperatures to which it is exposed. Do not use pressure sensitive tape as a sealant.

d. Make spiral lock seam duct, and flat oval with duct sealant and lock with not less than 3 equally spaced drive screws or other approved methods indicated in SMACNA 1966. Apply the sealant to the exposed male part of the fitting collar so that the sealer is on the inside of the joint and fully protected by the metal of the duct fitting. Apply one brush coat of the sealant over the outside of the joint to at least 2 inch band width covering all screw heads and joint gap. Dents in the male portion of the slip fitting collar are not acceptable. Fabricate outdoor air intake ducts and plenums with watertight soldered or brazed joints and seams.

2.9.1.1 Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts

Use flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated on the drawings, and is not to exceed 5 feet. Provide runouts that are preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181. Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier. Provide not less than 20 ounce glass fabric duct connectors coated on both sides with neoprene. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with vertical air inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose. Provide a die-stamped elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other than the vertical air inlet type. Insulated flexible connectors are allowed as runouts. Provide insulated material and vapor barrier that conform to the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Do not expose the insulation material surface to the air stream.

2.9.1.2 General Service Duct Connectors

Provide a flexible duct connector approximately 6 inches in width where sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar metals are connected. For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material by stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For rectangular ducts, install the flexible material locked to metal collars using normal duct construction methods. Provide a composite connector system that complies with NFPA 701 and is classified as "flame-retardent fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.



2.9.1.3 High Temperature Service Duct Connections

Provide material that is approximately 3/32 inch thick, 35 to 40-ounce per square yard weight, plain weave fibrous glass cloth with, nickel/chrome wire reinforcement for service in excess of 1200 degrees F.

2.9.2 Duct Access Doors

Provide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and plenums where indicated and at all air flow measuring primaries, automatic dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats, and other apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct system. Provide access doors upstream and downstream of air flow measuring primaries and heating and cooling coils. Provide doors that are a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise shown. Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors as large as practicable. Equip doors 24 by 24 inches or larger with fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct. Use insulated type doors in insulated ducts.

2.9.3 Fire Dampers

Use 1.5 hour rated fire dampers unless otherwise indicated. Provide fire dampers that conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and UL 555. Perform the fire damper test as outlined in NFPA 90A. Provide a pressure relief door upstream of the fire damper. If the ductwork connected to the fire damper is to be insulated then provide a factory installed pressure relief damper. Provide automatic operating fire dampers with a dynamic rating suitable for the maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it is subjected. Provide fire dampers approved for the specific application, and install according to their listing. Equip fire dampers with a steel sleeve or adequately sized frame installed in such a manner that disruption of the attached ductwork, if any, does not impair the operation of the damper. Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attached on both sides of the wall or floor opening. Construct ductwork in fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly systems with air ducts that pierce the ceiling of the assemblies in conformance with UL Fire Resistance. Provide curtain type with damper bladesout of the air stream fire dampers. Install dampers that do not reduce the duct or the air transfer opening cross-sectional area. Install dampers so that the centerline of the damper depth or thickness is located in the centerline of the wall, partition or floor slab depth or thickness. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the installation details given in SMACNA 1819 and in manufacturer's instructions for fire dampers. Perform acceptance testing of fire dampers according to paragraph Fire Damper Acceptance Test and NFPA 90A.

2.9.4 Manual Balancing Dampers

Furnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating mechanisms. Use chromium plated operators (with all exposed edges rounded) in finished portions of the building. Provide manual volume control dampers that are operated by locking-type quadrant operators. Install dampers that are 2 gauges heavier than the duct in which installed. Unless otherwise indicated, provide opposed blade type multileaf dampers with maximum blade width of 12 inches. Provide access doors or panels for all concealed damper operators and locking setscrews. Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters not less than the thickness of the insulation when the locking-type quadrant operators for dampers are installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the operator. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the



operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.

2.9.5 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles

Provide factory-fabricated units of aluminum that distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space intended without causing noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm in occupied zone, or dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as required for specified performance. Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound rated and certified inlets and outlets according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound power level as indicated. Provide diffusers and registers with volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device is acceptable. Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers and registers, except linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where the inlet and outlet openings are located less than 7 feet above the floor, protect them by a grille or screen according to NFPA 90A.

2.9.5.1 Diffusers

Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging through design features. Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type indicated. Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling diffusers conforming to the requirements of UL Electrical Constructn for the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply diffusers or return air units. Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling. Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim for flush mounted diffusers. For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that is airtight and does not interfere with volume controller. Provide return or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.

2.9.5.2 Registers and Grilles

Provide units that are four-way directional-control type, except provide return and exhaust registers that are fixed horizontal or vertical louver type similar in appearance to the supply register face. Furnish registers with sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling. Install wall supply registers at least 6 inches below the ceiling unless otherwise indicated. Locate return and exhaust registers 6 inches above the floor unless otherwise indicated. Achieve four-way directional control by a grille face which can be rotated in 4 positions or by adjustment of horizontal and vertical vanes. Provide grilles as specified for registers, without volume control damper.

2.9.6 Bird Screens and Frames

Provide bird screens that conform to ASTM E2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or stainless steel. Provide "medium-light" rated aluminum screens. Provide "light" rated stainless steel screens. Provide removable type frames fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.



2.10 AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT

2.10.1 Coils

Provide fin-and-tube type coils constructed of seamless copper tubes and aluminum fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Provide copper tube wall thickness that is a minimum of 0.020 inches. Provide aluminum fins that are 0.0055 inch minimum thickness. Provide casing and tube support sheets that are not lighter than 16 gauge galvanized steel, formed to provide structural strength. When required, provide multiple tube supports to prevent tube sag. Test each coil at the factory under water at not less than 400 psi air pressure and make suitable for 200 psi working pressure and 300 degrees F operating temperature unless otherwise stated. Mount coils for counterflow service. Rate and certify coils to meet the requirements of AHRI 410.

2.10.1.1 Water Coils

Install water coils with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch/foot of the tube length toward the drain end. Use headers constructed of cast iron, welded steel or copper. Furnish each coil with a plugged vent and drain connection extending through the unit casing. Provide removable water coils with drain pans.

2.10.2 Air Filters

List air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586.

2.10.2.1 Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters

Provide 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type filters of the size indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge. Provide UL Class 2 filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat media. Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a moisture resistant fiberboard frame. Bond all four edges of the filter media to the inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.

2.10.2.2 Extended Surface Nonsupported Pocket Filters

Provide 30 inch depth, sectional, replaceable dry media type filters of the size indicated with a MERV of 13 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.45 inches water gauge. Provide UL Class 1 filters. Provide fibrous glass media, supported in the air stream by a wire or non-woven synthetic backing and secured to a galvanized steel metal header. Provide pockets that do not sag or flap at anticipated air flows. Install each filter with an extended surface pleated panel filter as a prefilter in a factory preassembled, side access housing or a factory-made sectional frame bank, as indicated.

2.10.2.3 Holding Frames

Fabricate frames from not lighter than 16 gauge sheet steel with rust-inhibitor coating. Equip each holding frame with suitable filter holding devices. Provide gasketed holding frame seats. Make all joints airtight.



2.10.2.4 Filter Gauges

Provide dial type filter gauges, diaphragm actuated draft for all filter stations, including those filters which are furnished as integral parts of factory fabricated air handling units. Gauges shall be at least 3-7/8 inches in diameter, with white dials with black figures, and graduated in 0.01 inch of water, with a minimum range of 1 inch of water beyond the specified final resistance for the filter bank on which each gauge is applied. Provide each gauge with a screw operated zero adjustment and two static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two molded plastic vent valves, two 5 foot minimum lengths of 1/4 inch diameter aluminum tubing, and all hardware and accessories for gauge mounting.

2.11 AIR HANDLING UNITS

2.11.1 Factory-Fabricated Air Handling Units

Provide factory-fabricated air handling units with draw-through design including fans, coils, airtight insulated casing, combination filter/mixing box, vibration isolators and appertenances required for specified operation. Unit capacity shall be as indicated. Units shall fit into the space indicated with adequate clearance for service. Units shall be completely assembled, "knockdown" ready for installation by Contractor. Unit shall be shrinkwrapped to ensure no debri or water damage occurs during shipping. Multiple sectioned units shall be shipped as a single factory assembled piece (except where shipping limitations prevent) de-mounted into modular sections in the field by the contractor. Units shall be furnished with sufficient gasket and bolts for reassembly in the field by the contractor. Unit manufacturer shall provide certified ratings conforming to the latest edition of AMCA 210, 310, 500 and ARI 410. All electrical components and assemblies shall comply with NEMA standards. Unit internal insulation shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50 complying with NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." Units shall comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," as applicable for installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of air handling units. Tags and decals to aid in service or indicate caution areas shall be provided. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panel access doors. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be furnished with each unit. Units shall be UL or ETL listed. Unit shall be provided with view panels for visual inspection of uv disinfection lights.

Unit perimeter base rail shall be fabricated using heavy gauge steel. C-Channel cross supports shall be welded to perimeter base steel and located on maximum 24" centers to provide support for internal components. Base rails shall include lifting lugs at the corner of the unit or each section if de-mounted. Internal walk-on floor shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. The outer sub-floor of the unit shall be made from 20 gauge galvanized steel. The floor cavity shall be spray foam insulated with floor seams gasketed for thermal break and sealed for airtight / watertight construction. Where access is provided to the unit interior, floor openings shall be covered with walk on phenolic coated steel safety grating. Single wall floors with glued and pined insulation and no sub floor are not acceptable. Base frame shall be attached to the unit at the factory.

2.11.1.1 Casings

Provide the following:



a. The construction of the air handling unit shall consist of a (1" x 2") steel frame with formed 16 gauge galvanized steel panels. The exterior casing panels shall be attached to the gasketed (1 x 2) steel frame with corrosion resistant fasteners. All casing panels shall be completely removable from the unit exterior without affecting the unit's structural integrity. (Units without framed type of construction shall be considered, provided the exterior casing panels are made from 16 gauge galvanized steel, maximum panel center lines are less than 20 inches and deflection is less than L/200 @ 8" positive pressure). The air handling unit casing shall be of the "no-through-metal" design with insulating thermal breaks to prevent thermal conduction from inner to outer surfaces. All panel seams shall be caulked and sealed for an airtight unit. The exterior panel finish shall be painted with a polyester resin coating designed for long term corrosion resistance meeting or exceeding (ASTM B-117) Salt Spray Resistance at 95 degrees F. 1,000 hrs. and (ASTM D-2247) Humidity Resistance at 95 degrees F. 1,000 hrs.

c. Insulated, fully gasketed, double-wall type inspection and access doors, of a minimum 18 gauge outer and 20 gauge inner panels made of either galvanized steel or corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304. Doors shall be rigid and provided with heavy duty hinges and latches. Inspection doors shall be a minimum 12 inches wide by 12 inches high. Access doors shall be a minimum 24 inches wide, the full height of the unit casing or a minimum of 6 foot, whichever is less. Install a minimum 8 by 8 inches sealed glass window suitable for the intended application, in all access doors.

d. Double-wall insulated type drain pan (thickness equal to exterior casing) constructed of 16 gauge corrosion resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304, conforming to ASHRAE 62.1. Construct drain pans water tight, treated to prevent corrosion, and designed for positive condensate drainage. When 2 or more cooling coils are used, with one stacked above the other, condensate from the upper coils shall not flow across the face of lower coils. Provide intermediate drain pans or condensate collection channels and downspouts, as required to carry condensate to the unit drain pan out of the air stream and without moisture carryover. Construct drain pan to allow for easy visual inspection, including underneath the coil without removal of the coil and to allow complete and easy physical cleaning of the pan underneath the coil without removal of the coil. Coils shall be individually removable from the casing.

e. Casing insulation that conforms to NFPA 90A. Double-wall casing sections handling conditioned air shall be 4" thick and insulated with not less than R-16. Foil-faced insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use with double wall casing. Double wall insulation shall be completely sealed by inner and outer panels.

f. Factory applied fibrous glass insulation that conforms to ASTM C1071, except that the minimum thickness and density requirements do not apply, and that meets the requirements of NFPA 90A. Make air handling unit casing insulation uniform over the entire casing. Foil-faced insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use on double-wall access doors and inspections doors and casing sections.

g. Duct liner material, coating, and adhesive that conforms to fire-hazard



requirements specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Protect exposed insulation edges and joints where insulation panels are butted with a metal nosing strip or coat to meet erosion resistance requirements of ASTM C1071.

h. A latched and hinged inspection door, in the fan, filter, and coil sections.

2.11.1.2 Heating and Cooling Coils

Provide coils as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.

2.11.1.3 Air Filters

Provide air filters as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for types and thickness indicated.

2.11.1.4 Multi-Fan Array


a. The fan array system shall consist of multiple, direct driven plenum fans (arrangement as specified in design documents) with fan wheels that are rated and certified with tests and procedures in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program and constructed per the AMCA requirements for the duty specified, (Class III). Each fan/motor "cube" shall include a 10 gauge, G 90 Galvanized steel intake wall, 0.100 spun aluminum fan inlet funnel, and a 7 gauge steel (painted) motor support plate rail and structure. All motors shall be standard foot mounted type, TEAO motors selected at the specified operating voltage. Motors shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 30 and 31, section 4.4.2. Steel cased motors and/or ODP motors are not acceptable. Six pole motors, unless specifically called for, will not be accepted. All motors shall include permanently sealed bearings and AEGIS SGR, shaft grounding system, to protect the motor bearings from electrical discharge machining due to stray shaft currents. Motors sizes that are larger than 215 T-frame are not acceptable.

b. Each fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA standard 204-96, category BV-5, to meet or exceed an equivalent Grade G.55, indicating a maximum of 0.03" per second peak, filter in (0.55mm per second peak, filter in) residual unbalance. Fan arrangement with open spring isolators that do not meet this balance specification are not acceptable..

c. Each cell in the array shall be provided with a silencer that reduces the bare fan discharge sound power levels by a minimum of 10 db throughout the eight octave bands with center frequencies of 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, and 8000 HZ when compared to the same unit without the acoustical silencers. Manufacturers using arrangements without 4-sided acoustical silencers surrounding the fan motor / wheel assembly shall submit acoustical data for review and approval indicating that the proposed equipment can meet all specified performance requirements without impacting the equipment performance or design features including duct connection location, unit dimensions, unit weights, acoustical performance, number of fans in each fan array, scheduled / specified fan BHP, scheduled / specified total fan HP for each fan array, scheduled / specified total VFD rated Amps or



electrical service sizing, including standby generation systems. Proposals submitted which indicate a higher connected electrical service sizing for each fan array than specified or scheduled will not be accepted. The AHU with multiple fan array(s) shall provide the scheduled acoustical performance. CFMs and External Static Pressures, as specified. Manufacturers providing multiple fan arrays that incorporate fans which are not manufactured by the air handling unit (AHU) manufacturer shall provide modeled acoustical performance of the AHU unit for approval. Submitted sound and performance data for pre-approval showing only single fan performance for multiple fan arrays shall be returned without review. Manufacturers that do not manufacture their own fans for the specific purpose of use in multiple fan arrays shall provide a letter guaranteeing submitted AHU performance for flow, pressure, and acoustics at the perimeter boundary of the unit signed by an officer of the OEM fan manufacturer being submitted on and the AHU manufacturer. The letter from the OEM fan manufacturer shall clearly state that the submitted air handling unit perimeter boundary performance in the submitted AHU configuration is guaranteed and that any deficiencies in performance from that as scheduled shall be corrected at no cost to the owner. Submittals for manufacturers that do not contain the letter of guarantee as described above shall be returned to the contractor disapproved and shall be resubmitted for approval. Any corrective acoustical treatment, added airway tunnel lengths, increased electrical service, and any structural modifications necessary to meet specified and scheduled performance shall be provided at no additional cost to the owner to meet the specified performance criteria. All proposed corrective actions, when required, shall be submitted for approval and shall include a guarantee of performance, as listed above, at no additional cost to the owner.

d. The fan array shall consist of multiple fan/motor cells spaced in the air way tunnel cross section to provide a uniform air flow and velocity profile across the entire air way tunnel cross section and components contained therein. The fan cell dimensions shall be variable such that each fan rests in an identically sized cube or cell. There shall be no blank off plates or "spacers" between adjacent fan columns or rows to position fans across the air way tunnel. The fan array shall provide, as a minimum, the quantity of fans scheduled or shown on the plans, in order to produce a uniform air flow profile and fan velocity profile within the airway tunnel of the air handling unit. The fan array shall produce a uniform air flow profile and velocity profile within the airway tunnel of the air handling unit not to exceed the specified cooling coil and/or filter bank face velocity when measured at a point 12" from the intake side of the array intake plenum wall, and at a distance of 48" from the discharge side of the intake plenum wall. Manufacturers of units proposing less than the scheduled quantity of fans and/or spacing of the fans for multiple fan arrays shall submit CFD modeling of the air flow profile approval along with documentation and guarantees, subject to factory and/or field testing, uniform velocity and flow across all internal components without increasing the length of the AHU unit or changing the aspect ratio of the unit casing as designed. Each fan/motor assembly in the fan array shall be removable through an access door located on the discharge (outlet) side of the fan array without requiring the disassembly of the unit and / or the removal of any wall or roof panels. Each fan/motor cell shall be provided with an individual backdraft damper. Backdraft Dampers shall be constructed from Heavy Duty 6063-T5 extruded aluminum frames and blades. Steel frames and blades are not acceptable. FBD have Edge seals shall be solid rubber, achieving ultra low leakage rate of only 2



CFM/sq. ft. at 1" differential static pressure. Bearings are rubber shielded radial ball bearings, permanently lubricated. The vertical blades of the damper open as airflow commences and close when the fan is idle. This is accomplished without the use of mechanical means or weights. Manufacturers shall provide each individual fan/motor in a multiple fan array with an integral back flow prevention device that prohibits recirculation of air in the event a fan or multiple fans become disabled. System Effect Pressure Losses for alternate back flow prevention device systems shall be identified and added to the scheduled design criteria for Total Static Pressure (TSP) for the alternate fan selection and performance. The added System Effect Static Pressure Loss shall be included as a separate line item SP loss in the fan performance data. Motorized control dampers for the purpose of backflow prevention are not acceptable.

e. Each fan assembly shall be supplied with a complete flow measuring system which indicates airflow in Cubic Feet per Minute. The flow measuring system shall consist of flow measuring stations, transducers/transmitters and controller(s). The flow measuring stations shall not obstruct fan inlets and shall have no effect on fan performance (flow or static) or sound power levels. An exterior, flush-mounted, interface for each fan array shall provide a means to monitor and control the fan array and individual fans, including indication of fan and motor status, operating mode, fan array system flow rate and static pressure. A 4-20 ma output control signal from the controller(s) for use by the BAS shall be provided and coordinated with the DDC provider.

f. Fan array performance data submitted that is based on a single fan and then scaled to indicate performance for the number of fans in the array, or where the submitted manufacturer has less than five years of experience in building multiple fan array air handling systems and/or with fewer than 10 installations of similar scope and application within 50 miles, will only be accepted upon successful factory testing for performance and sound, and such testing shall be done for every unit being submitted. Any such testing shall be witnessed by the owner and/or his representative in an AMCA certified lab for performance and sound. Prior to the testing, a testing protocol and procedure shall be submitted to the engineer for approval. All testing shall be conducted in accordance with applicable industry standards and procedures as approved in writing by the engineer. Copies of the testing results, bearing the stamp of an independent registered professional mechanical engineer, as selected by the owner, shall be submitted for approval prior to shipment of any equipment being tested. The cost for the independent engineer, when required, shall be borne by the manufacturer of the submitted equipment. Upon receipt of approved testing results, the tested equipment can be released for shipment by the manufacturer. Fan array electrical designs shall be in accordance with the NEC, UL 508A and ETL Listing.

Each air handling unit shall contain one or more electrical control panels consisting of a surface mounted, NEMA rated, UL listed enclosure for the application that shall include all supply fan motor disconnects and overload protection, one for each fan motor in the multiple fan array, or alternate means for providing motor disconnecting capability along with overload protection as well as a single point electrical connection for the power wiring for the multiple fan array.

A BACnet IP BAS Communication Interface shall be provided by the AHU



manufacturer and shall require a single interface point at each multiple fan array system control panel by the project controls contractor.

The AHU unit shall be completely factory-wired, requiring only one field wiring connection of main power for both the power supply with disconnect switch for receptacles and light fixtures as well as the required line side of the main power disconnect switch of each multiple fan array. Motors shall be NEMA Design B; T-FRAME mounted on an adjustable steel base. All motors shall be tested to IEEE standard 112 test method B and rated per NEMA MG1, Part 31 "Inverter Fed Motors". All motors shall be specifically designed to meet or exceed all (EPAct) requirements for energy efficiency and include Class 'F' insulation.

Manufacturer to provide VFDs - Each variable air volume supply fan array shall be provided with 2 separate variable frequency drives as specified by Division 26. Drives shall be factory mounted with adequate ventilation provided. The variable frequency drive shall convert 460 volt +/ 10%, three phase, 60 hertz (+/ 2 Hz.) utility power to adjustable voltage/frequency, three phase, A C power step less motor control from 5% to 105% of base speed. The variable frequency drive (VFD) shall produce an adjustable A C voltage/frequency output of complete motor speed control and an input power factor near unity over the entire speed range. The VFD shall be automatically controlled by a control signal. The VFD shall be self-contained, totally enclosed in a NEMA 1 ventilated cabinet and capable of operation between 0 and 40 Celsius. The VFD shall be UL listed. Components used in all options shall be UL listed. The VFD shall have a hand/off/auto operator switch, drive switch with run or stop command and panel mounted digital display capable of indicating unit status, frequency, and fault diagnostics.

AHU manufacturers that are approved for bidding purposes that are submitting multiple fan arrays shall test one or more of the submitted AHU's for flow, pressure, leakage, BHP and acoustics as submitted and approved, prior to shipment. A test report shall be provided for each tested AHU unit and the report shall be included in the O&M manuals for the units. Each fan & motor assembly shall be removable through a 24" wide, free area, access door located on the discharge side of the fan wall array without removing the fan wheel from the motor. All fan/motor access doors shall open against pressure.

All motors in the multi-fan arrangement shall be provided with individual Motor Protection for thermal overload protection. All motor circuit protectors can be located in starting device enclosure or, if required by design, in a separate enclosure. Motor circuit protector enclosure shall be located and mounted at a minimal distance from motors in the multi-fan arrangement. Provide multiple (one per fan) cover mounted pilot lights for local monitoring.

All electrical and automatic control devices not previously called out or listed below shall be furnished and installed in the field by OTHERS.

All wiring shall be (75°C) Insulated copper wires.

The unit shall feature a mounted permanent nameplate displaying at a minimum the manufacturer, serial number, model number and current and amps voltage. The unit shall have an ETL or UL Listing and bear the appropriate mark.



Conduit shall consist of a combination of EMT or flexible metal conduit as required. Liquidtite flexible metal conduit may be used outside the air tunnel for wet locations.

Each section shall be equipped with a vapor- proof 100 watt service light with guard. Each light shall have its own light switch mounted adjacent to the access door. Lights, switches and outlets shall powered via single point power with the air handler fan and controls. Accessories shall be powered through a transformer fused disconnect package mounted on the unit.

2.11.1.5 Access Sections and Filter/Mixing Boxes

Provide access sections where indicated and furnish with access doors as shown. Construct access sections and filter/mixing boxes in a manner identical to the remainder of the unit casing and equip with access doors. Design mixing boxes to minimize air stratification and to promote thorough mixing of the air streams.

2.12 TERMINAL UNITS

2.12.1 Variable Air Volume (VAV) and Dual Duct Terminal Units

a. Provide VAV and dual duct terminal units that are the type, size, and capacity shown, mounted in the ceiling or wall cavity, plus units that are suitable for single or dual duct system applications. Provide actuators and controls as specified in paragraph SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES, subparagraph CONTROLS.

b. Provide unit enclosures that are constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 22 gauge or aluminum sheet not lighter than 18 gauge. Provide single or multiple discharge outlets as required. Units with flow limiters are not acceptable. Provide unit air volume that is factory preset and readily field adjustable without special tools. Provide reheat coils as indicated.

2.12.1.1 Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units

Provide variable volume, single duct, terminal units with a calibrated air volume sensing device, air valve or damper, actuator, and accessory relays. Provide units that control air volume to within plus or minus 5 percent of each air set point volume as determined by the thermostat with variations in inlet pressures from 3/4 to 6 inch water gauge. Provide units with an internal resistance not exceeding 0.4 inch water gauge at maximum flow range. Provide external differential pressure taps separate from the control pressure taps for air flow measurement with a 0 to 1 inch water gauge range.

2.12.1.2 Reheat Units

2.12.1.2.1 Hot Water Coils

Provide fin-and-tube type hot-water coils constructed of seamless copper tubes and copper or aluminum fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Provide headers that are constructed of cast iron, welded steel or copper. Provide casing and tube support sheets that are 16 gauge, galvanized steel, formed to provide structural strength. Provide tubes



that are correctly circuited for proper water velocity without excessive pressure drop and are drainable where required or indicated. At the factory, test each coil at not less than 250 psi air pressure and provide coils suitable for 200 psi working pressure. Install drainable coils in the air handling units with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch per foot of tube length toward the drain end. Coils shall conform to the provisions of AHRI 410.

2.13 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES

2.13.1 Rotary Wheel

Provide unit that is a factory fabricated and tested assembly for air-to-air energy recovery by transfer of sensible and latent heat from exhaust air to supply outside air stream in heating and sensible and latent heat from outside air stream to exhaust air stream in cooling/dehumidifying, with device performance according to ASHRAE 84 and that delivers an energy transfer effectiveness as scheduled with cross-contamination not in excess of 0.1 percent of exhaust airflow rate at system design differential pressure, including purging sector if provided with wheel. Provide exchange media that is chemically inert, moisture-resistant, fire-retardant, laminated, nonmetallic material which complies with NFPA 90A. Isolate exhaust and supply streams by seals which are static, field adjustable, and replaceable. Equip chain drive mechanisms with ratcheting torque limiter or slip-clutch protective device. Fabricate enclosure from galvanized steel and include provisions for maintenance access. Provide recovery control and rotation failure provisions as indicated. Provide outside air supply and exhaust fans as indicated. Provide factory wired single point power connection with factory mounted over-current protection, motor starters and disconnects as required by NEC. Single point power connection shall be such that only one power circuit as indicated in the electrical design shall provide power to the unit supply, exhaust and wheel motors. ERV construction shall equal to the air handler specifications.

2.14 FACTORY PAINTING

Factory paint new equipment, which are not of galvanized construction. Paint with a corrosion resisting paint finish according to ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A924/A924M. Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according to ASTM B117, ASTM D1654, and ASTM D3359. Submit evidence of satisfactory paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be installed indoors and 500 hours for units to be installed outdoors. Provide rating of failure at the scribe mark that is not less than 6, average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch. Provide rating of the inscribed area that is not less than 10, no failure. On units constructed of galvanized steel that have been welded, provide a final shop docket of zinc-rich protective paint on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have burned through from the interior according to ASTM D520 Type I.

Factory painting that has been damaged prior to acceptance by the Contracting Officer shall be field painted in compliance with the requirements of paragraph FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.



2.15 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES

2.15.1 Chilled, Condenser, or Dual Service Water Piping

The requirements for chilled water piping and accessories are specified in Section 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

2.15.2 Condensate Drain Lines

Provide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that generates condensate in accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS except as modified herein.

2.15.3 Backflow Preventers

The requirements for backflow preventers are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.

2.15.4 Insulation

The requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

2.15.5 Controls

The requirements for controls are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS and 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION-RELATED SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA

Perform and document Indoor Air Quality During Construction. Provide documentation showing that after construction ends, and prior to occupancy, new filters were installed in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION.

3.2 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

a. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of the contract drawings and approved manufacturer's installation instructions. Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this type of work. Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.

b. No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to any existing machine or system. Install all hinged doors to swing open a minimum of 120 degrees. Provide an area in front of all access doors that clears a minimum of 3 feet. In front of all access doors to electrical circuits, clear the area the minimum distance to energized circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333 (Electrical-Safety Related work practices)and an additional 3 feet.



c. Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and alarms in conspicuous locations. Mount all indicators, to include gauges, meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in the area.

3.3.1 Condensate Drain Lines

Provide water seals in the condensate drain from all units. Provide a depth of each seal of 2 inches plus the number of inches, measured in water gauge, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to which the drain is connected. Provide water seals that are constructed of 2 tees and an appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged. Provide pipe cap or plug cleanouts where indicated. Connect drains indicated to connect to the sanitary waste system using an indirect waste fitting. Insulate air conditioner drain lines as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

3.3.2 Equipment and Installation

Provide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and other similar items requiring supports. Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated. Anchor and fasten as detailed. Set floor-mounted equipment on not less than 6 inch concrete pads or curbs doweled in place unless otherwise indicated. Make concrete foundations heavy enough to minimize the intensity of the vibrations transmitted to the piping, duct work and the surrounding structure, as recommended in writing by the equipment manufacturer. In lieu of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete pedestal block with isolators placed between the pedestal block and the floor. Make the concrete foundation or concrete pedestal block a mass not less than three times the weight of the components to be supported. Provide the lines connected to the pump mounted on pedestal blocks with flexible connectors. Submit foundation drawings as specified in paragraph DETAIL DRAWINGS. Provide concrete for foundations as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.3.3 Access Panels

Install access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and items requiring inspection or maintenance of sufficient size, and locate them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or completely removed and replaced. Provide access panels as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.3.4 Flexible Duct

Install pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Provide hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the duct manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.

3.3.5 Metal Ductwork

Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless otherwise specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in SMACNA 1966. Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion. Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the



duct. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide retainer clips.

3.3.6 Dust Control

To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during construction, perform temporary dust control protection. Protect the distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all inlets and outlets at the end of each day's work. Keep temporary protection in place until system is ready for startup.

3.3.7 Insulation

Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork, piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and plenums up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit or up to the point where the outdoor air mixes with the return air stream.

3.3.8 Duct Test Holes

Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in balancing the air system. Plug insulated duct at the duct surface, patched over with insulation and then marked to indicate location of test hole if needed for future use.

3.4 EQUIPMENT PADS

Provide equipment pads to the dimensions shown or, if not shown, to conform to the shape of each piece of equipment served with a minimum 3-inch margin around the equipment and supports. Allow equipment bases and foundations, when constructed of concrete or grout, to cure a minimum of 28 calendar days before being loaded.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting and patching of the building structure is required. Make holes in exposed locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by sanding. Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically approved. Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an iron pipe masonry core saw.

3.6 CLEANING

Thoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed within the building structure. Before final acceptance, clean mechanical equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures, and free from dirt, grease, and finger marks. When the work area is in an occupied space such as office, laboratory or warehouse protect all furniture and equipment from dirt and debris. Incorporate housekeeping for field construction work which leaves all furniture and equipment in the affected area free of



construction generated dust and debris; and, all floor surfaces vacuum-swept clean.

3.7 PENETRATIONS

Provide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other penetrating items, and install during the construction of the surface to be penetrated. Cut sleeves flush with each surface. Place sleeves for round duct 15 inches and smaller. Build framed, prepared openings for round duct larger than 15 inches and square, rectangular or oval ducts. Sleeves and framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers are installed at the openings. Provide one inch clearance between penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers, and diffusers. Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2.

3.7.1 Sleeves

Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated, from 20 gauge thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Where sleeves are installed in bearing walls or partitions, provide black steel pipe conforming with ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 20.

3.7.2 Framed Prepared Openings

Fabricate framed prepared openings from 20 gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.

3.7.3 Insulation

Provide duct insulation in accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Terminate duct insulation at fire dampers and flexible connections. For duct handling air at or below 60 degrees F, provide insulation continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air.

3.7.4 Closure Collars

Provide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around the duct or insulation. Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent damage to penetrating surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum dimension over 15 inches from 18 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a maximum of 6 inches on center. Attach to collars a minimum of 4 fasteners where the opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less.

3.7.5 Firestopping

Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire partitions, and fire rated chase walls, seal the penetration with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.



3.8 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and item number on all valves and dampers. Provide tags that are 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter with stamped or engraved markings. Make indentations black for reading clarity. Attach tags to valves with No. 12 AWG 0.0808-inch diameter corrosion-resistant steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or plastic straps designed for that purpose.

3.9 DUCTWORK LEAK TEST

Perform ductwork leak test for the entire air distribution and exhaust system, including fans, coils, filters, etc. Provide test procedure, apparatus, and report that conform to SMACNA 1972 CD. Complete ductwork leak test with satisfactory results prior to applying insulation to ductwork exterior.

3.10 DAMPER ACCEPTANCE TEST

Submit the proposed schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of test. Operate all fire dampers and smoke dampers under normal operating conditions, prior to the occupancy of a building to determine that they function properly. Test each fire damper equipped with fusible link by having the fusible link cut in place. Test dynamic fire dampers with the air handling and distribution system running. Reset all fire dampers with the fusible links replaced after acceptance testing. To ensure optimum operation and performance, install the damper so it is square and free from racking.

3.11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

The requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Begin testing, adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and distribution, including controls, has been completed, with the exception of performance tests.

3.12 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

Provide a temporary bypass for water coils to prevent flushing water from passing through coils. Thoroughly clean ducts, plenums, and casing of debris and blow free of small particles of rubbish and dust and then vacuum clean before installing outlet faces. Wipe equipment clean, with no traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots. Provide temporary filters prior to startup of all fans that are operated during construction, and install new filters after all construction dirt has been removed from the building, and the ducts, plenums, casings, and other items specified have been vacuum cleaned. Maintain system in this clean condition until final acceptance. Properly lubricate bearings with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper tension. Adjust control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment to setting indicated or directed. Adjust fans to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. Maintain all equipment installed under the contract until close out documentation is received, the project is completed and the building has been documented as beneficially occupied.



3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

3.13.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Submit six manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit data complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 3 for the items/units listed under SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

3.13.2 Operation And Maintenance Training

Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist of a total of 24 hours of normal working time and start it after all work specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.




SECTION 23 03 00.00 20

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS08/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-7 2013) National Electrical Safety Code



NEMA MG 10 (2013) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors




1.2 SUBMITTALS



Energy Efficient Equipment for Motors; S

Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for paint/coatings; S

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1


1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION; 22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.


1.4.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.

1.4.2 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.4.3 Service Support

The equipment items must be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations must be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


For each item of equipment, provide a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.4.5.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions must be considered mandatory, the word "should" is interpreted as "must." Reference to the "code official" must be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" must be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" must be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" must

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2


be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.4.5.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, must be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.


Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations must conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.

1.6.1 New Work

Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as motors, motor starters (except starters/controllers which are indicated as part of a motor control center), control or push-button stations, float or pressure switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment. Extended voltage range motors are not to be permitted. The interconnecting power wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit, the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers, and the electrical power circuits must be provided under Division 26, except internal wiring for components of package equipment must be provided as an integral part of the equipment. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to the electrical service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the section specifying that motor or equipment.

1.6.2 High Efficiency Motors

1.6.2.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors

Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors must be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.

1.6.2.2 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors

Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors must be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings must meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3


accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.

1.6.3 Three-Phase Motor Protection

Provide controllers for motors rated one 1 horsepower and larger with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.


When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors must be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and must be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction must be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished must be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.


1.8 ACCESSIBILITY


PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.1.1 Energy Efficient Equipment for Motors

Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT that the motors meet energy efficiency requirements as outlined in this section.

2.1.2 Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for paint/coatings

Low or no VOC's and no added urea formaldehyde for paints or coatings, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph REDUCE VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC).

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting must be factory applied or shop applied, and must be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors must withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test must be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria must be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint must show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen must show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment must not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system must be designed for the temperature service.

3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F must be cleaned to bare metal.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat must be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F must receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil per coat.

b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F must receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F must receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.


SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 5


SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

AABC MN-1 (2002; 6th ed) National Standards for Total System Balance

AABC MN-4 (1996) Test and Balance Procedures

NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

NEBB MASV (2006) Procedural Standards for Measurements and Assessment of Sound and Vibration

NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB (Testing, Adjusting and Balancing) Environmental Systems


SMACNA 1780 (2002) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, 3rd Edition

SMACNA 1858 (2004) HVAC Sound And Vibration Manual - First Edition

SMACNA 1972 CD (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual - 2nd Edition

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council

b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative

c. DALT: Duct air leakage test

d. DALT'd: Duct air leakage tested

e. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating, ventilating, and cooling

f. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau

g. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field acceptance testing of



Final DALT or TAB report. When applied to DALT work, this phase means When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement taken during TAB field acceptance testing which does not fall within the range of plus 10 to minus 10 percent of the original measurement reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter."

h. Season of maximum heating load: The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's winter outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.

i. Season of maximum cooling load: The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's summer outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.

j. Season 1, Season 2: Depending upon when the project HVAC is completed and ready for TAB, Season 1 is defined, thereby defining Season 2. Season 1 could be the season of maximum heating load, or the season of maximum cooling load.

k. Sound measurements terminology: Defined in AABC MN-1, NEBB MASV, or SMACNA 1858 (TABB).

l. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems)

m. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed

n. TAB Agency: TAB Firmr. TABB: Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau

1.2.1 Similar Terms

In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results.

The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or TABB requirements where differences exist.

SIMILAR TERMS

Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term TABB Term

TAB Standard National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems

Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems

International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance

TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor TAB Supervisor



SIMILAR TERMS

Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term TABB Term

Systems Readiness Check

Construction Phase Inspection

Field Readiness Check & Preliminary Field Procedures

Field Readiness Check & Prelim. Field Procedures

1.3 WORK DESCRIPTION

The work includes duct air leakage testing (DALT) and testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of new heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air and water distribution systems including equipment and performance data, ducts, and piping which are located within, on, under, between, and adjacent to buildings.

Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB Firm's qualifications. Comply with requirements of AABC MN-1, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) as supplemented and modified by this specification section. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered mandatory.

1.3.1 Air Distribution Systems

Test, adjust, and balance systems (TAB) in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to exterior of air distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

1.3.2 Water Distribution Systems

TAB systems in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to water distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. At Contractor's option and with Contracting Officer's written approval, the piping systems may be insulated before systems are TAB'd.

Terminate piping insulation immediately adjacent to each flow control valve, automatic control valve, or device. Seal the ends of pipe insulation and the space between ends of pipe insulation and piping, with waterproof vapor barrier coating.

After completion of work under this section, insulate the flow control valves and devices as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

1.3.3 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS

Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:

1. A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.

2. Air quantities at air terminals.



3. Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules.

4. Water quantities and temperatures in thermal energy transfer equipment schedules.

5. Water quantities and heads in pump schedules.

6. Water flow measurement fittings and balancing fittings.

7. Ductwork Construction and Leakage Testing Table that defines the DALT test requirements, including each applicable HVAC duct system ID or mark, duct pressure class, duct seal class, and duct leakage test pressure. This table is included in the file for Graphics for Unified Facilities Guide Specifications:http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf

Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the Contracting Officer, no later than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field measurements.

1.3.4 Related Requirements

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

SD-02 Shop Drawings

TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms; G

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment and Performance Data; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Completed Pre-Final DALT Report; G

Certified Final DALT Report; G

SD-07 Certificates

Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications; G




1.5.1 Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications

To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with any other company participating in work on this contract, including design, furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:

a. Independent AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB agency:

TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of current certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of current certification; or TABB certification number and expiration date of current certification.

TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB supervisor certificate and expiration date of current certification.

TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team field leader has satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.

TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that each field technician has satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.

Current certificates: Registrations and certifications are current, and valid for the duration of this contract. Renew Certifications which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, in a timely manner so that there is no lapse in registration or certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current registration or current certification are not to perform TAB work on this contract.

b. TAB Team Members: TAB team approved to accomplish work on this contract are full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other personnel is allowed to do TAB work on this contract.

c. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if each new member complies with the applicable personnel qualifications and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS

Comply with requirements of this section.



3.2 PRE-DALT/TAB MEETING

Meet with the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR) to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the DALT work and TAB work requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this meeting. Requirements to be discussed include required submittals, work schedule, and field quality control.

3.3 DALT PROCEDURES

3.3.1 Instruments, Consumables and Personnel

Provide instruments, consumables and personnel required to accomplish the DALT field work. Follow the same basic procedure specified below for TAB Field Work, including maintenance and calibration of instruments, accuracy of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and treatment of deficiencies. Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.

3.3.2 DALT Field Visit

On completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to the COTR's duct selection field visit.

3.3.3 Ductwork To Be DALT'd

Each duct system is subject to DALT. The entire duct system shall be tested. Sections of duct systems subject to DALT will include main ducts, branch main ducts, branch ducts and plenums for supply, return, exhaust, and plenum ductwork.

3.3.4 DALT Testing

Perform DALT on the HVAC duct sections of each system as selected by the COTR. Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test pressure data indicated on the drawings, to comply with the procedures specified in SMACNA 1972 CD.

In spite of specifications of SMACNA 1972 CD to the contrary, DALT ductwork of construction class of 3-inch water gauge static pressure and below if indicated to be DALT'd. Complete DALT work on the COTR selected ductwork within 48 hours after the particular ductwork was selected for DALT. Separately conduct DALT work for large duct systems to enable the DALT work to be completed in 48 hours.

3.3.5 Completed Pre-Final DALT Report

3.3.6 Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Acceptance Testing

In the presence of the COTR and TAB team field leader, verify for accuracy Pre-final DALT Report data selected by the COTR. For each duct system, this acceptance testing shall be conducted on a maximum of 50 percent of the duct sections DALT'd.

Further, if any data on the Pre-final DALT report form for a given duct section is out-of-tolerance, then field acceptance testing shall be



conducted on data for one additional duct section, preferably in the same duct system, in the presence of the COTR.

3.3.7 Additional COTR Field Acceptance Testing

If any of the duct sections checked for a given system are determined to have a leakage rate measured that exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction class and sealant class, terminate data checking for that section. The associated Pre-final DALT Report data for the given duct system will be disapproved. Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised Pre-final DALT Report. Reschedule a field check of the revised report data with the COTR.

3.3.8 Certified Final DALT Report

3.3.9 Prerequisite for TAB Field Work

Do not commence TAB field work prior to the completion and approval, for all systems, of the Final DALT Report.

3.4 TAB PROCEDURES

3.4.1 TAB Field Work

Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air and water flow) are within plus or minus 10 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents.

That is, comply with the the requirements of AABC MN-1 or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) and SMACNA 1858 (TABB),except as supplemented and modified by this section.

Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the TAB work. Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.

Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air and water flow) are within plus or minus 10 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents. Conduct TAB work, including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in conformance with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV, or SMACNA 1780 (used by TABB) and SMACNA 1858 sound measurement procedures, except as supplemented and modified by this section. The only water flow and air flow reporting which can be deferred until the Season 2 is that data which would be affected in terms of accuracy due to outside ambient conditions.

3.4.2 Preliminary Procedures

Use the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and procedures for accomplishing TAB field work. TAB engineer is to locate, in the field, test ports required for testing. It is the responsibility of the sheet metal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by the TAB engineer.



3.4.3 TAB Air Distribution Systems

3.4.3.1 Units With Coils

Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water, chilled water coils for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test reports:

a. For air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) cooling, such as factory manufactured units, central built-up units and rooftop units, conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."

Do not determine entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures by single point measurement, but by the average of multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."

Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).

b. For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:

Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.

3.4.3.2 Air Handling Units

Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes, terminal units, variable air volume boxes, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, outside air, mixed air relief air, and makeup air.

3.4.4 TAB Water Distribution Systems

3.4.4.1 Chilled Water

Chilled water systems including chillers, condensers, cooling towers, pumps, coils, system balance valves and flow measuring devices.

For water chillers, report data as required by AABC, NEBB and TABB standard procedures, including refrigeration operational data.

3.4.4.2 Heating Hot Water

Heating hot water systems including boilers, hot water converters (e.g., heat exchangers), pumps, coils, system balancing valves and flow measuring devices.



3.4.4.3 Dual Temperature Water

Dual temperature water systems including boilers, converters, chillers, condensers, cooling towers, pumps, coils, and system balancing valves, and flow measuring devices.

3.4.5 TAB Work on Performance Tests Without Seasonal Limitations

3.4.5.1 Performance Tests

In addition to the TAB proportionate balancing work on the air distribution systems and the water distribution systems, accomplish TAB work on the HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy. TAB the operational performance of the heating systems and cooling systems.

3.4.5.2 Ambient Temperatures

On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking.

3.4.6 TAB Work on Performance Tests With Seasonal Limitations


3.4.6.2 Season Of Maximum Load

3.4.6.3 Ambient Temperatures

On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking.

3.4.6.4 Sound Measurements

Comply with the paragraph SOUND MEASUREMENT WORK, specifically, the requirement that a room must be operating in its noisiest mode at the time of sound measurements in the room. The maximum noise level measurements could depend on seasonally related heat or cooling transfer equipment.

3.4.7 Workmanship

Conduct TAB work on the HVAC systems until measured flow rates are within plus or minus 10 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents. This TAB work includes adjustment of balancing valves, balancing dampers, and sheaves. Further, this TAB work includes changing out fan sheaves and pump impellers if required to obtain air and water flow rates specified or indicated. If, with these adjustments and equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be attained, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.



3.4.8 Deficiencies

Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of the equipment as designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in equipment design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished within the range of design values specified in the paragraph WORKMANSHIP, provide written notice as soon as possible to the Contractor and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended correction.

Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the Contractor's. If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team supervisor for technical assistance. Responsibility for reporting design deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.

3.4.9 TAB Reports

3.4.10 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing

3.4.10.1 TAB Field Acceptance Testing

During the field acceptance testing, verify, in the presence of the COTR, random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion) recorded in the TAB Report. Points and areas for field acceptance testing are to be selected by the COTR. Measurement and test procedures are the same as approved for TAB work for the TAB Report.

Field acceptance testing includes verification of TAB Report data recorded for the following equipment groups:

Group 1: All chillers, boilers, return fans, computer room units, and air handling units (rooftop and central stations).

Group 2: 25 percent of the VAV terminal boxes and associated diffusers and registers.

Group 3: 25 percent of the supply diffusers, registers, grilles associated with constant volume air handling units.

Group 4: 25 percent of the return grilles, return registers, exhaust grilles and exhaust registers.

Group 5: 25 percent of the supply fans, exhaust fans, and pumps.

Further, if any data on the TAB Report for Groups 2 through 5 is found not to fall within the range of plus 10 to minus 10 percent of the TAB Report data, additional group data verification is required in the presence of the COTR. Verify TAB Report data for one additional piece of equipment in that group. Continue this additional group data verification until out-of-tolerance data ceases to be found.

3.4.10.2 Additional COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing

If any of the acceptance testing measurements for a given equipment group is found not to fall within the range of plus 10 to minus 10 percent of the TAB Report data, terminate data verification for all affected data for that group. The affected data for the given group will be disapproved. Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised TAB Report. Reschedule acceptance testing of the revised report data with the COTR.



3.4.10.3 Prerequisite for Approval

Compliance with the field acceptance testing requirements of this section is a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the TAB Report submitted.

3.5 MARKING OF SETTINGS

Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Provide permanent markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment devices which result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.

3.6 MARKING OF TEST PORTS

The TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, make these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation. Show the location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.




SECTION 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS02/13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced in this specification.




ASTM A167 (2011) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A580/A580M (2015) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM B209 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM C1136 (2012) Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C1710 (2011) Standard Guide for Installation of Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form

ASTM C195 (2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C450 (2008) Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging

ASTM C534/C534M (2014) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 (2015) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation



ASTM C552 (2016) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C647 (2008; R 2013) Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C795 (2008; R 2013) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

ASTM C916 (2014) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation


ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

ASTM D2863 (2013) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)

ASTM D5590 (2000; R 2010; E 2012) Standard Test Method for Determining the Resistance of Paint Films and Related Coatings to Fungal Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar Plate Assay

ASTM D882 (2012) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting

ASTM E2231 (2015) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E84 (2015b) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM E96/E96M (2016) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)



MSS SP-69 (2003; Notice 2012) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard)



MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards



NFPA 90B (2015) Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems


MIL-A-24179 (1969; Rev A; Am 2 1980; Notice 1 1987) Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic Thermal Insulation

MIL-A-3316 (1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation

MIL-PRF-19565 (1988; Rev C) Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire- and Water-Resistant, Vapor-Barrier


UL 723 (2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UL 94 (2013; Reprint Jan 2016) Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances


1.2.1 General

Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated. Field applied insulation materials required for use on Government-furnished items as listed in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

1.2.2 Recycled Materials

Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided that the materials meet all other requirements of this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are:

Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight



Fiberglass 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight

Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated AccessoriesDuct Insulation Systems and Associated AccessoriesEquipment Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe Insulation Systems; GDuct Insulation Systems; GEquipment Insulation Systems; G

SD-04 Samples

Thermal Insulation; G


Pipe Insulation Systems; GDuct Insulation Systems; GEquipment Insulation Systems; G


Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for Caulking, Sealant and Adhesive Materials; SRecycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials; S


1.4.1 Installer Qualification

Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years.


Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty,



dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material, date codes, and approximate shelf life (if applicable). Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.1.1 Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for Caulking, Sealant and Adhesive Materials

For interior applications, provide caulking, sealant and adhesive materials meeting the reduced VOC requirements as stated within Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph REDUCE VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC).

2.1.2 Recycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials

Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING that the following products meet the recycled content requirements as outlined in this section:

a. Pipe Insulation Systemsb. Duct Insulation Systems


Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Submit a complete list of materials, including manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. The product number, k-value, thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included. The product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. Materials furnished under this section shall be submitted together in a booklet.

2.2.1 Insulation System

Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems that are located within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems. Provide CFC and HCFC free insulation.

2.2.2 Surface Burning Characteristics

Unless otherwise specified, insulation must have a maximum flame spreadindex of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested inaccordance with ASTM E84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes,shall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723. Test insulation in



the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in theactual construction. Prepare and mount test specimens according to ASTM E2231.

2.3 MATERIALS

Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C795 requirements. Calcium silicate shall not be used on chilled or cold water systems. Materials shall be asbestos free. Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE.

2.3.1 Adhesives

2.3.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive

Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C916, Type I.

2.3.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement

Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195.

2.3.1.3 Lagging Adhesive

Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the cloth/material covering the insulation. To resist mold/mildew, lagging adhesive shall meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Lagging adhesives shall be nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.

2.3.1.4 Contact Adhesive

Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F. The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179, Type II, Class I. Provide product listed in FM APP GUIDE.



2.3.2 Caulking

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.

2.3.3 Corner Angles

Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.

2.3.4 Fittings

Fabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible elastomeric pipe insulation systems in accordance with ASTM C1710. Together with the flexible elastomeric tubes, they provide complete system integrity for retarding heat gain and controlling condensation drip from chilled-water and refrigeration systems. Flexible elastomeric, fabricated fittings provide thermal protection (0.25 k) and condensation resistance (0.05 Water Vapor Transmission factor). For satisfactory performance, properly installed protective vapor retarder/barriers and vapor stops shall be used on high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications to reduce movement of moisture through or around the insulation to the colder interior surface.

2.3.5 Finishing Cement

ASTM C450: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C795.

2.3.6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape

Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Elastomeric Foam Tape: Black vapor-retarder foam tape with acrylic adhesive containing an anti-microbial additive.

2.3.7 Staples

Outward clinching type ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.

2.3.8 Jackets

2.3.8.1 Aluminum Jackets

Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch nominal thickness; ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or 3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the



joints and hold the jacket in place.

2.3.8.2 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket

Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, using the water transmission rate test method; heavy duty, white or natural; and UV resistant. Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied, UV Jacket made with a cold weather acrylic adhesive. Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and excellent Water Vapor Transmission (WVT) rate.

2.3.9 Vapor Retarder Required

ASTM C921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch width. ASTM C921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units, tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that require manufacturer or fabricator applied pipe insulation jackets are cellular glass, when all joints are sealed with a vapor barrier mastic, and mineral fiber. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible elastomerics require (in addition to vapor barrier skin) vapor retarder jacketing for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.

2.3.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)

ASJ is for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment indoors or outdoors if covered by a suitable protective jacket. The product shall meet all physical property and performance requirements of ASTM C1136, Type I, except the burst strength shall be a minimum of 85 psi. ASTM D2863 Limited Oxygen Index (LOI) shall be a minimum of 31.

In addition, neither the outer exposed surface nor the inner-most surface contacting the insulation shall be paper or other moisture-sensitive material. The outer exposed surface shall be white and have an emittance of not less than 0.80. The outer exposed surface shall be paintable.

2.3.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings

2.3.9.2.1 Vapor Barrier

The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Permeability shall be less than 0.02 when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Products shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 flame and smoke requirements and shall be UV resistant.

2.3.9.2.2 Vapor Retarder

The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color shall



be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mils dry film thickness as determined according to procedure B of ASTM E96/E96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM E96/E96M. The coating shall be nonflammable, fire resistant type. To resist mold/mildew, coating shall meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Coating shall meet MIL-PRF-19565 Type II (if selected for indoor service) and be Qualified Products Database listed. All other application and service properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C647.

2.3.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder

ASTM C1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork; where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied UV Jacket. Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and an excellent WVT rate.

2.3.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder

The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units, a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.3.9.5 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape

Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor Retarder above.

2.3.9.6 Vapor Barrier/Weather Barrier

The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M). Vapor barrier shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant. Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with ISO 2758. Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified for laminated film vapor barrier above.

2.3.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required

ASTM C921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.3.11 Wire

Soft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.



2.3.12 Insulation Bands

Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.

2.3.13 Sealants

Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perms based on Procedure B for ASTM E96/E96M, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.4 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS

Conform insulation materials to Table 1 and minimum insulation thickness as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Comply with EPA requirements for material with recycled content in accordance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING, paragraph RECYCLED CONTENT. Limit pipe insulation materials to those listed herein and meeting the following requirements:

2.4.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be as follows:

2.4.1.1 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation from the fabricator with (paragraph WHITE VAPOR RETARDER ALL SERVICE JACKET (ASJ)) ASJ vapor retarder and installed with all longitudinal overlaps sealed and all circumferential joints ASJ taped or supply the insulation unfaced from the fabricator and install with all longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with vapor barrier mastic.

2.4.1.2 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Closed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II. Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials. Type II, Grade 1, for sheet materials. Type I and II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation, and require an additional exterior vapor retarder covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.

2.4.1.3 Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM)

ASTM C547. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.

2.4.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.



2.4.2.1 Mineral Fiber

ASTM C547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.

2.4.2.2 Cellular Glass

ASTM C552, Type II and Type III. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.

2.4.2.3 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Closed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II to 220 degrees F service. Type I for tubular materials. Type II for sheet materials.

2.4.3 Aboveground Dual Temperature Pipeline

Selection of insulation for use over a dual temperature pipeline system (Outdoor, Indoor - Exposed or Concealed) shall be in accordance with the most limiting/restrictive case. Find an allowable material from paragraph PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS and determine the required thickness from the most restrictive case. Use the thickness listed in paragraphs INSULATION THICKNESS for cold & hot pipe applications.

2.4.4 Below-ground Pipeline Insulation

For below-ground pipeline insulation, use cellular glass, ASTM C552, type II.

2.5 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS

2.5.1 Factory Applied Insulation

Provide factory-applied ASTM C552, cellular glass thermal insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations for insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant vapor barrier, with identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value and out-of-package R value.

2.5.1.1 Rigid Insulation

Calculate the minimum thickness in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.

2.5.1.2 Blanket Insulation

Calculate minimum thickness in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.

2.5.2 Duct Insulation Jackets

2.5.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket

Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface suitable for field painting.



2.5.2.2 Metal Jackets

2.5.2.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket

Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or natural).

2.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS

Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 5 and 6. In outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified. Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a smooth, exterior surface. Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation instructions for the insulation systems. The instructions must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. A booklet is also required by paragraphs titled: Pipe Insulation Systems and Duct Insulation Systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL

Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart after one hour, shall be replaced.

3.1.1 Installation

Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests and heat tracing specified in other sections of this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces. Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.

3.1.2 Firestopping

Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. The protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other penetrations, such as



piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must be protected with a material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL, FM, or a NRTL.

3.1.3 Painting and Finishing

Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.1.4 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Install flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 220 degrees F. Stagger seams when applying multiple layers of insulation. Protect insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have vapor barrier weatherproof jacketing with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured.

3.1.4.1 Adhesive Application

Apply a brush coating of adhesive to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. Allow the adhesive to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces. Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.

3.1.4.2 Adhesive Safety Precautions

Use natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical) ventilation to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices.

3.1.5 Welding

No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.

3.1.6 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment That Require Insulation

Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for omitted items as specified.

3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Pipe Insulation

3.2.1.1 General

Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and



using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following:

a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.

b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.

c. Sanitary drain lines.

d. Air chambers.

e. Adjacent insulation.

f. ASME stamps.

g. Access plates of fan housings.

h. Cleanouts or handholes.

3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors

Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.

Provide an aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.

3.2.1.2.1 Penetrate Interior Walls

The aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each end with a band.

3.2.1.2.2 Penetrating Floors

Extend the aluminum jacket from a point below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.

3.2.1.2.3 Penetrating Waterproofed Floors

Extend the aluminum jacket rom below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.

3.2.1.2.4 Penetrating Exterior Walls

Continue the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed to weather through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.

3.2.1.2.5 Penetrating Roofs

Insulate pipe as required for interior service to a point flush with the



top of the flashing and sealed with flashing sealant. Tightly butt the insulation for exterior application to the top of flashing and interior insulation. Extend the exterior aluminum jacket 2 inches down beyond the end of the insulation to form a counter flashing. Seal the flashing and counter flashing underneath with metal jacketing/flashing sealant.

3.2.1.2.6 Hot Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar Heated Service

Terminate the insulation on the backside of the finished wall. Protect the insulation termination with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats (if applicable). Extend the coating out onto the insulation 2 inches and seal the end of the insulation. Overlap glass tape seams 1 inch. Caulk the annular space between the pipe and wall penetration with approved fire stop material. Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.

3.2.1.2.7 Domestic Cold Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar Cooling Service

Terminate the insulation on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). Protect the insulation with two coats of weather barrier mastic (breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic impermeable to water and permeable to air) with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch. Extend the mastic out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and caulk the wall penetration with an approved fire stop material having vapor retarder properties. Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8 inches.

3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers

Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous through hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield, insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used.

3.2.1.3.1 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches at 60 Degrees F and Above

Supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.

3.2.1.3.2 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches and Below 60 Degrees F

Supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular glass, prefabricated insulation pipe hangers, or perlite above 80 degrees F shall be installed above each shield. The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above,



and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an option to installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.

3.2.1.3.3 Vertical Pipes

Supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert. The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When the pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the pipe shall be additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe that are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe insulation. These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.

3.2.1.3.4 Inserts

Covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and seal as required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation material.

3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation

Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation. Type II requires an additional exterior vapor retarder/barrier covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.

3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.

In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum or flexible laminate cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil laminate) laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000 permeability; (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed) aluminum



jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level shall be protected.

3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness

Pipe insulation materials must be as listed in Table 1 and must meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.

TABLE 1

Insulation Material for Piping

Service

Material Specification Type Class VR/VB Req'd

Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 F nominal)

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 Yes

Heating Hot Water Supply & Return, Heated Oil (Max 250 F)

Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 I 1 No

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 NoCold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 NoHot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)

Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 I 1 No

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 No

Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

ASTM C534/C534M I No

Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicapped Personnel



Horizontal Roof Drain Leaders (Including Underside of Roof Drain Fittings)

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 III Yes

Condensate Drain Located Inside Building



Note: VR/VB = Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier



TABLE 2

Piping Insulation Thickness (inch) Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applicationsexposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.

Service

Material Tube And Pipe Size (inch)

<1 1-<1.5 1.5-<4 4-<8 > or = >8

Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 Degrees F nominal)

Cellular Glass 1.5 2 2 2.5 3

Heating Hot Water Supply & Return, Heated Oil (Max 250 F)

Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2

Cellular Glass 2 2.5 3 3 3

Cold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

Hot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)

Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1.5 1.5

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2

Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)


1 1 1 N/A N/A

Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicapped Personnel


0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Horizontal Roof Drain Leaders (Including Underside of Roof Drain Fittings)

Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

Condensate Drain Located Inside Building


1 1 1 N/A N/A

3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines

The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in



subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Make-up water.

b. Horizontal and vertical portions of interior roof drains.

c. Refrigerant suction lines.

d. Chilled water.

f. Air conditioner condensate drains.

g. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing fixtures for handicap persons.

3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness

Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.

3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater than 3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, and Phenolic Foam Insulated Pipe. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is not required. In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft level.

3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe

Apply insulation to the pipe with tight butt joints. Seal all butted joints and ends with joint sealant and seal with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.

3.2.2.3.1 Longitudinal Laps of the Jacket Material

Overlap not less than 1-1/2 inches. Provide butt strips 3 inches wide for circumferential joints.



3.2.2.3.2 Laps and Butt Strips

Secure with adhesive and staple on 4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, seal in accordance with paragraph STAPLES below. Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems.

3.2.2.3.3 Factory Self-Sealing Lap Systems

May be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. Install the lap system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use a stapler only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, replace the section or repair the gap by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.

3.2.2.3.4 Staples

Coat all staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap systems, with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. Coat all seams, except those on factory self-seal systems, with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

3.2.2.3.5 Breaks and Punctures in the Jacket Material

Patch by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and secure it with adhesive, staple, and coat with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. Extend the patch not less than 1-1/2 inches past the break.

3.2.2.3.6 Penetrations Such as Thermometers

Fill the voids in the insulation and seal with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

3.2.2.3.7 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation

Install by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing. Secure all seams and butt joints and seal with adhesive. When using self seal products only the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive. Push insulation on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints. Clean cut all edges. Rough or jagged edges of the insulation are not be permitted. Use proper tools such as sharp knives. Do not stretch Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation around the pipe when used on pipe larger than 6 inches. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.

3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.



b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves; and 17 for flanges and unions. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow'. Submit a booklet containing completed MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each insulating system for each pipe, duct, or equipment insulating system, after approval of materials and prior to applying insulation.

(1) If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead of edited MICA Plates, the detail drawings shall be technically equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal.

c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch, applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation.

d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface.

e. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, and check valves.

3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines

3.2.3.1 General Requirements

All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.

b. Condensate discharge.



c. Hot water heating.

Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.

3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.

3.2.3.2.1 Precut or Preformed

Place precut or preformed insulation around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.

3.2.3.2.2 Rigid Preformed

Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".

3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather

Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3.

3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket

The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with metal jacketing/flashing sealant while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.



3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings

Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air) recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed, and UV resistant.

3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket

PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall include provision for thermal expansion.

3.2.5 Below Ground Pipe Insulation

Below ground pipes shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2, except as precluded in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3. This includes, but is not limited to the following:

a. Heated oil.

b. Domestic hot water.

c. Heating hot water.

3.2.5.1 Type of Insulation

Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application with thickness as determined from Table 2 (whichever is the most restrictive).

3.2.5.2 Installation of Below ground Pipe Insulation

a. Bore surfaces of the insulation shall be coated with a thin coat of gypsum cement of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Coating thickness shall be sufficient to fill surface cells of insulation. Mastic type materials shall not be used for this coating. Note that unless this is for a cyclic application (i.e., one that fluctuates between high and low temperature on a daily process basis) there is no need to bore coat the material.

b. Stainless steel bands, 3/4 inch wide by 0.020 inch thick shall be used to secure insulation in place. A minimum of two bands per section of insulation shall be applied. As an alternate, fiberglass reinforced tape may be used to secure insulation on piping up to 12 inches in diameter. A minimum of two bands per section of insulation shall be applied.



c. Insulation shall terminate at anchor blocks but shall be continuous through sleeves and manholes.

d. At point of entry to buildings, underground insulation shall be terminated 2 inches inside the wall or floor, shall butt tightly against the aboveground insulation and the butt joint shall be sealed with high temperature silicone sealant and covered with fibrous glass tape.

e. Provision for expansion and contraction of the insulation system shall be made in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendations.

f. Flanges, couplings, valves, and fittings shall be insulated with factory pre-molded, prefabricated, or field-fabricated sections of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. Insulation sections shall be secured as recommended by the manufacturer.

g. Insulation, including fittings, shall be finished with three coats of asphaltic mastic, with 6 by 5.5 mesh synthetic reinforcing fabric embedded between coats. Fabric shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches at joints. Total film thickness shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch. As an alternate, a prefabricated bituminous laminated jacket, reinforced with internal reinforcement mesh, shall be applied to the insulation. Jacketing material and application procedures shall match manufacturer's written instructions. Vapor barrier - less than 0.0000 permeability self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) jacket greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty, white or natural). Application procedures shall match the manufacturer's written instructions.

h. At termination points, other than building entrances, the mastic and cloth or tape shall cover the ends of insulation and extend 2 inches along the bare pipe.

3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Except for oven hood exhaust duct insulation, corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket. Air conditioned spaces shall be defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air (or provided with a cooling device such as a fan-coil unit) and heated conditioned air (or provided with a heating device such as a unit heater, radiator or convector).

3.3.1 Duct Insulation Minimum Thickness

Duct insulation minimum thickness in accordance with Table 4.

Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)

Cold Air Ducts 2.0



Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)

Relief Ducts 2.0

Fresh Air Intake Ducts 2.0

Warm Air Ducts 2.0

Relief Ducts 2.0

Fresh Air Intake Ducts 2.0

3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct

Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and associated equipment.

a. Supply ducts.

b. Return air ducts.

c. Relief and exhaust ducts.

d. Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).

e. Plenums.

f. Duct-mounted coil casings.

g. Coil headers and return bends.

h. Coil casings.

i. Fresh air intake ducts.

j. Filter boxes.

k. Mixing boxes (field-insulated).

l. Supply fans (field-insulated).

m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.

n. Ducts exposed to weather.

o. Combustion air intake ducts.

Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf. Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct insulation shall be



continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation. Sheet Metal Duct shall be sealed in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.

3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct

a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.

b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.

c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.

d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.

e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.

f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush



coat of vapor retarder coating.. The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.

j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.

3.3.3 Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose

For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.

3.3.4 Duct Test Holes

After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

3.4.1 General

Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers, fasteners, flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted on the following:

a. Hand-holes.

b. Boiler manholes.

c. Cleanouts.

d. ASME stamps.

e. Manufacturer's nameplates.

f. Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.

3.4.2 Insulation for Cold Equipment

Cold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:

a. Pumps.

b. Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.

c. Drip pans under chilled equipment.

d. Cold water storage tanks.

e. Water softeners.

f. Duct mounted coils.

g. Cold and chilled water pumps.



h. Pneumatic water tanks.

i. Roof drain bodies.

j. Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.

k. Expansion and air separation tanks.

3.4.2.1 Insulation Type

Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Material and thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:

TABLE 5

Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (inches)

Equipment handling media at indicated temperature

Material Thickness(inches)

35 to 60 degrees F

Cellular Glass 1.5

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1

1 to 34 degrees F

Cellular Glass 3

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1.5

Minus 30 to 0 degrees F

Cellular Glass 3.5

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1.75

3.4.2.2 Pump Insulation

a. Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Joints between sides and between sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips for rigid mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. The box shall conform to the requirements of MICA Insulation Stds plate No. 49 when using flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.

b. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

c. Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including removable sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be applied with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry



thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating. Flashing sealant shall be applied to parting line, between equipment and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.

3.4.2.3 Other Equipment

a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.

b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered with contact adhesive. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.

c. Cellular glass shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant, and sealed with a vapor retarder coating.

d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint. The entire surface of the removable section shall be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.

e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

f. Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6 inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch centers.

3.4.2.4 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier

Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be caulked. Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Flashing sealant or vapor barrier tape shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation.

3.4.3 Insulation for Hot Equipment

Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F including the following:

a. Converters.

b. Heat exchangers.

c. Hot water generators.



d. Water heaters.

e. Pumps handling media above 130 degrees F.

f. Fuel oil heaters.

g. Hot water storage tanks.

h. Air separation tanks.

i. Surge tanks.

j. Flash tanks.

k. Feed-water heaters.

l. Unjacketed boilers or parts of boilers.

m. Boiler flue gas connection from boiler to stack (if inside).

n. Induced draft fans.

o. Fly ash and soot collectors.

p. Condensate receivers.

3.4.3.1 Insulation

Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Shell and tube-type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the shell medium.

Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6:

TABLE 6

Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (inches)

Equipment handling steam or media at indicated pressure or temperature limit

Material Thickness(inches)

15 psig or 250 degrees F

Rigid Mineral Fiber 2

Flexible Mineral Fiber 2

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular (<200 F) 1

3.4.3.2 Insulation of Pumps

Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a rigid housing that does not rest on the pump. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly. The top cover shall have a joint forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, making the top cover removable. Two coats of Class I adhesive shall be applied



over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line of the removable sections and penetrations.

3.4.3.3 Other Equipment

a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.

b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.

c. On high vibration equipment, cellular glass insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer, and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound. Mineral fiber joints shall be filled with finishing cement.

d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. The removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint. Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished as specified.

e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

f. On equipment with ribs, such as boiler flue gas connection, draft fans, and fly ash or soot collectors, insulation shall be applied over 6 by 6 inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inch washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch (maximum) centers.

g. On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F, insulation shall be applied in two or more layers with joints staggered.

h. Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be caulked. Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation.




SECTION 23 09 23.13 20

BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC11/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

AMCA 500-D (2012) Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating


ASHRAE 135 (2012; Addenda AR 2013; Errata 1 2013; INT 1-9 2013; Errata 2 2013; INT 10-12 2014; Errata 3-4 2014; Addenda AI-AY 2014; INT 13-19 2015; Errata 5 2015; Addenda AJ-BC 2016) BACnet—A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks

ASHRAE 135.1 (2014; ADD O) Method of Test for Conformance to BACnet

ARCNET TRADE ASSOCIATION (ATA)

ATA 878.1 (1999) Local Area Network: Token Bus


ASME B16.5 (2013) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard




ASTM A126 (2004; R 2014) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings


SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 1


CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)

CEA-709.1-D (2014) Control Network Protocol Specification


IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.45 (2002; R 2008) Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000v and less)AC Power Circuits

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 8802-3 (2000) Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems - Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - Specific Requirements - Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications






SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition


UL 1449 (2014; Reprint Mar 2016) Surge Protective Devices

UL 506 (2008; Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty Transformers

UL 508A (2013; Reprint Jan 2014) Industrial Control Panels

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 2


UL 916 (2007; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for Energy Management Equipment

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135

ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, referred to as "BACnet". ASHRAE developed BACnet to provide a method for diverse building automation devices to communicate and share data over a network.

1.2.2 ARCNET

ATA 878.1 - Attached Resource Computer Network. ARCNET is a deterministic LAN technology; meaning it's possible to determine the maximum delay before a device is able to transmit a message.

1.2.3 BACnet

Building Automation and Control Network; the common name for the communication standard ASHRAE 135. The standard defines methods and protocol for cooperating building automation devices to communicate over a variety of LAN technologies.

1.2.4 BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)

ASHRAE 135 building controller that is the main interface for the building control system.

1.2.5 BACnet/IP

An extension of BACnet, Annex J, defines this mechanism using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number. See also "BACnet Broadcast Management Device".

1.2.6 BACnet Internetwork

Two or more BACnet networks, possibly using different LAN technologies, connected with routers. In a BACnet internetwork, there exists only one message path between devices.

1.2.7 BACnet Network

One or more BACnet segments that have the same network address and are interconnected by bridges at the physical and data link layers.

1.2.8 BACnet Segment

One or more physical segments of BACnet devices on a BACnet network, connected at the physical layer by repeaters.

1.2.9 BBMD

BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). A communications device, typically combined with a BACnet router. A BBMD forwards BACnet broadcast messages to BACnet/IP devices and other BBMDs connected to the same BACnet/IP network. Every IP subnetwork that is part of a BACnet/IP network

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 3


must have only one BBMD. See also "BACnet/IP".

1.2.10 BAS

Building Automation Systems, including DDC (Direct Digital Controls) used for facility automation and energy management.

1.2.11 BAS Owner

The regional or local user responsible for managing all aspects of the BAS operation, including: network connections, workstation management, submittal review, technical support, control parameters, and daily operation.

1.2.12 BIBBs

BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks. A collection of BACnet services used to describe supported tasks. BIBBs are often described in terms of "A" (client) and "B" (server) devices. The "A" device uses data provided by the "B" device, or requests an action from the "B" device.

1.2.13 BI

BACnet International, formerly two organizations: the BACnet Manufacturers Association (BMA) and the BACnet Interest Group - North America (BIG-NA).

1.2.14 BI/BTL

BACnet International/BACnet Testing Laboratories (Formerly BMA/BTL). The organization responsible for testing products for compliance with the BACnet standard, operated under the direction of BACnet International.

1.2.15 Bridge

Network hardware that connects two or more network (or BACnet internetwork) segments at the physical and data link layers. A bridge may also filter messages.

1.2.16 Broadcast

A message sent to all devices on a network segment.

1.2.17 Device

Any control system component, usually a digital controller, that contains a BACnet Device Object and uses BACnet to communicate with other devices. See also "Digital Controller".

1.2.18 Device Object

Every BACnet device requires one Device Object, whose properties represent the network visible properties of that device. Every Device Object requires a unique Object Identifier number on the BACnet internetwork. This number is often referred to as the device instance.

1.2.19 Device Profile

A collection of BIBBs determining minimum BACnet capabilities of a device, defined in ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, Annex L. Standard device profiles

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 4


include BACnet Operator Workstations (B-OWS), BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC), BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA), andBACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS). Each device used in new construction is required to have a PICS statement listing BIBBs supported.

1.2.20 Digital Controller

An electronic controller, usually with internal programming logic and digital and analog input/output capability, which performs control functions. In most cases, synonymous with a BACnet device described in this specification. See also "Device".

1.2.21 Direct Digital Control (DDC)

Digital controllers performing control logic. Usually the controller directly senses physical values, makes control decisions with internal programs, and outputs control signals to directly operate switches, valves, dampers, and motor controllers.

1.2.22 DDC System

A network of digital controllers, communication architecture, and user interfaces. A DDC system may include programming, sensors, actuators, switches, relays, factory controls, operator workstations, and various other devices, components, and attributes.

1.2.23 Ethernet

A family of local-area-network technologies providing high-speed networking features over various media.

1.2.24 Firmware

Software programmed into read only memory (ROM), flash memory, electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM), or erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM) chips.

1.2.25 Middleware

Communication hardware and software connecting two or more different protocols, similar to human language translators. The Middleware translates one protocol into equivalent concepts for the other protocol. In BACnet applications, a middleware has BACnet on one side and non-BACnet protocols on the other side.

1.2.26 Half Router

A device that participates as one partner in a BACnet point-to-point (PTP) connection. Two half-routers in an active PTP connection combine to form a single router.

1.2.27 Hub

A common connection point for devices on a network.

1.2.28 Internet Protocol (IP, TCP/IP, UDP/IP)

A communication method, the most common use is the World Wide Web. At the

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 5


lowest level, it is based on Internet Protocol (IP), a method for conveying and routing packets of information over various LAN media. Two common protocols using IP are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). UDP conveys information to well-known "sockets" without confirmation of receipt. TCP establishes "sessions", which have end-to-end confirmation and guaranteed sequence of delivery.

1.2.29 Input/Output (I/O)

Physical inputs and outputs to and from a device, although the term sometimes describes software, or "virtual" I/O. See also "Points".

1.2.30 I/O Expansion Unit

An I/O expansion unit provides additional point capacity to a digital controller.

1.2.31 IP subnet

Internet protocol (IP) identifies individual devices with a 32-bit number divided into four groups from 0 to 255. Devices are often grouped and share some portion of this number. For example, one device has IP address 209.185.47.68 and another device has IP address 209.185.47.82. These two devices share Class C subnet 209.185.47.00

1.2.32 Local-Area Network (LAN)

A communication network that spans a limited geographic area and uses the same basic communication technology throughout.

1.2.33 LonTalk

CEA-709.1-D. A communication protocol developed by Echelon Corp. LonTalk is an optional physical and data link layer for BACnet.

1.2.34 MAC Address

Media Access Control address. The physical node address that identifies a device on a Local Area Network.

1.2.35 Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP)

ISO 8802-3. One of the LAN options for BACnet. MSTP uses twisted-pair wiring for relatively low speed and low cost communication (up to 4,000 ft at 76.8K bps).

1.2.36 Native BACnet Device

A device that uses BACnet as its primary, if not only, method of communication with other BACnet devices without intermediary gateways. A system that uses native BACnet devices at all levels is a native BACnet system.

1.2.37 Network

Communication technology for data communications. BACnet approved network types are BACnet over Internet Protocol (IP), Point to Point (PTP) Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP, and LonTalk®.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 6


1.2.38 Network Number

A site-specific number assigned to each network segment to identify for routing. This network number must be unique throughout the BACnet internetwork.

1.2.39 Object

The concept of organizing BACnet information into standard components with various associated properties. Examples include analog input objects and binary output objects.

1.2.40 Object Identifier

An object property used to identify the object, including object type and instance. Object Identifiers must be unique within a device.

1.2.41 Object Properties

Attributes of an object. Examples include present value and high limit properties of an analog input object. Properties are defined in ASHRAE 135; some are optional and some are required. Objects are controlled by reading from and writing to object properties.

1.2.42 Peer-to-Peer

Peer-to-peer refers to devices where any device can initiate and respond to communication with other devices.

1.2.43 Performance Verification Test (PVT)

The procedure for determining if the installed BAS meets design criteria prior to final acceptance. The PVT is performed after installation, testing, and balancing of mechanical systems. Typically the PVT is performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Government.

1.2.44 PID

Proportional, integral, and derivative control; three parameters used to control modulating equipment to maintain a setpoint. Derivative control is often not required for HVAC systems (leaving "PI" control).

1.2.45 PICS

Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS), describing the BACnet capabilities of a device. See BACnet, Annex A for the standard format and content of a PICS statement.

1.2.46 Points

Physical and virtual inputs and outputs. See also "Input/Output".

1.2.47 PTP

Point-to-Point protocol connects individual BACnet devices or networks using serial connections like modem-to-modem links.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 7


1.2.48 Repeater

A network component that connects two or more physical segments at the physical layer.

1.2.49 Router/Protocol Gateway

A BACnet router is a component that joins together two or more networks using different LAN technologies and protocols. Examples include joining a BACnet RS485 field bus (serial network) to an IP or Ethernet network..

In the above case the protocol gateway encapsulates BACnet data from the field bus within UDP headers for transport over IP

1.2.50 Stand-Alone Control

Refers to devices performing equipment-specific and small system control without communication to other devices or computers for physical I/O, excluding outside air and other common shared conditions. Devices are located near controlled equipment, with physical input and output points limited to 64 or less per device, except for complex individual equipment or systems. Failure of any single device or communications will not cause other network devices to fail. Internal time clocks and onboard scheduling are required to allow for stand-alone control. BACnet "Smart" actuators (B-SA profile) and sensors (B-SS profile) communicating on a network with a parent device are exempt from stand-alone requirements. Provide stand-alone control routines to provide for energy saving sequences such as free cooling. Provide stand-alone control routines that operate without connection to the BACnet/IP and MS/TP networks during a loss of communication.

1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTSPerform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS in Section 01 00 00 ADDITIONAL SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. The paragraph specifies that all contract requirements of this section shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor. No work required shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor.

1.4 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC DESCRIPTION

a. Provide new BACnet DDC systems including associated equipment and accessoriesas indicated on the design drawings and interface to existing basewide system. Where gateways are allowed, they must support ASHRAE 135, including all object properties and read-write services shown on Government approved interoperability schedules. Manufacturer's products, including design, materials, fabrication, assembly, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 135, ASME B31.1, and NFPA 70, except where indicated otherwise.

1.4.1 Design Requirements

1.4.1.1 Control System Drawings Title Sheet

Provide a title sheet for the control system drawing set. Include the project title, project location, contract number, the controls contractor preparing the drawings, an index of the control drawings in the set, and a legend of the symbols and abbreviations used throughout the control system drawings.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 8


1.4.1.2 List of I/O Points

Also known as a Point Schedule, provide for each input and output point physically connected to a digital controller: point name, point description, point type (Analog Output (AO), Analog Input (AI), Binary Output (BO), Binary Input (BI)), point sensor range, point actuator range, point address, BACnet object, associated BIBBS (where applicable), and point connection terminal number. Typical schedules for multiple identical equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or contract criteria.

1.4.1.3 Control System Components List

Provide a complete list of control system components installed on this project. Include for each controller and device: control system schematic name, control system schematic designation, device description, manufacturer, model, part number, firmware version, serial number, and physical location (e.g. Building 4, room 112 overhead). For sensors, include point name, sensor range, and operating limits. For valves, include body style, Cv, design flow rate, pressure drop, valve characteristic (linear or equal percentage), and pipe connection size. For actuators, include point name, spring or non-spring return, modulating or two-position action, normal (power fail) position, nominal control signal operating range (0-10 volts DC or 4-20 milliamps), and operating limits.

1.4.1.4 Control System Schematics

Provide control system schematics. Typical schematics for multiple identical equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or contract criteria. Include the following:

a. Location of each input and output device

b. Flow diagram for each piece of HVAC equipment

c. Name or symbol for each control system component, such as V-1 for a valve

d. Setpoints, with differential or proportional band values

e. Written sequence of operation for the HVAC equipment

f. Valve and Damper Schedules, with normal (power fail) position

1.4.1.5 HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder Diagrams

Provide HVAC equipment electrical ladder diagrams. Indicate required electrical interlocks.

1.4.1.6 Component Wiring Diagrams

Provide a wiring diagram for each type of input device and output device. Indicate how each device is wired and powered; showing typical connections at the digital controller and power supply. Show for all field connected devices such as control relays, motor starters, actuators, sensors, and transmitters.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 9


1.4.1.7 Terminal Strip Diagrams

Provide a diagram of each terminal strip. Indicate the terminal strip location, termination numbers, and associated point names.

1.4.1.8 BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic

Provide a schematic showing the project's entire BACnet communication network, including Internet Protocol (IP), Media Access Control (MAC), BACnet network, Device ID, field bus address, BBMDs, any devices using BACnet FDR, and Firmware version / Operating System, LAN devices including routers and bridges, gateways, controllers, workstations, and field interface devices. If applicable, show connection to existing networks.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Submit detailed and annotated manufacturer's data, drawings, and specification sheets for each item listed, that clearly show compliance with the project specifications.

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Include the following in the project's control system drawing set:

Control System Drawings Title Sheet; G

List of I/O Points; G

Control System Components List; G

Control System Schematics; G

HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder Diagrams; G

Component Wiring Diagrams; G

Terminal Strip Diagrams; G

BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic; G

SD-03 Product Data

Direct Digital Controllers; G

Include BACnet PICS for each controller/device type, including smart sensors (B-SS) and smart actuators (B-SA).

BACnet Gateways; G

Include BACnet and workstation display information; bi-directional communication ability; compliance with

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 10


interoperability schedule; expansion capacity; handling of alarms, events, scheduling and trend data; and single device capability (not depending on multiple devices for exchanging information from either side of the gateway).

BACnet Operator Workstation Software; G

BACnet Operator Workstation; G

Include BACnet PICS for Operator Workstation software.

Sensors and Input Hardware; G

Output Hardware; G

Surge and Transient Protection; G

Indicators; G

Duct smoke detectors; G

Variable Frequency (Motor) Drives; G

SD-05 Design Data

Performance Verification Testing Plan; G

Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Performance Verification Testing Report; G

SD-07 Certificates

Contractor's Qualifications; G

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Pre-PVT Checklist; G


Comply with requirements for data packages in Section 01 78 23OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, except as supplemented and modified in this specification.

BACnet Direct Digital Control Systems, Data Package 4; G

Controls System Operators Manuals, Data Package 4; G

VFD Service Manuals, Data Package 4; G


Training Documentation; G

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 11



1.6.1 Standard Products

Provide material and equipment that are standard manufacturer's products currently in production and supported by a local service organization.

1.6.2 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation according to manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.6.3 Operating Environment

Protect components from humidity and temperature variation, dust, and contaminants. If components are stored before installation, keep them within the manufacturer's limits.

1.6.4 Finish of New Equipment

New equipment finishing shall be factory provided. Manufacturer's standard factory finishing shall be proven to withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Equipment located outdoors shall be proven to withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.

Salt-spray fog test shall be according to ASTM B117, with acceptance criteria as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the finish shall show no signs of degradation or loss of adhesion beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

1.6.5 Verification of Dimensions

The contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work.

1.6.6 Contractor's Qualifications

Submit documentation certifying the controls Contractor performing the work has completed at least three DDC systems installations of a similar design to this project, and programmed similar sequences of operation for at least two years.


The advisory provisions in ASME B31.1 and NFPA 70 are mandatory. Substitute "shall" for "should" wherever it appears and interpret all references to the "authority having jurisdiction" and "owner" to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.6.8 Project Sequence

The control system work for this project shall proceed in the following order:

a. Submit and receive approval on the Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Certificates specified under the paragraph SUBMITTALS.

b. Perform the control system installation work, including all field

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 12


check-outs and tuning.

c. Provide support to TAB personnel as specified under the paragraph TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT.

d. Submit and receive approval of the Controls System Operators Manual specified under the paragraph CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS.

e. Submit and receive approval of the Performance Verification Testing Plan and the Pre-PVT Checklist specified under the paragraph PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING.

f. Perform the Performance Verification Testing.

g. Submit and receive approval on the PVT Report.

h. Submit and receive approval on the Training Documentation specified under the paragraph INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL and VFD Service Support. Submit at least 30 days before training.

i. Deliver the final Controls System Operators Manuals and VFD Service Manuals.

j. Conduct the Phase I Training and VFD on-site/hands-on training.

k. Conduct the Phase II Training.

l. Submit and receive approval of Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DDC SYSTEM

a. Provide a networked DDC system for stand-alone control in compliance with the latest revision of the ASHRAE 135 BACnet standard. Include all programming, objects, and services required to meet the sequence of control. Provide BACnet communications between the DDC system and native BACnet devices furnished with HVAC equipment and plant equipment including boilers, chillers, and variable frequency drives. Devices provided shall be certified in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing and in accordance with ASHRAE 135.1 Method of Test for Conformance to BACnet. Interface the new DDC system with teh Hurlburt Field EMCS. Coordinate with Base comm.

2.1.1 BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)

ASHRAE 135 building controller that is the main interface for the building control system.New equipment finishing shall be factory provided.

2.1.2 Direct Digital Controllers

Direct digital controllers shall be UL 916 rated.

2.1.2.1 I/O Point Limitation

The total number of I/O hardware points used by a single stand-alone digital controller, including I/O expansion units, shall not exceed 64, except for complex individual equipment or systems. Place I/O expansion units in the same cabinet as the digital controller.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 13


2.1.2.2 Environmental Limits

Controllers shall be suitable for, or placed in protective enclosures suitable for the environment (temperature, humidity, dust, and vibration) where they are located.

2.1.2.3 Stand-Alone Controllers

Provide stand-alone direct digital controllers with internal time clocks. Each piece of equipment shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of any building communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller and serial connected expansion modules. Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method for values normally read over the network. Controllers shall be suitable for, or placed in protective enclosures suitable for the environment (temperature, humidity, dust, vibration, etc.) where they are located.

2.1.2.4 Internal Clock

Provide internal clocks and scheduling for all Direct Digital Controllers. Provide controllers with BTL listed profiles for all BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) and BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) using BACnet time synchronization services. This includes but is not limited to VAV Controllers, Fan Coil controllers, Heat Pump controllers and any terminal controllers. BACnet Application specific controllers (B-ASC) will only be accepted for dedicated small exhaust system control such as restroom and mechanical room exhaust fans. Automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated controller. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving time.

2.1.2.5 Memory

Provide sufficient memory for each controller to support the required control, communication, trends, alarms, and messages. Protect programs residing in memory with EEPROM, flash memory, or by an uninterruptible power source (battery or uninterruptible power supply). The backup power source shall have capacity to maintain the memory during a 72-hour continuous power outage. Rechargeable power sources shall be constantly charged while the controller is operating under normal line power. Batteries shall be replaceable without soldering. Trend and alarm history collected during normal operation shall not be lost during power outages less than 72 hours long.

2.1.2.6 Immunity to Power Fluctuations

Controllers shall operate at 90 percent to 110 percent nominal voltage rating.

2.1.2.7 Transformer

The controller power supply shall be fused or current limiting and rated at 125 percent power consumption.

2.1.2.8 Wiring Terminations

Use screw terminal wiring terminations for all field-installed

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 14


controllers. Provide field-removable modular terminal strip or a termination card connected by a ribbon cable for all controllers other than terminal units.

2.1.2.9 Input and Output Interface

Provide hard-wired input and output interface for all controllers as follows:

a. Protection: Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall cause no controller damage. Input or output point contact with sources up to 24 volts AC or DC for any duration shall cause no controller damage.

b. Binary Inputs: Binary inputs shall have a toggle switch and monitor on and off contacts from a "dry" remote device without external power, and external 5-24 VDC voltage inputs.

c. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input requirements and accumulate pulses at a resolution suitable to the application.

d. Analog Inputs: Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 VDC), current (4-20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals.

e. Binary Outputs: Binary outputs shall have a toggle switch and send a pulsed 24 VDC low-voltage signal for modulation control, or provide a maintained open-closed position for on-off control. For HVAC equipment and plant controllers, provide for manual overrides, either with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights, or with an adjacent operator display and interface. Where appropriate, provide a method to select normally open or normally closed operation.

f. Analog Outputs: Analog outputs shall send modulating 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signals to control output devices.

g. Tri-State Outputs: Tri-State outputs shall provide three-point floating control of terminal unit electronic actuators.

2.1.2.10 Digital Controller BACnet Internetwork

Provide a BACnet internetwork with control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers. Provide intermediate gateways, only when requested by the Government and shown on the contract drawings, to connect existing non-BACnet devices to the BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ASHRAE 135, BACnet. If a controller becomes non-responsive, the remaining controllers shall continue operating and not be affected by the failed controller.

2.1.2.11 Communications Ports

a. Direct-Connect Interface Ports: Provide at least one extra communication port at each local BACnet network for direct connecting a notebook computer or BACnet hand-held terminal so all network BACnet objects and properties may be viewed and edited by the operator.

b. BACnet routers supporting ARCnet shall also be capable of supporting MS/TP.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 15


2.1.2.12 BACnet Gateways

Provide BACnet communication ports, whenever available as a plant equipment OEM standard option, for DDC integration via a single communication cable. Typical BACnet controlled plant equipment includes, but is not limited to, boilers, chillers, and variable frequency motor drives.

Provide gateways to connect BACnet to legacy systems, existing non-BACnet devices, and existing non-BACnet DDC controlled plant equipment, only when specifically requested and approved by the Government, and shown on the Government approved BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic. Provide with each gateway an interoperability schedule Use gateway interoperability schedules shown on design drawings or other project documents, showing each point or event on the legacy side that the BACnet "client" will read, and each parameter that the BACnet network will write to. Describe this interoperability in terms of BACnet services, or Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBS), defined in ASHRAE 135 Annex K. Provide two-year minimum warranty for each gateway, including parts and labor.

The following minimum capabilities are required:

a. Middleware shall be able to read and view all readable object properties listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network to the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

b. Middleware shall be able to write to all writeable object properties listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network from the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

c. Middleware shall provide single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols) translation from the non-BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa.

d. Middleware shall meet the requirements of Data Sharing Read Property (DS-RP-B), Data Sharing Write Property (DS-WP-B), Device Management Dynamic Device Binding-B (DM-DDB-B), and Device Management Communication Control (DM-DCC-B) BIBBs, in accordance with ASHRAE 135.

e. Middleware shall include all hardware, software, software licenses, and configuration tools for operator-to-gateway communications. Provide backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify, download, backup, and restore gateway configuration.

2.1.2.13 Digital Controller Cabinet

Provide each digital controller in a factory fabricated cabinet enclosure. Cabinet shall be locked and alarmed. The alarm shall include both a local audible alarm and a networked alarm (e.g. switch connected to controller DI). Networked alarm events shall be recorded remotely for a period not less than one year.

Cabinets located indoors shall protect against dust and have a minimum NEMA 1 rating, except where indicated otherwise. Cabinets located outdoors or in damp environments shall protect against all outdoor conditions and have a minimum NEMA 4 rating. Outdoor control panels and controllers must be able to withstand extreme ambient conditions, without malfunction or failure, whether or not the controlled equipment is running. If necessary, provide a thermostatically controlled panel heater in freezing locations,

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 16


and an internal ventilating fan in locations exposed to direct sunlight. Cabinets shall have a hinged lockable door and an offset removable metal back plate, except controllers integral with terminal units, like those mounted on VAV boxes. Provide like-keyed locks for all hinged panels provided and a set of two keys at each panel, with one key inserted in the lock.

2.1.2.14 Main Power Switch and Receptacle

Provide each control cabinet with a main external power on/off switch located inside the cabinet. Also provide each cabinet with a separate 120 VAC duplex receptacle.

2.1.3 DDC Software

2.1.3.1 Programming

Provide programming to execute the sequence of operation indicated. Provide all programming and tools to configure and program all controllers. Provide programming routines in simple, easy-to-follow logic with detailed text comments describing what the logic does and how it corresponds to the project's written sequence of operation. All logic programming and control functions shall be closed loop, command and feedback for fault detection and alarming when status != command.

a. Graphic-based programming shall use a library of function blocks made from pre-programmed code designed for BAS control. Function blocks shall be assembled with interconnecting lines, depicting the control sequence in a flowchart. If providing a computer with device programming tools as part of the project, graphic programs shall be viewable in real time showing present values and logical results from each function block.

b. Menu-based programming shall be done by entering parameters, definitions, conditions, requirements, and constraints.

c. For line-by-line and text-based programming, declare variable types (variable types include but are not limited to the following: local, global, real, and integer) at the beginning of the program. Use descriptive comments frequently to describe the programming.

d. If providing a computer with device programming tools as part of the project, provide a means for detecting program errors and testing software strategies with a simulation tool. Simulation may be inherent within the programming software suite, or provided by physical controllers mounted in a NEMA 1 test enclosure. The test enclosure shall contain one dedicated controller of each type provided under this contract, complete with power supply and relevant accessories.

2.1.3.2 Parameter Modification

All writeable object properties, and all other programming parameters needed to comply with the project specification shall be adjustable for devices at any network level, including those accessible with web-browser communication, and regardless of programming methods used to create the applications.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 17


2.1.3.3 Short Cycling Prevention

Provide setpoint differentials and minimum on/off times to prevent equipment short cycling.

2.1.3.4 Equipment Status Delay

Provide an adjustable delay from when equipment is commanded on or off and when the control program looks to the status input for confirmation.

2.1.3.5 Run Time Accumulation

Use the Elapsed Time Property to provide re-settable run time accumulation for each Binary Output Object connected to mechanical loads greater than 1 HP, electrical loads greater than 10 KW, or wherever else specified.

2.1.3.6 Timed Local Override

Provide an adjustable override time for each push of a timed local override button.

2.1.3.7 Time Synchronization

Provide time synchronization, including adjustments for leap years, daylight saving time, and operator time adjustments.

2.1.3.8 Scheduling

Provide operating schedules as indicated, with equipment assigned to groups. Changing the schedule of a group shall change the operating schedule of all equipment in the group. Groups shall be capable of operator creation, modification, and deletion. Provide capability to view and modify schedules in a seven-day week format. Provide capability to enter holiday and override schedules one full year at a time.

2.1.3.9 Object Property Override

Allow writeable object property values to accept overrides to any valid value. Where specified or required for the sequence of control, the Out-Of-Service property of Objects shall be modifiable using BACnet's write property service. When documented, exceptions to these requirement are allowed for life, machine, and process safeties.

2.1.3.10 Alarms and Events

Alarms and events shall be capable of having programmed time delays and high-low limits. When a computer workstation or web server is connected to the BACnet internetwork, alarms/events shall report to the computer, printer, e-mail or cell phone, as defined by an authorized operator. Otherwise alarms/events shall be stored within a device on the BACnet network until connected to a user interface device and retrieved. Provide alarms/events in agreement with the point schedule, sequence of operation, and the BAS Owner. At a minimum, provide programming to initiate alarms/events any time a piece of equipment fails to operate, a control point is outside normal range or condition shown on schedules, communication to a device is lost, a device has failed, or a controller has lost its memory.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 18


2.1.3.11 Trending

Provide BACnet trend services capable of trending all object present values set points, and other parameters indicated for trending on project schedules. Trends may be associated into groups, and a trend report may be set up for each group. Trends are stored within a device on the BACnet network, with operator selectable trend intervals from 10 seconds up to 60 minutes. The minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 100 per variable. When trend memory is full, the most recent data shall overwrite the oldest data.

The operator workstation shall upload trends automatically upon reaching 3/4 of the device buffer limit (via Notification_Threshold property), by operator request, or by time schedule for archiving. Archived and real-time trend data shall be available for viewing numerically and graphically for at the workstation and connected notebook computers.

2.1.3.12 Device Diagnostics

Each controller shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and device fault condition. The DDC system shall recognize and report a non-responsive controller.

2.1.3.13 Device Management

System shall be capable of managing devices remotely to include updating/loading firmware, restarting, and network configuration. These capabilities shall be restricted to authorized roles. The system shall support, either natively or with provided add-on software, remote read/write and management of BBMD tables.

2.1.3.14 Power Loss

Upon restoration of power, the DDC system shall perform an orderly restart and restoration of control.

2.1.4 BACnet Operator Workstation

The workstation shall be capable of accessing all DDC system devices and communicate using the BACnet protocol. The workstation shall be capable of displaying, modifying, creating, archiving, and deleting (as applicable): all points, objects, object properties, programming, alarms, trends, messages, schedules, and reports.

2.1.4.1 BACnet Operator Workstation Hardware

Configure according to system manufacturer's specifications and conforming to BACnet Advanced Operator Workstation (B-AWS) device standards found in ASHRAE 135, Annex L. Install to permit complete monitoring and troubleshooting of the DDC system.

At a minimum the workstation hardware shall include: a desktop personal computer with Microsoft Windows Enterprise or Ultimate 64-bit operating system, processor and RAM exceeding capability and speed required by operating system and application software, hard drive capacity exceeding software and yearly archive requirements, 16X internal DVD+/-R/RW/CD-RW drive with archive creator software, 4 USB 3.0 ports, 10/100/1000 network interface card, 19-inch LCD monitor, internal V.92 modem, sound card with speakers, 101 character keyboard, optical mouse, USB Hub with four USB 3.0

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 19


ports and connecting cable, laser printer with USB port and cable, 3 matching color and black ink cartridges, 120-volt 800 VA uninterruptible power supply with automatic voltage regulation and 4 minimum battery back-up outlets and 2 surge protected outlets, Provide all original licenses, installation media, documentation, and recovery CDs capable of restoring the original configuration. Provide a manufacturer's 3-year next business day on-site warranty with the Government listed as the warranty owner.

2.1.5 BACnet Operator Workstation Software

2.1.5.1 Password Protection

System shall support role based access. At a minimum OS administrator, auditor, DDC operator and user roles must be defined. The system must be capable of enforcing role based access by location (e.g., Bob may alter operating parameters for Building 1 but not Building 2. Building 2 is Alice's responsibility).

Workstation shall be capable of DoD Common Access Card (CAC) login in addition to traditional username and password.

The lowest level only allow viewing graphics. The second level allows viewing graphics and changing space temperature setpoints. The third level allows the previous level's capability, plus changing operating schedules. The fourth level allows access to all functions except passwords. The highest level provides all administrator rights and allows full access to all programming, including setting new passwords and access levels. Provide the BAS Owner with the highest level password access. Provide automatic log out if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected after a user-defined time delay.

2.1.5.2 BACnet Operator Workstation DDC Software

Provide the workstation software with the manufacturer's installation CDs and licenses. Configure the software according to the DDC system manufacturer's specifications, cybersecurity requirements, and in agreement with BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device standards found in ASHRAE 135, Annex L.

The workstation software shall permit complete monitoring, modification, and troubleshooting interface with the DDC system. The operator interface with the software shall be menu-driven with appropriate displays and menu commands to manipulate the DDC system's objects, point data, operating schedules, control routines, system configuration, trends, alarms, messages, graphics, and reports. Trends shall be capable of graphic display in real time, with variables plotted as functions of time. Each alarmed point shall be capable of displaying its alarm history, showing when it went into alarm, if and when it was acknowledged, and when it went out of alarm. The modification of DDC system parameters and object properties shall be accomplished with "fill in the blank" and "point and drag" methods. Modifications shall download to the appropriate controllers at the operator's request.

2.1.5.3 Web-Based User Interface (UI) and Graphics

Provide web-based graphics fully compatible with Internet Explorer 9+, Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome. Web-based user interface shall be browser agnostic and shall not rely on proprietary client side scripting to

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 20


function.

Graphic displays shall have full-screen resolution when viewed on the workstation and notebook computers. Dynamic data on graphics pages shall refresh within 10 seconds using an Internet connection, or 30 seconds using a dial-up modem connection. Web-based user interface shall not rely on additional third-party browser "plug-in" software like Adobe Flash. Java client side applets may be used if appropriately signed. If Java client side runtimes are used they shall not require deprecated or otherwise unsupported Java runtime environments.

The graphics shall show the present value and object name for each of the project's I/O points on at least one graphic page. Arrange point values and names on the graphic displays in their appropriate physical locations with respect to the floor plan or equipment graphic displayed. Graphics shall allow the operator to monitor current status, view zone and equipment summaries, use point-and-click navigation between graphic pages, and edit setpoints and parameters directly from the screens. Items in alarm shall be displayed using a different color or other obvious visual indicator.Provide graphics with the following:

a. Graphic Types: Provide at least one graphic display for each piece of HVAC equipment, building floor, and controlled zone. Indicate dynamic point values, operating statuses, alarm conditions, and control setpoints on each display. Provide summary pages where appropriate.

(1) Building Elevation: For buildings more than one story, provide an elevation view of the building with links to each of the building's floor plans. Simulate the building's architecture and include the building number and floor numbers. If possible, use an actual photograph of the building.

(2) Building Floor Plans: Provide a floor plan graphic for each of the building's floors with dynamic display of space temperature and other important data. If used, indicate and provide links to sub-plan areas. If possible, use the project's electronic drawing files for the graphic backgrounds. Provide clear names for important areas, such as "Main Conference Room." Include room names and numbers where applicable. Include features such as stairwells, elevators, and main entrances. Where applicable, include the mechanical room, HVAC equipment, and control component locations, with corresponding links to the equipment graphics.

(3) Sub-plan Areas: Where a building's floor plan is too large to adequately display on the screen, sub-divide the plan into distinct areas, and provide a separate graphic display for each area. Provide same level of detail requested in building floor plan section above.

(4) HVAC Equipment: Provide a graphic display for each piece of HVAC equipment, such as a fan coil unit, VAV terminal, or air handling unit. Equipment shall be represented by a two or three-dimensional drawing. Where multiple pieces of equipment combine to form a system, such as a central chiller plant or central heating plant, provide one graphic to depict the entire plant. Indicate the equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and control valves in the installed location. Include labels for equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and control valves. Show the direction of air and water flow. Include dynamic display of

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 21


applicable object data with clear names in appropriate locations.

(5) Sequence of Operation: Provide a graphic screen displaying the written out full sequence of operation for each piece of HVAC equipment. Provide a link to the sequence of operation displays on their respective equipment graphics. Include dynamic real-time data within the text for setpoints and variables.

b. Graphic Title: Provide a prominent, descriptive title on each graphic page.

c. Dynamic Update: When the workstation is on-line, all graphic I/O object values shall update with change-of-value services, or by operator selected discrete intervals.

d. Graphic Linking: Provide forward and backward linking between floor plans, sub-plans, and equipment.

e. Graphic Editing: Provide installed software to create, modify, and delete the DDC graphics. Include the ability to store graphic symbols in a symbol directory and import these symbols into the graphics.

f. Dynamic Point Editing: Provide full editing capability for deleting, adding, and modifying dynamic points on the graphics.

2.2 SENSORS AND INPUT HARDWARE

Coordinate sensor types with the BAS Owner to keep them consistent with existing installations.

2.2.1 Field-Installed Temperature Sensors

Where feasible, provide the same sensor type throughout the project. Avoid using transmitters unless absolutely necessary.

2.2.1.1 Thermistors

Precision thermistors may be used in applications below 200 degrees F. Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be 0.36 degree F or less between 32 to 150 degrees F. Stability error of the thermistor over five years shall not exceed 0.25 degrees F cumulative. A/D conversion resolution error shall be kept to 0.1 degrees F. Total error for a thermistor circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degrees F.

2.2.1.2 Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs)

Provide RTD sensors with platinum elements compatible with the digital controllers. Encapsulate sensors in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or copper. Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0.1 percent (1 ohm) of expected ohms (1000 ohms) at 32 degrees F. Temperature sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0.25 degrees F cumulative. Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers without transmitters is preferred. When RTDs are connected directly, lead resistance error shall be less than 0.25 degrees F. The total error for a RTD circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degrees F.

2.2.1.3 Temperature Sensor Details

a. Room Type: Provide the sensing element components within a decorative

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 22


protective cover suitable for surrounding decor. Provide room temperature sensors with timed override button, setpoint adjustment lever, digital temperature display. Provide a communication port or 802.11x wireless support for a portable operator interface like a notebook computer or PDA.

b. Duct Probe Type: Ensure the probe is long enough to properly sense the air stream temperature.

c. Duct Averaging Type: Continuous averaging sensors shall be one foot in length for each 4 square feet of duct cross-sectional area, and a minimum length of 6 feet.

d. Pipe Immersion Type: Provide minimum three-inch immersion. Provide each sensor with a corresponding pipe-mounted sensor well, unless indicated otherwise. Sensor wells shall be stainless steel when used in steel piping, and brass when used in copper piping. Provide the sensor well with a heat-sensitive transfer agent between the sensor and the well interior.

e. Outside Air Type: Provide the sensing element on the building's north side with a protective weather shade that positions the sensor approximately 3 inches off the wall surface, does not inhibit free air flow across the sensing element, and protects the sensor from snow, ice, and rain.

2.2.2 Transmitters

Provide transmitters with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC linear output scaled to the sensed input. Transmitters shall be matched to the respective sensor, factory calibrated, and sealed. Size transmitters for an output near 50 percent of its full-scale range at normal operating conditions. The total transmitter error shall not exceed 0.1 percent at any point across the measured span. Supply voltage shall be 12 to 24 volts AC or DC. Transmitters shall have non-interactive offset and span adjustments. For temperature sensing, transmitter drift shall not exceed 0.03 degrees F a year.

2.2.2.1 Relative Humidity Transmitters

Provide transmitters with an accuracy equal to plus or minus 2 percent from 0 to 90 percent scale, and less than one percent drift per year. Sensing elements shall be the polymer type.

2.2.2.2 Pressure Transmitters

Provide transmitters integral with the pressure transducer.

2.2.3 Current Transducers

Provide current transducers to monitor motor amperage, unless current switches are shown on design drawings or point tables.

2.2.4 Pneumatic to Electric Transducers

Pneumatic to electronic transducers shall convert a 0 to 20 psig signal to a proportional 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC signal (operator scaleable). Supply voltage shall be 24 VDC. Accuracy and linearity shall be 1.0 percent or better.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 23


2.2.5 Air Quality Sensors

Provide power supply for each sensor.

2.2.5.1 CO2 Sensors

Provide photo-acoustic type CO2 sensors with integral transducers and linear output. The devices shall read CO2 concentrations between 0 and 2000 ppm with full scale accuracy of at least plus or minus 100 ppm.

2.2.5.2 Air Quality Sensors

Provide full spectrum air quality sensors using a hot wire element based on the Taguchi principle. The sensor shall monitor a wide range of gaseous volatile organic components common in indoor air contaminants like paint fumes, solvents, cigarette smoke, and vehicle exhaust. The sensor shall automatically compensate for temperature and humidity, have span and calibration potentiometers, operate on 24 VDC power with output of 0-10 VDC, and have a service rating of 32 to 140 degrees F and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity.

2.2.6 Input Switches

2.2.6.1 Timed Local Overrides

Provide buttons or switches to override the DDC occupancy schedule programming for each major building zone during unoccupied periods, and to return HVAC equipment to the occupied mode. This requirement is waived for zones clearly intended for 24 hour continuous operation.

2.2.7 Freeze Protection Thermostats

Provide special purpose thermostats with flexible capillary elements 20 feet minimum length for coil face areas up to 40 square feet. Provide longer elements for larger coils at 1-foot of element for every 4 square feet of coil face area, or provide additional thermostats. Provide switch contacts rated for the respective motor starter's control circuit voltage. Include auxiliary contacts for the switch's status condition. A freezing condition at any 18-inch increment along the sensing element's length shall activate the switch. The thermostat shall be equipped with a manual push-button reset switch so that when tripped, the thermostat requires manual resetting before the HVAC equipment can restart.

2.2.8 Air Flow Measurement Stations

Air flow measurement stations shall have an array of velocity sensing elements and straightening vanes inside a flanged sheet metal casing. The velocity sensing elements shall be the RTD or thermistor type, traversing the ducted air in at least two directions. The air flow pressure drop across the station shall not exceed 0.08 inch water gage at a velocity of 2,000 fpm. The station shall be suitable for air flows up to 5,000 fpm, and a temperature range of 40 to 120 degrees F. The station's measurement accuracy over the range of 125 to 2,500 fpm shall be plus or minus 3 percent of the measured velocity. Station transmitters shall provide a linear, temperature-compensated 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output. The output shall be capable of being accurately converted to a corresponding air flow rate in cubic feet per minute. Transmitters shall be a 2-wire, loop powered device. The output error of the transmitter shall not exceed

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 24


0.5 percent of the measurement.

2.2.9 Energy Metering2.2.9.1 Gas Meters

Provide gas meters with pulse outputs capable of being read by the DDC system.

2.2.9.2 Water Meters

Provide DDC system capable of receiving data from water meters.

2.3 OUTPUT HARDWARE

2.3.1 Control Dampers

Provide factory manufactured galvanized steel dampers whereindicated. Control dampers shall comply with SMACNA 1966 except as modified or supplemented by this specification. Published damper leakage rates and respective pressure drops shall have been verified by tests in compliance with AMCA 500-D requirements.

Provide damper assembly frames constructed of 0.064 inch minimumthickness galvanized steel channels with mitered and welded corners. Damper axles shall be 0.5 inches minimum diameter plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings.

Dampers shall be rated for not less than 2000 fpm air velocity. The pressure drop through each damper when full-open shall not exceed 0.04 inches water gage at 1000 fpm face velocity. Damper assemblies in ductwork subject to above 3-inch water gauge static air pressure shall be constructed to meet SMACNA Seal Class "A" construction requirements.

Provide the damper operating linkages outside of the air stream, including crank arms, connecting rods, and other hardware that transmits motion from the damper actuators to the dampers, shall be adjustable. Additionally, operating linkages shall be designed and constructed to have a 2 to 1 safety factor when loaded with the maximum required damper operating force. Linkages shall be brass, bronze, galvanized steel, or stainless steel.

Provide access doors or panels in hard ceilings and walls for access to all concealed damper operators and damper locking setscrews.

For field-installed control dampers, a single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and no higher than 72 inches. The maximum damper blade width shall be 12 inches. Larger sized dampers shall be built using a combination of sections.

Frames shall be at least 2 inches wide. Flat blades shall have edges folded for rigidity. Blades shall be provided with compressible gasket seals along the full length of the blades to prevent air leakage when closed.

The damper frames shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air leakage. Seals shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.

The leakage rate of each damper when full-closed shall be no morethan 3 cfm per sq. foot of damper face area at

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 25


1.0 inches water gage static pressure.

2.3.2 Control Valves

2.3.2.1 Valve Assembly

Valve bodies shall be designed for 125 psig minimum working pressure or 150 percent of the operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve stems shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Valve leakage ratings shall be 0.01 percent of rated Cv value. Class 125 copper alloy valve bodies and Class 150 steel or stainless steel valves shall meet the requirements of ASME B16.5. Cast iron valve components shall meet the requirements of ASTM A126 Class B or C.

2.3.2.2 Butterfly Valves

Butterfly valves shall be the threaded lug type suitable for dead-end service and for modulation to the fully-closed position, with stainless steel shafts supported by bearings, non-corrosive discs geometrically interlocked with or bolted to the shaft (no pins), and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from minus 20 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. Valves shall have a means of manual operation independent of the actuator.

2.3.2.3 Two-Way Valves

Two-way modulating valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic.

2.3.2.4 Three-Way Valves

Three-way valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic.

2.3.2.5 Valves for Chilled Water

a. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze, or iron. Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded connections. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 to 3 inches shall have flanged connections.

b. Internal valve trim shall be brass or bronze, except that valve stems shall be stainless steel.

c. Unless indicated otherwise, provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design flow rate.

d. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3.2.6 Valves for Hot Water Service

Valves for hot water service below 250 Degrees F:

a. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze, or iron. Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded connections. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 to 3 inches shall have flanged connections.

b. Internal trim (including seats, seat rings, modulation plugs, valve

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 26


stems, and springs) of valves controlling water above 210 degrees F shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze. Valve stems shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Non-metallic parts of hot water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever is higher.

e. Unless indicated otherwise, provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design flow rate.

f. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3.3 Actuators

Provide direct-drive electric actuators for all control applications, except where indicated otherwise. All actuators shall include a feedback loop for detecting actuator faults. The actuator shall report actual position back to the control system. Binary actuators shall provide open/closed status, at a minimum. Modulating actuators and process shall provide position feedback expressed (directly or through span conversion) as percent open/closed. Actuator status shall be derived from actuator position; however, effect may be used in cases where direct feedback is not practical such as VAV coils and dampers.

2.3.3.1 Electric Actuators

Each actuator shall deliver the torque required for continuous uniform motion and shall have internal end switches to limit the travel, or be capable of withstanding continuous stalling without damage. Actuators shall function properly within 85 to 110 percent of rated line voltage. Provide actuators with hardened steel running shafts and gears of steel or copper alloy. Fiber or reinforced nylon gears may be used for torques less than 16 inch-pounds. Provide two-position actuators of single direction, spring return, or reversing type. Provide modulating actuators capable of stopping at any point in the cycle, and starting in either direction from any point. Actuators shall be equipped with a switch for reversing direction, and a button to disengage the clutch to allow manual adjustments. Provide the actuator with a hand crank for manual adjustments, as applicable. Thermal type actuators may only be used on terminal fan coil units, terminal VAV units, convectors, and unit heaters. Spring return actuators shall be provided on all control dampers and all control valves except terminal fan coil units, terminal VAV units, convectors, and unit heaters; unless indicated otherwise. Each actuator shall have distinct markings indicating the full-open and full-closed position, and the points in-between.

2.3.4 Output Switches

2.3.4.1 Control Relays

Field installed and DDC panel relays shall be double pole, double throw, UL listed, with contacts rated for the intended application, indicator light, and dust proof enclosure. The indicator light shall be lit when the coil

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 27


is energized and off when coil is not energized. Relays shall be the socket type, plug into a fixed base, and replaceable without tools or removing wiring. Encapsulated "PAM" type relays may be used for terminal control applications.

2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION

2.4.1 Transformers

Transformers shall conform to UL 506. For control power other than terminal level equipment, provide a fuse or circuit breaker on the secondary side of each transformer.

2.4.2 Surge and Transient Protection

Provide each digital controller with surge and transient power protection. Surge and transient protection shall consist of the following devices, installed externally to the controllers.

2.4.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection

Provide surge suppressors on the incoming power at each direct digital controller or grouped terminal controllers and shall be installed externally to the device or devices being protected. Surge suppressors shall be rated in accordance with UL 1449, have a fault indicating light, and conform to the following:

a. The device shall be a transient voltage surge suppressor, hard-wire type individual equipment protector for 120 VAC/1 phase/2 wire plus ground.

b. The device shall react within 5 nanoseconds and automatically reset.

c. The voltage protection threshold, line to neutral, shall be no more than 211 volts.

d. The device shall have an independent secondary stage equal to or greater than the primary stage joule rating.

e. The primary suppression system components shall be pure silicon avalanche diodes.

f. The secondary suppression system components shall be silicon avalanche diodes or metal oxide varistors.

g. The device shall have an indication light to indicate the protection components are functioning.

h. All system functions of the transient suppression system shall be individually fused and not short circuit the AC power line at any time.

i. The device shall have an EMI/RFI noise filter with a minimum attenuation of 13 dB at 10 kHz to 300 MHz.

j. The device shall comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Class "B" requirements and be tested according to IEEE C62.45.

k. The device shall be capable of operating between minus 20 degrees F and plus 122 degrees F.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 28


2.4.2.2 Telephone and Communication Line Surge Protection

Provide surge and transient protection for DDC controllers and DDC network related devices connected to phone and network communication lines, in accordance with the following:

a. The device shall provide continuous, non-interrupting protection, and shall automatically reset after safely eliminating transient surges.

b. The protection shall react within 5 nanoseconds using only solid-state silicon avalanche technology.

c. The device shall be installed at the distance recommended by its manufacturer.

2.4.2.3 Controller Input/Output Protection

Provide controller inputs and outputs with surge protection via optical isolation, metal oxide varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche devices. Fuses are not permitted for surge protection.

2.4.3 Wiring

Provide complete electrical wiring for the DDC System, including wiring to transformer primaries. Unless indicated otherwise, provide all normally visible or otherwise exposed wiring in conduit. Where conduit is required, control circuit wiring shall not run in the same conduit as power wiring over 100 volts. Circuits operating at more than 100 volts shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Run all circuits over 100 volts in conduit, metallic tubing, covered metal raceways, or armored cable. Use plenum-rated cable for circuits under 100 volts in enclosed spaces. Examples of these spaces include HVAC plenums, within walls, above suspended ceilings, in attics, and within ductwork.

2.4.3.1 Power Wiring

The following requirements are for field-installed wiring:

a. Wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and rated for 300 VAC service.

b. Wiring for 120 V circuits shall be insulated copper 14 AWG minimum and rated for 600 VAC service.

2.4.3.2 Analog Signal Wiring

Field-installed analog signal wiring shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted pair. Each cable shall be 100 percent shielded and have a 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation rated for 300 VAC service. Cables shall have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape.

2.5 FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES

2.5.1 Duct Smoke Detectors

Provide duct smoke detectors in HVAC ducts in accordance with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A, except as indicated otherwise. Provide UL listed or FM approved

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 29


detectors, designed specifically for duct installation.

Furnish detectors under Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM and install under this section. Connect new detectors to the building fire alarm panel.

2.6 INDICATORS

2.6.1 Thermometers

Provide bi-metal type thermometers at locations shown. Thermometers shall have either 9 inch long scales or 3.5 inch diameter dials, with insertion, immersion, or averaging elements. Provide matching thermowells for pipe-mounted installations. Select scale ranges suitable for the intended service, with the normal operating temperature near the scale's midpoint. The thermometer's accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the scale range.

2.6.2 Pressure Gauges for Piping Systems

Provide pipe-mounted pressure gauges at the locations shown. Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100 and have a 4-inch diameter dial and shutoff cock. Provide gauges in steam piping with a pressure snubber pigtail fitting. Select scale ranges suitable for the intended service, with the normal operating pressure near the scale's midpoint. The gauge's accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the scale range.

2.7 VARIABLE FREQUENCY (MOTOR) DRIVES

Provide variable frequency drives (VFDs) as indicated. VFDs shall convert 208 or 480 volt (plus or minus 10 percent), three phase, 60 hertz (plus or minus 2Hz), utility grade power to adjustable voltage/frequency, three phase, AC power for stepless motor control from 5 percent to 105 percent of base speed. VFDs shall be UL listed as delivered to the end user. The VFD shall meet the requirements specified in the most current National Electrical Code. Each VFD shall also meet the following:

a. The VFD shall use sine coded Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) technology. PWM calculations shall be performed by the VFD microprocessor.

b. The VFD shall be capable of automatic control by a remote 4-20 mA signal, by network command, or manually by the VFD control panel.

2.7.1 VFD Quality Assurance

VFDs shall be the manufacturer's current standard production unit with at least 10 identical units successfully operating in the field.

2.7.2 VFD Service Support

a. Warranty: Provide the VFDs with a minimum 24-month full parts and labor warranty. The warranty shall start when the contract's HVAC system is accepted by the Government. Include warranty documentation, dates, and contact information with the VFD on-site service manuals.

b. VFD Service Manuals: Provide the VFDs with all necessary installation,

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 30


operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, service, and repair manuals in English including related factory technical bulletins. Provide the documents factory bound, in sturdy 3-ring binders, or hard bound covers. Provide a title sheet on the outside of each binder indicating the project title, project location, installing contractor, contract number, and the VFD manufacturer, address, and telephone number. Each binder shall include a table of contents and tabbed dividers, with all material neatly organized. The documentation provided shall be specifically applicable to this project, shall be annotated to reflect the actual project conditions, and shall provide a complete and concise depiction of the installed work. Provide a storage cabinet on or near the VFD large enough to hold all of the documentation. Have the cabinet's proposed installation site approved in advance by the Contracting Officer. Prominently label the cabinet "VFD OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS." Clearly label each manual with the wording "MECHANICAL ROOM COPY - DO NOT REMOVE".

c. Technical Support: Provide the VFDs with manufacturer's technical telephone support in English, readily available during normal working hours, and free of charge for the life of the equipment.

d. Initial Start-Up: Provide the VFDs with factory-trained personnel for the on-site start-up of the HVAC equipment and associated VFD. The personnel shall be competent in the complete start-up, operation, and repair of the particular model VFD installed. The factory start-up representative shall perform the factory's complete recommended start-up procedures and check-out tests on the VFD. Include a copy of the start-up test documentation with the VFD on-site service manuals.

e. Provide the VFDs with on-site/hands-on training for the user and maintenance personnel. Provide a capable and qualified instructor with minimum two years field experience with the operation and maintenance of similar VFDs. The training shall occur during normal working hours and last not less than 2 hours. Coordinate the training time with the Contracting Officer and the end user. The VFD service manuals shall be used during the training. The contractor shall ensure the manuals are on-site before the start of training. The training shall cover all operational aspects of the VFD.

2.7.3 VFD Features

VFDs shall have the following features:

a. A local operator control keypad capable of:

(1) Remote/Local operator selection with password access.

(2) Run/Stop and manual speed commands.

(3) All programming functions.

(4) Scrolling through all display functions.

b. Digital display capable of indicating:

(1) VFD status.

(2) Frequency.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 31


(3) Motor RPM.

(4) Phase current.

(5) Fault diagnostics in descriptive text.

(6) All programmed parameters.

c. Standard PI loop controller with input terminal for controlled variable and parameter settings.

d. User interface terminals for remote control of VFD speed, speed feedback, and an isolated form C SPDT relay, which energizes on a drive fault condition.

e. An isolated form C SPDT auxiliary relay which energizes on a run command.

f. A metal NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors, NEMA 4 with heater for outdoors.

g. An adjustable carrier frequency with 16 KHz minimum upper limit.

h. A built in or external line reactor with 3 percent minimum impedance to protect the VFDs DC buss capacitors and rectifier section diodes.

2.7.4 Programmable Parameters

VFDs shall include the following operator programmable parameters:

a. Upper and lower limit frequency.

b. Acceleration and Deceleration rate.

c. Variable torque volts per Hertz curve.

d. Starting voltage level.

e. Starting frequency level.

f. Display speed scaling.

g. Enable/disable auto-restart feature.

h. Enable/disable soft stall feature.

i. Motor overload level.

j. Motor stall level.

k. Jump frequency and hysteresis band.

l. PWM carrier frequency.

2.7.5 Protective Features

VFDs shall have the following protective features:

a. An electronic adjustable inverse time current limit with consideration for additional heating of the motor at frequencies below 45Hz, for the

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 32


protection of the motor.

b. An electronic adjustable soft stall feature, allowing the VFD to lower the frequency to a point where the motor will not exceed the full-load amperage when an overload condition exists at the requested frequency. The VFD will automatically return to the requested frequency when load conditions permit.

c. A separate electronic stall at 110 percent VFD rated current, and a separate hardware trip at 190 percent current.

d. Ground fault protection that protects the output cables and motor from grounds during both starting and continuous running conditions.

e. The ability to restart after the following faults:

(1) Overcurrent (drive or motor).

(2) Power outage.

(3) Phase loss.

(4) Over voltage/Under voltage.

f. The ability shut down if inadvertently started into a rotating load without damaging the VFD or the motor.

g. The ability to keep a log of a minimum of four previous fault conditions, indicating the fault type and time of occurrence in descriptive text.

h. The ability to sustain 110 percent rated current for 60 seconds

i. The ability to shutdown safely or protect against and record the following fault conditions:

(1) Over current (and an indication if the over current was during acceleration, deceleration, or running).

(2) Over current internal to the drive.

(3) Motor overload at start-up.

(4) Over voltage from utility power.

(5) Motor running overload.

(6) Over voltage during deceleration.

(7) VFD over heat.

(8) Load end ground fault.

(9) Abnormal parameters or data in VFD EEPROM.

2.7.6 Minimum Operating Conditions

VFDs shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following service conditions:

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 33


a. Ambient Temperature Range, 0 to 120 degrees F.

b. Non-condensing relative humidity to 90 percent.

2.7.7 Additional Features

Provide VFDs with the following additional features:

a. BACnet communication interface port

b. RFI/EMI filters

c. Manual bypass circuit and switch integral to the drive to allow drive bypass and operation at 100 percent speed. Motor overload and short circuit protective features shall remain in use during the bypass mode.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Perform the installation under the supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the installation of DDC systems.

3.1.1 BACnet Naming and Addressing

Coordinate with the BAS Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for BACnet networks and devices.

a. MAC Address

Every BACnet device shall have an assigned and documented MAC Address unique to its network. For Ethernet networks, document the MAC Address assigned at its creation. For ARCNET or MS/TP, assign from 01 to 64.

b. Network Numbering

Assign unique numbers to each new network installed on the BACnet internetwork. Provide ability for changing the network number; either by device switches, network computer, or field operator interface. The BACnet internetwork (all possible connected networks) can contain up to 65,534 possible unique networks.

c. Device Object Identifier Property Number

Assign unique Device "Object_Identifier" property numbers or device instances for each device on the BACnet internetwork. Provide for future modification of the device instance number; either by device switches, network computer, or field interface. BACnet allows up to 4,194,302 possible unique devices per internetwork.

d. Device Object Name Property Text

The Device Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. Assign unique Device "Object_Name" property names with plain-English descriptive names for each deviceFor example, the Device Object Name that for the device controlling the chiller plant at Building 3408 would be:

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 34


Device Object_Name = CW System B3408

A Device Object Name for a VAV box controller might be:

Device Object_Name = VAV BOX25

e. Object Name Property Text (Other than Device Objects)

The Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. Assign Object Name properties with plain-English names descriptive of the application using camelCase. Abbreviations, while necessary, shall be standard throughout the control environment and unique (i.e. Don't use SA for supply air temperature everywhere there is air blowing. Use it for FAN supply air temperature, and use a different abbreviation for VAV supply air temperature). Examples include "Zone 1 Temperature" and "Fan Start/Stop".

f. Object Identifier Property Number (Other than Device Objects)

Assign Object Identifier property numbers according to design drawings or tables if provided. If not provided, Object Identifier property numbers may be assigned at the Contractor's discretion but must be approved by the Government. In this case they must be documented and unique for like object types within the device.

3.1.2 Minimum BACnet Object Requirements

a. Use of Standard BACnet Objects

For the following points and parameters, use standard BACnet objects, where all relevant object properties can be read using BACnet's Read Property Service, and all relevant object properties can be modified using BACnet's Write Property Service:all device physical inputs and outputs, all set points, all PID tuning parameters, all calculated pressures, flow rates, and consumption values, all alarms, all trends, all schedules, and all equipment and lighting circuit operating status.

b. BACnet Object Description Property

The Object Description property shall support 32 minimum printable characters. For each object, complete the description property field using a brief, narrative, plain English description specific to the object and project application. For example: "HW Pump 1 Proof." Document compliance, length restrictions, and whether the description is writeable in the device PICS.

c. Analog Input, Output, and Value Objects

Support and provide Description and Device_Type text strings matching signal type and engineering units shown on the points list.

d. Binary Input, Output, and Value Objects

Support and provide Inactive_Text and Active_Text property descriptions matching conditions shown on the points list.

e. Calendar Object

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 35


For devices with scheduling capability, provide at least one Calendar Object with ten-entry capacity. All operators may view Calendar Objects; authorized operators may make modifications from a workstation. Enable the writeable Date List property and support all calendar entry data types.

f. Schedule Object

Use Schedule Objects for all building system scheduling. All operators may view schedule entries; authorized operators may modify schedules from a workstation.

g. Loop Object or Equal

Use Loop Objects or equivalent BACnet objects in each applicable field device for PID control. Regardless of program method or object used, allow authorized operators to adjust the Update Interval, Setpoint, Proportional Constant, Integral Constant, and Derivative Constant using BACnet read/write services.

3.1.3 Minimum BACnet Service Requirements

a. Command Priorities

Use commandable BACnet objects to control machinery and systems, providing the priority levels listed below. If the sequence of operation requires a different priority, obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.

Priority Level Application

1 Manual-Life Safety

2 Automatic-Life Safety

3 (User Defined)

4 (User Defined)

5 Critical Equipment Control

6 Minimum On/Off

7 (User Defined)

8 Manual Operator

9 (User Defined)

10 (User Defined)

11 Load Shedding

12 (User Defined)

13 (User Defined)

14 (User Defined)

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 36


Priority Level Application

15 (User Defined)

16 (User Defined)

b. Alarming

(1) Alarm Priorities - Coordinate alarm and event notification with the BAS Owner.

(2) Notification Class - Enable writeable Priority, Ack Required, and Recipient List properties of Notification Class objects.

(3) Event Notification Message Texts - Use condition specific narrative text and numerical references for alarm and event notification.

c. Updating Displayed Property Values

Allow workstations to display property values at discrete polled intervals, or based on receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services, and polled intervals shall be adjustable at the operator workstation.

3.1.4 Local Area Networks

Obtain Government approval before connecting new networks with existing networks. Network numbers and device instance numbers shall remain unique when joining networks. Do not change existing network addressing without Government approval. See also "BACnet Naming and Addressing".

3.1.5 BACnet Routers and Protocol Gateways

Provide the quantity of BACnet routers necessary for communications shown on the BACnet Communication Architecture schematic. Provide BACnet routers with BACnet Broadcast Message Device (BBMD) capability on each BACnet internetwork communicating across an IP network. Configure BBMD tables to enable unicast forwarding of broadcast messaging across Layer-3 IP subnets.

3.1.6 Wiring Criteria

a. Run circuits operating at more than 100 volts in rigid or flexible conduit, metallic tubing, covered metal raceways, or armored cable.

b. Do not run binary control circuit wiring in the same conduit as power wiring over 100 volts. Where analog signal wiring requires conduit, do not run in the same conduit with AC power circuits or control circuits operating at more than 100 volts.

c. Provide circuit and wiring protection required by NFPA 70.

d. Run all wiring located inside mechanical rooms in conduit.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 37


e. Do not bury aluminum-sheathed cable or aluminum conduit in concrete.

f. Input/output identification: Permanently label each field-installed wire, cable, and pneumatic tube at each end with descriptive text using a commercial wire marking system that fully encircles the wire, cable, or tube. Locate the markers within 2 inches of each termination. Match the names and I/O number to the project's point list. Similarly label all power wiring serving control devices, including the word "power" in the label. Number each pneumatic tube every six feet. Label all terminal blocks with alpha/numeric labels. All wiring and the wiring methods shall be in accordance with UL 508A.

g. For controller power, provide new 120 VAC circuits, with ground. Provide each circuit with a dedicated breaker, and run wiring in its own conduit, separate from any control wiring. Connect the controller's ground wire to the electrical panel ground; conduit grounds are not acceptable.

h. Surge Protection: Install surge protection according to manufacturer's instructions. Multiple controllers fed from a common power supply may be protected by a common surge protector, properly sized for the total connected devices.

i. Grounding: Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Conduit grounding is not acceptable; all grounding shall have a direct path to the building earth ground. Ground sensor drain wire shields at the controller end.

j. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all associated ground loop problems.

k. Run wiring in panel enclosures in covered wire track.

3.1.7 Accessibility

Install all equipment so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install digital controllers, data ports, and concealed actuators, valves, dampers, and like equipment in locations freely accessible through access doors.

3.1.8 Digital Controllers

a. Install as stand alone control devices (see definitions).

b. Locate control cabinets at the locations shown on the drawings. If not shown on the drawings, install in the most accessible space, close to the controlled equipment.

3.1.9 Hand-Off-Auto Switches

Wire safety controls such as smoke detectors and freeze protection thermostats to protect the equipment during both hand and auto operation.

3.1.10 Temperature Sensors

Install temperature sensors in locations that are accessible and provide a good representation of sensed media. Installations in dead spaces are not

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 38


acceptable. Calibrate sensors according to manufacturer's instructions. Do not use sensors designed for one application in a different application.

3.1.10.1 Room Temperature Sensors

Mount the sensors on interior walls to sense the average room temperature at the locations indicated. Avoid locations near heat sources such as copy machines or locations by supply air outlet drafts. Mount the center of the sensor 54 inches above the floor to meet ADA requirements.

3.1.10.2 Duct Temperature Sensors

a. Probe Type: Provide a gasket between the sensor housing and the duct wall. Seal the duct penetration air tight. Seal the duct insulation penetration vapor tight.

b. Averaging Type (and coil freeze protection thermostats): Weave the capillary tube sensing element in a serpentine fashion perpendicular to the flow, across the duct or air handler cross-section, using durable non-metal supports. Prevent contact between the capillary and the duct or air handler internals. Provide a duct access door at the sensor location. The access door shall be hinged on the side, factory insulated, have cam type locks, and be as large as the duct will permit, maximum 18 by 18 inches. For sensors inside air handlers, the sensors shall be fully accessible through the air handler's access doors without removing any of the air handler's internals.

3.1.10.3 Immersion Temperature Sensors

Provide thermowells for sensors measuring piping, tank, or pressure vessel temperatures. Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. Do not install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in piping at elbows to sense flow across entire area of well. Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of pipe area. Increase piping size as required to avoid restriction. Provide thermal conductivity material within the well to fully coat the inserted sensor.

3.1.10.4 Outside Air Temperature Sensors

Provide outside air temperature sensors in weatherproof enclosures on the north side of the building, away from exhaust hoods and other areas that may affect the reading. Provide a shield to shade the sensor from direct sunlight.

3.1.11 Energy Meters

Locate energy meters as indicated. Connect each meter output to the DDC system, to measure both instantaneous and accumulated energy usage.

3.1.12 Damper Actuators

Where possible, mount actuators outside the air stream in accessible areas.

3.1.13 Thermometers and Gages

Mount devices to allow reading while standing on the floor or ground, as applicable.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 39


3.1.14 Pressure Sensors

Locate pressure sensors as indicated.

3.1.15 Component Identification Labeling

Using an electronic hand-held label maker with white tape and bold black block lettering, provide an identification label on the exterior of each new control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Also provide labels on the exterior of each new control actuator indicating the (full) open and (full) closed positions. For labels located outdoors, use exterior grade label tape, and provide labels on both the inside and outside of the panel door or device cover. Acceptable alternatives are white plastic labels with engraved bold black block lettering permanently attached to the control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Have the labels and wording approved by the BAS Owner prior to installation.

3.1.16 Network and Telephone Communication Lines

When telephone lines or network connections by the Government are required, provide the Contracting Officer at least 60 days advance notice of need.

3.2 TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT

The controls contractor shall coordinate with and provide on-site support to the test and balance (TAB) personnel specified under Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING. This support shall include:

a. On-site operation and manipulation of control systems during the testing and balancing.

b. Control setpoint adjustments for balancing all relevant mechanical systems, including VAV boxes.

c. Tuning control loops with setpoints and adjustments determined by TAB personnel.

3.3 CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS

Provide four electronic and printed copies of a Controls System Operators Manual. The manual shall be specific to the project, written to actual project conditions, and provide a complete and concise depiction of the installed work. Provide information in detail to clearly explain all operation requirements for the control system.

Provide with each manual: CDs of the project's control system drawings, control programs, data bases, graphics, and all items listed below. Include gateway back-up data and configuration tools where applicable. Provide CDs in jewel case with printed and dated project-specific labels on both the CD and the case. For text and drawings, use Adobe Acrobat or MS Office file types. When approved by the Government, AutoCAD and Visio files are allowed. Give files descriptive English names and organize in folders.

Provide printed manuals in sturdy 3-ring binders with a title sheet on the outside of each binder indicating the project title, project location, contract number, and the controls contractor name, address, and telephone number. Each binder shall include a table of contents and tabbed dividers, with all material neatly organized. Manuals shall include the following:

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 40


a. A copy of the as-built control system (shop) drawings set, with all items specified under the paragraph SUBMITTALS. Indicate all field changes and modifications.

b. A copy of the project's mechanical design drawings, including any official modifications and revisions.

c. A copy of the project's approved Product Data submittals provided under the paragraph SUBMITTALS.

d. A copy of the project's approved Performance Verification Testing Plan and Report.

e. A copy of the project's approved final TAB Report.

f. Printouts of all control system programs, including controller setup pages if used. Include plain-English narratives of application programs, flowcharts, and source code.

g. Printouts of all physical input and output object properties, including tuning values, alarm limits, calibration factors, and set points.

h. A table entitled "AC Power Table" listing the electrical power source for each controller. Include the building electrical panel number, panel location, and circuit breaker number.

i. The DDC manufacturer's hardware and software manuals in both print and CD format with printed project-specific labels. Include installation and technical manuals for all controller hardware, operator manuals for all controllers, programming manuals for all controllers, operator manuals for all workstation software, installation and technical manuals for the workstation and notebook, and programming manuals for the workstation and notebook software.

j. A list of qualified control system service organizations for the work provided under this contract. Include their addresses and telephone numbers.

k. A written statement entitled "Technical Support" stating the control system manufacturer or authorized representative will provide toll-free telephone technical support at no additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from project acceptance, will be furnished by experienced service technicians, and will be available during normal weekday working hours. Include the toll-free technical support telephone number.

l. A written statement entitled "Software Upgrades" stating software and firmware patches and updates will be provided upon request at no additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from contract acceptance. Include a table of all DDC system software and firmware provided under this contract, listing the original release dates, version numbers, part numbers, and serial numbers.

3.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING (PVT)

3.4.1 General

The PVT shall demonstrate compliance of the control system work with the

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 41


contract requirements. The PVT shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed and approved by the Government. If the project is phased, provide separate testing for each phase. A Pre-PVT meeting to review the Pre-PVT Checklist is required to coordinate all aspects of the PVT and shall include the Contractor's QA representative, the Contractor's PVT administrator, the Contracting Officer's representative.

3.4.2 Performance Verification Testing Plan

Submit a detailed PVT Plan of the proposed testing for Government approval. Develop the PVT Plan specifically for the control system in this contract. The PVT Plan shall be a clear list of test items arranged in a logical sequence. Include the purpose of each test, intended test procedure, test setup and test conditions, the expected response, and the pass/fail criteria for every component tested.

The plan shall clearly describe how each item is tested, indicate where assisting personnel are required (like the mechanical contractor), and include what procedures are used to simulate conditions. Include a separate column for each checked item and extra space for comments. Where sequences of operations are checked, insert each corresponding routine from the project’s sequence of operation. For each test area, include signature and date lines for the Contractor's PVT administrator, the Contractor's QA representative, the Contracting Officer's representative, and the BAS Owner to acknowledge successful completion.

3.4.3 PVT Sample Size

Test all central plant equipment and primary air handling unit controllers unless otherwise directed. Twenty percent sample testing is allowed for identical controllers typical of terminal control like VAV boxes and fan coil units. The Government may require testing of like controllers beyond a statistical sample if sample controllers require retesting or do not have consistent results.

The Government may witness all testing, or random samples of PVT items. When only random samples are witnessed, the Government may choose which ones.

3.4.4 Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist

Submit the following as a list with items checked off once verified. Provide a detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified.

a. Verify all required mechanical installation work is successfully completed, and all HVAC equipment is working correctly (or will be by the time the PVT is conducted).

b. Verify HVAC motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.

c. Verify all required control system components, wiring, and accessories are installed.

d. Verify the installed control system architecture matches approved drawings.

e. Verify all control circuits operate at the proper voltage and are free from grounds or faults.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 42


f. Verify all required surge protection is installed.

g. Verify the A/C Power Table specified in the paragraph CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS is accurate.

h. Verify all DDC network communications function properly, including uploading and downloading programming changes.

i. Using the BACnet protocol analyzer (if provided or required in this specification), verify communications are error free.

j. Verify each digital controller’s programming is backed up.

k. Verify all wiring, components, and panels are properly labeled.

l. Verify all required points are programmed into devices.

m. Verify all TAB work affecting controls is complete.

n. Verify all valve and actuator zero and span adjustments are set properly.

o. Verify all sensor readings are accurate and calibrated.

p. Verify each control valve and actuator goes to normal position upon loss of power.

q. Verify all control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation. View trend data where applicable.

r. Verify each controller works properly in stand-alone mode.

s. Verify all safety controls and devices function properly, including freeze protection and interfaces with building fire alarm systems.

t. Verify all electrical interlocks work properly.

u. Verify all workstations, notebooks and maintenance personnel interface tools are delivered, all system and database software is installed, and graphic pages are created for each workstation and notebook.

v. Verify the as-built (shop) control drawings are completed.

3.4.5 Conducting Performance Verification Testing

a. Conduct Government-witnessed PVT after approval of the PVT Plan and the completed Pre-PVT Checklist. Notify the Contracting Officer of the planned PVT at least 15 days prior to testing. Provide an estimated time table required to perform the testing. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all aspects of the PVT. Ensure that testing personnel are regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems. Using the project's as-built control system (shop) drawings, the project's mechanical design drawings, the approved Pre-PVT Checklist, and the approved PVT Plan, conduct the PVT.

b. During testing, identify any items that do not meet the contract requirements and if time permits, conduct immediate repairs and

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 43


re-test. Otherwise, deficiencies shall be investigated, corrected, and re-tested later. Document each deficiency and corrective action taken.

c. If re-testing is required, follow the procedures for the initial PVT. The Government may require re-testing of any control system components affected by the original failed test.

3.4.6 Controller Capability and Labeling

Test the following for each controller:

a. Memory: Demonstrate that programmed data, parameters, and trend/ alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during power failure.

b. Direct Connect Interface: Demonstrate the ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a portable electronic device like a notebook computer or PDA. Show that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as specified in the manufacturer's technical literature.

c. Stand Alone Ability: Demonstrate controllers provide stable and reliable stand-alone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over the network.

d. Wiring and AC Power: Demonstrate the ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source using the AC Power Table. Demonstrate the ability to match wiring labels easily with the control drawings. Demonstrate the ability to locate a controller's location using the BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic and floor plans.

e. Nameplates and Tags: Show the nameplates and tags are accurate and permanently attached to control panel doors, devices, sensors, and actuators.

3.4.7 Workstation and Software Operation

For every user workstation or notebook provided:

a. Show points lists agree with naming conventions.

b. Show that graphics are complete.

c. Show the UPS operates as specified.

3.4.8 BACnet Communications and Interoperability Areas

Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. If available or required in this specification, use a BACnet protocol analyzer to assist with identifying devices, viewing network traffic, and verifying interoperability. These requirements must be met even if there is only one manufacturer of equipment installed. Testing includes the following:

a. Data Presentation: On each BACnet Operator Workstation, demonstrate graphic display capabilities.

b. Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate the ability to read and display any used readable object property of any device on the network.

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 44


c. Setpoint and Parameter Modifications: Show the ability to modify all setpoints and tuning parameters in the sequence of control or listed on project schedules. Modifications are made with BACnet messages and write services initiated by an operator using workstation graphics, or by completing a field in a menu with instructional text.

d. Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Show all BACnet devices are installed and configured to perform BACnet read/write services directly (without the need for operator or workstation intervention), to implement the project sequence of operation, and to share global data.

e. Alarm and Event Management: Show that alarms/events are installed and prioritized according to the BAS Owner. Demonstrate time delays and other logic is set up to avoid nuisance tripping, e.g., no status alarms during unoccupied times or high supply air during cold morning start-up. Show that operators with sufficient privilege can read and write alarm/event parameters for all standard BACnet event types. Show that operators with sufficient privilege can change routing (BACnet notification classes) for each alarm/event including the destination, priority, day of week, time of day, and the type of transition involved (types of transition include but are not limited to the following: TO-OFF NORMAL and TO-NORMAL).

f. Schedule Lists: Show that schedules are configured for start/stop, mode change, occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in the sequence of operations.

g. Schedule Display and Modification: Show the ability to display any schedule with start and stop times for the calendar year. Show that all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.

h. Archival Storage of Data: Show that data archiving is handled by the operator workstation/server, and local trend archiving and display is accomplished with BACnet Trend Log objects.

i. Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Show that an operator with sufficient privilege can change the logged data points, sampling rate, and trend duration.

j. Device and Network Management: Show the following capabilities:

(1) Display of Device Status Information

(2) Display of BACnet Object Information

(3) Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data

(4) Time Synchronization

(5) Remote Device Reinitialization

(6) Backup and Restore Device Programming and Master Database(s)

(7) Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 45


3.4.9 Execution of Sequence of Operation

Demonstrate that the HVAC system operates properly through the complete sequence of operation. Use read/write property services to globally read and modify parameters over the internetwork.

3.4.10 Control Loop Stability and Accuracy

For all control loops tested, give the Government trend graphs of the control variable over time, demonstrating that the control loop responds to a 20 percent sudden change of the control variable set point without excessive overshoot and undershoot. If the process does not allow a 20 percent set point change, use the largest change possible. Show that once the new set point is reached, it is stable and maintained. Control loop trend data shall be in real-time with the time between data points 30 seconds or less.

3.4.11 Performance Verification Testing Report

Upon successful completion of the PVT, submit a PVT Report to the Government and prior to the Government taking use and possession of the facility. Do not submit the report until all problems are corrected and successfully re-tested. The report shall include the annotated PVT Plan used during the PVT. Where problems were identified, explain each problem and the corrective action taken. Include a written certification that the installation and testing of the control system is complete and meets all of the contract's requirements.

3.5 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Provide a qualified instructor (or instructors) with two years minimum field experience with the installation and programming of similar BACnet DDC systems. Orient training to the specific systems installed. Coordinate training times and location with the Contracting Officer and BAS Owner after receiving approval of the training course documentation. Training shall take place at the job site or a nearby Government-furnished location. A training day shall occur during normal working hours, last no longer than 8 hours and include a one-hour break for lunch and two additional 15-minute breaks. The project's approved Controls System Operators Manual shall be used as the training text. The Contractor shall ensure the manuals are submitted, approved, and available to hand out to the trainees before the start of training.

3.5.1 Training Documentation

Submit training documentation for review 30 days minimum before training. Documentation shall include an agenda for each training day, objectives, a synopses of each lesson, and the instructor's background and qualifications. The training documentation can be submitted at the same time as the project's Controls System Operators Manual.

3.5.2 Phase I Training - Fundamentals

The Phase I training session shall last two consecutive days and be conducted in a classroom environment with complete audio-visual aids provided by the contractor. Provide each trainee a printed 8.5 by 11 inch hard-copy of all visual aids used. Upon completion of the Phase I Training, each trainee should fully understand the project's DDC system fundamentals. The training session shall include the following:

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 46


a. BACnet fundamentals (objects, services, addressing) and how/where they are used on this project

b. This project's list of control system components

c. This project's list of points and objects

d. This project's device and network communication architecture

e. This project's sequences of control, and:

f. Alarm capabilities

g. Trending capabilities

h. Troubleshooting communication errors

i. Troubleshooting hardware errors

3.5.3 Phase II Training - Operation

Provide Phase II Training shortly after completing Phase I Training. The Phase II training session shall last one day and be conducted at the DDC system workstation, at a notebook computer connected to the DDC system in the field, and at other site locations as necessary. Upon completion of the Phase II Training, each trainee should fully understand the project's DDC system operation. The training session shall include the following:

a. A walk-through tour of the mechanical system and the installed DDC components (components include but are not limited to the following: controllers, valves, dampers, surge protection, switches, thermostats, and sensors)

b. A discussion of the components and functions at each DDC panel

c. Logging-in and navigating at each operator interface type

d. Using each operator interface to find, read, and write to specific controllers and objects

e. Modifying and downloading control program changes

f. Modifying setpoints

g. Creating, editing, and viewing trends

h. Creating, editing, and viewing alarms

i. Creating, editing, and viewing operating schedules and schedule objects

j. Backing-up and restoring programming and data bases

k. Modifying graphic text, backgrounds, dynamic data displays, and links to other graphics

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 47


l. Creating new graphics and adding new dynamic data displays and links

m. Alarm and Event management

n. Adding and removing network devices


SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 48


SECTION 23 52 00

HEATING BOILERS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

AMCA 801 (2001; R 2008) Industrial Process/Power Generation Fans: Specification Guidelines




ASME B16.20 (2012) Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges - Ring-Joint, Spiral Wound, and Jacketed



ASME BPVC SEC IV (2010) BPVC Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers


ASME CSD-1 (2016) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers


ASTM A653/A653M (2015; E 2016) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM C155 (1997; R 2013) Standard Specification for Insulating Firebrick



ASTM C27 (1998; R 2008) Fireclay and High-Alumina Refractory Brick

ASTM C34 (2013) Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile

ASTM C401 (2012) Alumina and Alumina-Silicate Castable Refractories

ASTM D1784 (2011) Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM F1097 (1991; R 2012) Mortar, Refractory (High-Temperature, Air-Setting)

HYDRONICS INSTITUTE DIVISION OF AHRI (HYI)

HYI-005 (2008) I=B=R Ratings for Boilers, Baseboard Radiation and Finned Tube (Commercial)






NFPA 54 (2015) National Fuel Gas Code


UL 1738 (2010; Reprint Nov 2014) Venting Systems for Gas-Burning Appliances, Categories II, III and IV

UL 795 (2011; Reprint Nov 2013) Standard for Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment

UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE (2012) Flammable and Combustible Liquids and Gases Equipment Directory

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with



Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Materials and EquipmentSpare PartsHeating System TestsFuel System Tests

WeldingQualificationsField InstructionsTests

SD-06 Test Reports

Heating System TestsFuel System Tests

SD-07 Certificates

Energy Star


Operation and Maintenance Instructions


Energy Efficient Equipment for Boilers; SIndoor Air Quality During Construction; S


Submit a copy of qualified welding procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of welding operations. Boilers and piping shall be welded and brazed in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practical. The welder or welding operator shall apply the personally assigned symbol near each weld made as a permanent record. Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 05 23.16 STRUCTURAL WELDING.


Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment



specified, after approval of the detail drawings and no later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. Submit Detail Drawings consisting of equipment layout including installation details and electrical connection diagrams; combustion and safety control diagrams; ductwork layout showing the location of supports and hangers, typical hanger details, gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and static pressure and seal classifications; and piping layout showing the location of guides and anchors, the load imposed on each support or anchor (not required for radiant floor tubing), and typical support details. Include on the drawings any information required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit and to show equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance. Include in the data a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 and 3 years of service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


For products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by performance criteria, provide and document the energy efficient equipment for boilers.

Provide boilers meeting the efficiency requirements as stated within this section and provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. Submit manufacturer's catalog data included with the detail drawings for the following:

a. Data showing model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Data submitted shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's written installation instructions and manufacturer's recommendations for operation and maintenance clearances for the following:

(1) Boilers

(4) Combustion Control Equipment(6) Fittings and Accessories

2.2.2 Asbestos Prohibition

Asbestos and asbestos-containing products will not be allowed.



2.2.3 Nameplates

Secure a plate to each major component of equipment containing the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number. Also, display an ENERGY STAR labels as applicable. Each pressure vessel shall have an approved ASME stamp.

2.2.4 Equipment Guards

Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with OSHA requirements. High temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type specified. Catwalks, operating platforms, ladders, and guardrails shall be provided where shown and shall be constructed in accordance with Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

2.3 BOILERS

Each boiler shall have the output capacity in British thermal units per hour (Btuh) as indicated when fired with the specified fuels. The boiler shall be furnished complete with the gas burning equipment, boiler fittings and trim, automatic controls, forced draft fan, electrical wiring, insulation, piping connections, and protective jacket. The boiler shall be completely assembled and tested at the manufacturer's plant. Boiler auxiliaries including fans, motors, drives, and similar equipment shall be provided with at least 10 percent excess capacity to allow for field variations in settings and to compensate for any unforeseen increases in pressure losses in appurtenant piping and ductwork. However, the boiler safety devices shall not be sized for a 10 percent excess capacity. The boiler and its accessories shall be designed and installed to permit ready accessibility for operation, maintenance, and service. Boilers shall be designed, constructed, and equipped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV. Each boiler shall be of the condensing type and designed for water service as specified herein. The boiler capacity shall be based on the ratings shown in HYI-005 or as certified by the American Boiler Manufacturers Association, or American Gas Association.

2.3.1 Condensing Boiler

Each boiler shall be a self-contained packaged type, complete with accessories, mounted on a structural steel base or a steel base which is integral to the boiler shell. Each boiler shall conform to the commercial design used by the manufacturer and shall permit free thermal expansion without placing undue stress on any part of the boiler. Each boiler which experiences the formation of condensate within the flue gas shall be specifically designed for condensing application. Each boiler shall withstand the corrosive effects of condensate for each part which may be in contact with the condensate at all possible operating conditions. Each boiler shall be provided with a separate air intake, exhaust, and condensate drain. Each boiler shall be designed to withstand the water temperature differentials anticipated at the required operating conditions without experiencing any damage due to thermal shock.

2.3.2 Modular Configuration

Modular boilers shall be of the condensing type. Modular boilers shall have the capability of independent operation. Upon failure of any module, the



remaining modules shall be capable of operating at their designed capacity. The size of the individual modules shall be as indicated.

2.3.3 Hot Water Heating Boilers

The hot water heating boiler shall be capable of operating at the specified maximum continuous capacity without damage or deterioration to the boiler, its setting, firing equipment, or auxiliaries. The rated capacity shall be the capacity at which the boiler will operate continuously while maintaining at least the specified minimum efficiency. The boiler design conditions shall be as scheduled.

2.4 FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT

Boiler shall be designed to burn gas. Each boiler shall comply with Federal, state, and local emission regulations.

2.4.1 Burners

2.4.1.1 Gas Fired Burners and Controls

Burners shall be UL approved mechanical draft burners with all air necessary for combustion supplied by a blower where the operation is coordinated with the burner. Burner shall be provided complete with fuel supply system in conformance with the following safety codes or standards:

a. Gas-fired units with inputs greater than 400,000 Btuh per combustion chamber shall conform to UL 795.

2.4.2 Draft Fans

Fans conforming to AMCA 801 forced-draft and induced-draft shall be furnished as an integral part of boiler design. Fans shall be centrifugal with backward-curved blades,radial-tip blades, or axial flow type. Each fan shall be sized for output volume and static pressure rating sufficient for pressure losses, excess air requirements at the burner, leakages, temperature, and elevation corrections for worst ambient conditions, all at full combustion to meet net-rated output at normal firing conditions, plus an overall excess air volume of 10 percent against a 20 percent static overpressure. Noise levels for fans shall not exceed 85 decibels in any octave band at a 3 foot station. Forced draft fan bearings shall be air cooled.

2.4.2.1 Draft Fan Control

Forced-draft centrifugal fans shall have inlet vane controls or shall have variable speed control where indicated. Inlet vanes shall be suitable for use with combustion control equipment. Axial propeller fans shall have variable propeller pitch control.

2.4.2.2 Draft Fan Drives

Fans shall be driven by electric motors. Electric motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled. Motor starter shall be magnetic across-the-line type with general purpose enclosure and shall be furnished with four auxiliary interlock contacts.



2.4.3 Draft Damper

Boilers shall be provided with automatic dampers, draft hoods, or barometric dampers as recommended by the boiler manufacturer to maintain proper draft in the boiler. Draft damper shall be provided in a convenient and accessible location in the flue gas outlet from the boiler. Automatic damper shall be arranged for automatic operation by means of a damper motor.

2.4.4 Ductwork

Air ducts connecting the forced-draft fan units with the plenum chamber shall be designed to convey air with a minimum of pressure loss due to friction. Ductwork shall be galvanized sheet metal conforming to ASTM A653/A653M. Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with laps made in direction of air flow. Ducts shall have cross-break with enough center height to assure rigidity in the duct section, shall be angle iron braced, and shall be completely free of vibration. Access and inspection doors shall be provided as indicated and required, with a minimum of one in each section between dampers or items of equipment. Ducts shall be constructed with long radius elbows having a centerline radius 1-1/2 times the duct width, or where the space does not permit the use of long radius elbows, short radius or square elbows with factory-fabricated turning vanes may be used. Duct joints shall be substantially airtight and shall have adequate strength for the service, with 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 inch angles used where required for strength or rigidity. Duct wall thickness shall be 16 gauge (0.0598 inch) for ducts 60 inches or less and 12 gauge (0.1046 inch) for ducts larger than 60 inches in maximum dimension. Additional ductwork shall be in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.

2.5 COMBUSTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Combustion control equipment shall be provided as a system by a single manufacturer. Field installed automatic combustion control system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and under the direct supervision of a representative of the control manufacturer. The boiler water temperature shall be controlled by a water temperature controller. The equipment shall operate electronically. On multiple boiler installations, each boiler unit shall have a completely independent system of controls responding to the load and to a plant master controller. If recording instruments are provided, a 1 year supply of ink and 400 blank charts for each recorder shall be furnished.

2.5.1 Electrical controls

Electrical control devices shall be rated at 24 volts and shall be connected as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.5.2 Water Temperature Controller

The controller shall be of sturdy construction and shall be protected against dust and dampness. The thermostatic element shall be inserted in a separable socket installed in the upper part of the boiler near the water outlet. Modulating controllers shall control the fuel burning equipment to maintain set boiler water temperature within 2 percent. Controller shall be furnished with necessary equipment to automatically adjust the setting to suit the outside weather conditions. The outside air reset controller shall be operated in such a manner that the operating temperatures required by the boiler manufacturer are not compromised.



2.5.3 Boiler Plant Master Controller

A boiler plant master controller, sensitive to a temperature transmitter in the return water header for the boiler shall be furnished to provide anticipatory signals to all boiler controllers. Boiler controllers shall react to anticipatory signals from the plant master controller as necessary in response to the boiler temperature indication to maintain the preset temperature. An automatic-manual switch shall be provided to allow the sequence of boiler loading to be varied to distribute equal firing time on all boilers in the plant. The plant master controller shall load the boilers one at a time as the plant load increases.

2.5.4 Boiler Combustion Controls and Positioners

a. Gas boiler units shall be provided with modulating combustion controls with gas pilot or spark ignition. Modulating controls shall be provided with a means for manually controlling the firing rate.

b. Modulating control function shall be accomplished using positioning type controls. Air flow ratio and fuel control valve shall be controlled by relative positions of operative levers on a jackshaft responding to a water temperature controller. Positioning type combustion control equipment shall include draft controls with synchronized fuel feed and combustion air supply controls, while and shall maintain the proper air/fuel ratio. The desired furnace draft shall be maintained within 0.01 inch of water column.

2.5.5 Combustion Safety Controls and Equipment

Combustion safety controls and equipment shall be UL listed, microprocessor-based distributed process controller. The system shall include mounting hardware, wiring and cables, and associated equipment. The controller shall be mounted completely wired, programmed, debugged, and tested to perform all of its functions. The controller shall process the signals for complete control and monitoring of the boiler. This shall include maintaining boiler status, starting and stopping all control functions, sequencing control functions and signaling alarm conditions. The program shall be documented and include cross references in description of coils and contacts. Microprocessor shall be able to perform self diagnostics and contain a message center to provide operator with status and failure mode information. Controllers for each boiler shall be mounted on a separate, free standing panel adjacent to the boiler or for packaged boilers on the boiler supporting structure. Control systems and safety devices for automatically fired boilers shall conform to ASME CSD-1. Electrical combustion and safety controls shall be rated at 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz and shall be connected as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. A 4 inch diameter alarm bell shall be provided and shall be located where indicated or directed. The alarm bell shall ring when the boiler is shut down by any safety control or interlock. Indicating lights shall be provided on the control panel. A red light shall indicate flame failure, and a green light shall indicate that the main fuel valve is open. The following shutdown conditions shall require a manual reset before the boiler can automatically recycle:

a. Flame failure.

b. Failure to establish pilot flame.



c. Failure to establish main flame.

d. Low-water cutoff.

e. High temperature cutoff.

2.5.5.1 Low-water Cutoff

Low water cutoff shall be float actuated switch or electrically actuated probe type low-water cutoff. Float chamber shall be provided with a blow-down connection. Cutoff shall cause a safety shutdown and sound an alarm when the boiler water level drops below a safe minimum level. A safety shutdown due to low water shall require manual reset before operation can be resumed and shall prevent recycling of the burner. The cutoff shall be in strict accordance to ASME CSD-1.

2.5.5.2 Water Flow Interlock

Hot water boiler limit controls shall be provided to include protection for low boiler water flow and high boiler water temperature. The limit controls shall be interlocked with the combustion control system to effect boiler alarm and shutdown. The controls shall not allow boiler startup unless hot water flow is proven.

2.6 PUMPS

2.6.1 Boiler Circulating Pumps

Circulating pumps for hot water shall be electrically driven single-stage centrifugal type and have a capacity not less than indicated. The boiler circulating pumps shall be inline. The pump shaft shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant alloy steel, sleeve bearings and glands of bronze designed to accommodate a mechanical seal, and the housing of close-grained cast iron. Pump seals shall be capable of withstanding 240 degrees F temperature without external cooling. The motor shall have sufficient power for the service required, shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of the pump, shall be suitable for the available electric service, and shall conform to the requirements of paragraph ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. Each pump suction and discharge connection shall be provided with a pressure gauge as specified. The boiler circulating pump discharge heater shall be provided with a flow switch. Flow switch unit shall be a self-contained swinging vane type to indicate fluid flow. Switch shall be a SPDT with 120-volt, 15-ampere rating.

2.7 COLD WATER CONNECTIONS

Connections shall be provided which includes consecutively in line a strainer, reduced pressure principle backflow preventers, and water pressure regulator in that order in the direction of the flow. The reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall be provided as indicated and in compliance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Cold water fill connections shall be made to the water supply system as indicated. Necessary pipe, fittings, and valves required for water connections between the boiler and cold water main shall be provided as shown. The pressure regulating valve shall be of a type that will not stick or allow pressure to build up on the low side. The valve shall be set to maintain a terminal pressure of approximately 5 psi in excess of the static head on the system and shall operate within a 2 psi tolerance regardless of cold water supply



piping pressure and without objectionable noise under any condition of operation.

2.8 AIR HANDLING UNITS

Air handling units and associated equipment shall be in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.

2.9 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

Boiler fittings and accessories shall be installed with each boiler in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV, unless otherwise specified.

2.9.1 Direct Vents

Direct venting shall be used for condensing type boilers. Both the air intake and exhaust vents shall be sized and located as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the boiler manufacturer. A separate combustion air intake vent and exhaust vent shall be provided for each boiler.

2.9.1.1 Combustion Air Intake Vent

The combustion air intake piping shall be constructed of Schedule 40 PVC in accordance with ASTM D1784. The vent shall be suitable for the temperature at the boiler combustion air intake connection point. Each intake shall be provided complete with bird screen.

2.9.1.2 Exhaust Vent

The exhaust vent piping shall be constructed of stainless steel conforming to UL 1738 and the boiler manufacturer's recommendations. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. The exhaust vent shall be suitable for the maximum anticipated boiler exhaust temperature and shall withstand the corrosive effects of the condensate. A 0.3125 inch diameter hole shall be provided in the stack not greater than 6 inches from the boiler flue outlet for sampling of the exit gases. A method shall be provided to seal the hole to prevent exhaust gases from entering the boiler room when samples are not being taken. Each exhaust stack shall be provided complete with bird screen.

2.9.2 Filters

Filters shall conform to ASHRAE 52.2.

2.9.3 Foundation (Setting) Materials

2.9.3.1 Firebrick

Firebrick shall be ASTM C27 class as recommended by boiler manufacturer.

2.9.3.2 Tile

Tile shall be ASTM C34, Grade LBX.

2.9.3.3 Insulating Brick

Insulating brick shall comply with ASTM C155.



2.9.3.4 Refractory Mortar

Refractory mortar shall comply with ASTM F1097.

2.9.3.5 Castable Refractories

Castable refractories shall be ASTM C401. The minimum modulus of rupture for transverse strength shall be not less than 600 psi after being heat soaked for 5 hours or more at a temperature in excess of 2500 degrees F.

2.9.4 Steel Sheets

2.9.4.1 Galvanized Steel

Galvanized steel shall be ASTM A653/A653M.

2.9.4.2 Uncoated Steel

Uncoated steel shall be composition, condition, and finish best suited to the intended use.

2.9.5 Gaskets

Gaskets shall be nonasbestos material in accordance with ASME B16.20, full face or self-centering type. The gaskets shall be of the spiral wound type with graphite filler material.

2.9.6 Pipe Supports

Pipe supports shall conform to MSS SP-58.

2.9.7 Pressure Gauges

Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100 and shall be provided with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve. Minimum dial size shall be 3-1/2 inches. A pressure gauge shall be provided for each boiler in a visible location on the boiler. Pressure gauges shall be provided with readings in psi. Pressure gauges shall have an indicating pressure range that is related to the operating pressure of the fluid in accordance with the following table:

Operating Pressure (psi) Pressure Range (psi)

76-150 0-200

16-75 0-100

2-15 0-30 (retard)

2.9.8 Thermometers

Thermometers shall be provided with wells and separable corrosion-resistant steel sockets. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. Thermometers for inlet water and outlet water for each hot water boiler shall be provided in a visible location on the boiler. Thermometers shall have brass, malleable iron, or aluminum alloy case and frame, clear protective face, permanently stabilized glass tube with indicating-fluid column, white



face, black numbers, and a minimum 9 inch scale. The operating range of the thermometers shall be 32-212 degrees F. The thermometers shall be provided with readings in degrees F.

2.9.9 Steam Traps2.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Electric motor-driven equipment shall be provided complete with motors, motor starters, and necessary control devices. Electrical equipment, motor control devices, motor efficiencies and wiring shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Motors which are not an integral part of a packaged boiler and which are integral in size shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Motors which are an integral part of the packaged boiler shall be the highest efficiency available by the manufacturer of the packaged boiler. Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protections and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Starters shall be furnished in general purpose enclosures. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not shown shall be provided.

2.10.1 Motor Ratings

Motors shall be suitable for the voltage and frequency provided. Motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be three-phase, unless otherwise indicated. Motors shall be of sufficient capacity to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating on the motor.

2.10.2 Motor Controls

Motor controllers shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any wiring required to such devices shall be provided. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided to accomplish the same function. Solid state variable speed controllers shall be utilized for fractional through 10 hp ratings. Adjustable frequency drives shall be used for larger motors.

2.11 INSULATION

Shop and field-applied insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 3 EXECUTION


Perform and document the indoor air quality during construction. Provide documentation showing that after construction ends, and prior to occupancy, new filters were installed in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING, paragraph INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION.

3.2 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work or ordering any materials.



3.3 ERECTION OF BOILER AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

Boiler and auxiliary equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction between boiler foundation and floor. This joint shall be packed with suitable nonasbestos rope and filled with suitable compound that will not become soft at a temperature of 100 degrees F. Boilers and firing equipment shall be supported from the foundations by structural steel completely independent of all brickwork. Boiler supports shall permit free expansion and contraction of each portion of the boiler without placing undue stress on any part of the boiler or setting. Boiler breeching shall be as indicated with full provision for expansion and contraction between all interconnected components.

3.4 GAS FUEL SYSTEM

Gas piping, fittings, valves, regulators, tests, cleaning, and adjustments shall be in accordance with the NFPA 55. Submit proposed test schedules for the heating system and fuel system tests, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing. NFPA 54 shall be complied with unless otherwise specified. Burners, pilots, and all accessories shall be listed in UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE. The fuel system shall be provided with a gas tight, manually operated, UL listed stop valve at the gas-supply connections, a gas strainer, a pressure regulator, pressure gauges, a burner-control valve, a safety shutoff valve suitable for size of burner and sequence of operation, and other components required for safe, efficient, and reliable operation as specified. Approved permanent and ready facilities to permit periodic valve leakage tests on the safety shutoff valve or valves shall be provided.

3.5 COLOR CODE MARKING AND FIELD PAINTING

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Ferrous metal not specified to be coated at the factory shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Exposed pipe covering shall be painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Aluminum sheath over insulation shall not be painted.

3.6 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified to supervise the installing, adjusting, and testing of the equipment.

3.7 TEST OF BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES

Backflow prevention assemblies shall be tested in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.

3.8 HEATING SYSTEM TESTS

Submit the Qualifications of the firms in charge of installation and testing as specified. Submit a statement from the firms proposed to prepare submittals and perform installation and testing, demonstrating successful completion of similar services of at least five projects of similar size or scope, at least 2 weeks prior to the submittal of any other item required by this section. Before any covering is installed on pipe or



heating equipment, the entire heating system's piping, fittings, and terminal heating units shall be hydrostatically tested and proved tight at a pressure of 1.5 times the design working pressure, but not less than 100 psi. Submit proposed test procedures for the heating system tests and fuel system tests, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.

a. Before pressurizing system for test, items or equipment (e.g., vessels, pumps, instruments, controls, relief valves) rated for pressures below the test pressure shall be blanked off or replaced with spool pieces.

b. Before balancing and final operating test, test blanks and spool pieces shall be removed; and protected instruments and equipment shall be reconnected. With equipment items protected, the system shall be pressurized to test pressure. Pressure shall be held for a period of time sufficient to inspect all welds, joints, and connections for leaks, but not less than 2 hours. No loss of pressure will be allowed. Leaks shall be repaired and repaired joints shall be retested.

c. Repair joints shall not be allowed under the floor for floor radiant heating systems. If a leak occurs in tubing located under the floor in radiant heating systems, the entire zone that is leaking shall be replaced. If any repair is made above the floor for floor radiant heating systems, access shall be provided for the installed joint. Caulking of joints shall not be permitted.

d. System shall be drained and after instruments and equipment are reconnected, the system shall be refilled with service medium and maximum operating pressure applied. The pressure shall be held while inspecting these joints and connections for leaks. The leaks shall be repaired and the repaired joints retested.

Upon completion of hydrostatic tests and before acceptance of the installation, submit test reports for the heating system tests. Upon completion of testing complete with results, balance the heating system in accordance with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS and operating tests required to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operational efficiency. The operating test shall cover a period of at least 24 hours for each system, and shall include, as a minimum, the following specific information in a report, together with conclusions as to the adequacy of the system:

a. Certification of balancing.

b. Time, date, and duration of test.

c. Outside and inside dry bulb temperatures.

d. Temperature of hot water supply leaving boiler.

e. Temperature of heating return water from system at boiler inlet.

g. Boiler make, type, serial number, design pressure, and rated capacity.

h. Fuel burner make, model, and rated capacity; ammeter and voltmeter readings for burner motor.

i. Circulating pump make, model, and rated capacity, and ammeter and voltmeter readings for pump motor during operation.



j. Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet.

k. Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas.

l. Grade or type and calorific value of fuel.

m. Draft at boiler flue-gas exit.

n. Draft or pressure in furnace.

o. Quantity of water circulated.

p. Quantity of fuel consumed.

q. Stack emission pollutants concentration.

Indicating instruments shall be read at half-hour intervals unless otherwise directed. Furnish all instruments, equipment, and personnel required for the tests and balancing. Obtain necessary natural gas, water and electricity as specified in the Division 01 specifications. Operating tests shall demonstrate that fuel burners and combustion and safety controls meet the requirements of ASME CSD-1.

3.9 CLEANING

3.9.1 Boilers and Piping

After the hydrostatic tests have been made and before the system is balanced and operating tests are performed, the boilers and piping shall be thoroughly cleaned by filling the system with a solution consisting of either 1 pound of caustic soda or 1 pound of trisodium phosphate per 50 gallons of water. The proper safety precautions shall be observed in the handling and use of these chemicals. The water shall be heated to approximately 150 degrees F and the solution circulated in the system for a period of 48 hours. The system shall then be drained and thoroughly flushed out with fresh water. Strainers and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned. Prior to operating tests, air shall be removed from all water systems by operating the air vents.

3.10 FIELD TRAINING

Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total of 24 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests.

a. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations and boiler safety devices.

b. Submit system layout diagrams that show the layout of equipment, piping, and ductwork and typed condensed operation manuals explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system, framed under glass or laminated plastic, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing. After approval, these items shall be posted where directed.

c. Submit six complete operation and maintenance instructions listing



step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 2 weeks prior to field training. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, simplified wiring and control diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone number) for each item of equipment. Each service organization shall be capable of providing 4 hour onsite response to a service call on an emergency basis.

d. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the training course.

3.11 FUEL SYSTEM TESTS

Submit test reports for the fuel system tests, upon completion of testing complete with results.

3.11.1 Gas System Test

The gas fuel system shall be tested in accordance with the test procedures outlined in NFPA 54.




SECTION 23 64 10

WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AHRI 550/590 I-P (2011; Addendum 1 2012; Addendum 2-3 2013) Performance Rating Of Water-Chilling and Heat Pump Water-Heating Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle


ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2013; Addenda A 2014; ERTA 1 2014; Addenda A-T AND SUPP 2015; ERTA 2 2015; INT 1 2015; ERTA 3 2015; ERTA 4 2016) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants


AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes


ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1


ASTM A307 (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength


ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment


ASTM F104 (2011) Standard Classification System for Nonmetallic Gasket Materials






1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for nformation only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Water Chiller; G

Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least highlighted to show material, size, options, performance charts and curves including full-load and IPLV efficiences (DOE PL-109-58), etc. in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements as specified within the paragraphs:

a. Water Chiller

b. Chiller Components

c. Refrigerant - Provide MSDS sheets for all refrigerants

d. Accessories

If vibration isolation is specified for a unit, vibration isolator literature shall be included containing catalog cuts and certification that the isolation characteristics of the isolators provided meet the manufacturer's recommendations.Posted Instructions

Posted instructions, including equipment layout, wiring and control diagrams, piping, valves and control sequences, and typed condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. The posted instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic and be posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer.

Verification of Dimensions

A letter including the date the site was visited, conformation of existing conditions, and any discrepancies found.



Manufacturer's Multi-Year Compressor Warranty

Manufacturer's multi-year warranty for compressor(s) in air-cooled water chillers as specified.

Water Chiller - Field Acceptance Test Plan

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Acceptance Testing

Water Chiller - Field Acceptance Test Report

SD-07 Certificates

Refrigeration System; G

Where the system, components, or equipment are specified to comply with requirements of AGA, NFPA, AHRI, ASHRAE, ASME, or UL, 1 copy of proof of such compliance shall be provided. The label or listing of the specified agency shall be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of the specified agency may be submitted. When performance requirements of this project's drawings and specifications vary from standard AHRI rating conditions, computer printouts, catalog, or other application data certified by AHRI or a nationally recognized laboratory as described above shall be included. If AHRI does not have a current certification program that encompasses such application data, the manufacturer may self certify that his application data complies with project performance requirements in accordance with the specified test standards.


Water Chiller - Installation Instruction; G



Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training course. The booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, and parts list. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals



shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.


Energy Efficient Equipment for Chillers; S

Indoor Air Quality During Construction; S

Ozone Depleting Substances; S

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.


Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.

1.5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS


The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

1.6 Warranty

In addition to the warranty requirements specification in Division 00, Contract Requirements, the following major components of the chiller shall be covered by a warranty of a duration period of five years: Compressors.

1.7 MANUFACTURER'S MULTI-YEAR COMPRESSOR WARRANTY

The Contractor shall provide a 10 year parts and labor (includes refrigerant) manufacturer's warranty on the chiller compressor(s). This warranty shall be directly from the chiller manufacturer to the Government and shall be in addition to the standard one-year warranty of construction. The manufacturer's warranty shall provide for the repair or replacement of the chiller compressor(s) that become inoperative as a result of defects in material or workmanship within 10 years after the date of final acceptance. When the manufacturer determines that a compressor requires replacement, the manufacturer shall furnish new compressor(s) at no additional cost to the Government. Upon notification that a chiller compressor has failed under the terms of the warranty, the manufacturer shall respond in no more than 6 hours. Response shall mean having a manufacturer-qualified technician onsite to evaluate the extent of the needed repairs. The warranty period shall begin on the same date as final



acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period.

1.7.1 Indexed Notebook

The Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed notebook containing a complete listing of all water chillers covered by a manufacturer's multi-year warranty. The chiller list shall state the duration of the warranty thereof, start date of the warranty, ending date of the warranty, location of the warranted equipment, and the point of contact for fulfillment of the warranty. This information shall be provided for each chiller and the recorded chiller serial numbers shall identify each chiller. Point of contact shall include the name of the service representative along with the day, night, weekend, and holiday phone numbers for a service call. The completed bound and indexed notebook shall be delivered to the Contracting Office prior to final acceptance of the facility. The Contractor shall furnish with each manufacturer's multi-year warranty the name, address, and telephone number (day, night, weekend, and holiday) of the service representative nearest to the location where the equipment is installed. Upon a request for service under the multi-year warranty, the service representative shall honor the warranty during the warranty period, and shall provide the services prescribed by the terms of the warranty.

1.7.2 Equipment Warranty Tags

At the time of installation, each item of manufacturer's multi-year warranted equipment shall be tagged with a durable, oil- and water-resistant tag, suitable for interior and exterior locations, resistant to solvents, abrasion, and fading due to sunlight. The tag shall be attached with copper wire or a permanent, pressure-sensitive, adhesive backing. The tag shall be installed in an easily noticed location attached to the warranted equipment. The tag for this equipment shall be similar to the following in format, and shall contain all of the listed information:

MANUFACTURER'S MULTI-YEAR WARRANTY EQUIPMENT TAGEquipment/Product Covered: ____________________Manufacturer:_______Model No.:_____Serial No.:__Warranty Period: From _________to _____________Contract No.: _________________________________Warranty Contact: _____________________________Name: _________________________________________Address: ______________________________________Telephone: ____________________________________ STATION PERSONNEL SHALL PERFORM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.1.1 Energy Efficient Equipment for Chillers

Provide chillers meeting the efficiency requirements as stated within this section and provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT.



2.1.2 Ozone Depleting Substances

Chillers must not use CFC-based refrigerants, and must have an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) no greater than 0.0, with exception to R-123, in conformance with this section. Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES.

2.2 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

Materials and equipment shall be standard Commercial cataloged products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.

These products shall have a two year record of satisfactory field service prior to bid opening. The two year record of service shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

Products having less than a two year record of satisfactory field service shall be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field service for not less than 6000 hours can be shown. The 6000 hour service record shall not include any manufacturer's prototype or factory testing.

Satisfactory field service shall have been completed by a product that has been, and presently is being sold or offered for sale on the commercial market through the following copyrighted means: advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.

2.3 MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD NAMEPLATES

Major equipment including chillers, compressors, compressor drivers, condensers, water coolers, receivers, refrigerant leak detectors, heat exchanges, fans, and motors shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible throughout equipment life. Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.

2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK

a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart.

b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.

c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system, and that meet the



efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

e. Provide inverter duty premium efficiency motors for use with variable frequency drives.

f. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided to accomplish the same function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or less and variable frequency drives for larger motors. 2.5

SELF-CONTAINED WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE

Unless necessary for delivery purposes, units shall be assembled, leak-tested, charged (refrigerant and oil), and adjusted at the factory. In lieu of delivery constraints, a chiller may be assembled, leak-tested, charged (refrigerant and oil), and adjusted at the job site by a factory representative. Unit components delivered separately shall be sealed and charged with a nitrogen holding charge. Parts weighing 50 pounds or more which must be removed for inspection, cleaning, or repair, such as motors, gear boxes, cylinder heads, casing tops, condenser, and cooler heads, shall have lifting eyes or lugs. Chiller shall be provided with a single point wiring connection for incoming power supply. Chiller's condenser and water cooler shall be provided with standard water boxes with flanged connections.

2.5.1 Scroll, Reciprocating, or Rotary Screw Type

Chiller shall be rated in accordance with AHRI 550/590 I-P. Chiller shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. As a minimum, chiller shall include the following components as defined in paragraph CHILLER COMPONENTS.

a. Refrigerant and oil

b. Structural base

c. Chiller refrigerant circuit

d. Controls package

e. Scroll, reciprocating, or rotary screw compressor

f. Compressor driver, electric motor

g. Compressor driver connection

h. Water cooler (evaporator)



i. Air-cooled condenser coil

2.6 CHILLER COMPONENTS

2.6.1 Refrigerant and Oil

Refrigerants shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases. Refrigerants shall have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. Refrigerants classified by the EPA as Class 2 shall not be allowed with the exception of R-123. The ODP shall be in accordance with the "Montreal Protocol On Substances That Deplete The Ozone Layer," September 1987, as amended through 2000, sponsored by the United Nations Environment Programme.

2.6.2 Structural Base

Chiller and individual chiller components shall be provided with a factory-mounted structural steel base (welded or bolted) or support legs. Chiller and individual chiller components shall be isolated from the building structure by means of molded neoprene isolation pads.

2.6.3 Chiller Refrigerant Circuit

Chiller refrigerant circuit shall be completely piped and factory leak tested. For multicompressor units, not less than 2 independent refrigerant circuits shall be provided. Circuit shall include as a minimum a combination filter and drier, combination sight glass and moisture indicator, liquid-line solenoid valve for reciprocating, an electronic or thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer or float valve, charging ports, compressor service valves for field-serviceable compressors, and superheat adjustment.

2.6.4 Controls Package

Chiller shall be provided with a complete factory-mounted, prewired electric or microprocessor based operating and safety control system. Controls package shall contain as a minimum a digital display or acceptable gauges, an on-auto-off switch, motor starters, disconnect switches, power wiring, and control wiring. Controls package shall provide operating controls, monitoring capabilities, programmable setpoints, safety controls, and EMCS interfaces as defined below.

2.6.4.1 Operating Controls

Chiller shall be provided with the following adjustable operating controls as a minimum.

a. Leaving chilled water temperature control

b. Adjustable timer or automated controls to prevent a compressor from short cycling

c. Automatic lead/lag controls (adjustable) for multi-compressor units

d. Load limiting

e. System capacity control to adjust the unit capacity in accordance with the system load and the programmable setpoints. Controls shall



automatically re-cycle the chiller on power interruption.

f. Startup and head pressure controls to allow system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 0 degrees F.

2.6.4.2 Monitoring Capabilities

During normal operations, the control system shall be capable of monitoring and displaying the following operating parameters. Access and operation of display shall not require opening or removing any panels or doors.

a. Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures

b. Self diagnostic

c. Operation status

d. Operating hours

e. Number of starts

f. Compressor status (on or off)

g. Refrigerant discharge and suction pressures

h. Magnetic bearing levitation status (if applicable)

i. Magnetic bearing temperatures (if applicable)

j. Oil pressure

2.6.4.3 Programmable Setpoints

The control system shall be capable of being reprogrammed directly at the unit. No parameters shall be capable of being changed without first entering a security access code. The programmable setpoints shall include the following as a minimum.

a. Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

2.6.4.4 Safety Controls with Manual Reset

Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and which require manual reset.

a. Low chilled water temperature protection

b. High condenser refrigerant discharge pressure protection

c. Low evaporator pressure protection

d. Chilled water flow detection

e. High motor winding temperature protection

f. Low oil flow protection if applicable

g. Magnetic bearing controller (MBC), Internal fault (if applicable)



h. MBC, High bearing temperature (if applicable)

i. MBC, Communication fault (if applicable)

j. MBC, Power supply fault (if applicable)

2.6.4.5 Safety Controls with Automatic Reset

Chiller shall be provided with the following safety controls which automatically shutdown the chiller and which provide automatic reset.

a. Over/under voltage protection

b. Chilled water flow interlock

c. MBC, Vibration (if applicable)

d. MBC, No levitation (if applicable)

2.6.4.6 Remote Alarm

During the initiation of a safety shutdown, a chiller's control system shall be capable of activating a remote alarm bell. In coordination with the chiller, the Contractor shall provide an alarm circuit (including transformer if applicable) and a minimum 4 inch diameter alarm bell. Alarm circuit shall activate bell in the event of machine shutdown due to the chiller's monitoring of safety controls. The alarm bell shall not sound for a chiller that uses low-pressure cutout as an operating control.

2.6.4.7 Energy Management Control System (EMCS) Interface

The control system shall be capable of communicating all data to a remote integrated DDC processor through a single shielded cable. A BACNet interface card shall be provided as required to communicate with controls system. The data shall include as a minimum all system operating conditions, capacity controls, and safety shutdown conditions. The control system shall also be capable of receiving at a minimum the following operating commands.

a. Remote Unit Start/Stop

2.6.5 Compressor(s)

2.6.5.1 Scroll Compressor(s)

Compressors shall be of the hermetically sealed design. Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators to minimize vibration and noise. Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory to minimize vibration. Lubrication system shall be centrifugal pump type equipped with a means for determining oil level and an oil charging valve. Crankcase oil heater shall be provided if standard or if available as an option. If provided, the crankcase oil heater shall be controlled as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.6.6 Compressor Driver, Electric Motor

Motors, starters, wiring, etc. shall be in accordance with paragraph ELECTRICAL WORK. Motor starter shall be unit mounted as indicated with starter type, wiring, and accessories coordinated with the chiller



manufacturer.

2.6.7 Compressor Driver Connections

Each compressor shall be driven by a V-belt drive or direct connected through a flexible coupling, except that flexible coupling is not required on hermetic units. V-belt drives shall be designed for not less than 150 percent of the driving motor capacity. Flexible couplings shall be of the type that does not require lubrication.2.6.8 Water Cooler (Evaporator)

Cooler shall be of the shell-and-coil or shell-and-tube type design. Cooler shell shall be constructed of seamless or welded steel. Coil bundles shall be totally removable and arranged to drain completely. Tubes shall be seamless copper, plain, integrally finned with smooth bore or integrally finned with enhanced bore. Each tube shall be individually replaceable. Tubes shall be installed into carbon mild steel tube sheets by rolling. Tube baffles shall be properly spaced to provide adequate tube support and cross flow. Performance shall be based on a water velocity not less than 3 fps nor more than 12 fps and a fouling factor of 0.0001 h(ft2)(degrees F)/Btu.

2.6.9 Air-Cooled Condenser Coil

Condenser coil shall be of the extended-surface fin-and-tube type and shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes with compatible aluminum fins. Fins shall be soldered or mechanically bonded to the tubes and installed in a metal casing. Coils shall be circuited and sized for a minimum of 5 degrees F subcooling and full pumpdown capacity. Coil shall be factory leak and pressure tested after assembly in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. Coil shall be entirely coated with the manufacturer's recommended protective coating for seacoast-type environements.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

2.7.1 Refrigerant Relief Valve/Rupture Disc Assembly

The assembly shall be a combination pressure relief valve and rupture disc designed for refrigerant usage. The assembly shall be in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. The assembly shall be provided with a pressure gauge assembly which will provide local indication if a rupture disc is broken. Rupture disc shall be the non-fragmenting type.

2.7.2 Refrigerant Signs

Refrigerant signs shall be a medium-weight aluminum type with a baked enamel finish. Signs shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service. Signs shall have a white background with red letters not less than 0.5 inches in height.

2.7.2.1 Installation Identification

Each new refrigerating system shall be provided with a refrigerant sign which indicates the following as a minimum:

a. Contractor's name.

b. Refrigerant number and amount of refrigerant.



c. The lubricant identity and amount.

d. Field test pressure applied.

2.7.2.2 Controls and Piping Identification

Refrigerant systems containing more than 110 lb of refrigerant shall be provided with refrigerant signs which designate the following as a minimum:

a. Valves or switches for controlling the refrigerant flow and the refrigerant compressor(s).

b. Pressure limiting device(s).

2.7.3 Gaskets

Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F104 - classification for compressed sheet with nitrile binder and acrylic fibers for maximum 700 degrees F service.

2.7.4 Bolts and Nuts

Bolts and nuts, except as required for piping applications, shall be in accordance with ASTM A307. The bolt head shall be marked to identify the manufacturer and the standard with which the bolt complies in accordance with ASTM A307.

2.8 FABRICATION

2.8.1 Factory Coating

Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have weather resistant finishes that will withstand 500 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM D520, Type I.

2.8.2 Factory Applied Insulation

Chiller shall be provided with factory installed insulation on surfaces subject to sweating including the water cooler, suction line piping, economizer, and cooling lines. Insulation on heads of coolers may be field applied, however it shall be installed to provide easy removal and replacement of heads without damage to the insulation. Where motors are the gas-cooled type, factory installed insulation shall be provided on the cold-gas inlet connection to the motor per manufacturer's standard practice. Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E84. Insulation shall be tested in the



same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction. Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.9 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES

2.9.1 Chilled and Condenser Water Piping and Accessories

Chilled and condenser water piping and accessories shall be provided and installed in accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS.

2.9.2 Temperature Controls

Chiller control packages shall be fully coordinated with and integrated into the temperature control system specified in Section 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

PART 3 EXECUTION


For construction activities in this section, provide and document the following:

3.1.1 Indoor Air Quality During Construction

Provide documentation showing that after construction ends, and prior to occupancy, new filters were installed in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Installation of water chiller systems including materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions, including the following:

3.2.1 Refrigeration System

3.2.1.1 Equipment

Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment, appurtenances, and pipe as required, including frames or supports for compressors, pumps, cooling towers, condensers, water coolers, and similar items. Compressors shall be isolated from the building structure. If mechanical vibration isolators are not provided, vibration absorbing foundations shall be provided. Each foundation shall include isolation units consisting of machine and floor or foundation fastenings, together with intermediate isolation material. Other floor-mounted equipment shall be set on not less than a 6 inch concrete pad doweled in place. Concrete foundations for floor mounted pumps shall have a mass equivalent to three times the weight of the components, pump, base plate, and motor to be supported. In lieu of concrete pad foundation, concrete pedestal block with isolators placed between the pedestal block and the floor may be provided. Concrete pedestal block shall be of mass not less



than three times the combined pump, motor, and base weights. Isolators shall be selected and sized based on load-bearing requirements and the lowest frequency of vibration to be isolated. Lines connected to pumps mounted on pedestal blocks shall be provided with flexible connectors. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts shall be furnished prior to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations. Concrete for foundations shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Equipment shall be properly leveled, aligned, and secured in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2.1.2 Field Refrigerant Charging

a. Initial Charge: Upon completion of all the refrigerant pipe tests, the vacuum on the system shall be broken by adding the required charge of dry refrigerant for which the system is designed, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall provide the complete charge of refrigerant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Upon satisfactory completion of the system performance tests, any refrigerant that has been lost from the system shall be replaced. After the system is fully operational, service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened.

b. Refrigerant Leakage: If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the remainder of the system and the refrigerant shall be pumped into the system receiver or other suitable container. The refrigerant shall not be discharged into the atmosphere.

c. Contractor's Responsibility: The Contractor shall, at all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in accordance with the specified requirements including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of defective equipment, material, or installation.

3.2.1.3 Oil Charging

Except for factory sealed units, two complete charges of lubricating oil for each compressor crankcase shall be furnished. One charge shall be used during the performance testing period, and upon the satisfactory completion of the tests, the oil shall be drained and replaced with the second charge.

3.2.2 Field Applied Insulation

Field installed insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as defined differently herein.

3.2.3 Field Painting

Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting



of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE

The services of a factory-trained representative shall be provided. The representative shall advise on the following:

a. Hermetic machines:

(1) Testing hermetic water-chilling unit under pressure for refrigerant leaks; evacuation and dehydration of machine to an absolute pressure of not over 300 micrometers.

(2) Charging the machine with refrigerant.

(3) Starting the machine.

b. Open Machines:

(1) Erection, alignment, testing, and dehydrating.

(2) Charging the machine with refrigerant.

(3) Starting the machine.


Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction, and new filters shall be installed after all construction dirt has been removed from the building. System shall be maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. At least one week before the official equipment warranty start date, all condenser coils on air-cooled water chillers and split-system water chillers shall be cleaned in accordance with the chiller manufacturer's instructions. This work covers two coil cleanings. The condenser coils shall be cleaned with an approved coil cleaner by a service technician, factory trained by the chiller manufacturer. The condenser coil cleaner shall not have any detrimental affect on the materials or protective coatings on the condenser coils. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.

3.5 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTING

3.5.1 Test Plans

a. Manufacturer's Test Plans: Within 120 calendar days after contract award, submit the following plans:

(1) Water chiller - field acceptance test plan

Field acceptance test plans shall be developed by the chiller manufacturer detailing recommended field test procedures for that



particular type and size of equipment. Field acceptance test plans developed by the installing Contractor, or the equipment sales agency furnishing the equipment, will not be acceptable.

The Contracting Officer will review and approve the field acceptance test plan for each of the listed equipment prior to commencement of field testing of the equipment. The approved field acceptance tests of the chiller and subsequent test reporting.

b. Coordinated testing: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan when work required by this section requires coordination with test work required by other specification sections. Furnish test procedures for the simultaneous or integrated testing of tower system controls which interlock and interface with controls factory prewired or external controls for the equipment provided under Section 23 09 23.13 20, BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.

c. Prerequisite testing: Chillers for which performance testing is dependent upon the completion of the work covered by Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC must have that work completed as a prerequisite to testing work under this section. Indicate in each field acceptance test plan when such prerequisite work is required.

d. Test procedure: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan each equipment manufacturers published installation, start-up, and field acceptance test procedures. Include in each test plan a detailed step-by-step procedure for testing automatic controls provided by the manufacturer.

Each test plan shall include the required test reporting forms to be completed by the Contractor's testing representatives. Procedures shall be structured to test the controls through all modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing with the intended sequence of control.

Controller shall be verified to be properly calibrated and have the proper set point to provide stable control of their respective equipment.

e. Performance variables: Each test plan shall list performance variables that are required to be measured or tested as part of the field test.

Include in the listed variables performance requirements indicated on the equipment schedules on the design drawings. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish with each test procedure a description of acceptable results that have been verified.

Chiller manufacturer shall identify the acceptable limits or tolerance within which each tested performance variable shall acceptably operate.

f. Job specific: Each test plan shall be job specific and shall address the particular cooling towers and particular conditions which exist in this contract. Generic or general preprinted test procedures are not acceptable.

g. Specialized components: Each test plan shall include procedures for



field testing and field adjusting specialized components, such as hot gas bypass control valves, or pressure valves.

3.5.2 Testing

a. Each water chiller system shall be field acceptance tested in compliance with its approved field acceptance test plan and the resulting following field acceptance test report submitted for approval:

b. Manufacturer's recommended testing: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended field testing in compliance with the approved test plan. Furnish a factory trained field representative authorized by and to represent the equipment manufacturer at the complete execution of the field acceptance testing.

c. Operational test: Conduct a continuous 24 hour operational test for each item of equipment. Equipment shutdown before the test period is completed shall result in the test period being started again and run for the required duration. For the duration of the test period, compile an operational log of each item of equipment. Log required entries every two hours. Use the test report forms for logging the operational variables.

d. Notice of tests: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended tests and the operational tests; record the required data using the approved reporting forms. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the testing. Within 30 calendar days after acceptable completion of testing, submit each test report for review and approval.

e. Report forms: Type data entries and writing on the test report forms. Completed test report forms for each item of equipment shall be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor's test director. The manufacturer's field test representative shall review, approve, and sign the report of the manufacturer's recommended test. Signatures shall be accompanied by the person's name typed.

f. Deficiency resolution: The test requirements acceptably met; deficiencies identified during the tests shall be corrected in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and corrections retested in order to verify compliance.

3.6 DEMONSTRATIONS

Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 24 hours of normal working time and start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.




SECTION 23 64 26

CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (2015) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010)


AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

AWS BRH (2007; 5th Ed) Brazing Handbook

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016) Structural Welding Code - Steel

AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes



ASME B16.1 (2015) Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250


ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ASME B16.22 (2013) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.26 (2013) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy



Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300

ASME B16.39 (2014) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300


ASME B31.9 (2014) Building Services Piping






ASTM A733 (2013) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples


ASTM B32 (2008; R 2014) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B42 (2015a) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B62 (2015) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

ASTM B75/B75M (2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

ASTM B813 (2016) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

ASTM B88 (2014) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM D3308 (2012) PTFE Resin Skived Tape




ASTM F1199 (1988; R 2015) Cast (All Temperatures and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)

HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)

HI 1.1-1.2 (2014) Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pump for Nomenclature and Definitions


MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-25 (2013) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions


MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves

MSS SP-69 (2003; Notice 2012) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard)

MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-71 (2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service


MSS SP-85 (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends










Provide the water systems having the minimum service (design) temperature-pressure rating indicated. Provision of the piping systems, including materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of ASME B31.9 except as modified or supplemented by this specification section or design drawings. This specification section covers the water systems piping which is located within, on, and adjacent to building(s) within the building(s) 5 foot line.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Calibrated Balancing Valves; G

Pump Discharge Valve

Water Temperature Regulating Valves; G

Water Pressure Reducing Valve

Pressure Relief Valve

Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves

Pumps; G

Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser

Expansion Tanks

Air Separator Tanks

Water Treatment Systems; G

Proposed water treatment plan including a layout, control scheme, a list of existing make-up water conditions including the items listed in paragraph WATER ANALYSIS", a list of chemicals, the proportion of chemicals to be added, the final treated water



conditions, and a description of environmental concerns for handling the chemicals.

SD-06 Test Reports

Piping Welds NDE Report

Pressure Tests Reports; G

Report shall be provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. In the reports, document all phases of the tests performed. Include initial test summaries, all repairs/adjustments made, and the final test results.

SD-07 Certificates

Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)

Welding Procedures and Qualifications

Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section.

FITTINGS

UNIONS

FLANGES

GASKETS

BOLTING


Lesson plan for the Instruction Course; G


Requirements for data packages are specified Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, except as supplemented and modified by this specification section.

Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified, with operation and maintenance data packages. Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.

Submit a list of qualified permanent service organizations with operation and maintenance data packages. Include service organization addresses and service area or expertise. The service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment



installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

Water Treatment Systems; G

An operation manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown. Include testing procedures used in determining water quality.

A maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide.

Calibrated Balancing Valves, Data Package 3; G

Pump Discharge Valve, Data Package 2; G

Water Pressure Reducing Valve, Data Package 3; G

Pressure Relief Valve, Data Package 2; G

Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves, Data Package 2; G

Pumps, Data Package 3; G

Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser, Data Package 2; G

Expansion Tanks, Data Package 2; G

Air Separator Tanks, Data Package 2; G

1.4 MODIFICATIONS TO REFERENCES

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.4.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.4.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of



Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.

1.5 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired.


Protect stored items from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. Any porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Non-porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be disinfected and cleaned prior to installation.



The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

1.7.2 Drawings

Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.

1.7.3 Accessibility


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have



been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening.

The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.

Products having less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

2.2 STEEL PIPING

Chilled and hot water piping shall be steel pipe. Provide steel piping with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig.

2.2.1 Pipe

Steel pipe, conform to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grades A or B. Do not use Type F pipe.

2.2.2 Fittings and End Connections (Joints)

Piping and fittings 1 inch and smaller shall have threaded connections. Piping and fittings larger than 1 inch and smaller than 3 inches shall have either threaded, or welded connections. Piping and fittings 3 inches and larger shall have welded, or flanged connections. The manufacturer of each fitting shall be permanently identified on the body of the fitting in accordance with MSS SP-25.

2.2.2.1 Threaded Connections

Use threaded valves and pipe connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Used threaded fitting conforming to ASME B16.3. Use threaded unions conforming to ASME B16.39. Use threaded pipe nipples conforming to ASTM A733.

2.2.2.2 Flanged Connections

Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.1, Class 125. Gaskets shall be nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. These gaskets shall contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadeine rubber (SBR) or nitrile butadeine rubber (NBR). Bolts, nuts, and bolt patterns shall conform to ASME B16.1.

2.2.2.3 Welded Connections

Welded valves and pipe connections (both butt-welds and socket-welds types) shall conform to ASME B31.9. Butt-welded fittings shall conform to



ASME B16.9. Socket-welded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.11. Welded fittings shall be identified with the appropriate grade and marking symbol.

2.2.2.4 Dielectric Waterways and Flanges

Provide dielectric waterways with a water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, insulation barrier shall be able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test. Provide dielectric waterways constructed of galvanized steel and have threaded end connections to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures. Provide dielectric flanges with the same pressure ratings as standard flanges and provide complete electrical isolation between connecting pipe and/or equipment as described herein for dielectric waterways.

2.3 COPPER TUBING

For chilled and hot water piping less than 4" in diameter, copper tubing and fittings may be provided with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F., the pressure rating is 175 psig.

2.3.1 Tube

Use copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, Type L or M for aboveground tubing, and Type K for buried tubing.

2.3.2 Fittings and End Connections (Solder and Flared Joints)

Wrought copper and bronze solder joint pressure fittings, including unions ands flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75/B75M. Provide adapters as required. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings , including unions and flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.18. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B62. ASTM B42 copper pipe nipples with threaded end connections shall conform to ASTM B42.

Copper tubing of sizes larger than 4 inches shall have brazed joints. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.

Extracted brazed tee joints may be used if produced with an acceptable tool and installed in accordance with tool manufacturer's written procedures.

2.3.3 Solder

Provide solder in conformance with ASTM B32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy. Solder flux shall be liquid or paste form, non-corrosive and conform to ASTM B813.

2.3.4 Brazing Filler Metal

Filler metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3 flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper joints.

2.4 VALVES

Provide valves with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150



degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig.

Valves in sizes larger than 1 inch and used on steel pipe systems, may be provided with rigid grooved mechanical joint ends. Such grooved end valves shall be subject to the same requirements as rigid grooved mechanical joints and fittings and, shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the grooved pipe joint and fitting system.

2.4.1 Gate Valve

Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 Class 125 and shall be bronze with wedge disc, rising stem and threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-70, Class 125, cast iron with bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, and flanged or threaded ends.

2.4.2 Globe and Angle Valve

Globe and angle valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80, Class 125. Globe and angle valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-85, Class 125.

2.4.3 Check Valve

Check valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80. Check valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-71, Class 125.

2.4.4 Butterfly Valve

Butterfly valves shall conform to MSS SP-67, Type 1 and shall be either the wafer or lug type. Valves smaller than 8 inches shall have throttling handles with a minimum of two locking positions. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops and position indicators.

2.4.5 Ball Valve

Full port design. Ball valves 1/2 inch and larger shall conform to MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110 and shall be cast iron or bronze with threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Valves 8 inches or larger shall be provided with manual gear operators with position indicators. Ball valves may be provided in lieu of gate valves.

2.4.6 Square Head Cocks

Provide copper alloy or cast-iron body with copper alloy plugs, suitable for 125 psig water working pressure.

2.4.7 Calibrated Balancing Valves

Copper alloy or cast iron body, copper alloy or stainless internal working parts. Provide valve calibrated so that flow can be determined when the temperature and pressure differential across valve is known. Valve shall have an integral pointer which registers the degree of valve opening. Valve shall function as a service valve when in fully closed position. Valve shall be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage and shall be supplied with preformed insulation.

Provide valve bodies with tapped openings and pipe extensions with positive



shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation. The pipe extensions shall be provided with quick connecting hose fittings for a portable differential pressure meter connections to verify the pressure differential. Provide metal tag on each valve showing the gallons per minute flow for each differential pressure reading.

2.4.8 Pump Discharge Valve

Valve shall shall perform the functions of a nonslam check valve, a manual balancing valve, and a shutoff. Valve shall be of cast iron or ductile iron construction with bronze and/or stainless steel accessories. Provide an integral pointer on the valve which registers the degree of valve opening. Flow through the valve shall be manually adjustable from bubble tight shutoff to full flow. Valves smaller than 2 inches shall have NPT connections. Valves 2 inches and larger shall have flanged or grooved end connections. Valve design shall allow the back seat for the stem to be replaced in the field under full line pressure.

2.4.9 Water Temperature Regulating Valves

Provide copper alloy body, direct acting, pilot operated, for the intended service.

2.4.10 Water Pressure Reducing Valve

Valve, ASSE 1003 for water service, copper alloy body.

2.4.11 Pressure Relief Valve

Valve shall prevent excessive pressure in the piping system when the piping system reaches its maximum heat buildup. Valve, ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 and shall have cast iron bodies with corrosion resistant internal working parts. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet unless otherwise indicated.

2.4.12 Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves

ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4, copper alloy body, automatic re-seating, test lever, and discharge capacity based on AGA temperature steam rating.

2.4.13 Drain Valves

Valves, MSS SP-80 gate valves. Valve shall be manually-operated, 3/4 inch pipe size and above with a threaded end connection. Provide valve with a water hose nipple adapter. Freeze-proof type valves shall be provided in installations exposed to freezing temperatures.

2.4.14 Air Venting Valves

Automatic type air venting shall be the ball-float type with brass/bronze or brass bodies, 300 series corrosion-resistant steel float, linkage and removable seat. Air venting valves on water coils shall have not less than 1/8 inch threaded end connections. Air venting valves on water mains shall have not less than 3/4 inch threaded end connections. Air venting valves on all other applications shall have not less than 1/2 inch threaded end connections.



2.4.15 Vacuum Relief Valves

ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4

2.5 PIPING ACCESSORIES

2.5.1 Strainer

Strainer, ASTM F1199, except as modified and supplemented in this specification. Strainer shall be the cleanable, basket or "Y" type, the same size as the pipeline. Strainer bodies shall be fabricated of cast iron with bottoms drilled, and tapped. Provide blowoff outlet with pipe nipple, gate valve, and discharge pipe nipple. The bodies shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.

Provide strainer with removable cover and sediment screen. The screen shall be made of minimum 22 gauge corrosion-resistant steel, with small perforations numbering not less than 400 per square inch to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe. The flow shall be into the screen and out through the perforations.

2.5.2 Cyclonic Separator

Metal- bodied, with removal capability of removing solids 45 microns/325 mesh in size and heavier than 1.20 specific gravity, maximum pressure drop of 5 psid, with cleanout connection.

2.5.3 Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser

Angle type body with removable strainer basket and internal straightening vanes, a suction pipe support, and a blowdown outlet and plug. Strainer shall be in accordance with ASTM F1199, except as modified and supplemented by this specification. Unit body shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.

Strainer screen shall be made of minimum 22 gauge corrosion-resistant steel, with small perforations numbering not less than 400 per square inch to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe. Flow shall be into the screen and out through the perforations. Provide an auxiliary disposable fine mesh strainer which shall be removed 30 days after start-up. Provide warning tag for operator indicating scheduled date for removal.

Casing shall have connection sizes to match pump suction and pipe sizes, and be provided with adjustable support foot or support foot boss to relieve piping strains at pump suction. Provide unit casing with blowdown port and plug. Provide a magnetic insert to remove debris from system.

2.5.4 Flexible Pipe Connectors

Provide flexible bronze or stainless steel piping connectors with single braid. Equip flanged assemblies with limit bolts to restrict maximum travel to the manufacturer's standard limits. Unless otherwise indicated, the length of the flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended. Internal sleeves or liners, compatible with circulating medium, shall be provided when recommended by the manufacturer. Provide covers to protect the bellows where indicated.



2.5.5 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges

Gauges, ASME B40.100 with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shut-off valve. Provide gauges with 4.5 inch dial, brass or aluminum case, bronze tube, and siphon. Gauge shall have a range from 0 psig to approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working pressure. Each gauge range shall be selected so that at normal operating pressure, the needle is within the middle-third of the range.

2.5.6 Temperature Gauges

Temperature gauges, shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for the required temperature range. Provide gauges with fixed thread connection, dial face gasketed within the case; and an accuracy within 2 percent of scale range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2 degree graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face. The pointer shall be adjustable. Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells located within 5 feet of the finished floor. Universal adjustable angle type or remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells located 5 to 7 feet above the finished floor or in locations indicated. Remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells located 7 feet above the finished floor or in locations indicated.

2.5.6.1 Stem Cased-Glass

Stem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum, 9 inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube with indicating-fluid column.

2.5.6.2 Thermal Well

Thermal well shall be identical size, 1/2 or 3/4 inch NPT connection, brass or stainless steel. Where test wells are indicated, provide captive plug-fitted type 1/2 inch NPT connection suitable for use with either engraved stem or standard separable socket thermometer or thermostat. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. Extended neck thermal wells shall be of sufficient length to clear insulation thickness by 1 inch.

2.5.7 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports: to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.5.8 Escutcheons

Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Secure plates in place by internal spring tension or set screws. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.

2.6 PUMPS

Pumps shall be the electrically driven, non-overloading, centrifugal type which conform to HI 1.1-1.2. Pumps shall be selected at or within 5 percent of peak efficiency. Pump curve shall rise continuously from maximum capacity to shutoff. Pump motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1, be open, and have sufficient horsepower for the service required. Pump motor shall have the required capacity to prevent overloading with pump operating



at any point on its characteristic curve. Pump speed shall not exceed 3,600 rpm, except where the pump head is less than 60 feet of water, the pump speed shall not exceed 1,750 rpm. Pump motor shall be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in the cover or VFD as indicated.

2.6.1 Construction

Each pump casing shall be designed to withstand the discharge head specified plus the static head on system plus 50 percent of the total, but not less than 125 psig. Pump casing and bearing housing shall be close grained cast iron. High points in the casing shall be provided with manual air vents; low points shall be provided with drain plugs. Provide threaded suction and discharge pressure gage tapping with square-head plugs.

Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Impeller, impeller wearing rings, glands, casing wear rings, and shaft sleeve shall be bronze. Shaft shall be carbon or alloy steel, turned and ground. Bearings shall be ball-bearings, roller-bearings, or oil-lubricated bronze-sleeve type bearings, and be efficiently sealed or isolated to prevent loss of oil or entrance of dirt or water.

Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron base having lipped edges and tapped drainage openings or structural steel base with lipped edges or drain pan and tapped drainage openings.Pump shall be provided with steel shaft coupling guard. Base-mounted pump, coupling guard, and motor shall each be bolted to a fabricated steel base which shall have bolt holes for securing base to supporting surface. Close-coupled pump shall be provided with integrally cast or fabricated steel feet with bolt holes for securing feet to supporting surface. Close- coupled pumps shall be provided with drip pockets and tapped openings. Pump shall be accessible for servicing without disturbing piping connections. Shaft seals shall be mechanical-seals or stuffing-box type.

2.6.2 Mechanical Shaft Seals

Seals shall be single, inside mounted, end-face-elastomer bellows type with stainless steel spring, brass or stainless steel seal head, carbon rotating face, and tungsten carbide or ceramic sealing face. Glands shall be bronze and of the water-flush design to provide lubrication flush across the face of the seal. Bypass line from pump discharge to flush connection in gland shall be provided, with filter or cyclone particle separator in line.

2.6.3 Stuffing-Box Type Seals

Stuffing box shall include minimum 4 rows of square, impregnated TFE (Teflon) or graphite cord packing and a bronze split-lantern ring. Packing gland shall be bronze interlocking split type.

2.7 EXPANSION TANKS

Tank shall be welded steel, constructed for, and tested to pressure-temperature rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F. Provide tanks precharged to the minimum operating pressure. Tank shall have a replaceable polypropylene or butyl lined diaphragm which keeps the air charge separated from the water; shall be the captive air type.

Tanks shall accommodate expanded water of the system generated within the normal operating temperature range, limiting this pressure increase at all



components in the system to the maximum allowable pressure at those components. Each tank air chamber shall be fitted with a drain, fill, an air charging valve, and system connections. Tank shall be supported by steel legs or bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for horizontal installations. The only air in the system shall be the permanent sealed-in air cushion contained within the expansion tank.

2.8 AIR SEPARATOR TANKS

Design to separate air from water and to direct released air to automatic air vent. Unit shall be of one piece cast-iron construction with internal baffles and two air chambers at top of unit; one air chamber shall have outlet to expansion tank and other air chamber shall be provided with automatic air release device. Tank shall be steel, constructed for, and tested to a ANSI Class 125 pressure-temperature rating.

2.9 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS

When water treatment is specified, the use of chemical-treatment products containing equivalent chromium (CPR) is prohibited.

2.9.1 Chilled and Hot Water

Water to be used in the chilled and hot water systems shall be treated to maintain the conditions recommended by this specification as well as the recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and evaporator coils. Chemicals shall meet all required federal, state, and local environmental regulations for the treatment of evaporator coils and direct discharge to the sanitary sewer.

2.9.2 Water Treatment Services

The services of a company regularly engaged in the treatment of chilled water systems shall be used to determine the correct chemicals required, the concentrations required, and the water treatment equipment sizes and flow rates required. The company shall maintain the chemical treatment and provide all chemicals required for the chilled water systems for a period of 1 year from the date of occupancy. The chemical treatment and services provided over the 1 year period shall meet the requirements of this specification as well as the recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and evaporator coils. Acid treatment and proprietary chemicals shall not be used.

2.9.3 Chilled and Hot Water System

A shot feeder shall be provided on the chilled and hot water piping as indicated. Size and capacity of feeder shall be based on local requirements and water analysis. The feeder shall be furnished with an air vent, gauge glass, funnel, valves, fittings, and piping.

2.10 ELECTRICAL WORK

Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For



packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart.

Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.

Provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.

Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided to accomplish the same function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.

2.11 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

2.11.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided. The factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.

Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test, the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen.

If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

2.12 FACTORY APPLIED INSULATION

Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces



shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E84.

Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction. Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.13 NAMEPLATES

Major equipment including pumps, pump motors, expansion tanks, and air separator tanks shall have the manufacturer's name, type or style, model or serial number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. Plates shall be durable and legible throughout equipment life and made of stainless steel. Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.

2.14 RELATED COMPONENTS/SERVICES

2.14.1 Drain and Make-Up Water Piping

Requirements for drain and make-up water piping and backflow preventer is specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.


Requirements for field applied insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.


Requirements for field installed insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as supplemented and modified by this specification section.

2.14.4 Field Painting

Requirements for painting of surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting of items only primed at the factory, are specified in Section 09 90 00PAINTS AND COATINGS.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and work into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted without written approval. Cut pipe or tubing square, remove burrs by reaming, and fashion to permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers.

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required. Obtain approval before interrupting service. Furnish materials required to make connections into



existing systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish labor and tools for making actual connections to existing systems.

3.1.1 Welding

Provide welding work specified this section for piping systems in conformance with ASME B31.9, as modified and supplemented by this specification section and the accompanying drawings. The welding work includes: qualification of welding procedures, welders, welding operators, brazers, brazing operators, and nondestructive examination personnel; maintenance of welding records, and examination methods for welds.

3.1.1.1 Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)

Submit for review and approval the following documentation. This documentation and the subject qualifications shall be in compliance with ASME B31.9.

a. List of qualified welding procedures that is proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.

b. List of qualified welders, brazers, welding operators, and brazing operators that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.

c. List of qualified weld examination personnel that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.

3.1.1.2 Welding Procedures and Qualifications

a. Specifications and Test Results: Submit copies of the welding procedures specifications and procedure qualification test results for each type of welding required. Approval of any procedure does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing acceptable welds. Submit this information on the forms printed in ASME BPVC SEC IX or their equivalent.

b. Certification: Before assigning welders or welding operators to the work, submit a list of qualified welders, together with data and certification that each individual is performance qualified as specified. Do not start welding work prior to submitting welder, and welding operator qualifications. The certification shall state the type of welding and positions for which each is qualified, the code and procedure under which each is qualified, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the qualification tests.

3.1.1.3 Examination of Piping Welds

Conduct non-destructive examinations (NDE) on piping welds and brazing and verify the work meets the acceptance criteria specified in ASME B31.9. NDE on piping welds covered by ASME B31.9 is visual inspection only. Submit a piping welds NDE report meeting the requirements specified in ASME B31.9.

3.1.1.4 Welding Safety

Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.



3.1.2 Directional Changes

Make changes in direction with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller is permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar construction to form elbows or tees is not permitted. The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations is not acceptable.

3.1.3 Functional Requirements

Pitch horizontal supply mains down in the direction of flow as indicated. The grade shall not be less than 1 inch in 40 feet. Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes. Cap or plug open ends of pipelines and equipment during installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of the system.

Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated. Connections to appliances shall be made with malleable iron unions for steel pipe 2-1/2 inches or less in diameter, and with flanges for pipe 3 inches and above in diameter. Connections between ferrous and copper piping shall be electrically isolated from each other with dielectric waterways or flanges.

Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Pipe and fittings installed in inaccessible conduits or trenches under concrete floor slabs shall be welded. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and maintenance. Electric isolation fittings shall be provided between dissimilar metals.

3.1.4 Fittings and End Connections

3.1.4.1 Threaded Connections

Threaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with PTFE tape complying with ASTM D3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made.

3.1.4.2 Brazed Connections

Brazing, AWS BRH, except as modified herein. During brazing, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with a pressure regulated inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Before brazing copper joints, both the outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be cleaned with a wire fitting brush until the entire joint surface is bright and clean. Do not use brazing flux. Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints. Steel tubing joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Piping shall be supported prior to brazing and not be sprung or forced.

3.1.4.3 Welded Connections

Branch connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch outlets. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and foreign matter before the piping is assembled. During welding, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of



weld shall conform to ASME B31.9. Weld defects shall be removed and rewelded at no additional cost to the Government. Electrodes shall be stored and dried in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by the manufacturer. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.

3.1.4.4 Flanges and Unions

Except where copper tubing is used, union or flanged joints shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items. Flanged joints shall be assembled square end tight with matched flanges, gaskets, and bolts. Gaskets shall be suitable for the intended application.

3.1.5 Valves

Isolation gate or ball valves shall be installed on each side of each piece of equipment, at the midpoint of all looped mains, and at any other points indicated or required for draining, isolating, or sectionalizing purpose. Isolation valves may be omitted where balancing cocks are installed to provide both balancing and isolation functions. Each valve except check valves shall be identified. Valves in horizontal lines shall be installed with stems horizontal or above.

3.1.6 Air Vents

Air vents shall be provided at all high points, on all water coils, and where indicated to ensure adequate venting of the piping system.

3.1.7 Drains

Drains shall be provided at all low points and where indicated to ensure complete drainage of the piping. Drains shall be accessible, and shall consist of nipples and caps or plugged tees unless otherwise indicated.

3.1.8 Flexible Pipe Connectors

Connectors shall be attached to components in strict accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Hangers, when required to suspend the connectors, shall be of the type recommended by the flexible pipe connector manufacturer and shall be provided at the intervals recommended.

3.1.9 Temperature Gauges

Temperature gauges shall be located on coolant supply and return piping at each heat exchanger, on condenser water piping entering and leaving a condenser, at each automatic temperature control device without an integral thermometer, and where indicated or required for proper operation of equipment. Thermal wells for insertion thermometers and thermostats shall extend beyond thermal insulation surface not less than 1 inch.

3.1.10 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as supplemented and modified in this specification section. Pipe hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used. Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate



adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Piping subjected to vertical movement, when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.

3.1.10.1 Hangers

Type 3 shall not be used on insulated piping. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.

3.1.10.2 Inserts

Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.

3.1.10.3 C-Clamps

Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and have both locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

3.1.10.4 Angle Attachments

Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.

3.1.10.5 Saddles and Shields

Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall be used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping less than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than 60 degrees F. A high density insulation insert of cellular glass shall be used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.

3.1.10.6 Horizontal Pipe Supports

Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have the excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.

3.1.10.7 Vertical Pipe Supports

Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, and at intervals of not more than 15 feet, not more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.

3.1.10.8 Pipe Guides

Type 35 guides using, steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided where required to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Lateral restraints shall be provided as required. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.



3.1.10.9 Steel Slides

Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of lateral movement, an alternate guide method may be used. On piping 4 inches and larger, a Type 39 saddle shall be used. On piping under 4 inches, a Type 40 protection shield may be attached to the pipe or insulation and freely rest on a steel slide plate.

3.1.10.10 Multiple Pipe Runs

In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.

3.1.10.11 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Structural steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under this section. Material used for support shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.

3.1.11 Pipe Alignment Guides

Pipe alignment guides shall be provided where indicated for expansion loops, offsets, and bends and as recommended by the manufacturer for expansion joints, not to exceed 5 feet on each side of each expansion joint, and in lines 4 inches or smaller not more than 2 feet on each side of the joint.

3.1.12 Pipe Anchors

Anchors shall be provided where indicated. Unless indicated otherwise, anchors shall comply with the requirements specified. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles where required.

Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will injure the structure or adjacent construction during installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and conduit penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide essentially zero movement within penetration seal.

3.1.13 Building Surface Penetrations

Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated or approved. Except as indicated otherwise piping sleeves shall comply with requirements specified. Sleeves in nonload bearing surfaces shall be galvanized sheet metal, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Coating Class G-90,



20 gauge. Sleeves in load bearing surfaces shall be uncoated carbon steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40. Sealants shall be applied to moisture and oil-free surfaces and elastomers to not less than 1/2 inch depth. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members.

3.1.13.1 Refrigerated Space

Refrigerated space building surface penetrations shall be fitted with sleeves fabricated from hand-lay-up or helically wound, fibrous glass reinforced polyester or epoxy resin with a minimum thickness equal to equivalent size Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves shall be constructed with integral collar or cold side shall be fitted with a bonded slip-on flange or extended collar.

In the case of masonry penetrations where sleeve is not cast-in, voids shall be filled with latex mixed mortar cast to shape of sleeve and flange/external collar type sleeve shall be assembled with butyl elastomer vapor barrier sealant through penetration to cold side surface vapor barrier overlap and fastened to surface with masonry anchors.

Integral cast-in collar type sleeve shall be flashed with not less than 4 inches of cold side vapor barrier overlap of sleeve surface. Normally noninsulated penetrating round surfaces shall be sealed to sleeve bore with mechanically expandable seals in vapor tight manner and remaining warm and cold side sleeve depth shall be insulated with not less than 4 inches of foamed-in-place rigid polyurethane or foamed-in-place silicone elastomer.

Vapor barrier sealant shall be applied to finish warm side insulation surface. Warm side of penetrating surface shall be insulated beyond vapor barrier sealed sleeve insulation for a distance which prevents condensation. Wires in refrigerated space surface penetrating conduit shall be sealed with vapor barrier plugs or compound to prevent moisture migration through conduit and condensation therein.

3.1.13.2 General Service Areas

Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface. Pipes passing through concrete or masonry wall or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be of such size as to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch all-around clearance between bare pipe and sleeves or between jacketed-insulation and sleeves. Except in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve or between jacket over-insulation and sleeve shall be sealed in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.1.13.3 Waterproof Penetrations

Pipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane shall be installed through a .17 ounce copper sleeve, or a 0.032 inch thick aluminum sleeve, each within an integral skirt or flange.

Flashing sleeve shall be suitably formed, and skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe and be set over the roof or floor membrane in a troweled coating of bituminous cement. The flashing sleeve shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 2 inches above the roof or floor penetration. The annular space between the flashing sleeve and the bare pipe or between the flashing sleeve and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Penetrations shall be sealed by either one



of the following methods.

a. Waterproofing Clamping Flange: Pipes up to and including 10 inches in diameter passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be placed in the caulking recess.

b. Modular Mechanical Type Sealing Assembly: In lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange, a modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed. Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.

After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit seal between the pipe/conduit and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve involved. The Contractor electing to use the modular mechanical type seals shall provide sleeves of the proper diameters.

3.1.13.4 Fire-Rated Penetrations

Penetration of fire-rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.13.5 Escutcheons

Finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms, shall be provided with escutcheons. Where sleeves project slightly from floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used. Escutcheon shall be secured to pipe or pipe covering.

3.1.14 Access Panels

Access panels shall be provided where indicated for all concealed valves, vents, controls, and additionally for items requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced and maintained or completely removed and replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Install electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturers instructions.


Pipes shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all foreign matter. A temporary bypass shall be provided for all water coils to prevent flushing water from passing through coils. Strainers and valves



shall be thoroughly cleaned. Prior to testing and balancing, air shall be removed from all water systems by operating the air vents. Temporary measures, such as piping the overflow from vents to a collecting vessel shall be taken to avoid water damage during the venting process. Air vents shall be plugged or capped after the system has been vented. Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or directed.

3.4 FIELD TESTS

Field tests shall be conducted in the presence of the QC Manager or his designated representative to verify systems compliance with specifications. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor.

3.4.1 Equipment and Component Isolation

Prior to testing, equipment and components that cannot withstand the tests shall be properly isolated.

3.4.2 Pressure Tests

Each piping system , except for polypropylene piping, shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure not less than 188 psig for period of time sufficient to inspect every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours. Test pressure shall be monitored by a currently calibrated test pressure gauge. Leaks shall be repaired and piping retested until test requirements are met. No leakage or reduction in gage pressure shall be allowed.

Leaks shall be repaired by rewelding or replacing pipe or fittings. Caulking of joints will not be permitted. Concealed and insulated piping shall be tested in place before concealing.

Submit for approval pressure tests reports covering the above specified piping pressure tests; describe the systems tested, test results, defects found and repaired, and signature of the pressure tests' director. Obtain approval from the QC Manager before concealing piping or applying insulation to tested and accepted piping.

3.4.3 Related Field Inspections and Testing

3.4.3.1 Piping Welds

Examination of Piping Welds is specified in the paragraph EXAMINATION OF PIPING WELDS (above).

3.4.3.2 HVAC TAB

Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of HVAC water piping, and associated equipment is specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Coordinate with the TAB team, and provide support personnel and equipment as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC to assist TAB team to meet the TAB work requirements.


Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to



the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the chilled water piping system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be instructed in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Submit a lesson plan for the instruction course for approval. The lesson plan and instruction course shall be based on the approved operation and maintenance data and maintenance manuals.

Conduct a training course for the operating staff and maintenance staff selected by the Contracting Officer. Give the instruction during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be one man-day.. Use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction and the other time for instruction at the location of equipment or system.





SECTION 23 81 23.00 20

COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS02/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 1 2002; Addendum 2 2005; Addendum 3 2011) Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils


ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2013; Addenda A 2014; ERTA 1 2014; Addenda A-T AND SUPP 2015; ERTA 2 2015; INT 1 2015; ERTA 3 2015; ERTA 4 2016) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants


ASHRAE 55 (2010) Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy

ASHRAE 62.1 (2010) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality



ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components


ASTM D5864 (2011) Standard Test Method for Determining Aerobic Aquatic Biodegradation of Lubricants or Their Components

ASTM D6081 (1998; R 2014) Aquatic Toxicity Testing of Lubricants: Sample Preparation and Results

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 1


Interpretation

ETL TESTING LABORATORIES (ETL)

ETL DLP (updated continuously) ETL Listed Mark Directory



U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 1110-2-1424 (2016) Engineering and Design -- Lubricants and Hydraulic Fluids


UL Elec Equip Dir (2011) Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory


Provide new computer room air conditioning units (CRACU) complete and ready for operation. Size equipment based on Design Manual CS from the Air Conditioning Contractors of America; do not oversize.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Computer room air conditioning units; G

Space temperature control system drawings; G

Filters

Refrigerants: Provide MSDS sheets for all refrigerants

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Test Schedule; G

Manufacturer's Field Test Plans; G

Field Test Reports; G

Aquatic Toxicity

SD-07 Certificates

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 2


Credentials of the Manufacturer's Field Test Representative; G


Installation Manual for Each Type of CRACU


Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

Computer Room Air Conditioning Units, Data Package 4; G


Energy Efficient Equipment for Computer Room Air Conditioning Units; S

Ozone Depleting Substances; S

Indoor Air Quality During Construction; S

1.4 OZONE DEPLETION POTENTIAL

Equipment using refrigerants R-11, R-12, R-113, R-114, R-115, R-500, or refrigerants with ozone depletion factor (ODF) greater than 0.0, or refrigerants containing CFCs or HCFCs or Halons shall not be permitted. Refrigerant shall be an approved alternative refrigerant per EPA's Significant New Alternative Policy (SNAP) listing.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

For proper Indoor Environmental Quality, maintain positive pressure within the building. Ventilation shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 62.1 and all published addenda. Meet or exceed filter media efficiency as tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2. Thermal comfort shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 55.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.1.1 Energy Efficient Equipment for Computer Room Air Conditioning Units

Provide computer room air conditioning units meeting the efficiency requirements as stated within this section and provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT.

2.1.2 Ozone Depleting Substances

Computer room air conditioning units must not use CFC-based refrigerants, and must have an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) no greater than 0.0, with exception to R-123, in conformance with this section. Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES.

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 3


2.2 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (CRACU)

ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. Provide self-contained units, designed, and factory assembled. Unit shall be listed in UL Elec Equip Dir or ETL DLP for computer room application. Unit shall include room cabinet and frame, fan section, filter section, cooling coil, reheat coil, humidifier, controls, and, interconnecting piping internal to the CRACU.

2.2.1 Cabinet and Frame

2.2.1.1 Unit Cabinet

Unit frame shall be minimum 14 gage welded steel tubes or steel angles and shall be mill-galvanized or coated with an epoxy finish, or an approved manufacturer's standard finish, if equivalent.

Exterior panels shall be furniture grade steel sheet, minimum of 20 gage, mill-galvanized or coated with a corrosion-inhibiting epoxy finish, or an approved equivalent finish. Mill galvanized sheet metal shall be coated with not less than 1.25 ounces of zinc per square foot of two-sided surface. Mill rolled structural steel shall be hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted. Cut edges, burns and scratches in hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with galvanizing repair coating.

Provide removable panel for access to controls without interrupting airflow. Panels shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage under system operating pressure and shall be removable for service access without the use of special tools. Condensate pans shall be minimum 22 gage Type 304 stainless steel, non-corroding, double-sloped, and shall be piped to drain.

Exterior surfaces of cabinets constructed of mill-galvanized steel shall be finished by the manufacturer's standard enamel finish and color.

CRACU manufacturer's standard cabinet materials and finishes will be acceptable if considered equivalent to the above requirements by the Contracting Officer.

2.2.2 Fan Section

Fans which force air through coils into computer rooms shall have belt drives and adjustable sheaves sized to ensure achievement of design air flow by field adjustments. Fan system design shall be such that design air flow shall be achieved at the midpoint of sheave adjustment.

The supply air fan shall be AMCA certified, double-inlet/double-width, and equipped with forward-curved blades wheel. The supply air fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and equipped with V-belt drive. The fan shall have self-aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings with a minimum life span of 100,000 hours. Assess potential effects of lubricant on aquatic organisms in accordance with ASTM D6081 and submit aquatic toxicity reports. Assess biodegradation in accordance with ASTM D5864. In accordance with EM 1110-2-1424 Chapter 8, aquatic toxicity shall exceed 1,000 ppm at LL50 and biodegradation shall exceed 60 percent conversion of carbon to carbon dioxide in 28 days.

Provide V-belt drive sized for 200 percent of the motor nameplate rating. Fan speed shall be adjustable with cast iron variable pitch pulleys. Sheaves shall be within the middle one third of the sheave adjustment range.

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 4


The fan motor shall be drip-proof with NEMA rated frame, inherent overload protection, and sliding adjustable motor base. The maximum vibrations shall not exceed 2 mils in any plane.

2.2.3 Cooling Coil

Provide AHRI 410 coils and slope for drainage. Coil shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes with plate aluminum fins. Indoor and outdoor coils shall be matched and from same manufacturer. Use a low sensible heat ratio for more moisture removal. Each coil, in the production process, shall be individually tested at 320 psi with compressed air under water and verified to be air tight. Provide hydronic coils complete with drain and vent connections. Provide condensate drain pan of stainless steel construction with nonferrous connections and internal trap, and a condensate pump system complete with integral pump discharge check valve, integral float switch, reservoir, and pump and motor assembly.

2.2.4 Filters

Provide UL listed 2 inches thick deep pleated fiberglass throwaway type filters. Provide filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 as determined by ASHRAE 52.2. Provide one complete spare filter bank set for installation prior to final acceptance testing covered in Part 3 of this section.

2.2.5 Reheat Coil

Provide electric reheat coils with low watts density. The electric reheat coils shall be enclosed in 304 stainless steel tubes and 304 stainless steel fins. Provide modulating control of the electric reheat coils by multiple stages. Provide UL or ETL listed safety switches to protect system from overheating.

2.2.6 Humidifier

Humidifier section shall include liquid-level control, emergency overflow and automatic water supply system factory pre-piped for final connection. Provide stainless steel evaporator pan with water high level and low level alarms. Arrange system to be cleanable and serviceable.

Provide steam generator type humidifier. Provide steam generator humidifier cutout. Controls shall include steam generation, and flush cycle. Furnish two extra canisters.

2.2.7 Space Temperature Control System

Provide microprocessor control system integral with unit including electronic control center, control valves, sensors, wiring, and other appurtenances for workable system. Provide access panel or door in front of unit.

Isolate electronic control center from conditioned airstream to allow service while system is in operation. Provide control sensors in unit for cooling, dehumidifying, and humidifying. High-voltage circuits in system shall have individual leg overload protection. Starters, contactors, and relays shall be controlled by 24 volt control circuit.

High-voltage circuit components shall be protected by safety lock,

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 5


dead-front panel. Mount nonautomatic, molded-case circuit breaker in high-voltage section of electrical panel. Operating mechanism shall prevent access to high-voltage electrical components until switched to "OFF" position.

Include the following control capabilities:

a. Capable of changing the set points and sensitivity of the space and humidity along with their low and high alarm points.

b. Logging capability of the last 10 alarms and run time.

c. Diagnostics

Provide a BACnet interface on CRACU to enable the DDC system to monitor all operating parameters and alarm conditions.

2.2.8 Alarm Panel System

Provide unit with cabinet-mounted alarm panel which shall monitor high and low space temperature, high and low space humidity, dirty filters, loss of airflow, loss of water flow, and humidifier problems. Provide field accessible local audible alarm with silence pushbutton. Provide push-to-test lamps or all-lamp test pushbutton. CRACUs shall have local devices which provide signals for remote audible and visual alarming capability for the above specified alarm conditions.

2.2.9 Air Return and Delivery Orientation

Computer room air conditioning units shall be back return, and draw-thru cooling coil, and shall discharge air supply ductwork with through an acoustically-lined sweep or acoustically-lined multiple turning vane elbows provided to direct the flow of air away from the back of the unit. Provide acoustical lining on the interior of the discharge air devices in compliance with with requirements specified hereinafter in paragraph CABINET INTERIORS SOUND ATTENUATION.

2.3 ELECTRICAL

2.3.1 Electrical Motors, Controllers, Contactors, and Disconnects

Furnish with respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall conform to Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, as modified and supplemented by this section. Provide electrical connections under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide controllers and contactors with maximum of 120-volt control circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with controls furnished. Motors shall be variable-speed. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of providing additional electrical service and related work shall be included under this section.

2.3.2 Electrical Control Wiring

Provide control wiring under Section 23 09 23.13 20 SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS. Provide Space temperature control system drawings which include point-to-point electrical wiring diagrams.

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 6


2.4 HVAC WATER PIPING AND METAL DUCTWORK

Requirements for HVAC water piping and metal ductwork is specified in Section 23 64 26 CHILLED AND HOT WATER PIPING AND ACCESSORIES and Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS.

PART 3 EXECUTION


Perform and document the following:

3.1.1 Indoor Air Quality During Construction

Provide documentation showing that after construction ends, and prior to occupancy, new filters were installed in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 CRACU System

Installation of each CRACU system including equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, NFPA 70, as modified and supplemented by the requirements of this section and the CRACU manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2.2 Installation Instructions

Provide a manufacturer's installation manual for each type of CRACU.

3.2.3 Connections to Existing Systems

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required. Obtain approval before interrupting service. Furnish materials required to make connections into existing systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish labor and tools for making actual connections to existing systems.


Upon completion and before final acceptance of work, test each CRACU subsystem in service to demonstrate compliance with the contract requirements, including field testing specified below. Adjust controls and balance systems prior to final acceptance of completed systems. Test controls through every cycle of operation. Test safety controls to demonstrate performance of required function. Correct defects in work provided by Contractor and repeat tests. Furnish steam, fuel, water, electricity, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for tests. Flush and clean piping before placing in operation. Clean equipment, piping, strainers, and ducts. Prior to commencement of field testing, remove all filters and provide new filters.

3.4 FIELD TESTING

Provide field test plans, field test schedules, field tests and field test reports on each of the CRACUs. Field test each CRACU for Contracting

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 7


Officer acceptance in accordance with the CRACU manufacturer's approved field test plan.

3.4.1 Manufacturer's Field Test Plans

Submit field test plans developed by the manufacturer for each CRACU; submit the field test plans at least 90 calendar days prior to planned date of the field test. Field test plans developed by the installing Contractor, or the equipment sales agency furnishing the CRACU, will not be acceptable.

The Contracting Officer will review and approve the field test plan for each of the listed CRACU's prior to commencement of field testing of the equipment. The approved field test plans shall be followed for the field tests of the CRACU and test reporting.

3.4.1.1 Coordinated Testing

Indicate in each field test plan when work required by this section requires coordination with test work required by other specification sections. Furnish test procedures for the simultaneous or integrated testing of: CRACU controls which interlock and interface with controls factory prewired; and external controls for the CRACU provided under Section 23 09 23.13 20 SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS.

3.4.1.2 Prerequisite Testing

Each CRACU for which performance testing is dependent upon the completion of the work covered by Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC must have that work completed as a prerequisite to testing work under this section. Indicate in each field test plan when such prerequisite work is required.

3.4.1.3 Test Procedure

Indicate in each field test plan the CRACU manufacturer's published start-up, and field acceptance test procedures. Include in each test plan a detailed step-by-step procedure for testing automatic controls provided by the manufacturer.

Procedures shall be structured to test the controls through all modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing with the intended sequence of control.

Controllers shall be verified to be properly calibrated and have the proper set point to provide stable control of their respective equipment.

3.4.1.4 Performance Variables

Each test plan shall list performance variables that are required to be measured or tested as part of the field test.

Include, in the listed performance variables, requirements indicated on the CRACU schedules on the design drawings. Manufacturer shall furnish, with each test procedure, a description of acceptable results that have been verified.

Manufacturer shall identify the acceptable limits or tolerances within which each tested performance variable shall acceptably operate.

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 8


3.4.1.5 Test Configuration

Plans shall indicate that tests are to be performed for a minimum of four continuous hours in a wet coil condition. If test period is interrupted, the four hour test period shall be started over. Each test plan shall be job specific and shall address the particular CRACU and particular conditions which exist with this contract. Generic or general preprinted test procedures are not acceptable.

3.4.1.6 Tested Variables

Plans shall provide for air side testing which includes verification of the airflow, total static pressure; fan drive motor KW, amperage and RPM; and fan RPM. Provide entering air temperatures equal to those indicated on the CRACU schedules.

3.4.1.7 Thermal Testing

Plans shall provide thermal testing utilizing chilled water with temperatures equal to those indicated on the CRACU schedules. Thermal testing shall verify CRACU heating, sensible cooling, total cooling, and humidifying performance scheduled on the contract drawings.

3.4.1.8 Specialized Components

Include procedures for field testing and field adjusting specialized components, such as hot gas bypass control valves, or pressure valves.

3.4.1.9 Field Test Reporting Forms

Each test plan shall include the required test reporting forms to be completed by the Contractor's testing representatives.

3.4.2 Field Test Schedule

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 30 calendar days prior to the testing. Within 30 calendar days after acceptable completion of testing, submit each test report for the review and approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.4.3 Manufacturer's Test Representative

Furnish a factory trained field test representative authorized by the CRACU manufacturer to oversee the complete execution of the field testing. This test representative shall also review, approve, and sign the completed field test report. Signatures shall be accompanied by the person's name typed.

Submit credentials of the manufacturer's field test representative proposed, including current telephone number, to the Contracting Officer for review and approval. Submit these credentials with the written advance notice of the field tests

3.4.4 Field Tests

Conduct the field testing in compliance with the Contracting Officer approved manufacturer's field test plan, and in accordance with additional field testing requirements specified herein. Record the required data

SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 9


using the test reporting forms approved of the approved field test plan. Conduct the test for each CRACU for a continuous 24-hour test period. A CRACU shutdown before the continuous 24-hour test period is completed shall result in the 24-hour test period being started again and run for the required duration.

3.4.5 Deficiency Resolution

The test requirements shall be acceptably met; deficiencies identified during the tests shall be corrected in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Corrections shall be tested again in compliance with the requirements specified in the paragraph FIELD TEST PLANS.

3.4.6 Field Test Reports

Use the test reporting forms approved in the field test plan. Final test report forms shall be typed, including data entries and remarks. Completed test report forms for each CRACU shall be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor's test director and the QC manager.


SECTION 23 81 23.00 20 Page 10


SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B1 (2013) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B8 (2011) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D709 (2016) Laminated Thermosetting Materials


IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System


INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems


ANSI C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering

ANSI C80.1 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

ANSI C80.3 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)


NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General



Requirements

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2011) Enclosures

NEMA KS 1 (2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V Maximum)

NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications

NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2013) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2015) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2012) Wiring Devices Dimensions Specifications

NEMA Z535.4 (2011) American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels



NFPA 70E (2012; Errata 2012) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 780 (2014) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises




UL 1 (2005; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel

UL 1449 (2014; Reprint Mar 2016) Surge Protective Devices

UL 1660 (2004; Reprint Apr 2013) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 20 (2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap Switches

UL 360 (2013; Reprint May 2013) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

UL 44 (2010) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 467 (2013) Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A-486B (2013) Wire Connectors

UL 486C (2013) Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2013; Reprint Mar 2014) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 498 (2012; Reprint Aug 2013) Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 50 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations

UL 510 (2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A (2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B (2012) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings

UL 514C (1996; Reprint Nov 2011) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers


UL 651 (2011; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings



UL 67 (2009; Reprint Jan 2013) Standard for Panelboards

UL 797 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel

UL 83 (2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 943 (2006; Reprint Jun 2012) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with the "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Definitions of Reviewing Agency: "G" = Government Review No designation = For Information Only (CQC Manager)

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Panelboards; G

Transformers; G

Power Distribution Units (PDU's); G

Cable Trays; G

Dry Type Transformers; G

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles; G

Enclosure; G

Ground Rods; G



Ground Bus; G

Firestopping Materials; G

Circuit Breakers; G

Switches; G

Transformers; G

Enclosed Circuit Breakers; G

Telecommunications and CATV Grounding Busbar; G

Surge Protective Devices; G

Metering (see drawings for requirements); G

SD-06 Test Reports

600-Volt Wiring Test; G

Grounding System Test; G

Transformer Tests; G

Ground-fault Receptacle Test; G


Transformer Factory Tests; G


Electrical Systems; G

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.


1.4.1 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years



prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.

1.4.2.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

1.4.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Electrical Systems

Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. Include the following:

a. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


As a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials, equipment, and devices.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Conform to the following:

2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit

2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit

ANSI C80.1, UL 6.



2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

PVC Type EPC-40or EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.

2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.

2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)

UL 797, ANSI C80.3.

2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit

NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).

2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1.

2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel

UL 360.

2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 514B. Ferrous fittings: cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.

2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC

Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.

2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT

Steelcompression type.

2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.

2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1660.

2.3 CABLE TRAYS

NEMA VE 1. Provide the following:

a. Cable trays: form a wireway system, with a nominal depth.

b. Cable trays: constructed of aluminum for ladder trays and coated steel for basket trays..

c. Cable trays: include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware.

d. Edges, fittings, and hardware: finished free from burrs and sharp edges.



e. Fittings: ensure not less than load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and have manufacturer's minimum standard radius.

f. Radium of bends to meet EIA TIA Standards.

2.3.1 Basket-Type Cable Trays

Provide size as indicated with maximum wire mesh spacing of 2 by 4 inch.

2.3.2 Ladder-Type Cable Trays

Provide size as indicated with 6" rung spacing.

2.4 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.

2.4.1 Flush Floor Outlet Boxes

Provide as indicated on the drawings.

2.4.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications Systems


a. Standard type 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep with 2" x 4" trim ring.

b. Outlet boxes for wall-mounted telecommunications outlets: 4 by 2 1/8 by 2 1/8 inches deep.

c. Depth of boxes: large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend radii.

2.5 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES

Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel.

2.6 WIRES AND CABLES

Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site.

2.6.1 Conductors


a. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise.

b. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter: stranded.

c. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter: solid.



d. Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.

e. All conductors shall be: copper.

2.6.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:

a. Branch circuits: No. 12 AWG.

b. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits: No. 14 AWG.

c. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits: No. 16 AWG.

d. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits: No. 22 AWG.

2.6.2 Color Coding

Provide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.

2.6.2.1 Ground and Neutral Conductors

Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:

a. Grounding conductors: Green.

b. Neutral conductors: White.

c. Exception, where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals color coding: white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each.

2.6.2.2 Ungrounded Conductors

Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows:

a. 208/120 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue

b. 480/277 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - brown

(2) Phase B - orange

(3) Phase C - yellow

c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red



2.6.3 Insulation

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83 or Type XHHW or RHW conforming to UL 44, except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits: Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.

2.6.4 Bonding Conductors

ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.

2.6.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)

Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA-607 with No. 6 AWG minimum size, and sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG.

2.6.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical service ground in accordance with TIA-607. Size the bonding conductor for telecommunications the same as the TBB.

2.7 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires: insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

2.8 DEVICE PLATES


a. UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed.

b. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls: zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.

c. For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided.

d. Plates on finished walls: nylon or lexan, minimum 0.03 inch wall thickness and same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which they are mounted.

e. Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate.

f. Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.



g. Plates installed in wet locations: gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."

2.9 SWITCHES

2.9.1 Toggle Switches

NEMA WD 1, UL 20,, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Include the following:

a. Handles: white thermoplastic.

b. Wiring terminals: screw-type, side-wired or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.

c. Contacts: silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy.

d. Switches: rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.

2.9.2 Disconnect Switches

NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches. Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means. Provide switches in NEMA 1 or 3R, enclosure as indicated per NEMA ICS 6.

2.10 FUSES

NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch. Coordinate time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval. Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.

2.10.1 Fuseholders

Provide in accordance with UL 4248-1.

2.10.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)

UL 198M, Class RK-5 time-delay type. Provide only Class R associated fuseholders in accordance with UL 4248-12.

2.11 RECEPTACLES


a. UL 498, hard use (also designated heavy-duty), grounding-type.

b. Ratings and configurations: as indicated.

c. Bodies: white unless otherwise noted as per NEMA WD 1.

d. Face and body: thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.

e. Dimensional requirements: per NEMA WD 6.



f. Screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.

g. Grounding pole connected to mounting strap.

h. The receptacle: containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.

2.11.1 Weatherproof Receptacles

Provide receptacles, UL listed for use in "wet locations". Include cast metal box with gasketed, hinged, lockable and weatherproof while-in-use, polycarbonate, UV resistant/stabilized cover plate.

2.11.2 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Provide device capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.

2.11.3 Special Purpose Receptacles

Provide special receptacles as indicated on the drawings.

2.12 PANELBOARDS

Provide panelboards in accordance with the following:

a. UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated.

b. Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.

c. Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL.

d. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.

e. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise.

f. Main breaker: "separately" mounted above or below branch breakers.

g. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.

h. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.

i. Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP).

j. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.

k. Panelboards: listed and labeled for their intended use.l. Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD



FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

2.12.1 Enclosure

Provide panelboard enclosure in accordance with the following:

a. UL 50.

b. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted: hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

c. Cabinets: painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING.

d. Front edges of cabinets: form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front.

e. All cabinets: fabricated such that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.

f. Flush doors: mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed.

g. Each door: fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock. "Door in Door" construction shall be provided.

h. Keys: two provided with each lock, with all locks keyed alike.

i. Finished-head cap screws: provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.

2.12.2 Panelboard Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet. All busses shall be copper.

2.12.3 Circuit Breakers

UL 489, thermal magnetic-typeor solid state-type (see drawings for requirements) having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.12.3.1 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.



2.12.3.2 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment

Provide circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.

2.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as indicated. Provide solid neutral where indicated or required.

2.14 TRANSFORMERS

Provide transformers in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated.

b. Provide transformers in NEMA 1 enclosure.

c. Transformer insulation system:

(1) 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.

(2) 180 degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.d. Transformer of 150

degrees C temperature rise: capable of carrying continuously 100 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating.

e. Transformers: quiet type with maximum sound level at least 3 decibels less than NEMA standard level for transformer ratings indicated.

2.14.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency

Transformers, indicated and specified with: 480V primary, 80 degrees C or 115 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single phase or 30 to 500 for three phase, energy efficient type. Minimum efficiency, based on factory test results: not be less than NEMA Class 1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1.

2.14.2 Transformers With Non-Linear Loads

Provide transformers for non-linear loads in accordance with the following:

a. Transformer insulation: UL recognized 220 degrees C system. Neither the primary nor the secondary temperature is allowed to exceed 220 degrees C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of non-sinusoidal load.

b. Transformers are to be UL listed and labeled for K-9 K-Factor rating as indicated in accordance with UL 1561.

c. Transformers evaluated by the UL K-Factor evaluation: listed for 115



degrees C average temperature rise only.

d. Transformers with K-Factor ratings with temperature rise of 150 degrees C rise are not acceptable.

e. K-Factor rated transformers impedance: allowed range of 3 percent to 5 percent, with a minimum reactance of 2 percent to prevent excessive neutral current when supplying loads with large amounts of third harmonic.2.15 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

2.16 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

2.16.1 Ground Rods

UL 467. Ground rods: copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length 10 feet. Sectional ground rods are permitted.

2.16.2 Ground Bus

Copper ground bus: provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated.

2.16.3 Telecommunications Grounding Busbar

Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor installation in accordance with TIA-607. Busbars: plated for reduced contact resistance. If not plated, clean the busbar prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar and apply an anti-oxidant to the contact area to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB): sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:

a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs,

b. Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick by 4 in wide for the TMGB with length as indicated;

c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2.17 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.18 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:

a. ASTM D709.

b. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings.

c. Each nameplate inscription: identify the function and, when



applicable, the position.

d. Nameplates: melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.

e. Surface: matte finish. Corners: square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core.

f. Minimum size of nameplates: one by 2.5 inches.

g. Lettering size and style: a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

2.19 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, and similar equipment that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment. See Spec Section 33 70 02.00 10 for coordination study and arc flash analysis requirements.

2.20 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING .

2.21 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Provide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 where indicated. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker. Surge protectors shall meet the requirements of UL96/96A (required for lightning protection certification).

Provide the following modes of protection:

FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS- Phase to phase ( L-L ) Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) Neutral to ground ( N-G ) Phase to ground ( L-G )

SPDs at the service entrance: provide with a minimum surge current rating of 80,000 amperes for L-L mode minimum and 40,000 amperes for other modes (L-N, L-G, and N-G) and downstream SPDs rated 40,000 amperes for L-L mode minimum and 20,000 amperes for other modes (L-N, L-G, and N-G).

Provide SPDs per NFPA 780 for the lightning protection system.

Maximum L-N, L-G, and N-G Voltage Protection Rating:

600V for 208Y/120V, three phase system 1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system

Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating:



1,200V for 208Y/120V, three phase system 1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system

Provide SPDs. Maximum L-N, L-G, and N-G Voltage Protection Rating:

700V for 208Y/120V, three phase system 1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system

The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating for L-N and L-G modes of operation: 120% of nominal voltage for 240 volts and below; 115% of nominal voltage above 240 volts to 480 volts.

2.22 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following:

a. NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein.

b. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures: thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting.

c. Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections.

d. Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.

e. Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.

f. Equipment located indoors: ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors: ANSI Light Gray or Dark Gray.

g. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.

2.23 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.23.1 Transformer Factory Tests

Submittal: include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each transformer and also provide the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype" tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to those specified.

2.24 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

Prepare analyses as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces: conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Underground Service

Underground service conductors and associated conduit: continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.

3.1.2 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures: labeled and identified as such.

3.1.2.1 Labels

Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, label each enclosure, new and existing, as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum: indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure: provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.

3.1.3 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor: separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size: 1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings: made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts, with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches. Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.3.1 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire: plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

3.1.4 Conduit Installation

Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible



after completion of project.

3.1.4.1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a. Do not install underground.

b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.

c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT.

d. Do not use in hazardous areas.

e. Do not use outdoors.

3.1.4.2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile magazines, and other such areas.

(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.

(3) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or fire-rated floors.

(4) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.

3.1.4.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS.

3.1.4.4 Underground Conduit

Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40. Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor slab. Plastic coating: extend minimum 6 inches above floor.

3.1.4.5 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs

Conduit run under floor slab: located a minimum of 12 inches below the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.

3.1.4.6 Conduit Through Floor Slabs

Where conduits rise through floor slabs, do not allow curved portion of bends to be visible above finished slab.

3.1.4.7 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs

PVC, Type EPC-40, unless indicated otherwise. Locate so as not to adversely affect structural strength of slabs. Install conduit within middle one-third of concrete slab. Do not stack conduits. Space conduits



horizontally not closer than three diameters, except at cabinet locations. Curved portions of bends must not be visible above finish slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum one inch cover over conduit. Where embedded conduits cross building and/or expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion/deflection fittings and bonding jumpers. Expansion/deflection fittings must allow horizontal and vertical movement of raceway. Conduit larger than one inch trade size: installed parallel with or at right angles to main reinforcement; when at right angles to reinforcement, install conduit close to one of supports of slab. Where nonmetallic conduit is used, convert raceway to plastic coated rigid steel or plastic coated steel IMC before rising above floor, unless specifically indicated.

3.1.4.8 Stub-Ups

Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.

3.1.4.9 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, threaded rod conduit hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners. Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete ceiling. Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems: supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Do not share supporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Coordinate installationwith above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations. Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.4.10 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes,



fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.

3.1.4.11 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.

3.1.4.12 Flexible Connections

Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size: 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.1.4.13 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway

Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA-569.

a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to the telecommunications room: installed and cabling length requirements in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Size conduits, and cable trays as indicated.

b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms.

3.1.4.14 Community Antenna Television (CATV) System Conduits

Install a system of CATV wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires cable trays, and other accessories for CATV outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA-569. Provide distribution system with star topology with empty conduit and pullwire from each outlet to the headend equipment location. CATV cable must be 2 meters from all other network cables.

3.1.5 Cable Tray Installation

Install and ground in accordance with NFPA 70. In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with TIA-569, and TIA-607. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support in accordance with manufacturer recommendations but at not more than 6 foot intervals. Coat contact surfaces of aluminum connections with an antioxidant compound prior to assembly. Adjacent cable tray sections: bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable tray sections. For grounding of cable tray system provide No. 2 AWG bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section, except use No. 1/0 aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Terminate cable trays 10 inches from both sides of smoke and fire partitions. Install conductors run through smoke and fire partitions in 4 inch rigid steel conduits with grounding bushings, extending 12 inches beyond each side of partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to



maintain smoke and fire ratings of partitions. Firestop penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.6 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports

Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways: cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel. Provide each box with volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures: minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls: square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; provide readily removable fixturesfor access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or nail-type nylon anchors may be used in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields, or machine screws. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.

3.1.6.1 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets: minimum 4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets: a minimum of 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep, except for wall mounted telephones. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls. For power and misc. systems, all communications outlets are to utilize surface boxes and/or raceways.

3.1.6.2 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.



3.1.7 Mounting Heights

Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished floor. Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Wall-mounted telecommunications outlets: mounted at height 48 inches above finished floor. Mount other devices as indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets to center of device or outlet.

3.1.8 Conductor Identification

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, provide color coding by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves. Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.

3.1.8.1 Marking Strips

Provide marking strips in accordance with the following:

a. Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.

b. Use permanent ink for the wire numbers

c. Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides, or provide two marking strips with each block.

d. Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.

e. Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams.

f. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Government's wire designations.

g. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required.

3.1.9 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless



connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.

3.1.10 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.

3.1.11 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.12 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, access flooring support system, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This includes lightning protection, electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Make interconnection to the gas line on the customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system. In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA-607. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.

3.1.12.1 Ground Rods

Provide cone pointed ground rods. Measure the resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Do not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven ground. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod,2 additional rods, spaced on center, not less than twice the distance of the length of the rod, or if sectional type rods are used,2 additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.

3.1.12.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, excepting specifically those connections for which access for periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression connector.



a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Provide tools and dies as recommended by the manufacturer. Use an embossing die code or other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.12.3 Ground Bus

Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment: effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. Bond the ground bus to the entrance ground, . Make connections and splices of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except use pressure connectors or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment.

3.1.12.4 Resistance

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system: do not exceed 10 ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 10 ohms, contact Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.1.12.5 Telecommunications System

Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:

a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility. Install telecommunications grounding busbars to maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and insulated from its support. A minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and adjust the mounting height to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing.

b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds3 feet in length, bond the conductors to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor, minimum.

c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications grounding connections to the TMGB: utilize listed compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections. Bond all metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the TMGB. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room; bond each TMGB to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible, bond the metal frame to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor.



When practicable because of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building must be listed for the intended purpose.

3.1.13 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying the associated equipment.

3.1.14 Watthour Meters

ANSI C12.1.

3.1.15 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible. Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet.

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.

3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting: as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test.

3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.

3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum resistance: 250,000 ohms.



3.5.3 Transformer Tests

Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.

3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.

3.5.5 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.

3.5.6 Watthour Meter

a. Visual and mechanical inspection

(1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.

(2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meter.

(2) Calibrate meters to one-half percent.

(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable.




SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS05/15

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware


ASTM A780/A780M (2009; R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM D1535 (2014) Specifying Color by the Munsell System






IEEE C37.90.1 (2013) Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power



Equipment and Systems


ANSI C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering

ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1 (2013) General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 V or Less

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2011) Enclosures

NEMA PB 2 (2011) Deadfront Distribution Switchboards





UL 489 (2013; Reprint Mar 2014) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 891 (2005; Reprint Oct 2012) Switchboards

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor QC approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Switchboard Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Switchboard; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Switchboard Design Tests; G

Switchboard Production Tests; G

Acceptance Checks and Tests; G




Switchboard Operation and Maintenance, Data Package 5; G


Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G

Equipment Test Schedule; G

Request for Settings; G

Required Settings; G

Service Entrance Available Fault Current Label; G


1.4.1 Product Data

Include manufacturer's information on each submittal for each component, device and accessory provided with the switchboard including:

a. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings.

b. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (in hard copy and electronic format) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device.

1.4.2 Switchboard Drawings

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Identify circuit terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Include the nameplate data, size, and capacity on submittal. Also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references on submittals. Include the following:

a. One-line diagram including breakers current transformers, and meters.

b. Outline drawings including front elevation, section views, footprint, and overall dimensions.

c. Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars.

d. Markings and NEMA nameplate data.

e. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings.

f. Wiring diagrams and elementary diagrams with terminals identified, and indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the



interconnection between the items.

g. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (in electronic format) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device. Use this information (designer of record) to provide breaker settings that ensures protection and coordination are achieved.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship, and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data

Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.5.2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Assemble and securely bind manuals in durable, hard covered, water



resistant binders. Assemble and index the manuals in the following order with a table of contents:

a. Manufacturer's O&M information required by the paragraph SD-10, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

b. Catalog data required by the paragraph SD-03, PRODUCT DATA.

c. Drawings required by the paragraph SD-02, SHOP DRAWINGS.

d. Prices for spare parts and supply list.

e. Information on metering.

f. Production test reports.

1.5.3 Spare Parts

Provide spare parts as specified below. Provide spare parts that are of the same material and workmanship, meet the same requirements, and are interchangeable with the corresponding original parts furnished.

a. Quantity 2 - Fuses of each type and size.

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide equipment items that are supported by service organizations reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be switchboards and related accessories are specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.2 SWITCHBOARD

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

2.2.1 Ratings

Provide equipment with the following ratings:

a. Voltage rating: as indicated.

b. Continuous current rating of the main bus: amperes asindicated.

c. Short-circuit current rating: as indicated.

d. UL listed and labeled as service entrance equipment where required.

2.2.2 Construction




a. Switchboard: consisting of one or more vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly and rear aligned.

b. All circuit breakers: front accessible.

c. Where indicated, "space for future" or "space" means to include a vertical bus provided behind a blank front cover. Where indicated, "provision for future" means full hardware provided to mount a breaker suitable for the location.

d. Completely factory engineered and assembled, including protective devices and equipment indicated with necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring.

2.2.2.1 Enclosure


a. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6 Type as indicated.

b. Enclosure: bolted together with removable bolt-on, and sloping roof downward toward rear for NEMA 3R enclosure.

c. Front doors: provided with padlockable vault handles with a three point catch for NEMA 3R enclosure.

d. Bases, frames and channels of enclosure: corrosion resistant and fabricated of galvanized steel.

e. Base: includes any part of enclosure that is within 3 inches of concrete pad.

f. Galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A653/A653M G90 coating, and ASTM A153/A153M, as applicable. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable.

g. Paint color: ASTM D1535 light gray No. 61 or No. 49 over rust inhibitor.

2.2.2.2 Bus Bars


a. Bus bars: copper with silver-plated contact surfaces.

(1) Phase bus bars: uninsulated.

(2) Neutral bus: rated 100 percent of the main bus continuous current rating.

b. Make bus connections and joints with hardened steel bolts.

c. Main-bus (through bus): rated at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard.

d. Minimum one-quarter by 2 inch copper ground bus secured to each vertical section along the entire length of the switchboard.



2.2.2.3 Main Section

Provide the main section consisting of molded-case circuit breakers and branch devices as where indicated. Main shall be individually mounted.

2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections

Provide the distribution section consisting of group mounted molded-case circuit breakers as indicated. Distribution section may be combined with main.

2.2.2.5 Auxiliary Equipment

Provide auxiliary equipment consisting of indicated metering equipment as indicated on the drawings.

2.2.2.6 Handles

Provide handles for individually mounted devices of the same design and method of external operation. Label handles prominently to indicate device ampere rating, color coded for device type. Identify ON-OFF indication by handle position and by prominent marking.

2.2.3 Protective Device

Provide main and branch protective devices as indicated.

2.2.3.1 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker


a. UL 489. UL listed and labeled, 100 percent rated main breaker standard rated branch breakers, manually operated, low voltage molded-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating as indicated.

b. Breaker frame sizes: as indicated.

c. Series rated circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.2.4 Electronic Trip Units

Equip breakers where indicated with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors and a microprocessor-based trip unit that provides true rms sensing adjustable time-current circuit protection. Include the following:

a. Current sensors ampere rating: as indicated.

b. Trip unit ampere rating: as indicated.

c. Ground fault protection: where indicated.

d. Electronic trip units: provide additional features as indicated on the drawings:



2.2.5 Metering

2.2.5.1 Digital Meters

IEEE C37.90.1 for surge withstand. Provide true rms, plus/minus one percent accuracy, programmable, microprocessor-based meter enclosed in a sealed case with the following features.

a. Display capability:

(1) Multi-Function Meter: Display a selected phase to neutral voltage, phase to phase voltage, percent phase to neutral voltage THD, percent phase to phase voltage THD; a selected phase current, neutral current, percent phase current THD, percent neutral current; selected total PF, kW, KVA, kVAR, FREQ, kVAh, kWh. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over/under voltage, over/under KVA, over/under frequency, over/under selected PF/kVAR, voltage phase reversal, voltage imbalance, reverse power, over percent THD. Include a Form C KYZ pulse output relay on the meter.

b. Design meters to accept input from standard 5A secondary instrument transformers and direct voltage monitoring range to 600 volts, phase to phase.

2.2.6 Wire Marking

Mark control and metering conductors at each end. Provide factory installed, white, plastic tubing, heat stamped with black block type letters on factory-installed wiring. On field-installed wiring, provide white, preprinted, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sleeves, heat stamped with black block type letters. Provide a single letter or number on each sleeve, elliptically shaped to securely grip the wire, and keyed in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent sleeves. Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination of individual sleeves. Indicate on each wire marker the device or equipment, including specific terminal number to which the remote end of the wire is attached.


Provide a nameplate on each item of equipment bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not acceptable. This nameplate and method of attachment may be the manufacturer's standard if it contains the required information.


ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard, equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in this section or as indicated on the drawings. Identify on each nameplate inscription the function and, when applicable, the position. Provide nameplates of melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Provide matte finish surface. Provide square corners. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Provide nameplates with minimum size of one by 2.5 inches. Provide lttering that is a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.




2.5.1 Equipment Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

Provide the following as part of test equipment calibration:

a. Provide a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

b. Accuracy: Traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

c. Instrument calibration frequency schedule: less than or equal to 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

d. Dated calibration labels: visible on all test equipment.

e. Calibrating standard: higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

f. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

(1) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(2) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.5.2 Switchboard Design Tests

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

2.5.2.1 Design Tests

Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as that provided by this specification.

a. Short-circuit current test.

b. Enclosure tests.

c. Dielectric test.

2.5.2.2 Additional Design Tests

In addition to normal design tests, perform the following tests on the actual equipment. Furnish reports which include results of design tests performed on the actual equipment.

a. Temperature rise tests.



b. Continuous current.

2.5.3 Switchboard Production Tests

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. Furnish reports which include results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this project. These tests include:

a. 60-hertz dielectric tests.

b. Mechanical operation tests.

c. Electrical operation and control wiring tests.

d. Ground fault sensing equipment test.


Provide a power system study as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM UNDERGROUND.

2.7 ARC FLASH WARNING LABEL

Provide warning label for switchboards. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the enclosure warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and appropriate PPE required. Provide label format as indicated.

2.8 SERVICE ENTRANCE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT LABEL

Provide label on exterior of switchboards used as service equipment listing the maximum available fault current at that location. Include on the label the date that the fault calculation was performed and the contact information for the organization that completed the calculation. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the switchboard. Provide label format as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounds and grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms.

3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes

Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of the ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.



3.2.2 Equipment Grounding

Provide bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG not less than 24 inches below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" applies.

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. Install exothermic welds and compression connectors as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.

3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.

3.3.1 Switchboard

ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1.

3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers

ANSI C12.1.

3.3.3 Field Applied Painting

Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3.4 Galvanizing Repair

Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A780/A780M, zinc rich paint, for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has been applied to.

3.3.5 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting


3.4 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

3.4.1 Exterior Location

Mount switchboard on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 inch No. 6 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab.



b. Place slab on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base.

c. Install slab such that the top of the concrete slab is approximately 4 inches above the finished grade.

d. Provide edges above grade 1/2 inch chamfer.

e. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.

f. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted.

g. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant.

h. Cut off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface.

i. Provide concrete work as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.4.2 Interior Location

Mount switchboard on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least 4 inches thick.

b. Install slab such that the top of the concrete slab is approximately 4 inches above the finished grade.

c. Provide edges above grade 1/2 inch chamfer.

d. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.

e. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted.

f. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant.

g. Cut off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface.

h. Provide concrete work as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


Submit Required Settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement. See Specification Section 33 70 02.00 10 for coordination study requirements.

3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.



3.5.1.1 Switchboard Assemblies

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

(1) Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

(2) Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.

(3) Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment.

(4) Clean switchboard and verify shipping bracing, loose parts, and documentation shipped inside cubicles have been removed.

(5) Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit, and missing hardware.

(6) Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings as well as to the circuit breaker’s address for microprocessor-communication packages.

(7) Verify that current transformer ratios correspond to approved shop drawings.

(8) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

(9) Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.

(10) Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended lubricants.

(11) Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.

(12) Verify correct barrier installation and operation.

(13) Exercise all active components.

(14) Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.

(15) Verify that filters are in place and vents are clear.

(16) Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument transformer withdrawal disconnects.

(17) Inspect control power transformers.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.

(2) Perform dielectric withstand voltage tests.



(3) Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.

(4) Perform control wiring performance test.

(5) Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of assembly.

3.5.1.2 Circuit Breakers - Low Voltage - Power


(1) Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

(3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

(4) Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the breaker.

(5) Inspect arc chutes.

(6) Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition, wear, and alignment.

(7) Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct.

(8) Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and its operating mechanism.


(10) Verify cell fit and element alignment.

(11) Verify racking mechanism.

(12) Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended lubricants.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform contact-resistance tests on each breaker.

(2) Perform insulation-resistance tests.

(3) Adjust Breaker(s) for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings.

(4) Determine long-time minimum pickup current by primary current injection.

(5) Determine long-time delay by primary current injection.



(6) Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.

(7) Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.

(8) Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.

(9) Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground-fault or undervoltage relays, to ensure operation of shunt trip devices; Check the operation of electrically-operated breakers in their cubicle.

(10) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.

(11) Verify operation of charging mechanism.

3.5.1.3 Circuit Breakers

Low Voltage Molded Case with Solid State Trips


(1) Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

(2) Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.

(3) Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

(4) Inspect case for cracks or other defects.

(5) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted connections and/or cable connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

(6) Inspect mechanism contacts and arc chutes in unsealed units.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform contact-resistance tests.


(3) Perform Breaker adjustments for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings.

(4) Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests

(5) Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.

(6) Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection.

(7) Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection.



(8) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and anti-pump function.

3.5.1.4 Current Transformers




(3) Verify correct connection.

(4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit.


(6) Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.


(3) Perform polarity tests.

(4) Perform ratio-verification tests.

3.5.1.5 Metering and Instrumentation




(3) Verify tightness of electrical connections.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale.

(2) Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published data.

(3) Verify all instrument multipliers.

(4) Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage



transformer secondary circuits are intact.

3.5.1.6 Grounding System


(1) Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.

b. Electrical Tests

(1) IEEE 81. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. Use an instrument equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

(2) Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

3.5.2 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. Trip circuit breakers by operation of each protective device. Test each item to perform its function not less than three times. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, provide the Contracting Officer 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times for checks, settings, and tests.




SECTION 26 41 00

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES






NFPA 780 (2014) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF)

AFI 32-1065 (1998) Grounding Systems



UL 96 (2005; Reprint Sep 2013) Standard for Lightning Protection Components




Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain prior approval of Contracting Officer before making any departures from the design.

1.2.2 System Requirements

Provide a system furnished under this specification consisting of the latest UL Listed products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in production of lightning protection system components. Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 780, and UL 96.



1.2.3 Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation

Provide documentation showing that the installer is certified with a commercial third-party inspection company whose sole work is lightning protection, or is a UL Listed Lightning Protection Installer. In either case, the documentation must show that they have completed and passed the requirements for certification or listing, and have a minimum of 2 years documented experience installing lightning protection systems for DoD projects of similar scope and complexity.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Definitions of Reviewing Agency: "G" = Government Review

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Overall lightning protection system; G

Each major component; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan; G

Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test; G

SD-07 Certificates

Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation; G

Component UL Listed and Labeled; G


In each standard referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" or "must" has been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these standards to "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean Contracting Officer.

1.4.1 Installation Drawings

1.4.1.1 Overall System Drawing

Submit installation shop drawing for the overall lightning protection system. Include on the drawings the physical layout of the equipment (plan view and elevations), mounting details, relationship to other parts of the work, and wiring diagrams.

1.4.1.2 Major Components

Submit detail drawings for each major component including manufacturer's



descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions.

1.4.2 Component UL Listed and Labeled

Submit proof of compliance that components are UL Listed and Labeled. Listing alone in UL Electrical Constructn, which is the UL Electrical Construction Directory, is not acceptable evidence. In lieu of Listed and Labeled, submit written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that items have been tested and conform to requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories.

1.4.3 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan

Provide a lightning protection and grounding system test plan. Detail both the visual inspection and electrical testing of the system and components in the test plan. Identify (number) the system test points/locations along with a listing or description of the item to be tested and the type of test to be conducted. As a minimum, include a sketch of the facility and surrounding lightning protection system as part of the specific test plan for each structure. Include the requirements specified in paragraph, "Testing of Integral Lightning Protection System" in the test plan.

1.4.4 Lightning Protection System Inspection Certificate

Provide certification from a commercial third-party inspection company whose sole work is lightning protection, stating that the lightning protection system complies with NFPA 780 and AFI 32-1065. Third party inspection company cannot be the system installer or the system designer. Alternatively, provide a UL Lightning Protection Inspection Master Label Certificate for each facility indicating compliance to NFPA 780 and AFI 32-1065. In either case, AFI 32-1065 takes precedence over NFPA 780, whether or not it is more stringent.

Inspection must cover every connection, air terminal, conductor, fastener, accessible grounding point and other components of the lightning protection system to ensure 100% system compliance. This includes witnessing the tests for the resistance measurements for ground rods with test wells, and for continuity measurements for bonds. It also includes verification of proper surge protective devices for power, data and telecommunication systems. Random sampling or partial inspection of a facility is not acceptable.

The new building will be physically connected to the existing building. The existing building does not have a lightning protection system, therefore the new buildings' lightning protection system cannot be provided with a UL Label (the system will be designed and installed to UL Standards but the actual certification cannot be provided).

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain prior approval of Contracting Officer before changing the design.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Do not use a combination of materials that forms an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions exist which would cause corrosion of conductors, provide conductors with protective coatings, such as tin or lead, or oversize conductors. Where a mechanical hazard is involved, increase conductor size to compensate for the hazard or protect conductors. When metallic conduit or tubing is provided, electrically bond conductor to conduit or tubing at the upper and lower ends by clamp type connectors or welds (including exothermic). All lightning protection components, such as bonding plates, air terminals, air terminal supports and braces, chimney bands, clips, connector fittings, and fasteners are to comply with the requirements of UL 96 classes as applicable.

2.1.1 Main and Bonding Conductors

NFPA 780 and UL 96 Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable.

2.1.2 Copper Only

Provide copper conductors, except where aluminum conductors are required for connection to aluminum equipment, or where contact is required with materials not compatible with copper.

2.2 COMPONENTS

2.2.1 Air Terminals

Provide solid air terminals with a blunt tip. Tubular air terminals are not permitted. Support air terminals more than 24 inches in length by suitable brace, supported at not less than one-half the height of the terminal.

2.2.2 Ground Rods

Provide ground rods made of copper-clad steel conforming to conform to UL 467. Provide ground rods that are not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length. Do not mix ground rods of copper-clad steel or solid copper on the job.

2.2.3 Connections and Terminations

Provide connectors for splicing conductors that conform to UL 96, class as applicable. Conductor connections can be made by clamps or welds (including exothermic). Provide style and size connectors required for the installation.

2.2.4 Connector Fittings

Provide connector fittings for "end-to-end", "Tee", or "Y" splices that conform to NFPA 780 and UL 96.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM

Provide a lightning protection system that meets the requirements of NFPA 780. Lightning protection system consists of air terminals, roof conductors, down conductors, ground connections, and grounding electrodes. Bond secondary conductors with grounded metallic parts within the building. Make interconnections within side-flash distances at or below the level of the grounded metallic parts.

3.1.1 Roof-Mounted Components

Coordinate with the roofing manufacturer and provide certification that the roof manufacturer's warranty is not violated by the installation methods for air terminals and roof conductors.

3.1.1.1 Air Terminals

Use adhesive shoes with adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer when installing air terminals on "rubber" (EPDM) type roofs. In areas of snow or constant wind, ensure that a section of roofing material (minimum dimensional area of 1 square foot) is first glued to the roof and then the air terminal is glued to it unless the roof manufacturer recommends another solution. Use a standing seam base for installation of air terminals on a standing seam metal roof that does not produce any roof penetrations.

3.1.1.2 Roof Conductors

Use adhesive shoes with adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer when installing roof conductors on "rubber" (EPDM) type roofs. Use a standing seam base for installation of roof conductors on a standing seam metal roof that does not produce any roof penetrations.

3.1.2 Down Conductors

Down conductors are to be concealed within the wall cavities.

3.1.3 Ground Connections

Attach each down conductor to ground rods by welding (including exothermic), brazing, or compression. All connections to ground rods below ground level must be by exothermic weld connection or with a high compression connection using a hydraulic or electric compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Accessible connections above ground level and in test wells can be accomplished by mechanical clamping.


Extend driven ground rods vertically into the existing undisturbed earth for a distance of not less 10 feet. Set ground rods not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet, from the structure foundation, and at least beyond the drip line for the facility. After the completed installation, measure the total resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Maximum allowed resistance of a driven ground rod is 25 ohms, under normally dry conditions when a ground ring electrode is not used. Contact the Contracting Officer for direction on how to proceed when two of any three ground rods, driven not less than 10 feet into the ground, a minimum of 10 feet apart, and equally spaced around the perimeter, give a



combined value exceeding 50 ohms immediately after having driven. For ground ring electrode, provide continuous No. 1/0 bare stranded copper cable. Lay ground ring electrode around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the nearest point of the structure foundation, and at least beyond the drip line for the facility. Install ground ring electrode to a minimum depth of 30 inches. Install a ground ring electrode in earth undisturbed by excavation, not earth fill, and do not locate beneath roof overhang, or wholly under paved areas or roadways where rainfall cannot penetrate to keep soil moist in the vicinity of the cable.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

3.2.1 Nonmetallic Exterior Walls with Metallic Roof

Bond metal roof sections together which are insulated from each other so that they are electrically continuous, having a surface contact of at least 3 square inches.


3.3.1 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test

Test the lightning protection and grounding system to ensure continuity is not in excess of 1 ohm and that resistance to ground is not in excess of 25 ohms. Provide documentation for the measured values at each test point. Test the ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to the rod. Tie the grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Include in the written report: locations of test points, measured values for continuity and ground resistances, and soil conditions at the time that measurements were made. Submit results of each test to the Contracting Officer.




SECTION 26 42 14.00 10

CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B 843 (2007) Standard Specification for Magnesium Alloy Anodes for Cathodic Protection

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE SP0169 (2015) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems




Provide a complete, operating, sacrificial anode cathodic protection system in complete compliance with NFPA 70, with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations and with the minimum requirements of this contract. In addition to the minimum requirements of these specifications. The services required include planning, installation, adjusting and testing of a cathodic protection system, using sacrificial anodes for cathodic protection of the Domestic Water and Fire Protection Water lines, their connectors and lines under the slab or floor foundation. The cathodic protection system shall include anodes, cables, connectors, corrosion protection test stations, and any other equipment required for a complete operating system providing the NACE criteria of protection as specified. Insulators are required whenever needed to insulate the pipes from any other structure. The cathodic protection shall be provided on Domestic Water and Fire Protection Water pipes.

1.2.1 Contractor's Modifications

The specified system is based on a complete system with magnesium sacrificial anodes. The Contractor may modify the cathodic protection system after review of the project, site verification, and analysis, if the proposed modifications include the anodes specified and will provide better overall system performance. The modifications shall be fully described, shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's representative, and shall meet the following criteria. The proposed system shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts with reference

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 1


to a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference cell or 100 millivolts polariztion as described in paragraph 3.1.1 on the underground components of the piping or other metallic surface. Take resistivity measurements of the soil in the vicinity of the pipes and ground bed sites. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage shall be required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential or 100 millivolts polarization between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. The anode system shall be designed for a life of twenty-five (25) years of continuous operation.

1.2.2 Summary of Services Required

The scope of services shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

a. Cathodic Protection Systems.

b. System testing.

c. Training.

d. Operating and maintenance manual.

e. Insulator testing and bonding testing.

1.2.3 Tests of Components

Perform a minimum of three (3) tests at each metallic component in the piping system. Structure and pipes shall be shown with the cathodic protection equipment. All components of the cathodic protection system shall be shown on drawings, showing their relationship to the protected structure or component.

1.2.4 Electrical Potential Measurements

All potential tests shall be made at each fitting

1.2.5 Achievement of Criteria for Protection

All conductors, unless otherwise shown, shall be routed to or through the test stations. Each system provided shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolt potentials with reference to a saturated copper-copper-sulfate reference cell or 100 mV of polarization, see paragraph 3.1.1, on all underground components of the piping. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage of the anodes should be adjusted as required to satisfy the criteria stated in paragraph 3.1.1. This potential should be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. This must be achieved without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1150 millivolts. Testing will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Provide additional anodes if required to achieve the criteria stated in paragraph 3.1.1.

1.2.6 Metallic Components on Nonmetallic Systems and Typicals

a. Metallic components: As a minimum, protect each metallic component with one 2 magnesium anodes. This number of anodes is required to achieve the criteria stated in paragraph 3.1.1 on the metallic area and

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 2


at the same time not provide overvoltage above 1150 millivolts "instant off." As a minimum, the magnesium anode unpackaged weight shall be 32 pounds.

b. Fire Hydrants: Fire hydrant pipe components shall have a minimum of two (2) anodes. These magnesium anodes shall have an unpackaged weight of 32 pounds.

c. Pipe Under Concrete Slab: Pipe under concrete slab shall have a minimum of 2 magnesium anodes. These magnesium anodes shall have an unpackaged weight of 32 pounds. Instead of permanent reference electrodes the test stations will be located directly over the pipe or fitting and backfilled with native soil to the bottom of the test station body. This will allow potential measurements to be taken with respect to a portable reference electrode placed in the bottom of the test station body. All conductors shall be routed to a test station.

d. Valves: Each valve shall be protected with 2 magnesium anodes. The magnesium anode shall have an unpackaged weight of 32 pounds.

e. Metallic Pipe Component or Section: Each section of metallic pipe shall be protected with 2 magnesium anodes. The magnesium anodes shall have an unpackaged weight of 32 pounds.

f. Connectors or Change-of-Direction Devices: Each change-of-direction device shall be protected with 2 magnesium anodes. The magnesium anode shall have an unpackaged weight of 32 pounds.

1.2.6 Metallic Component Coating

Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings as indicated. This will include fire hydrants, T's, elbows, valves, etc. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified in these specifications. All aboveground pipeline shall be coated as indicated or as approved. The coating shall have a minimum thickness of 10 mil. The pipeline coating shall be in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations. Field coating and inspection of the fittings must be in accordance with paragraph 2.2.6.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Whenused, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the officethat will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall besubmitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings; G

Six copies of detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, results of system design calculations including soil-resistivity, installation instructions and certified test data stating the maximum recommended anode current output density. Include in the detail drawings complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 3


demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a unit.

Contractor's Modifications; G

Six copies of detail drawings showing proposed changes in location, scope of performance indicating any variations from, additions to, or clarifications of contract drawings. Show proposed changes in anode arrangement, anode size and number, anode materials and layout details, conduit size, wire size, mounting details, wiring diagram, method for electrically-isolating each pipe, and any other pertinent information to proper installation and performance of the system.

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment; G

An itemized list of equipment and materials including item number, quantity, and manufacturer of each item, within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed. The list shall be accompanied by a description of procedures for each type of testing and adjustments, including testing of coating for thickness and holidays. Installation of materials and equipment shall not commence until this submittal is approved. The coating system used on the fittings must be submitted as part of the cathodic protection system submittal.

Spare Parts; G

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than six (6) months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests and Measurements; G

Test reports in booklet form tabulating all field tests and measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system and including close interval potential survey, casing and interference tests, final system test verifying protection, insulated joint and bond tests, and holiday coating test.

Final report regarding Contractor's modifications. The report shall include pipe-to-soil measurements throughout the affected area, indicating that the modifications improved the overall conditions, and current measurements for anodes. The following special materials and information are required: taping materials and conductors; zinc grounding cell, installation and testing procedures, and equipment; coating material; system design calculations for anode number, life, and parameters to achieve protective potential; backfill shield material and installation details showing waterproofing; bonding and waterproofing details; insulated resistance wire; exothermic weld equipment and material.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 4


SD-07 Certificates

Services of "Corrosion Expert"; G

Evidence of qualifications of the "corrosion expert."

a. The "corrosion expert's" name and qualifications shall be certified in writing to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction.

b. Certification shall be submitted giving the name of the firm, the number of years of experience, and a list of not less than five (5) of the firm's installations three (3) or more years old that have been tested and found satisfactory.


Cathodic Protection System

Before final acceptance of the cathodic protection system, six copies of operating manuals outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, adjustment of current flow, and shutdown. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Six copies of maintenance manual, listing routine maintenance procedures, recommendation for maintenance testing, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The manuals shall include single-line diagrams for the system as installed; instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell and Pipe-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of monitoring; instructions for dielectric connections, interference and sacrificial anode bonds; instructions shall include precautions to ensure safe conditions during repair of pipe or other metallic systems. The instructions shall be neatly bound between permanent covers and titled "Operating and Maintenance Instructions." These instructions shall be submitted for the Contracting Officer's approval. The instructions shall include the following:

a. As-built drawings, to scale, of the entire system, showing the locations of the piping, location of all anodes and test stations, locations of all insulating joints, and structure-to-soil potential test points as measured during the tests required by paragraph TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS. Each test point shall be given a unique alphanumeric identification that is cross referenced to the data sheets.

b. Recommendations for maintenance testing, including instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of testing.

c. All maintenance and operating instructions and nameplate data shall be in English.

d. Instructions shall include precautions to insure safe conditions during repair of pipe system.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 5


Training Course

The proposed Training Course Curriculum (including topics and dates of discussion) indicating that all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions, are to be covered.


1.4.1 Services of "Corrosion Expert"

Obtain the services of a "corrosion expert" to supervise, inspect, and test the installation and performance of the cathodic protection system. "Corrosion expert" refers to a person, who by thorough knowledge of the physical sciences and the principles of engineering and mathematics, acquired by professional education and related practical experience, is qualified to engage in the practice of corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic surfaces. Such a person must be accredited or certified by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as a NACE Accredited Corrosion Specialist or a NACE certified Cathodic Protection (CP) Specialist or be a registered professional engineer who has certification or licensing that includes education and experience in corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic piping systems, if such certification or licensing includes 5 years experience in corrosion control on underground metallic surfaces of the type under this contract. The "corrosion expert" shall make at least 3 visits to the project site. The first of these visits shall include obtaining soil resistivity data, acknowledging the type of pipeline coatings to be used and reporting to the Contractor the type of cathodic protection required. Once the submittals are approved and the materials delivered, the "corrosion expert" shall revisit the site the ensure the Contractor understands installation practices and laying out the components. The third visit shall involve testing the installed cathodic protection systems and training applicable personnel on proper maintenance techniques. The "corrosion expert" shall supervise installation and testing of all cathodic protection.

1.4.2 Isolators

Isolators are required to insulate the indicated pipes from any other structure. Isolators shall be provided with lightning protection and a test station as shown.

1.4.3 Anode and Bond Wires

For each cathodic system, the metallic components and structures to be protected shall be made electrically continuous. This shall be accomplished by installing bond wires between the various structures. Bonding of existing buried structures may also be required to preclude detrimental stray current effects and safety hazards. Provisions shall be included to return stray current to its source without damaging structures intercepting the stray current. The electrical isolation of underground facilities in accordance with acceptable industry practice shall be included under this section. All tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 6


1.4.4 Nonmetallic Pipe System

In the event pipe other than metallic pipe is approved and used in lieu of metallic pipe, all metallic components of this pipe system shall be protected with cathodic protection. Detailed drawings of cathodic protection for each component shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval within 45 days after date of receipt of notice to proceed, and before commencement of any work.

1.4.5 Drawings

Detailed drawings shall be provided showing location of anodes, insulated fittings, test stations, permanent reference cells, and bonding. Locations shall be referenced to two (2) permanent facilities or mark points.


Storage area for magnesium anodes will be designated by the Contracting Officer. If anodes are not stored in a building, tarps or similar protection should be used to protect anodes from inclement weather. Packaged anodes, damaged as a result of improper handling or being exposed to rain, shall be resacked and the required backfill added.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MAGNESIUM ANODES

2.1.1 Anode Composition

Anodes shall be of high-potential magnesium alloy, made of primary magnesium obtained from sea water or brine, and not made from scrap metal. Magnesium anodes shall conform to ASTM B 843 and to the following analysis (in percents) otherwise indicated:

Aluminum, max. 0.010Manganese, max. 0.50 to 1.30Zinc 0.05Silicon, max. 0.05Copper, max. 0.02Nickel, max. 0.001Iron, Max. 0.03Other impurities, max. 0.05 each or 0.3 max. totalMagnesium Remainder

Furnish spectrographic analysis on samples from each heat or batch of anodes used on this project.

2.1.2 Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions and weights of anodes shall be approximately as follows:

TYPICAL MAGNESIUM ANODE SIZE

(Cross sections may be round, square, or D shaped)

NOMINAL GROSS NOMINAL APPROX. WT lb PACKAGED NOMINAL PACKAGE WT. LBS. SIZE (IN) IN BACKFILL DIMENSIONS (IN) _________________________________________________________________________

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 7


TYPICAL MAGNESIUM ANODE SIZE

(Cross sections may be round, square, or D shaped)

32 20.5 X 5.5 X 5 70 28 X 8

2.1.3 Packaged Anodes

Provide anodes in packaged form with the anode surrounded by specially-prepared quick-wetting backfill and contained in a water permeable cloth or paper sack. Anodes shall be centered by means of spacers in the backfill material. The backfill material shall have the following composition, unless otherwise indicated:

Material Approximate Percent by Weight

Gypsum 75Bentonite 20Sodium Sulphate 5

Total 100

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

2.2.1 Electrical Wire Anode Lead Wire

Wire shall be No. 12 AWG solid copper wire with NFPA 70, Type TW

2.2.1.1 Test Wires

Test wires shall be AWG No. 10 solid copper wire with NFPA 70, Type TW.

2.2.2 Backfill Shields

Shields shall consist of approved pipeline wrapping or fiberglass-reinforced, coal-tar impregnated tape, or plastic weld caps, specifically made for the purpose and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When joint bonds are required, due to the use of mechanical joints, the entire joint shall be protected by the use of a kraft paper joint cover. The joint cover shall be filled with poured-in, hot coat-tar enamel.

2.2.3 Test Stations

Stations shall be of the flush-curb-box type and shall be the standard product of a recognized manufacturer. Test stations shall be complete with an insulated terminal block having the required number of terminals. The test station shall be provided with a lockable over and shall have an embossed legend, "C.P. Test." A minimum of one (1) test station shall be provided each component of the pipe. A minimum of six (6) terminals shall be provided in each test station. A minimum of two (2) leads are required to the metallic pipe from each test station. Other conductors shall be provided for each anode, other foreign pipe, and reference cells as required.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 8


2.2.4 Joint and Continuity Bonds

Bonds shall be provided across all joints in the metallic water lines, across any electrically discontinuous connections and all other pipes and structures with other than welded or threaded joints that are included in this cathodic protection system. Continuity bonds shall be as shown in the design drawings. Unless otherwise specified in the specifications, bonds between structures and across joints in pipe with other than welded or threaded joints shall be No. 8 AWG stranded copper cable with polyethylene insulation. Bonds between structures shall contain sufficient slack for any anticipated movement between structures. Bonds across pipe joints shall contain a minimum of 4 inch of slack to allow for pipe movement and soil stress. Bonds shall be attached by exothermic welding. Exothermic weld areas shall be insulated with coating compound and approved, and witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Continuity bonds shall be installed as necessary to reduce stray current interference.

2.2.5 Electrical Isolation of Structures

Isolation shall be provided at metallic connection of all lines to existing system and where connecting to a building.

2.2.5.1 Insulating Joint Testing

A Model 601 Insulation Checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics", or an approved equal, shall be used for insulating joint (flange) electrical testing.

2.2.6 Underground Structure Coating

This coating specification shall take precedence over any other project specification and drawing notes, whether stated or implied, and shall also apply to the pipeline supplier. No variance in coating quality shall be allowed by the Contractor or Base Construction Representative without the written consent of the designer. All underground metallic pipelines to be cathodically protected shall be afforded a good quality factory-applied coating. This includes all carbon steel, cast-iron and ductile-iron pipelines or vessels. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified. If non-metallic pipelines are installed, all metallic fittings on pipe sections shall be coated in accordance with this specification section.

a. The nominal thickness of the metallic pipe joint or other component coating shall be 10 mils, plus or minus 5 percent.

b. Pipe and joint coating for factory applied or field repair material shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be one of the following:

(1) Continuously extruded polyethylene and adhesive coating system.(2) Polyvinyl chloride pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.(3) High density polyethylene/bituminous rubber compound tape.(4) Butyl rubber tape.(5) Coal tar epoxy.

Submit field coating and touchup method for damaged coating and other areas like rods and bolts.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 9


2.2.7 Electrical Connections

Electrical connections shall be done as follows:

a. Exothermic welds shall be "Cadweld", "Thermoweld", or an approved equal. Use of this material shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CRITERIA OF PROTECTION

Acceptance criteria for determining the adequacy of protection on a buried underground pipe metallic component shall be in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as specified below.

3.1.1 Iron and Steel

The following method a. shall be used for testing cathodic protection voltages. At the discretion of the project corrosion engineer method b. shall be used.

a. A negative voltage of at least minus 850 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode connecting the earth (electrolyte) directly over the underground component. Determination of this voltage shall be made with the cathodic protection system in operation. Voltage drops shall be considered for valid interpretation of this voltage measurement. A minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the underground component being tested and the reference cell shall be achieved over 95 percent of the area of the structure. Adequate number of measurements shall be obtained over the entire structure, pipe metallic component to verify and record achievement of minus 850 millivolts "instant off." This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the total metallic area without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1200 millivolts.

b. A minimum polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth directly over the underground component. This polarization voltage shift shall be determined by interrupting the protective current and measuring the polarization decay. When the protective current is interrupted, an immediate voltage shift will occur. The voltage reading, after the immediate shift, shall be used as the base reading from which to measure polarization decay. Measurements achieving 100 millivolts decay shall be made over 95 percent of the metallic surface being protected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Anode Installation

Unless otherwise authorized, installation shall not proceed without the presence of the Contracting Officer. Anodes of the size specified shall be installed to the depth indicated and at the locations shown. Locations may be changed to clear obstructions with the approval of the Contracting Officer. Anodes shall be installed in sufficient number and of the

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 10


required type, size, and spacing to obtain a uniform current distribution over the surface of the structure. The anode system shall e designed for a life of 25 years of continuous operation. Anodes shall be installed as indicated in a dry condition after any plastic or waterproof protective covering has been completely removed from the water permeable, permanent container housing the anode metal. The anode connecting wire shall not be used for lowering the anode into the hole. The annular space around the anode shall be backfilled with fine earth in 6 inch layers and each layer shall be hand tamped. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or connecting wire with the tamper. Approximately 5 gallons of water shall be applied to each filled hole after anode backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point about 6 inch above the anode. After the water has been absorbed by the earth, backfilling shall be completed to the ground surface level.

3.2.1.1 Single Anodes

Single anodes, spaced as shown, shall be connected through a test station to the pipeline, allowing adequate slack in the connecting wire to compensate for movement during backfill operation.

3.2.2 Anode Placement - General

Packaged anodes shall be installed completely dry, and shall be lowered into holes by rope sling or by grasping the cloth gather. The anode lead wire shall not be used in lowering the anodes. The hole shall be backfilled with fine soil in 6 inch layers and each layer shall be hand-tamped around the anode. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or lead wire with the tamper. If immediate testing is to be performed, water shall be added only after backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point 6 inch above the anode. Approximately 5 gallons of water may be poured into the hole. After the water has been absorbed by the soil, backfilling and tamping may be completed to the top of the hole. Anodes shall be installed as specified or shown.

3.2.3 Underground Pipeline

Anodes shall be installed at a minimum of 2 feet and a maximum of 3feet from the line to be protected.

3.2.4 Installation Details

Details shall conform to the requirements of this specification. Details shown on the drawings are indicative of the general type of material required, and are not intended to restrict selection to material of any particular manufacturer.

3.2.5 Lead Wire Connections

3.2.5.1 Underground Pipeline (Metallic)

To facilitate periodic electrical measurements during the life of the sacrificial anode system and to reduce the output current of the anodes, if required, all anode lead wires shall be connected to a test station and buried a minimum of 24 inch in depth. The cable shall be No. 10 AWG, stranded copper, TW insulated cable. The cable shall make contact with the structure only through a test station. Resistance wire shall be installed between the cable and the pipe cable, in the test station, to reduce the current output, if required. Anode connections, except in the test

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 11


station, shall be made with exothermic welding process, and shall be insulated by means of at least three (3) layers of electrical tape; and all lead wire connections shall be installed in a moistureproof splice mold kit and filled with epoxy resin. Lead wire-to-structure connections shall be accomplished by an exothermic welding process. All welds shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A backfill shield filled with a pipeline mastic sealant or material compatible with the coating shall be placed over the weld connection and shall be of such diameter as to cover the exposed metal adequately.

3.2.6 Location of Test Stations

Test stations shall be located at each fitting group or single fitting.

3.2.7 Underground Pipe Joint Bonds

Underground pipe having other than welded or threaded coupling joints shall be made electrically continuous by means of a bonding connection installed across the joint.

3.3 TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS

3.3.1 Baseline Potentials

Each test and measurement will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of five (5) working days prior to each test. After backfill of the pipe, the static potential-to-soil of the pipe shall be measured. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations specified for pipe-to-reference electrode potential measurements. The initial measurements shall be recorded.

3.3.2 Isolation Testing

Before the anode system is connected to the pipe metallic component, an isolation test shall be made at each isolating joint or fitting. This test shall demonstrate that no metallic contact, or short circuit exists between the two isolated sections of the pipe. Any isolating fittings installed and found to be defective shall be reported to the Contracting Officer.

3.3.2.1 Insulation Checker

A Model 601 insulation checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics", or an approved equal.

3.3.2.2 Cathodic Protection Meter

A Model B3A2 or LC4 cathodic protection meter, as manufactured by "M.C. Miller", or an approved equal, using the continuity check circuit, shall be used for potential testing and other voltage measurements.

3.3.3 Anode Output

As the anodes or groups of anodes are connected to the pipe, current output shall be measured with an approved calibrated shunt with a suitable millivoltmeter or multimeter, or a low resistance ammeter.

3.3.4 Reference Electrode Potential Measurements

Upon completion of the installation and with the entire cathodic protection

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 12


system in operation, electrode potential measurements shall be made with anodes connected to the structures being protected using a copper-copper sulphate reference electrode and a potentiometer-voltmeter, or a direct-current voltmeter having an internal resistance (sensitivity) of not less than 10 megohms per volt and a full scale of 10 volts. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations used for the baseline potentials. The values obtained and the date, time, and locations of measurements shall be recorded. No less than three (3) measurements shall be made over any component with anodes connected to the structure throught the test lead wires. At least one instant off potential must be measured per test station in the same location where the baseline or native potential was measured. Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line. Potential measurements shall be made at minimum every five feet along runs of metallic pipe. If a metallic component of a non-metallic pipe is located under pavement, far from the edge of the pavement, potential measurement should be made with a portable reference electrode in contact with the soil in the bottom of the test station body.

3.3.5 Location of Measurements

3.3.5.1 Piping or Conduit

For coated piping or conduit, measurements shall be taken from the reference electrode located in contact with the earth, directly over the pipe or fitting group.

3.3.5.2 Recording Measurements

All pipe-to-soil potential measurements, including initial potentials where required, shall be recorded.

3.4 TRAINING COURSE

Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total of 1 hourof normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions. At least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the training course, the training course curriculum shall be submitted for approval, along with the proposed training date. Training shall consist of demonstration of test equipment, providing forms for test data and the tolerances which indicate that the system works.

3.5 SYSTEM TESTING

Submit a report including potential measurements taken at adequately-close intervals to establish that criteria stated in paragraph 3.1.1, is provided, and that the cathodic protection is not providing interference to other foreign pipes causing damage to paint or pipes. The report shall provide a narrative describing how the criteria of protection is achieved without damaging other pipe or structures in the area.


SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 13


SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING05/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASHRAE 189.1 (2011) Standard for the Design of High-Performance Green Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings



ASTM A1008/A1008M (2015) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened

ASTM A580/A580M (2015) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM A641/A641M (2009a; R 2014) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire


ASTM B164 (2003; R 2014) Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire

ASTM B633 (2015) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM D4674 REV A (2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to Indoor Office Environments

CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

CEC Title 24 (2008; Effective Jan 2010) California's



Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential and Nonresidential Buildings

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011; Errata 2015) IES Lighting Handbook

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

IES RP-16 (2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B 2009; Addendum C 2016) Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering

IES TM-21 (2011; Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources




IEEE C62.41 (1991; R 1995) Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits



NEMA ANSLG C78.377 (2015) American National Standard for Electric Lamps— Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

NEMA C82.77 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment

NEMA SSL 1 (2010) Electronic Drivers for Led Devices, Arrays, or Systems

NEMA SSL 3 (2011) High-Power White LED Binning for General Illumination

NEMA SSL 7A (2015) Phase-Cut Dimming for Solid State Lighting: Basic Compatibility

NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2015) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices




NFPA 101 (2015; ERTA 2015) Life Safety Code



DOD 8500.01 (2014) Cybersecurity

DOD 8510.01 (2014) Risk Management Framework (RMF) for DoD Information Technology (IT)


UL 1472 (2015) UL Standard for Safety Solid-State Dimming Controls

UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires

UL 20 (2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap Switches

UL 2043 (2013) Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces

UL 508 (1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment

UL 8750 (2009; Reprint May 2014) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products

UL 916 (2007; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for Energy Management Equipment

UL 924 (2006; Reprint Dec 2015) Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

UL 94 (2013; Reprint Jan 2016) Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances


Materials not considered to be luminaires or luminaire accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Luminaires and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, must be as defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.



b. For fluorescent, HID and induction luminaire light sources, "Average Rated Life" is the time after which 50 percent of a large group of light sources will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions.

c. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is also know as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IES LM-80.

d. For fluorescent, HID and induction luminaires, "Luminaire Efficacy Rating" (LER) is the appropriate measure of energy efficiency, measured in lumens/watt. Specifically it is the luminaire's efficiency multiplied by the total rated light source lumens and the ballast factor, divided by the luminaire input watts.

e. For LED luminaires, "Luminaire Efficacy" (LE) is the appropriate measure of energy efficiency, measured in lumens/watt. This is gathered from LM-79 data for the luminaire, in which absolute photometry is used to measure the lumen output of the luminaire as one entity, not the source separately and then the source and housing together.

f. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval.. Data, drawings, and reports must employ the terminology, classifications and methods prescribed by the IES HB-10 as applicable, for the lighting system specified. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Central Emergency Lighting System (Emergency Inverter); G

Lighting Control Relay Panel; G

Lighting Control Systems; G

Luminaire Drawings; G

Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Coverage Layout; G

SD-03 Product Data

Luminaires; G

Light Sources; G

Drivers, Ballasts and Generators; G

LED Luminaire Warranty; G



Luminaire Design Data; G

Dimming Controllers (Dimmers); G

Lighting Control System Components; G

Exit Signs; G

Ambient Light Level Sensor; G

Bi-Level HID Controller; G

Lighting Control Panel; G

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G

LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G

LED Light Source - IES TM-21 Test Report; G

Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Verification Tests; G

Energy Efficiency; G

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate; G

LED Driver and Dimming Switch Compatibility Certificate; G

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

1.5.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data must accompany shop drawings.

1.5.2 Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Coverage Layout

Provide floor plans showing coverage layouts of all devices using manufacturer's product information.

1.5.3 LED Driver and Dimming Switch Compatibility Certificate

Submit certification from the luminaire, driver, or dimmer switch manufacturer that ensures compatibility and operability between devices.

1.5.4 Luminaire Design Data

a. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family that must be listed, labeled, or identified per the NFPA 70 (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).



b. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections must be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.

1.5.5 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire. Include all applicable and required data as outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in IES LM-79.

1.5.6 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED light source (package, array, or module). Include all applicable and required data as outlined under "8.0 Test Report" in IES LM-80.

1.5.7 LED Light Source - IES TM-21 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production LED light source (package, array or module). Include all applicable and required data, as well as required interpolation information as outlined under "7.0 Report" in IES TM-21.

1.5.8 Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Verification Tests

Submit test report outlining post-installation coverage and operation of sensors.

1.5.9 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports must be one of the following:

a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program for both LM-79 and LM-80 testing.

b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - LED Lighting Facts Approved Testing Laboratories List at for LM-79 testing.

c. One of the EPA-Recognized Laboratories listed at for LM-80 testing.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70, unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal



material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two-year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the two-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




Products manufactured more than six months prior to date of delivery to site must not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.5.11.3 Energy Efficiency

Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficacy and color rendering index of light source.

1.6 WARRANTY

Support all equipment items by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.6.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

a. Provide a written 10 year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

(1) Include finish warranty to include failure and substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

(2) Material warranty must include:

(a) All drivers.

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Provide the Contracting Officer with signed warranty certificates prior to final payment.

1.6.1.1 Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life must be directly



correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions must be taken into consideration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, luminaire controls, or associated equipment are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Luminaires, luminaire controls, and associated equipment for exterior applications are specified in Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 LUMINAIRES

UL 1598, NEMA C82.77, and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and NL plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. Provide all luminaires of the same type by the same manufacturer. Luminaires must be specifically designed for use with the driver, ballast or generator and light source provided.

2.2.1 LED Luminaires

Provide luminaires complete with power supplies (drivers) and light sources. Provide design information including lumen output and design life in luminaire schedule on project plans for LED luminaires. LED luminaires must meet the minimum requirements in the following table:

LUMINAIRE TYPE MINIMUM LUMINAIREEFFICACY (LE)

MINIMUM COLOR RENDERING INDEX(CRI)

LED TROFFER -1 x 42 x 22 x 4

90 LPW 80

LED Downlight 50 LPW 90

LED Track or Accent 40 LPW 80

LED Low Bay/High Bay 80 LPW 70

LED Linear Ambient 80 LPW 80

LED luminaires must also meet the following minimum requirements:

a. Luminaires must have a minimum 10 year manufacturer's warranty.

b. Luminaires must have a minimum L70 lumen maintenance value of 50,000 hours as calculated by IES TM-21, with data obtained per IES LM-80 requirements.

c. Luminaire drive current value must be identical to that provided by test data for luminaire in question.

d. Luminaires must be tested to IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 standards, with the results provided as required in the Submittals paragraph of this specification.



e. Luminaires must be listed with the DesignLights Consortium 'Qualified Products List' when falling into category of "General Application" luminaires, i.e. Interior Directional, Display Case, Troffer, Linear Ambient, or Low/High Bay. Requirements are shown in the Designlights Consortium "Technical Requirements Table" at https://data.energystar.gov/dataset/EPA-Recognized-Laboratories-For-Lighting-Product

f. Provide Department of Energy 'Lighting Facts' label for each luminaire.

2.3 DRIVERS, BALLASTS and GENERATORS

2.3.1 LED Drivers

NEMA SSL 1, UL 8750. LED drivers must be electronic, UL Class 1, constant-current type and comply with the following requirements:

a. Output power (watts)and luminous flux (lumens) as shown in luminaire schedule for each luminaire type to meet minimum luminaire efficacy (LE) value provided.

b. Power Factor (PF) greater than or equal to 0.9 over the full dimming range when provided.

c. Current draw Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 20 percent.

d. Class A sound rating.

e. Operable at input voltage of 120-277 volts at 60 hertz.

f. Minimum 10 year manufacturer's warranty.

g. RoHS compliant.

h. Integral thermal protection that reduces or eliminates the output power if case temperature exceeds a value detrimental to the driver.

i. UL listed for dry or damp locations typical of interior installations.

j. fully-dimmable as indicated in luminaire schedule.

2.4 LIGHT SOURCES

NEMA ANSLG C78.377, NEMA SSL 3. Provide type and wattage as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans.

2.4.1 LED Light Sources

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of 3500 degrees K or as indicated.

b. Minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) R9 value of 80.

c. High power, white light output utilizing phosphor conversion (PC) process or mixed system of colored LEDs, typically red, green and blue (RGB).

d. RoHS compliant.

e. Provide light source color consistancy by utilizing a binning tolerance



within a 4 step McAdam ellipse.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTROLS

ASHRAE 90.1 - IP ASHRAE 189.1. Provide network certification for all networked lighting control systems and devices per requirements of DOD 8500.01 and DOD 8510.01.

2.5.1 Toggle Switches

Provide line-voltage toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.5.2 Dimming Controllers (Dimmers)

UL 1472, UL 20, IEEE C62.41, NEMA SSL 7A. 120/277 V or 0-10 V as indicated. Dimmers must provide flicker-free, continuously variable light output throughout the dimming range. Provide radio frequency interference suppression integral to device. Provide device with a vertical slider, paddle, rotary button, or toggle (with adjacent vertical slider) type control, with finish to match switches and outlets in same area. Provide back box in wall with sufficient depth to accomodate body of switch and wiring. Devices must be capable of operating at their full rated capacity regardless of being single or ganged-mounted, and be compatible with three-way and four-way switching scenarios. Dimmers must be capable of controlling two wire or three wire or 1-10V drivers as indicated. Ensure compatibility of dimmer with separate power packs when utilized for lighting control. Dimmers and the ballasts or drivers they control, must be provided from the same manufacturer, or tested and certified as compatible for use together. Provide NEMA SSL 7A-compiant devices.

2.5.3 Sensors for Lighting Control

IEEE C62.41, NEMA WD 1, UL 94, UL 916, UL 508, ASTM D4674 REV A.

2.5.3.1 Occupancy Sensors

Provide occupancy sensors with coverage patterns as indicated on project plans. Provide no less quantity of sensors as shown on plans, but add additional sensors when required to fulfill coverage requirement for the specific model sensor provided. Sensor must be provided with an adaptive learning function that automaticaly sets sensor in optimum calibration in a set period of time after installation and a non-volatile memory that saves settings after a power outage. Provide sensors designed for ceiling, wall or wall-box installation as indicated. Operating voltage must be 24V in conjunction with a control system or separate power pack which interacts with luminare being controllled. Provide housing of high-impact, injection-molded thermoplastic with a multi-segmented lens for PIR and dual technology sensors. Sensor operation requires movement to activate luminaires controlled, and turns luminaires off after a set time of inactivity.

2.5.3.1.1 Passive Infrared (PIR) Sensors

Provide ceiling or wall-mounted PIR sensors meeting the following requirements:

a. Temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a multi-element fresnel lens (Poly IR4 material).



b. Technology to optimize automatic time delay to fit occupant usage patterns.

c. No minimum load requirement for line voltage sensors and be capable of switching from zero to 800 W at 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz and from zero to 1200 W at 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Control voltage sensors must not exceed a maximum load requirement of 20 mA at 24VDC.

d. Time delay of five to 30 minutes in increments of five minutes with a walk through and test mode set by DIP switch.

e. LED indicator that remains active during occupancy.

f. Built-in light level sensor that is operational from 8 to 180 foot-candles.

g. Coverage pattern tested to NEMA WD 7 standards.

h. Standard five year warranty and be UL listed

i. No leakage current to load when in the off mode.

2.5.3.1.2 Ultrasonic Sensors

Provide ceiling-mounted ultrasonic sensors meeting the following requirements:

a. Operate at an ultrasonic frequency of 40 kHz.

b. LED on exterior of device to indicate occupant detection.

c. Adjustable time delay period of 15 seconds to 15 minutes.

d. UL listed with minimum five year warranty.

e. Provide with isolated relay for integrating control of HVAC or other automated systems.

2.5.3.1.3 Dual Technology Sensors

Provide dual technology sensors that meet the requirements for PIR sensors and ultrasonic sensors indicated above. If either the passive infrared or ultrasonic sensing registers occupancy, the luminaires must remain on.

2.5.3.1.4 Power Packs for Sensors

UL 2043, CEC Title 24, ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Power packs used to provide power to one or more lighting control sensors must meet the following requirements:

a. Input voltage - 120-277 VAC; output voltage - 24 VDC at 225 mA.

b. Plenum-rated, high-impact thermoplastic enclosure.

c. Utilizes zero-crossing circuitry to prevent damage from inrush current.

d. Maximum load rating of 16 amps for electronic lighting loads.



e. RoHS compliant.

2.5.4 Lighting Control Panel

Provide an electronic, programmable lighting control panel, capable of providing lighting control with input from internal programming, digital switches, time clocks, and other low-voltage control devices.

Enclose panel hardware in a surface-mounted, NEMA 1, painted, steel enclosure, with hinged, lockable access door and ventilation openings. Internal low-voltage compartment must be separated from line-voltage compartment of enclosure with only low-voltage compartment accessible upon opening of door.

Input voltage - 120/277 V, 60 Hz, with internal 24 VDC power supply.

Provide quantity as indicated single-pole latching relays rated at 30 amps, 277 volts.

2.5.5 Individual Room Lighting Control Systems

Individual controls as indicated on the drawings.

2.6 EXIT AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

UL 924, NFPA 101, and NFPA 70 compliant.

2.6.1 Exit Signs

Provide exit signs consuming a maximum of five watts total.

2.6.1.1 LED Self-Powered Exit Signs

Provide in UV-stable, thermo-plastic housing configured for ceiling, wall or end mounting. Provide 6 inch high, 3/4 inch stroke red lettering on face of sign. Provide chevrons on either side of lettering to indicate direction. Provide single or double face as indicated. Equip with automatic power failure device, test switch, and pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery must be sealed, maintenance free nickel-cadmium type, and must operate unattended for a period of not less than five years. Emergency run time must be a minimum of 1 1/2 hours. LEDs must have a minimum rated life of 10 years. Provide self-diagnostic circuitry integral to emergency LED driver.

2.6.2 Central Emergency Lighting System (Emergency Inverter)

Provide integrally-housed emergency system rated as indicated 277 volts (input and output), for a minimum period of 90 minutes. Output frequency must be a pure sine wave at 60 hertz, with maximum 5 percent total harmonic distortion. Provide system with minimum short circuit rating required for protection against available fault current.

2.6.2.1 System Operation

During normal power operation, system charges batteries as needed and allows normal power to pass through to load. Upon loss of normal power, system automatically transfers to emergency mode without interruption of connected loads. Internal batteries provide a minimum of 90 minutes of



emergency power at this time. Upon normal power being restored, system switches back to normal power mode and fully charges batteries within UL-approved time period.

2.6.2.2 Battery Charger

Solid state, monitored, three step float charging type, keeping batteries in a fully charged state. Provide circuitry to prevent deep discharge of batteries in prolonged power outage conditions.

2.6.2.3 Batteries

Provide sealed, lead calcium type, designed to operated unattended without maintenance, for a minimum of 10 years.

2.6.2.4 Enclosure

Provide system in NEMA 1 painted steel enclosure with exterior-mounted "push-to-test" button and LED indicator.

2.6.2.5 Accessories

Provide output circuit breakers as indicated.

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT HARDWARE

2.7.1 Wire

ASTM A641/A641M; Galvanized, soft tempered steel, minimum 0.11 inches in diameter, or galvanized, braided steel, minimum 0.08 inches in diameter.

2.7.2 Wire for Humid Spaces

ASTM A580/A580M; Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, minimum 0.11 inches in diameter.

ASTM B164; UNS NO4400, annealed nickel-copper alloy, minimum 0.11 inches in diameter.

2.7.3 Threaded Rods

Threaded steel rods, 3/16 inch diameter, zinc or cadmium coated.

2.7.4 Straps

Galvanized steel, one by 3/16 inch, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, with a light commercial zinc coating or ASTM A1008/A1008M with an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to ASTM B633, Type RS.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.8.1 Manufacturer's Namplate

Each item of equipment must have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.



2.8.2 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All luminaires must be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources and ballasts, generators or drivers. Note the following light source characteristics in the format "Use Only _____":

a. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.

All markings related to light source type must be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when light sources are in place. Ballasts, generators or drivers must have clear markings indicating multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.


Provide all luminaires and lighting equipment with factory-applied painting system that as a minimum, meets requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

2.10 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

Provide access to lamp and driver from bottom of luminaire. Provide trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted luminaires as indicated on project drawings and specifications.

2.11 SUSPENDED LUMINAIRES

Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of luminaires supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Provide cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers must allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit swinging. Single-unit suspended luminaires must have twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row luminaires must have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Provide rodsRods in minimum 0.18 inch diameter.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations must conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. Install luminaires and lighting controls to meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP and ASHRAE 189.1. To encourage consistancy and uniformity, install luminaires of the same manufacture and model number when residing in the same facility or building.

3.1.1 Light Sources

When light sources are not provided as an integral part of the luminaire, deliver light sources of the type, wattage, lumen output, color temperature, color rendering index, and voltage rating indicated to the project site and install just prior to project completion, if not already installed in the luminaires from the factory.



3.1.2 Luminaires

Set luminaires plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent luminaires and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation must meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated must be to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted luminaires and to center of luminaire for wall-mounted luminaires. Obtain approval of the exact mounting height on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed luminaires must be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires, straps or rods per luminaire and located near each corner of the luminiare. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported luminaires. Round luminaires or luminaires smaller in size than the ceiling grid must be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires, straps or rods per luminaire, spaced approximately equidistant around. Do not support luminaires by acoustical tile ceiling panels. Where luminaires of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support each independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the luminiare. Provide wires, straps, or rods for luminaire support in this section. Luminaires installed in suspended ceilings must also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.

3.1.3 Suspended Luminaires

Provide suspended luminaires with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and level. Locate so that there are no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and luminaire must be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer excluding luminaire must be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation. Suspended luminaires in continuous rows must have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and must be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Utilize aligning splines on extruded aluminum luminaires to assure minimal hairline joints. Support steel luminaires to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Luminaire finishes must be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and must match the color and gloss specified. Match supporting pendants with supported luminaire. Aircraft cable must be stainless steel. Canopies must be finished to match the ceiling and must be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points must be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.

3.1.4 Ballasts, Generators and Power Supplies

Typically, provide ballasts, generators, and power supplies (drivers) integral to luminaire as constructed by the manufacturer.

3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units

Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the local switch, to the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.

3.1.5.1 Exit Signs

Connect exit signs to local lighting circuit ahead of switching.



3.1.5.2 Emergency Lighting from Central Emergency System

Connect emergency lighting from a central emergency system as indicated on the project drawings.

3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.7 Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors

Provide testing and sensor coverage in all spaces where sensors are placed. This should be done only after all furnishings (carpet, furniture, workstations, etc.) have been installed. Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage must provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage.

3.1.8 Daylight or Ambient Light Level Sensor

Locate sensor as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 30 footcandlesor for the indicated light level measured at the work plane for that particular area.


Paint lighting equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Provide painting as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.




SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO LTS (2013; Errata 2013) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals



ASTM B108/B108M (2012; E 2012) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings


ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011; Errata 2015) IES Lighting Handbook

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

IES RP-16 (2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B 2009; Addendum C 2016) Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering

IES RP-8 (2000; Errata 2004; R 2005; Errata 2007) Roadway Lighting

IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires

IES TM-21 (2011; Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources








NEMA C136.31 (2010) American National for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration




UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires


Materials not considered to be luminaires or lighting equipment are specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Luminaires and accessories installed in interior of buildings are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.

b. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IES LM-80.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




Photometric Plan; G

LED Luminaire Warranty; G



SD-03 Product Data

LED Luminaires; G

Luminaire Drivers; G

Photocell; G

Aluminum poles; G

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires; G

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G

LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G

Operating test

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate; G

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions shall be taken into consideration.


1.5.1 Drawing Requirements

1.5.1.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

1.5.1.2 Poles

Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.

1.5.2 Photometric Plan

For LED luminaires, include computer-generated photometric analysis of the "designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. For LED and all other types of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following:



Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at a maximum of every 10 feet.

Vertical illuminance measurements at finished grade.

Minimum and maximum footcandle levels.

Average maintained footcandle level.

Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.

1.5.3 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as defined in IES HB-10.

b. Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed position as defined by IES TM-15.

c. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family. Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).

d. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.

e. Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles. Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in particular wind zone area.

1.5.4 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire. Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as well as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in IES LM-79.

1.5.5 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or module. Submittal shall include:

a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light source being tested.

b. All data required by IES LM-80.

1.5.5.1 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one of the following:

a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited



for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.

b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy Efficiency & Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.

c. A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:

1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.

2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology.


In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 15-year period.


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.



1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

1.6.1 Aluminum Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.7.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.


a. Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

2. Material warranty shall include:

(a) All power supply units (drivers).

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates prior to final payment.

1.7.2 Electronic Ballast Warranty

Furnish the electronic ballasts manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than five (5) years from the date of manufacture. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed twelve (12) months, thereby permitting four (4) years of the five (5) year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, equipment or accessories are specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Luminaires and associated equipment and accessories for interior applications are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 LUMINAIRES

Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

2.2.1 General Requirements

a. Luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum. Housings for luminaires other than LED shall be die cast, extruded, or fabricated aluminum. Fabricated aluminum housings shall have all seams and corners internally welded to resist weathering, moisture and dust.

b. Luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 20 degrees F to 122 degrees F.

c. Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598.d. Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle

classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per IES HB-10.

e. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling.

f. Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings:

1. Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed.

2. Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0.

3. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed.

g. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory.

h. The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or detail on the project plans.

i. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.

j. Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of clear tempered glass or UV-resistant acrylic.



k. Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks, power supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless electric screwdriver.

l. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

m. Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA C136.31.

n. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking, or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not acceptable.

2.3 POLES

Provide poles designed for wind loading of 160 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.


Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch wall thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M and shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Manufacturer's standard provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.

2.4 POLE FOUNDATIONS

Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.



2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION




Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.


Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location. Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions. Alterations to poles after fabrication will void manufacturer's warranty and shall not be allowed.

3.1.2 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.1.3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test after 100 hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.




SECTION 27 10 00

BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ASSOCIATION (ECA)

ECA EIA/ECA 310 (2005) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment



INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA S-90-661 (2012) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements

JOINT ARMY-AIR FORCE-NAVY STANDARDS

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

NECA/BICSI 568 (2006) Standard for Installing Building Telecommunications Cabling


ANSI/NEMA WC 66 (2001; Errata 2003) Performance Standard for Category 6 and Category 7 100 Ohm Shielded and Unshielded Twisted Pairs



TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA-1152 (2009) Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling



TIA-526-7 (2002; R 2008) OFSTP-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant

TIA-568-C.0 (2009; Add 1 2010; Add 2 2012) Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA-568-C.2 (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards

TIA-568-C.3 (2008; Add 1 2011) Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA-606 (2012b) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)


UL 1863 (2004; Reprint Nov 2012) Communication Circuit Accessories

UL 444 (2008; Reprint Apr 2010) Communications Cables


UL 514C (1996; Reprint Nov 2011) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 969 (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems


Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569, TIA-606 and IEEE 100 and herein.

1.3.1 Telecommunications Room (TR)

An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.

1.3.2 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)

An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including wireless) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the equipment room.

1.3.3 Equipment Room (ER) (Telecommunications)

An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.

1.3.4 Open Cable

Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers to cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with that space.

1.3.5 Pathway

A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.


The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling, horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways, telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in a building. The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the telecommunications work area to the TR. Provide telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with the "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a "AE" designation following the "G" identifies the agency that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Definitions of Reviewing Agency:



"G" = Government Review No designation = For Information Only (CQC Manager)

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Telecommunications drawings; G

Telecommunications Space Drawings; G

In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.

SD-03 Product Data

Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G

Patch panels; G

Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G

Equipment support frame; G

Connector blocks; G

Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification, the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

SD-06 Test Reports

Telecommunications cabling testing; GTest results shall include each pair number length and loss.

SD-07 Certificates

Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G

Key Personnel Qualifications; G

Manufacturer Qualifications; G

Test plan; G


Factory reel tests; G


Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G




Record Documentation; G


1.6.1 Shop Drawings

In exception to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submitted plan drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1/8 inch per foot, except as specified otherwise. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings

Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved, drawings in accordance with TIA-606. The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in accordance with TIA-606. The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:

a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving Zone Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and Horizontal Pathways. Layout of complete building per floor. The drawing indicates location of building areas, serving zones, vertical backbone diagrams, telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways, grounding system, and other systems that need to be viewed from the complete building perspective.

b. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable Identification (ID’S). Shows a building area or serving zone. These drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested areas.

c. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.

1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings

Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA-606 that include telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and cabinet, rack, backboard and wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list



of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings.

1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications

Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel.

1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor

The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years of similar scope and size. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor.

1.6.2.2 Key Personnel

Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years.

Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel.

In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful



full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity.

Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer.

Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer.

1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications

Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3.

1.6.3 Test Plan

Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the components and accessories for each cable type specified, 60 days prior to the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.




Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the



products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.




Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage.


Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

1.9 WARRANTY


1.10 MAINTENANCE

1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system, Data Package 5. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 24.05 25 FACILITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION and as specified herein not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD DOCUMENTATION. Ensure that these drawings and documents depict the as-built configuration.

1.10.2 Record Documentation

Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware in accordance with TIA-606. T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided in hard copy format on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management software. A licensed copy of the cable management software including documentation, shall be provided. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum:



a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance with TIA-606. The cable records shall include only the required data fieldsinclude the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility in accordance with TIA-606. Include manufacture date of cable with submittal.

b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels, cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance with TIA-606. Documentation shall include the required data fields only in accordance with TIA-606.

1.10.3 Spare Parts

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

Components shall be UL or third party certified. Surge protection devices shall meet the requirements of UL96/96A (required for lightning protection certifiation). Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY

Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA-569 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by TIA-606 and UL 969. Ship cable on reels or in boxes bearing manufacture date for for unshielded twisted pair (UTP) in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.



2.3.1 Horizontal Cabling

Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.

2.3.1.1 Horizontal Copper Provide horizontal copper cable, ScTP (shielded), 100 ohm in accordance with TIA-568-C.2, UL 444, ANSI/NEMA WC 66, ICEA S-90-661. Provide four each individually twisted pair, minimum size 24 AWG conductors, Category 6, with a blue thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) and length marking at regular intervals in accordance with ICEA S-90-661. Provide plenum (CMP), riser (CMR), or general purpose (CM or CMG) communications rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with NFPA 70. Cables installed in conduit within and under slabs shall be UL listed and labeled for wet locations in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the telecommunications entrance facility to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA-606.

2.4.1 Backboards

Backboards shall be fire rated by manufacturing process.

2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame

All racks will be Government furnished, Government installed.

a. Racks modular type floor mounted as indicated on the drawings.

2.4.3 Connector Blocks

Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6 systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare.

2.4.4 Cable Guides

Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on 19 inches equipment racks. Cable guides of ring or bracket type devices mounted on backboard for horizontal cable management and individually mounted for vertical cable management. Mount cable guides with screws, and or nuts and lockwashers.

2.4.5 Patch Panels

Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the panel plus 25 percent spare.



2.4.5.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel

Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Panels shall be third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIACategory 6 requirements. Panel shall be constructed of 0.09 inches minimum aluminum and shall be rack mounted and compatible with an ECA EIA/ECA 310 19 inches equipment rack. Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to T568A or T568B. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type 110 IDCs and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of each panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each port factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each port. Patch panels shall be suitable for shielded ScTP copper cable.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES

2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper

Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2. ScTP outlet/connectors shall be color coded UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for ScTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired as indicated (Confirm with contracting officer). Outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 for 200 mating cycles.

2.5.2 Cover Plates

Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA-568-C.1; constructed of high impact thermoplastic material. Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA-607, and NFPA 70. Components shall be identified as required by TIA-606. Provide ground rods, bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.7 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.




ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125



inches thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches high normal block style.

2.10 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

2.10.1 Factory Reel Tests

Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, and TIA-526-7 for single mode optical fiber.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with NECA/BICSI 568, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3TIA-569, NFPA 70, and UL standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network. Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.

3.1.1 Cabling

Install ScTP and optical fiber telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, and TIA-568-C.3. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. Bend radii shall not be less than that recommended by the manufacturer. Cables shall be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in this section.

3.1.1.1 Open Cable

Use only where specifically indicated on plans for use in cable trays, or below raised floors. Install in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3. Do not exceed cable pull tensions recommended by the manufacturer. Placement of cable parallel to power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 12 inches shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided.

Plenum cable shall be used where open cables are routed through plenum areas. Cable routed exposed under raised floors shall be plenum rated. Plenum cables shall comply with flammability plenum requirements of NFPA 70.



3.1.1.2 Horizontal Cabling

Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings Do not untwist Category 6 cables more than one half inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide slack cable in the form of a figure eight (not a service loop) on each end of the cable, 10 feet in the telecommunications room, and 12 inches in the work area outlet.

3.1.2 Pathway Installations

Provide in accordance with TIA-569 and NFPA 70. Provide building pathway as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.1.3 Work Area Outlets

3.1.3.1 Terminations

Terminate cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and wiring configuration as specified. Terminate fiber optic cables in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.

3.1.3.2 Cover Plates

As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

3.1.3.3 Cables

Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded.

3.1.3.4 Pull Cords

Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets (all conduits shall have pull cords even those with cables installed).

3.1.4 Telecommunications Space Termination

Install termination hardware required for Category 6 system. An insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation displacement connectors.

3.1.4.1 Connector Blocks

Connector blocks shall be rack mounted in orderly rows and columns. Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard wire routing guides in accordance with TIA-569.

3.1.4.2 Patch Panels

Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment racks with sufficient ports to accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares.

a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel with cable tiesas recommended by the manufacturer



to prevent movement of the cable.

3.1.4.3 Equipment Support Frames

a. Racks, will be Government furnished, Government installed.

3.1.5 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.6 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with TIA-607, NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.2 LABELING

3.2.1 Labels

Provide labeling in accordance with TIA-606. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using thermal ink transfer process or laser printer.

3.2.2 Cable

Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with TIA-606.

3.2.3 Termination Hardware

Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA-606.


Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.3.1 Painting Backboards

If backboards are required to be painted, then the manufactured fire retardant backboard must be painted with fire retardant paint, so as not to increase flame spread and smoke density and must be appropriately labeled. Label and fire rating stamp must be unpainted.

3.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING


3.5 TESTING

3.5.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing

Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and



performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Test equipment shall conform to TIA-1152.

3.5.1.1 Inspection

Visually inspect jacket materials for UL or third party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for T568A or T568B pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.


Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows:

a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew.. Optical fiber Links. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.

3.5.1.3 Final Verification Tests

Perform verification tests for ScTP and fiber optic systems after the complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. Test results shall include each pair number length and loss.




SECTION 28 16 01.00 10

SMALL INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



IEEE 142 (2007) Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Green Book






NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements



NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

NIST FIPS 140-2 (2001) Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules

NIST FIPS 197 (2001) Advance Encryption Standard


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 1



UL 2050 2014; Alarm System Standard

UL 1037 (1999; Rev thru Nov 2004) Standard for Safety Antitheft Alarms and Devices

UL 1076 (1995; Rev thru Mar 2005) Standard for Safety Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

UL 681 (2014) Installation and Classification of Burglar and Holdup Alarm Systems

UL 796 (2010; Reprint Sep 2013) Standard for Printed-Wiring Boards

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Intrusion Alarm

An alarm resulting from the detection of a specified target and which results in an attempt to intrude into the protected area or when entry into an entry controlled area is attempted without successfully using entry control procedures.

1.2.2 Nuisance Alarm

An alarm resulting from the detection of an alarm stimuli, but which does not represent an attempt to intrude into the protected area.

1.2.3 Environmental Alarm

An alarm during environmental conditions which exceed those specified.

1.2.4 False Alarm

An alarm when there is no alarm stimulus.

1.2.5 Duress Alarm

An alarm condition which results from a set of pre-established conditions such as entering a special code into a keypad or by activating a switch. This alarm category shall take precedence over other alarm categories.

1.2.6 Standard Intruder

Individual that weighs 100 pounds or less and is 5 feet tall or less, dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks and shoes, unless environmental conditions at the site require protective clothing. Standard intruder movement is defined as any movement such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping through a protected zone in the most advantageous manner for the intruder.


1.3.1 General

Configure the Intrusion Detection System (IDS) as described and shown.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 2


Computing devices, as defined in 47 CFR 15, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for Class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in 47 CFR 15. Submit the following:

a. System block diagram.b. Console installation, block diagrams, and wiring diagrams.c. Processor installation, typical block, and wiring diagrams.d. Details of connections to power sources, including power supplies and

grounding.e. Details of surge protection device installation.f. Sensor detection patterns.g. The qualifications of the Manufacturer, Contractor, and Installer to

perform the work specified herein.

1.3.2 Overall System Reliability Requirement

The system, including all components and appurtenances, shall be configured and installed to yield a mean time between failure (MTBF) of at least 10,000 hours continuous operation.

1.3.3 Probability of Detection

Each zone shall have a continuous probability of detection greater than 90 percent and shall be demonstrated with a confidence level of 95 percent. This probability of detecting a standard intruder equates to 49 successful detections out of 50 tests or 98 successful detections out of 100 tests.

1.3.4 Electrical Requirements

Electrically powered IDS equipment shall operate on 120 volt 60 Hz AC sources as shown. Equipment shall be able to tolerate variations in the voltage source of plus or minus 10 percent, and variations in the line frequency of plus or minus 2 percent with no degradation of performance.

1.3.5 Power Line Surge Protection

Protect equipment connected to alternating current circuits from power line surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

1.3.6 Sensor Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection

Protect inputs against surges induced on sensor wiring. Outputs shall be protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. All communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications circuit. All cables and conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits from the console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Protection shall be furnished at equipment, and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wireline circuit shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms:

a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 3


b. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.

1.3.7 System Reaction

All alarms shall be annunciated on the displays within 1 second of their occurring at a local processor.

1.3.8 System Capacity

The system shall monitor and control the number of inputs and outputs shown and shall include an expansion capability of a minimum of 25 percent.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Intrusion Detection System G

Spare PartsManufacturer's Instructions GTesting G

SD-06 Test Reports

Performance Verification Test

SD-07 Certificates

Materials and Equipment


Submit written proof that the following experience requirements are being met.

1.5.1 Hardware Manufacturer

All system components shall be produced by manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the production of intrusion detection system components of the types to be installed for at least 3 years. The system shall be as manufactured by Vindicator to match Hurlburt Standards.

1.5.2 Software Manufacturer

All system and application software shall be produced by manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the production of intrusion detection system and application software of similar type and complexity as the specified system for at least 2 years.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 4


1.5.3 System Installer

The system shall be installed by a Contractor who has been regularly engaged in the installation of intrusion detection systems of similar type and complexity as the specified system for at least 2 years.

1.5.4 Line Supervision

1.5.4.1 Signal and Data Transmission System (DTS) Line Supervision

All signal or DTS lines between sensors and the alarm annunciation console shall be supervised by the system. The system shall supervise the signal lines by monitoring changes in the direct current that flows through the signal lines and a terminating resistor. The system shall initiate an alarm in response to a current change of 10 percent or greater. The system shall also initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of the signal and DTS lines.

1.5.4.2 Data Encryption

The intrusion detection system shall incorporate data encryption equipment on data transmission media links as shown. The algorithm used for encryption shall be the Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm described in NIST FIPS 140-2 and NIST FIPS 197.

1.5.5 Data Transmission System (DTS)

Provide data transmission systems as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM and as shown.


1.6.1 Interior, Uncontrolled Environment

All system components installed in interior locations having uncontrolled environments shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 0 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

1.6.2 Central Station

All central station equipment shall, unless designated otherwise, be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 60 to 85 degrees F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment and material specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts, tools and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of the parts recommended for stocking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Where materials or equipment are specified to conform, be constructed or tested to meet specific requirements, submit certification that the items

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 5


provided conform to such requirements. Certification by a nationally recognized testing laboratory that a representative sample has been tested to meet the requirements, or a published catalog specification statement to the effect that the item meets the referenced standard, will be acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with other requirements of the specifications.

2.1.1 General

Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for local processors. Each nameplate shall identify the local processor and its location within the system. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8 inch thick, white with black center core. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 1 by 3 inches, with minimum 1/4 inch high engraved block lettering. Attach nameplates to the inside of the enclosure housing the local processor. Other major components of the system shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a corrosion resistant plate secured to the item of equipment. Nameplates will not be required for devices smaller than 1 by 3 inches.

2.1.2 Enclosures

System enclosures shall be as shown.

2.1.2.1 Interior Sensor

Sensors to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in an enclosure that provides protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.

2.1.2.2 Interior Electronics

System electronics to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 12.

2.1.3 Fungus Treatment

System components located in fungus growth inductive environments shall be completely treated for fungus resistance. Treating materials containing a mercury bearing fungicide shall not be used. Treating materials shall not increase the flammability of the material or surface being treated. Treating materials shall cause no skin irritation or other injury to personnel handling it during fabrication, transportation, operation, or maintenance of the equipment, or during use of the finished items when used for the purpose intended.

2.1.4 Tamper Provisions

2.1.4.1 Tamper Switches

Enclosures, cabinets, housings, boxes, and fittings of every description having hinged doors or removable covers and which contain circuits or connections of the intrusion detection system and its power supplies, shall be provided with cover operated, corrosion-resistant tamper switches,

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 6


arranged to initiate an alarm signal when the door or cover is moved. The enclosure and the tamper switch shall function together in such a manner as to not allow direct line of sight to any internal components before the switch activates. Make tamper switches inaccessible until the switch is activated; have mounting hardware so concealed that the location of the switch cannot be observed from the exterior of the enclosure; be connected to circuits which are under electrical supervision at all times, irrespective of the protection mode in which the circuit is operating; shall be spring-loaded and held in the closed position by the door or cover; and shall be wired so that they break the circuit when the door or cover is disturbed.

2.1.4.1.1 Nonsensor Enclosures

Tamper switches on nonsensor enclosures, which must be opened to make routine maintenance adjustments to the system and to service the power supplies, shall be push/pull-set, automatic reset type.

2.1.4.1.2 Sensor Enclosures

Tamper switches on sensor enclosures, which must be opened to make routine maintenance adjustments to the sensor, shall be single pole single throw type.

2.1.4.2 Enclosure Covers

Covers of pull and junction boxes provided to facilitate initial installation of the system need not be provided with tamper switches if they contain no splices or connections, but shall be protected by tack welding or brazing the covers in place or by tamper resistant security fasteners. Labels shall be affixed to such boxes indicating they contain no connections.

2.1.5 Locks and Key-Lock Switches

2.1.5.1 Locks

Install locks on system enclosures for maintenance purposes. Locks shall be UL listed, round-key type, with three dual, one mushroom, and three plain pin tumblers or conventional key type lock having a combination of five cylinder pin and five-point three position side bar. Keys shall be stamped "U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP". The locks shall be so arranged that the key can only be withdrawn when in the locked position. All maintenance locks shall be keyed alike and only two keys shall be furnished for all of these locks. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control plan. Submit a Key control plan including the following:

a. Procedures that will be used to log and positively control all keys during installation.

b. A listing of all keys and where they are used.

c. A listing of all persons allowed entry to the keys.

2.1.5.2 Construction Locks

If the Contractor requires locks during installation and construction, a set of temporary locks shall be used. The final set of locks installed and delivered to the Government shall not include any of the temporary locks.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 7


2.1.6 Application of System Component

System components shall be designed for continuous operation. Electronic components shall be solid state type, mounted on printed circuit boards conforming to UL 796. Printed circuit board connectors shall be plug-in, quick-disconnect type. Power dissipating components shall incorporate safety margins of not less that 25 percent with respect to dissipation ratings, maximum voltages, and current carrying capacity. Light duty relays and similar switching devices shall be solid state type or sealed electro-mechanical.

2.1.6.1 Maintainability

Components shall be designed to be maintained using commercially available tools and equipment. Components shall be arranged and assembled so they are accessible to maintenance personnel. There shall be no degradation in tamper protection, structural integrity, EMI/RFI attenuation, or line supervision after maintenance when it is performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The system shall be configured and installed to yield a mean time to repair (MTTR) of not more than 8 hours. Repair time is the clock time from the time maintenance personnel are given entrance to the system and begin work, until the system is fully functional.

2.1.6.2 Interchangeability

Construct the system with off-the-shelf components which are physically, electrically and functionally interchangeable with equivalent components as complete items. Replacement of equivalent components shall not require modification of either the new component or of other components with which the replacement items are used. Custom designed or one-of-a-kind items shall not be used. Interchangeable components or modules shall not require trial and error matching in order to meet integrated system requirements, system accuracy, or restore complete system functionality.

2.1.6.3 Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI)

System components generating EMI/RFI shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 47 CFR 15.

2.1.6.4 Product Safety

System components shall conform to applicable rules and requirements of NFPA 70. System components shall be equipped with instruction plates, including warnings and cautions, describing physical safety, and special or important procedures to be followed in operating and servicing system equipment.

2.1.7 Controls and Designations

Provide controls and designations as specified in NEMA ICS 1.

2.1.8 Special Test Equipment

Provide all special test equipment, special hardware, software, tools, and programming or initialization equipment needed to start or maintain any part of the system and its components. Special test equipment is defined as any test equipment not normally used in an electronics maintenance facility.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 8


2.1.9 Alarm Output

The alarm output of each sensor shall be a single pole double throw (SPDT) contact rated for a minimum of 0.25 A at 24 volts DC.

2.1.10 Access/Secure Devices

2.1.10.1 Key Pads

Secure/Access keypads shall use a unique combination of alphanumeric and other symbols as an identifier. Keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbols keyboard with symbols arranged in ascending ASCII code ordinal sequence. The keypad shall have a contact output.

2.2 INTERIOR SENSORS

2.2.1 Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS)

The BMS shall detect 1/4 inch of separating relative movement between the magnet and the switch housing. Upon detecting such movement, it shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. Acceptable BMS Sensors:

General Electric (Sentrol) Model 2700 Series BMSGeneral Electric (Sentrol) Model 2807T Explosion Proof Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS)General Electric (Sentrol) Model 2507AH-L Wide Gap BMSGeneral Electric (Sentrol) Model 2800 Series BMSMagnasphere, High Security Sensor (HSS) Door Contact Switch, BMS, Version HSSL2S000

2.2.1.1 BMS Subassemblies

The BMS shall consist of a switch assembly and an actuating magnetic assembly. The switch mechanism shall be of the balanced magnetic type. Each switch shall be provided with an overcurrent protective device, rated to limit current to 80 percent of the switch capacity. Switches shall be rated for a minimum lifetime of one million operations. The housings of surface mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal and shall be weatherproof. The housings of recess mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal or plastic.

2.2.2 Passive Infrared Motion Sensor

The passive infrared motion sensor shall detect changes in the ambient level of infrared emissions caused by the movement of a standard intruder within the sensor's field of view. Upon detecting such changes, the sensor shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. The sensor shall detect a change in temperature of no more than 2 degrees F, and shall detect a standard intruder traveling within the sensor's detection pattern at a speed of 0.3 to 7.5 feet per second across two adjacent segments of the field of view. Emissions monitored by the sensor shall be in the 8 to 14 micron range. The sensor shall be adjustable to obtain the coverage pattern shown. The sensor shall be equipped with a temperature compensation circuit. Acceptable passive infrared sensors:

Bosch DS 9370 PIR/MW (Volumetric)Bosch DS 939 PIR (Volumetric)

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 9


General Electric AP669 PIR (Volumetric)Protech Passive Infrared and Microwave Intruder Detectors (PIRAMID) SDI-76-G (Volumetric)Protech Passive Infrared and Microwave Intruder Detectors (PIRAMID) SDI-77-D (Volumetric)Protech SDI-76M-HS1-H Volumetric (Coverage 60' x 40', Two Sensors in Combination)

2.2.2.1 Test Indicator, Infrared Emissions

The passive infrared motion sensor shall be equipped with an LED walk test indicator. The walk test indicator shall not be visible during normal operations. When visible, the walk test indicator shall light when the sensor detects an intruder. The sensor shall either be equipped with a manual control, located within the sensor's housing, to enable/disable the test indicator or the test indicator shall be located within the sensor such that it can only be seen when the housing is open/removed.

2.2.2.2 Remote Test, Infrared Emissions

Provide a remote test capability. The remote test hardware may be integral to the sensor or a separate piece of equipment. The remote test shall be initiated when commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall excite the sensing element and associated electronics causing an alarm signal to be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The sensor stimulation generated by the remote test hardware shall simulate a standard intruder moving within the sensor's detection pattern.

2.3 FIELD PROCESSING HARDWARE

2.3.1 Alarm Annunciation Local Processor

The alarm annunciation local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station and change outputs based on commands received from the central station. The local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs.

2.3.1.1 Inputs

Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for change of state that reflect alarm conditions. The local processor shall have at least 8 alarm inputs which allow wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions; and shall also provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements. The local processor shall report for any condition that remains off normal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds. Each alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central computer during the next interrogation cycle.

2.3.1.2 Outputs

Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station. The outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. The local processor shall have at least four command outputs.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 10


2.3.2 Processor Power Supply

Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source. The uninterruptible power source shall provide 6 hours of battery back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within 24 hours after primary power is restored. There will be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type. The power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc output power. Loss of primary power shall be reported to the central station as an alarm.

2.3.3 Auxiliary Equipment Power

A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's enclosure.

2.4 FIELD PROCESSING SOFTWARE

All field processing software described in this specification shall be furnished as part of the complete system.

2.4.1 Operating System

Each local processor shall contain an operating system that controls and schedules that local processor's activities in real time. The local processor shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes all parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of all points connected to that local processor. The execution of local processor application programs shall utilize the data in memory resident files. The operating system shall include a real time clock function that maintains the seconds, minutes, hours, date and month, including day of the week. Each local processor real time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station clock at least once per day to plus or minus 10 seconds. The time synchronization shall be accomplished without operator intervention and without requiring system shutdown.

2.4.1.1 Startup

The local processor shall have startup software that causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention, including startup of all connected functions. A local processor restart program based on detection of power failure at the local processor shall be included in the local processor software. The startup software shall initiate operation of self-test diagnostic routines. Upon failure of the local processor, if the database and application software are no longer resident, the local processor shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode indicated until the necessary repairs are made. If the database and application programs are resident, the local processor shall immediately resume operation.

2.4.1.2 Operating Mode

Each local processor shall control and monitor inputs and outputs as specified, independent of communications with the central station. Alarms, status changes and other data shall be transmitted to the central station when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available, each local processor shall function in a stand-alone mode and

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 11


operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station shall be stored for later transmission to the central station. Storage for the latest 1024 events shall be provided at each local processor. Each local processor shall accept software downloaded from the central station.

2.4.1.3 Failure Mode

Upon failure for any reason, each local processor shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all local processor outputs to a predetermined (failure mode) state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device.

2.4.2 Functions

Provide all software necessary to accomplish the following functions, as appropriate, fully implemented and operational, within each local processor.

a. Monitoring of inputs.

b. Control of outputs.

c. Reporting of alarms automatically to central station.

d. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station upon request.

e. Maintenance of real time, updated by the central station at least once a day.

f. Communication with the central station.

g. Execution of local processor resident programs.

h. Diagnostics.

i. Download and upload data to and from the central station.

2.5 WIRE AND CABLE

2.5.1 General

Provide all wire and cable not indicated as Government furnished equipment. All wiring shall meet NFPA 70 standards.

2.5.2 Above Ground Sensor Wiring

Sensor wiring shall be 20 AWG minimum, twisted and shielded, 2, 3, 4, or 6 pairs to match hardware. Multiconductor wire shall have an outer jacket of PVC.

2.5.3 Class 2 Low Energy Conductors

The conductor sizes specified for digital functions shall take precedence over any requirements for Class 2 low energy signal-circuit conductors specified elsewhere.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 12


2.6 Vindicator Specific System Requirements

2.6.1 Vindicator Annunciator

Vindicator Security Management and Reporting Terminal (SMART) Annunciator with Graphics Display:

Version 2.40 with Administrative Browser 4.0Version 2.43, Build 11Vindicator Command and Control (VCC) Version 1.0.1.5Vindicator Access Control System (ACS) Version 2.3, Build 21Transponder Firmware Version 2.28TS 4000 Radion Frequency (R/F) Modem Interface

Vindicator SMART with Graphics Display Version 2.39 and SAW Version 3.9

Vindicator Command and Control Platform (VCCP) v5-Version 5.0Vindicator Command and Control Platform (VCCP) v5-Version 6.0Vindicator Command and Control Platform (VCCP) v5-Version 6.5 (Win 7, 32 bit only)

Vindicator Command and Control (VCC) GUI Version 5.1.1.4Vindicator Badge Manager 2 (VBM 2) Version 2.0.7.0Vindicator Badge Manager 2 (VBM 2) Version 2.0.7.1 (Win 7, 32 bit only)Vindicator Security Archive Workstation (SAW 5) Version 5.1.0.6Honeywell Vindicator Site Commander Version 1.2.0.1V5 IDS Network Security Appliance-Intrusion Detection, Revision 3.2, Release 20:UHS-8170DES-8170TAES-8170T

Vindicator UHS-Net Gateways:UHS-8101 Version 2.33, Build 7UHS-8102 Version 2.33, Build 6UHS-8301 Version 2.33, Build 13UHS-8400 Version 2.33, Build 13

Vindicator UHS-Net Transponder/Gateway Revision 3.3, Release 5:UHS-1500DES-1500TAES-1500T

Vindicator UHS-Net Transponders Version 2.33, Build 13:UHS-6842UHS-6842FDES-6842DES-6842F

PC SMART PAC Software Package Version 5.1Proteus5 and SmartSave 5 Software Programs Version 5.2

Vindicator Command and Control Platform (VCCP) Windows 7 (64 bit)Vindicator Command and Control 2-Version 1.2.1.4V5 ACS Network Security Application-Version 3.2, Release 23UHS-1500 UHS-Net Field Panel-Version 3.3, Release 7Security Archive Workstation 2-Version 1.4.2.9Vindicator Site Commander-Version 1.3.0.7

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 13


Vindicator Area Commander-Version 1.1.0.6Vindicator Premise Controller-Version 3.3, Release 7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install the system in accordance with the standards for safety, NFPA 70, UL 681, UL 1037 and UL 1076, UL 2050 and the appropriate installation manual for each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with appropriate service points to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20 minutes. Minimum size of conduit shall be 1/2 inch. DTS shall not be pulled into conduits or placed in raceways, compartments, outlet boxes, junction boxes, or similar fittings with other building wiring. Flexible cords or cord connections shall not be used to supply power to any components of the system, except where specifically noted herein. All other electrical work shall be as specified in Sections 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown. Grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation. Install all system components, including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, IEEE C2 and as shown, and shall furnish necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system as specified and shown. Submit printed copies of manufacturer's recommendations for installation of materials prior to installation. Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received and approved.

3.1.1 Enclosure Penetrations

All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and all penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer, and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged.

3.1.2 Cold Galvanizing

All field welds and/or brazing on factory galvanized components, such as boxes, enclosures, and conduits, shall be coated with a cold-galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.

3.2 SYSTEM STARTUP

Do not apply power to the intrusion detection system until the following items have been completed:

a. Intrusion detection system equipment items and DTS have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. A visual inspection of the intrusion detection system has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 14


c. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.

d. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly installed and connected as indicated.

e. Power supplies to be connected to the intrusion detection system have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.

f. Satisfaction of the above requirements will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installation, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment.

3.3 SITE TESTING

3.3.1 Testing

Submit a Test Plan defining all tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60 days prior to proposed test date. The test plan must be approved before the start of any testing. The test plan shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested, and include detailed instructions for the setup and execution of each test and procedures for evaluation and documentation of the results. Perform site testing and adjustment of the completed intrusion detection system. Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing. The Government will witness all testing. Obtain written permission from the Government before proceeding with the next phase of testing.

a. Original copies of all data produced during performance verification and endurance testing shall be turned over to the Government at the conclusion of each phase of testing prior to Government approval of the test. Submit written notification of planned testing to the Government, at least 14 days prior to the test, and in no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written approval of the specific test procedures.

b. Calibrate and test all equipment, verify data transmission system (DTS) operation, place the integrated system in service, and test the integrated system. Test installed ground rods as specified in IEEE 142.

c. Deliver a report describing results of functional tests, diagnostics, and calibrations including written certification to the Government that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is ready to begin performance verification testing. The report shall also include a copy of the approved performance verification test procedure.

3.3.2 Performance Verification Test

Demonstrate that the completed system complies with the specified requirements. Using approved test procedures, all physical and functional requirements of the project shall be demonstrated and shown. The performance verification test, as specified, shall not be started until receipt of written permission from the Government, based on the Contractor's written request. This shall include certification of successful completion of testing as specified in paragraph Contractor's Field Testing, and upon successful completion of training as specified. Upon successful completion of the performance verification test, deliver

SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 15


test reports and other documentation to the Government, as specified. Submit test reports, in booklet form with witness signatures verifying execution of tests. Reports shall show the field tests to verify compliance with the specified performance criteria. Test reports shall include records of the physical parameters verified during testing. Test reports shall be submitted within 14 days after completion of testing. The Contractor will not be held responsible for failures in system performance resulting from the following:

a. An outage of the main power in excess of the capability of any backup power source, provided that the automatic initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and that automatic shutdown and restart of the system performed as specified.

b. Failure of a Government furnished communications link, provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software.

c. Failure of existing Government owned equipment, provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software.

d. The occurrence of specified nuisance alarms.

e. The occurrence of specified environmental alarms.


SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 16


SECTION 28 20 00.00 20

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM B 32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal


IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms



U.S. DEFENSE INTELLIGENCE AGENCY (DIA)

DIA DCID 6/9 (2002) Director of Central Intelligence Directive No. 6/9


UL 1037 (1999; Rev thru Nov 2004) Standard for Safety Antitheft Alarms and Devices

UL 1076 (1995; Rev thru Mar 2005) Standard for Safety Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

UL 294 (1999; Rev thru Aug 2005) Access Control System Units

UL 681 (2014) Installation and Classification of Burglar and Holdup Alarm Systems


Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Items of equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that have been in satisfactory use at

SECTION 28 20 00.00 20 Page 1


least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.

a. Active mode: That in which some type of signal is continuously sent across the link, resulting in simple link breaks being readily detected.

b. Fail-safe: The capability to monitor system functions and report an alarm when a failure is detected in a critical system function.

c. Installer: Either the Contractor or a subcontractor with whom the Contractor has a firm contractual agreement.

e. Sensor zone: A geographic position for which an intrusion must be identified and displayed and may be the combination of multiple detection devices.

f. Element: As used in this section means a constituent part of a complex signal such as an ac or dc voltage or current, ac phase, or frequency duration.


Provide new Automated Access Control System (AACS) , including associated equipment and appurtenances. The design of the AACS shall include devices and equipment used to , control access to restricted areas, The AACS shall be designed to provide operational flexibility and reliable performance. The AACS shall be modular, allowing for future incremental expansion or modification of inputs, outputs, and remote control stations.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

SECTION 28 20 00.00 20 Page 2


Overall system schematic; G

SD-03 Product Data

Communications; G

Card reader; G

Keypad; G

SD-06 Test Reports

SD-07 Certificates

ESS operational test plan; G

Installer's qualifications; G

Instructor's qualifications; G


ESS components, Data Package 5 ; GACS Software; G

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.



1.6.1 Drawings

1.6.1.1 ESS Components

Submit drawings that clearly and completely indicate the function of each ESS component. Indicate termination points of devices, and interconnections required for system operation. Indicate interconnection between modules and devices. In addition, submit a layout drawing showing spacing of components, location, mounting and positioning details.

1.6.1.2 Overall System Schematic

Indicate the relationship of integrated components on one diagram and show power source, system controls, impedance matches; plus number, size, identification, and maximum lengths of interconnecting wires. Drawings shall be not less than 11 by 17 inches.

1.6.2 Evidence of Experience and Qualifications

1.6.2.1 Installer's Qualifications

Prior to installation, submit data of the installer's experience and certified qualifications. Show that the installer who will perform the work has a minimum of 2 years experience successfully installing ESS of the same type and design as specified herein. Include the names, locations, and points of contact of at least two installations of the same type and

SECTION 28 20 00.00 20 Page 3


design as specified herein where the installer has installed such systems. Indicate the type of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 12 months.

1.6.2.2 Instructor's Qualifications

Prior to installation, submit data of the instructor's experience and certified qualifications. Show that the instructor, who will train operating and maintenance personnel, has received a minimum of 24 hours of ESS training from a technical organization such as the National Burglar and Fire Alarm Association, and 2 years experience in the installation of ESS of the type specified.



1.6.3.1 Reference Standard Compliance

Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance

1.6.3.2 Independent Testing Organization Certificate

In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standardProvide only UL listed ESS equipment for access control, and components.

1.6.4 ESS Operational Test Plan

Submit at least 30 days prior to commencement of formal operational testing. Include detailed procedures for operational testing of each ESS component and subsystem, and for performance of an integrated system test.

1.6.5 User's Software Data

Submit for approval not later than 30 days prior to formal operational testing or instruction to Government personnel on ESS software, whichever is earlier. ACS software shall be documented in the user's manual.


Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

SECTION 28 20 00.00 20 Page 4


regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished


Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACS SUBSYSTEMS

Provide a complete integrated ACS consisting of the following major subsystems:

a. Automated Access Control System

2.2 Automated Access Control System (AACS)

Basis of design is Hirsch to provide future interconnection with the existing building system. Other manufacterers are acceptable if compatible with the existing Hirsch system.. Provide Automated access control system based upon a modular distributed microprocessor architecture complete with access control cards (provide a minimum of 500 cards and provide 1-card printer) and ready for operation. System shall meet the Grade AA communications requirements of UL 1076 and UL 294. System shall grant or deny access or exit based upon keypad identification data and card identification data, input through the access control devices compared to data stored within the system, as well as time of day and day of week.

The AACS primary functions shall be to regulate access through specific doors or portals to secured areas.

The AACS shall support configuration and simultaneous monitoring of multiple access control devices when TCP/IP communication interfaces are used between the ESS and the primary Access Control Units (ACU). The events of the AACS shall be viewable as separate or as a combined list of all ESS events. Overall control of the AACS, alarm monitoring shall be through software control of the ESS.

AACS functions shall include validation based on time of day and day of week, special day/holiday scheduling with card validation override, access validation based on positive verification of card, card/PIN, card and video.

SECTION 28 20 00.00 20 Page 5


2.2.1 Access Control Unit (ACU)

The ACU shall be micro-processor based. The ACU shall be capable of, but not limited to, the following:

(1) The ACU shall have the capability of supporting card reader technologies including Card/Keypad. This capability shall be an integral part of the ACU and will not require special external equipment.

(2) The ACU shall have built-in battery back-up.

(3) The ACU shall be powered by a DC power source. The power supply shall have a battery back-up for complete system operation in the event of power failure.

(4) Electric locks and other locking devices and ancillary peripherals shall have a separate power supply.

2.2.2 Card Reader and Keypad Access Control Devices

Devices shall be tamper and vandal resistant, and solid state, containing no electronics which could compromise the access control subsystem should the subsystem be attacked. Devices shall be surface, semiflush, pedestal, or weatherproof mountable as specified for each individual location. Card readers shall be the proximity type access control cards (with scramble keypad where indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

UL 681, UL 1037, and UL 1076, and the appropriate installation manual for each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with appropriate "service points" to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20 minutes.

3.1.1 Cable and Wire Runs

NFPA 70 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,applicable DOD directives, DIA DCID 6/9, and as specified herein. Conduits including flexible metal and armored cable shall terminate in the sensor or device enclosure. Ends of conduit shall be fitted with insulated bushings. Exposed conductors at ends of conduits external to sensors and devices are not acceptable.

3.1.2 Soldering

ASTM B 32. For soldering electrical connections, use composition Sn60, Type AR or S, for general purposes; use composition Sn62 or Sn63, Type AR or S, for special purposes. When Type S solder is used for soldering electrical connections, flux shall conform to ASTM B 32.

3.1.3 Galvanizing

Ferrous metal shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with

SECTION 28 20 00.00 20 Page 6


ASTM A 123/A 123M. Screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastenings and supports shall be corrosion resistant.

3.1.4 Conduit

Install in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.2 AACS System Acceptance and Training

3.2.1 AACS System Acceptance Test

AACS System Acceptance testing shall be performed as follows;

a. Prior to the final acceptance test, security contractor shall conduct a complete test of the entire AACS including subsystems and provide the Contracting Officer with a written report.

b. Following completion of the initial testing and correction of any noted deficiencies, conduct a five-day burn-in test, intent of the burn-in test shall be to prove the AACS by placing it in near real operating conditions. During this period the AACS shall be fully functional and programmed such that all points, interfaces, controls, reports, messages, prompts, etc. can be exercised and validated. Record and correct any system anomaly, deficiency, or failure noted during this period. Scheduling of the final acceptance test shall be based on a review of the results of this burn-in test.

c. Prior to the final acceptance test, complete all clean-up and patch work requirements. Security equipment closets and similar areas shall be free of accumulation of waste materials or rubbishcaused by operations under the Contract At completion of the Work, remove all waste materials, rubbish, contractor tools, construction equipment, machinery and all surplus materials.

d. The functionality of the various interfaces between systems will be tested.

e. The installation of all field devices will be inspected. This field inspection will weigh heavily on the general neatness and quality of installation, complete functionality of each device, and compliance with mounting, back box and conduit requirements.

f. All equipment shall be on and fully operational during any and all testing procedures. Provide personnel, equipment, and supplies necessary to perform all site testing. Provide a minimum of two Contractor employees familiar with the ACS for the final acceptance test.

3.3 NAMEPLATE MOUNTING



SECTION 28 20 00.00 20 Page 7


SECTION 28 31 76

INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM08/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Division 26 ELECTRICAL applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. In addition, refer to the following sections for related work and coordination:

Section 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTIONSection 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS for additional work related to elevators.Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to firestopping.

1.2 SUMMARY

1.2.1 Scope

a. This work includes completion of design and providing a new, complete, fire alarm and mass notification system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the 39th IOS addition. Include in the system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide system complete and ready for operation.

b. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict accordance with the required provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as modified herein. The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations. Submit plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170. Final quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.3 REFERENCES


ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)

ASA S3.2 (2009; R 2014) Method for Measuring the Intelligibility of Speech Over Communication Systems (ASA 85)




ASME A17.1/CSA B44 (2013) Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

FM GLOBAL (FM)





INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 60268-16 (2003; ED 4.0) Sound System Equipment - Part 16: Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility By Speech Transmission Index

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems — Part 16: Sound System Control And Indicating Equipment

ISO 7240-19 (2007) Fire Detection and Alarm Systems — Part 19: Design, Installation, Commissioning and Service of Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes


NFPA 170 (2015) Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols





UFC 3-601-02 (2010) Operations and Maintenance: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems

UFC 4-021-01 (2008; with Change 1) Design and O&M: Mass



Notification Systems


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices

47 CFR 90 Private Land Mobile Radio Services


UL 1480 (2016) Standard for Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use

UL 1638 (2016) Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General Utility Signaling

UL 1971 (2002; Reprint Oct 2008) Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired

UL 2017 (2008; Reprint Jan 2016) General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems

UL 268 (2016) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems

UL 464 (2016) Standard for Audible Signal Appliances

UL 864 (2014) Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems


UL Fire Prot Dir (2015) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Wherever mentioned in this specification section or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:

1.4.1 Interface Device

An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system.

1.4.2 Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Autonomous Control Unit (FMCP)

A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control units are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory, input and output terminals, and LCD, LED Display units.

1.4.3 Local Operating Console (LOC)

A unit designed to allow emergency responders and/or building occupants to



operate the mass notification system (MNS) including delivery of recorded and/or live messages, initiate strobe and textural visible appliance operation and other related functions.

1.4.4 Terminal Cabinet

A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door that terminal strips are securely mounted.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Nameplates; G

Instructions; G

Wiring Diagrams; G

System Layout; G

System Operation; G

Notification Appliances; G

Amplifiers; G

SD-03 Product Data

Technical Data And Computer Software; G

Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCP); G

Terminal Cabinets; G

Manual Stations; G

Transmitters (including housing); G

Batteries; G

Battery Chargers; G

Smoke Sensors; G

Notification Appliances; G

Addressable Interface Devices; G

Amplifiers; G



Tone Generators; G

Digitalized Voice Generators; G

Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels; G

Local Operating Console (LOC); G

SD-05 Design Data

Battery Power; G

Battery Chargers; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control

Testing Procedures; G

Smoke Sensor Testing Procedures; G

SD-07 Certificates

Installer

Formal Inspection and Tests

Final Testing


System Operation; G

Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System


Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G

Instruction of Government Employees; G


As-Built Drawings

1.6 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE

Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and may be defined/required in other specification sections, shall be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The data package shall also include the following:

a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and



capabilities.

b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements.

c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions of the fire alarm and detection system.

d. Description of fire alarm and mass notification control panel equipment operation.

e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.

f. Library of application software.

g. Operation and maintenance manuals.


Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm and mass notification system and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system. The proprietary type Supervising Station (PSS) is located in the Base Fire Department.

a. Interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" to mean the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR).

b. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements.

c. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service must be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE.

1.7.1 Qualifications

1.7.1.1 Design Services

Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an individual meeting one of the following conditions:

a. A registered professional engineer having a Bachelor of Science or Masters of Science Degree in Fire Protection Engineering from an accredited university engineering program, plus a minimum of four years work experience in fire protection engineering.

b. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection engineering.

c. Registered professional engineer with verification of experience and at least five years of current experience in the design of the fire protection and detection systems.



1.7.1.2 Supervisor

NICET fire alarm technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level 3 fire alarm technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification system. The fire alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.3 Technician

Fire alarm technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized to install and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The fire alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.4 Installer

Fire alarm installer with a minimum of two years of experience utilized to assist in the installation of fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician shall be allowed to install wire, cable, conduit and backboxes for the fire alarm/mass notification system. The fire alarm installer shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.5 Test Personnel

Fire alarm technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience (NICET Level 3 or 4)utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The fire alarm technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.7.1.6 Manufacturer's Representative

The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control panel. The manufacturer's representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer or the installing contractor with necessary technical training (NICET Level 3 or 4)on the system being installed.

1.7.1.7 Manufacturer

Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.


1.7.2.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service

Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms



under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.

1.7.2.2 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System

Furnish equipment that is compatible and is UL-listed, FM-approved, or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use. All listings by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. Submit a unique identifier for each device, including the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication of test results, and signature of the factory trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate test reports.

1.7.2.3 Fire alarm Testing Services or Laboratories

Construct fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM APP GUIDE.


Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Submit annotated catalog data as required in the paragraph SUBMITTAL, in table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings shall not be smaller than ISO A1. Also provide UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided.


Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM Approvals, LLC (FM), and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification section. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least two years prior to bid opening.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. FMCPs

b. Automatic transmitter/transceiver



c. Terminal cabinet

Furnish nameplate illustrations and data to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation. Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer for installation locations. Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls.

2.1.3 Keys

Keys and locks for fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required. Lock cores shall match the C415 type key per the Base requirements.

LOC is not permitted to be locked or lockable.

2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT

All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of listed UL 864 or similar approved industry listing with mass notification panels listed to UL 2017 shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the software programming features cannot provide a listed interface control. If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays, the contractor shall notifity Contracting Officer. As part of the submittal documents, provide this information.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

The addressable interior fire alarm and mass notification system shall be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864 , and UL 2017. The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the control panel is reset and restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alarm mode by local microphones, LOC, or remotely from authorized locations/users.

Submit data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances and 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings. Submit a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings. Submit a complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages.

2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Voice, Textural)

a. Connect alarm initiating devices to signal line circuits (SLC) Class "B" and installed in accordance with NFPA 72.

b. Connect alarm notification appliances and speakers to notification appliance circuits (NAC) Class "B".

c. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device or a mass notification signal. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) or mass notification signal is/are reset and the control panel is manually



reset and restored to normal. Audible, and visual appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72 and as specified herein. Fire alarm/mass notification system components requiring power, except for the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.

2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features

The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:

a. The FMCP shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer (microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.

b. Provide signaling line circuits for the network.

c. Provide notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized as required by NFPA 72.

d. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.

e. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.

f. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FMCP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting system, air handler shutdown and elevator recall features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FMCP display and printer output.

g. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the fire department.

h. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.

i. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panel keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory.

j. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices.

k. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously.

l. Where the fire alarm/mass notification system is responsible for



initiating an action in another emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC system or an elevator system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be in the vicinity of the emergency control device.

m. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Transmission of an alarm signal to the fire department.

(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the control panel (FMCP) and on the annunciator. Indication on the annunciator shall be by floor, zone or circuit, and type of device.

(3) Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances.

(4) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the fire control system unit.

(5) Operation of a smoke sensor in an elevator lobby or other location associated with the automatic recall of elevators, shall recall the elevators in addition to other requirements of this paragraph.

(6) Operation of a sprinkler waterflow switch serving an elevator machinery room or elevator shaft shall operate shunt trip circuit breaker(s) to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

n. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FMCP, and on the annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to the fire department.

(3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the control unit.

(4) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72.

o. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FMCP and on the annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a trouble signal to the fire department.

(3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the control unit.

p. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FMCP is 10 seconds.

q. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FMCP is 200 seconds.



r. Activation of a LOC pushbutton shall activate the audible and visual alarms in the facility. The audible message shall be the one associated with the pushbutton activated.

2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING

2.4.1 Valves

Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve and isolating valves for supervision switches, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Provide each tamper switch with a separate address.

2.5 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

2.5.1 Notification Appliance Network

The audible notification appliance network consists of speakers located to provide intelligible instructions in all areas of the building that are normally occupied. Audibility requirements are to be met in areas of the building that are not normally occupied. The mass notification system announcements shall take priority over all other audible announcements of the system including the output of the fire alarm system in a normal or alarm state. When a mass notification announcement is activated during a fire alarm, all fire alarm system functions shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the fire alarm audible and visual notification appliances.

2.5.2 Strobes

Provide strobes to alert hearing-impaired occupants.

2.5.3 Wide Area MNS

The wide area MNS system (if available) in the area of the building shall not be activated by the in-building MNS.

2.5.4 Voice Notification

An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate delivery of prerecorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and instructions, and initiate visual strobe notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering mass notification messages to ensure they are intelligible.

2.5.5 Installation-Wide Control

If an Installation-wide control system for mass notification exists on the Base, the autonomous control unit shall communicate with the central control unit of the Installation-wide system. The autonomous control unit shall receive commands/messages from the central control unit and provide status information.



2.6 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION

2.6.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection

For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the following waveform(s):

a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be provided at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors, rated for the application, shall be installed on each wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection

Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested with the following waveform(s):

a. A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Class "B" initiating device circuit. The system shall be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, relays for output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL-listed or FM-approved as compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to initiate elevator fire service. The module shall be UL-listed or FM-approved as compatible with the control panel. The indicating device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Class "B" notification appliance circuit. The system shall be capable of supervising audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect a short on



the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Control modules shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed.

2.9 SMOKE SENSORS

2.9.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors

Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:

a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.

b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any re-adjustment after actuation at the FMCP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL-listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.

c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber.

d. Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.

e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.

f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device.

(1) Primary status

(2) Device type

(3) Present average value

(4) Present sensitivity selected

(5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)

2.9.2 Duct Smoke Sensors

Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke sensors shall be furnished and installed where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a smoke sensor as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Smoke Sensors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Sensor circuitry



shall be mounted in an enclosure exterior to the duct. (It is not permitted to cut the duct insulation to install the duct sensor directly on the duct). Sensors shall have a manual reset. Sensors shall be rated for air velocities that include air flows between 500 and 4000 fpm. Sensors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel.

a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct sensor package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268, and shall be UL-listed for use in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from the fire alarm control panel.

b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place. Remote indicators shall be provided where required by NFPA 72 and these shall be provided with test and reset switches.

c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly identified in etched plastic placards. Sensors shall provide control of auxiliary contacts that provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions specified in Section 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC. Auxiliary contacts provided for this function shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance. The sensors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.

2.9.3 Air Sampling Smoke Sensors

Air sampling sensors are early warning devices use to detect what may be the beginning of a fire. The sensor uses a series of perforated pipes in the protected area to continuously draw air into the sampling chamber. Once in the sampling chamber the the air is sampled by mass scattering of light, laser particle counting or cloud density measuring to determine if there is possibly a fire in the protected area. These units shall be programmable in multiple levels to indicate detection of particles that are not normally present, to indicate the presence of particle that could be produced by a fire and to indicate the presence of particles of the proper size and quantity to indicate that a fire conditions exists.

2.9.4 Smoke Sensor Testing

Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval. In addition to the NFPA 72 requirements, smoke sensor sensitivity shall be tested during the preliminary tests.

2.10 ELECTRIC POWER

2.10.1 Primary Power

Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FMCP from the AC service to the building in accordance with NFPA 72.

2.11 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY

Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause



transmission of a false alarm.

2.11.1 Batteries

Provide maintenance-free, sealed lead acid batteries as the source for emergency power to the FMCP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power.

2.11.1.1 Capacity

Battery size shall be the greater of the following two capacities.

a. Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 24 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes.

b. Sufficient capacity to operate the mass notification system for 60 minutes after loss of AC power.

2.11.1.2 Battery Power Calculations

a. Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements.

(1) Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each panel component, and compliance with UL 864.

(2) Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Submit ampere-hour requirements for each system component with the calculations.

(3) A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components, at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries.

b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources.

2.11.2 Battery Chargers

Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 120 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed



on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided.

2.12 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNIT (FMCP)

Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the unit cabinets shall match exactly.

a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.

b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters. The mass notification control unit shall have the capability of temporarily deactivating the fire alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages.

c. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least eight prerecorded messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat prerecorded messages. Provide a secure microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, and initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file.

2.12.1 Cabinet

Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less than 1-inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and recessed mounting provisions.

2.12.2 Control Modules

Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FMCP. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and resistors, if any, on screw terminals in the FMCP. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL-listed voltage at the sensor or appliance connected. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage.



2.12.3 Silencing Switches

2.12.3.1 Alarm Silencing Switch

Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FMCP that shall silence the audible and visual appliances. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.

2.12.3.2 Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch

Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.

2.12.4 Non-Interfering

Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually reset by switch from the FMCP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.

2.12.5 Audible Notification System

The audible notification system shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for emergency voice/alarm communications system requirements ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of a minimum eight distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Audible appliances shall produce a temporal code 3 tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers throughout the building/facility, but not in stairs or elevator cabs. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control panel or the LOC.

a. When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast throughout the building. The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the code 3 temporal tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit in the event an alarm is activated.

b. The mass notification functions shall override the manual or automatic fire alarm notification or public address (PA) functions. Other fire alarm functions including transmission of a signal(s) to the fire department shall remain operational. The system shall have the capability of utilizing LOC with redundant controls of the notification system control panel. Notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level. Amplifier



outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The strobe NAC circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC circuits activation.

2.12.5.1 Outputs and Operational Modules

All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Provide form "C" contacts for system alarm and trouble conditions. Provide circuits for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a mass notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the fire alarm system.

2.12.5.2 Mass Notification and Fire Alarm

a. Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the audible notification system. All tones shall be 1000 Hz tones (as required in 18.4.2.1 of NFPA 72). Messages shall utilize the voice as noted in the following table and shall be the following:

Priority Type Pre-Tone Voice Message Script (Tones andMessages Repeat a Minimum of

Three Times

1 BombThreat

Continuous Male May I have your attention please! A bomb threat has been reported in or around the building. Please follow the pre-plan and await further instructions.

2 Intruder Continuous Male May I have your attention please! An intruder/hostile person has been sighted within or around the building. Please follow the pre-plan and await further instructions.

3 AlternateExit

Continuous Male May I have your attention please! Please evacuate the building - using the designated alternate exits.

4 Fire Code 3 Female May I have your attention please! A fire emergency has been reported in the building. While this is being verified, please leave by the nearest exit and report to your designated assembly area.



Priority Type Pre-Tone Voice Message Script (Tones andMessages Repeat a Minimum of

Three Times

5 Shelterin Place

Continuous Male May I have your attention please! Please shelter in place, and await further instructions.

6 Weather None Male May I have your attention please! The National Weather Service has issued a severe weather warning for our area.

7 AllClear

None Male May I have your attention please! The building emergency has ended. An all clear has been given. Please resume normal activities.

8 Test None Male May I have your attention please! This is a test of the mass notification system, this is only a test.

b. The LOC shall incorporate a push-to-talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system status indicators of/for the system. The unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation, Public Address system or prerecorded messages. All wiring to the LOC shall be supervised in accordance with UFC 4-021-01. Systems that require field modification or are not supervised for multiple LOC's shall not be approved.The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel. The housing shall contain a latch (not lock).

c. Auxiliary input module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion module to either expand the number of optional LOC's, or allow a telephone interface.

d. When an installation has more than one LOC, the LOC's shall be programmed to allow only one LOC to be available for page or messaging at a time. Once one LOC becomes active, all other LOC's will have an indication that the system is busy (Amber Busy Light)and cannot be used at that time. This is to avoid two messages being given at the same time. Also, it must be possible to override or lockout the LOC's from the Master Command Panel (in accordance with NFPA 72).

2.12.6 Memory

Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.

2.12.7 Field Programmability

Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable



for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.

2.12.8 Input/Output Modifications

The FMCP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FMCP.

2.12.9 Resetting

Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists.

2.12.10 Instructions

Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the FMCP. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.

2.12.11 Walk Test

The FMCP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.

2.12.12 History Logging

In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory.

2.13 AMPLIFIERS, PRE-AMPLIFIERS, BOOSTER, TONE GENERATORS

Any amplifiers, pre-amplifiers, booster panels, tone generators, digitalized voice generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote FMCP, terminal cabinet, or in the FMCP. Submit data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at the maximum rating plus 50 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings. Amplifiers, pre-amplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators, and booster panels shall not be installed in finished areas. These devices shall be installed in mechanical or electrical rooms/closets.



2.13.1 Operation

The system shall automatically operate and control all building speakers except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages.

2.13.2 Construction

Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system.

2.13.3 Inputs

Equip each system with separate inputs for the tone generator, digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.

2.13.4 Tone Generator

The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a code 3 temporal tone and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm silence mode as specified. The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay.

2.13.5 Protection Circuits

Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and other actions for trouble conditions as specified.

2.14 ANNUNCIATOR

2.14.1 Annunciator Panel

Provide an annunciator that includes an LCD display. The display shall indicate the device in trouble/alarm or any supervisory device. Display the device name, address, and actual building location.

A building floor plan shall be provided mounted (behind plexiglass or similar protective material) at the annunciator location. The floor plan shall indicate all rooms by name and number including the locations of stairs and elevators. The floor plan shall show all devices and their programmed address to facilitate their physical location from the LCD display information.



2.14.2 Programming

Where programming for the operation of the annunciator is accomplished by a separate software program than the software for the FMCP, the software program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power. The software shall be reprogrammable in the field.

2.15 MANUAL STATIONS

Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double-action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key shall be required to reset the station. The operating handle of the manual stations shall be mounted at 48 inches. Stations shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor.

2.16 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

2.16.1 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers

Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Surface-mounted audible appliances shall be painted red.

a. Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with audio line input levels of 70.7 VRMs and 25 VRMs, by means of selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2-watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 150 Hz to 10,000 Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4-inch square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall-mounted unit. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the FMCP.

b. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16 gauge or molded high impact plastic and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.

c. Speakers shall utilize screw terminals for termination of all field wiring.

d. Provide self-amplifying speakers in all stand-alone secured areas. Connection to a remote amplifier is not permitted.

2.16.2 Visual Notification Appliances

Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA). Colored lens, such as amber, shall comply with UL 1638. The manufacturer shall



have the color lens tested to the full UL 1971 polar plotting criteria, voltage drop, and temperature rise as stated in UL 1971. Fire alarm notification appliances shall have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and be marked "Fire" in red letters. Mass notification appliances shall have amber high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and be marked "ALERT" in red letters. The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 15 candela (actual output after derating for tinted lens) based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be surface-mounted. Where two or more appliances are located in the same room or corridor or field of view, provide synchronized operation. Devices shall use screw terminals for all field wiring.

2.17 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS

Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit fire alarm or mass notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed. Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating device or notification appliance.

2.18 INTERFACE TO THE BASE-WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK

2.18.1 Radio

The radio transceiver shall be bi-direction and meet all the requirements of paragraph, RADIO TRANSMITTER AND INTERFACE PANELS as specified in this specification section. The transceiver utilized in the mass notification system shall be capable of the following:

a. Communication with the central control/monitoring system to provide supervision of communication link and status changes are reported by automatic and manual poll/reply/acknowledge routines.

b. All monitored points/status changes are transmitted immediately and at programmed intervals until acknowledged by the central control/monitoring system.

c. Each transceiver shall transmit a unique identity code as part of all messages; the code is set by the user at the transceiver.

2.18.1.1 Radio Frequency Communications

Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA) requirements.

2.18.1.2 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems

An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation.



2.19 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS

2.19.1 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels

Transmitters shall be compatible with proprietary supervising station receiving equipment. Each radio alarm transmitter shall be the manufacturer's recognized commercial product, completely assembled, wired, factory tested, and delivered ready for installation and operation. Transmitters shall be provided in accordance with applicable portions of NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90 and Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 15. Transmitter electronics module shall be contained within the physical housing as an integral, removable assembly. The proprietary supervising station receiving equipment is Monaco BT-XM and the transceiver shall be fully compatible with this equipment. At the contractors option, and if UL-listed or FM-approved, the transmitter may be housed in the same panel as the fire alarm control panel. The transmitter shall be narrowband radio, with FCC certification for narrowband operation and meets the requirements of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and Information Administration) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Frequency Management.

2.19.1.1 Operation

Operate each transmitter from 120-volt ac power. In the event of 120-volt ac power loss, the transmitter shall automatically switch to battery operation. Switchover shall be accomplished with no interruption of protective service, and shall automatically transmit a trouble message. Upon restoration of ac power, transfer back to normal ac power supply shall also be automatic.

2.19.1.2 Battery Power

Transmitter standby battery capacity shall provide sufficient power to operate the transmitter in a normal standby status for a minimum of 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during that period.

2.19.1.3 Transmitter Housing

Use NEMA Type 1 for housing. The housing shall contain a lock that is keyed identical to radio alarm transmitter housings on the Base. Radio alarm transmitter housing shall be factory painted with a suitable priming coat and not less than two coats of a hard, durable weatherproof enamel.

2.19.1.4 Antenna

Antenna shall be omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas for radio alarm transmitters with a driving point impedance to match transmitter output. The antenna and antenna mounts shall be corrosion resistant and designed to withstand wind velocities of 100 mph. Do not mount antennas to any portion of the building roofing system. Protect the antenna from physical damage.

2.19.2 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station

The following signals shall be sent to the Base receiving station:

a. Building general alarm

b. First floor waterflow switch activation



c. Second floor waterflow switch activation

d. Manual pull station activation

e. Smoke sensor activation

f. Duct smoke sensor activation

g. Air sampling smoke sensor alarm

h. Air sampling smoke sensor trouble

i. Sprinkler valve supervision (tamper switch)

j. LOC HVAC shutdown

k. Mass notification override fire alarm message

l. Mass notification system trouble

m. Elevator shunt trip

n. Elevator shunt power

2.20 WIRING

Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein. NFPA 70 accepted fire alarm cables that do not require the use of raceways except as modified herein are permitted.

2.20.1 Alarm Wiring

The SLC wiring shall be solid copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded solid conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm appliances, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be solid copper No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL-listed voltages for the sensors and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. Acceptable power-limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with red colored covering. Nonpower-limited cables shall comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

3.1.1 FMCP

Locate the FMCP where indicated on the drawings. Recess or semi-recess the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations



shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FMCP.

3.1.2 Manual Stations

Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated on the drawings. Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.

3.1.3 Notification Appliance Devices

Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72 and where indicated on the drawings. Mount assemblies on walls as required by NFPA 72 and to meet the intelligibility requirements. Ceiling-mounted speakers shall conform to NFPA 72.

3.1.4 Smoke Sensors

Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and their listings and as indicated on the drawings on a 4-inch mounting box. Locate smoke sensors on the ceiling. Smoke sensors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12 inches from the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. In raised floor spaces, install the smoke sensors to protect 225 square feet per sensor. Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply outlets.

3.1.5 Annunciator

Locate the annunciator as shown on the drawings. Surface mount the panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.

3.1.6 Waterflow Detectors and Tamper Switches

Connect to waterflow detectors and tamper switches.

3.1.7 Local Operating Console (LOC)

Locate the LOC as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated on the drawings. Mount the console so that the top message button is no higher than 44 inches above the floor.

3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING

3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes

Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box shall be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts or similar devices is prohibited. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.

Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams.

a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and



terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show connections from field devices to the FMCP and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.

b. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment.

3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets

Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches. Only screw-type terminals are permitted.

3.2.3 Alarm Wiring

Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. Provide all wiring in electrical metallic conduit. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6-foot length shall be permitted in initiating device or notification appliance circuits. Run conduit or tubing (rigid, IMC, EMT, FMC, etc. as permitted by NFPA 72 and NFPA 70) concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise. Utilize shielded wiring where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, ground the shield at only one point, that is in or adjacent to the FMCP. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.

3.2.4 Conductor Terminations

Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FMCP, and remote FMCP and the LOC shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FMCP, and remote FMCP shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.4 PAINTING

All fire alarm conduit, junction boxes, pull boxes, and back boxes shall be



painted red both inside and out. Paint all coverplates on junction boxes, pull boxes, and back boxes red and label each coverplate with a permanent stick-on label, white with black letters (lettering a minimum of 1/2-inch in height), with the words "Fire Alarm". Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


3.5.1 Testing Procedures

Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a a NICET Level 3 or 4 fire alarm technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire alarm/mass notification system 30 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, Guard's Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the forms in NFPA 72) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and shall:

a. Identify the NFPA Class of all initiating device circuits (IDC), notification appliance circuits (NAC), voice notification system circuits (NAC Audio), and signaling line circuits (SLC).

b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test shall be performed.

c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.

d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke sensors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations).

e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

3.5.2 Tests Stages

3.5.2.1 Preliminary Testing

Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests". After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary



tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.

3.5.2.2 Request for Formal Inspection and Tests

When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR).

3.5.2.3 Final Testing

Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the following are provided at the job site:

a. The systems manufacturer's technical representative

b. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed

c. Loop resistance test results

d. Complete program printout including input/output addresses

The final tests will be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion.

3.5.2.4 System Acceptance

Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. Submit six sets of detailed as-built drawings. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test.

a. Furnish one set of full size paper as-built drawings and schematics. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets similar to contract drawings. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD and DXF format of as-built drawings and schematics.

b. Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both factory and field wired.

c. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment.

3.5.3 Minimum System Tests

Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:



a. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

b. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test.

c. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M manual.

d. Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke sensors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 except that, for item 12(e) (Supervision) in Table 14.4.2.2, disconnect at least 20 percent of devices. If there is a failure at these devices, then supervision shall be tested at each device.

e. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specification and the manufacturer's O&M manual.

f. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified.

g. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified.

h. Visually inspect wiring.

i. Test the battery charger and batteries.

j. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FMCP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.

k. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.

l. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits.

m. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive.

n. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke or the use of canned smoke which is permitted.

o. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit.



3.5.3.1 Intelligibility Tests

Intelligibility testing of the system shall be accomplished in accordance with NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2. Following are the specific requirements for intelligibility tests:

a. Intelligibility Requirements: Verify intelligibility by measurement after installation.

b. Ensure that a CIS value greater than the required minimum value is provided in each area where building occupants typically could be found. The minimum required value for CIS is 0.7.

c. Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if approved by the DOD Installation, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 feet to find a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.

d. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 feet to a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.

e. Take measurements near the head level applicable for most personnel in the space under normal conditions (e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate).

f. The distance the occupant must walk to the location meeting the minimum required CIS value shall be measured on the floor or other walking surface as follows:

(1) Along the centerline of the natural path of travel, starting from any point subject to occupancy with less than the minimum required CIS value.

(2) Curving around any corners or obstructions, with a 12-inch clearance there from.

(3) Terminating directly below the location where the minimum required CIS value has been obtained.

Use commercially available test instrumentation to measure intelligibility as specified by ISO 7240-19 and ISO 7240-16 as applicable. Use the mean value of at least three readings to compute the intelligibility score at each test location.

3.6 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES

3.6.1 Instructor

Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of



the fire alarm and mass notification system. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. Submit the instructors information and qualifications including the training history.

3.6.2 Required Instruction Time

Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.

3.6.2.1 Technical Training

Equipment manufacturer or a factory representative shall provide 1-day of on site. Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Onsite training shall occur within 1-month of system acceptance.

3.7 Technical Data and Computer Software

Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training shall familiarize designated Government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course shall provide the designated Government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.

3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS

Submit six copies of the operation and maintenance instructions, indexed and in booklet form. The operation and maintenance instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals shall be approved prior to training. The interior fire alarm and mass notification system operation and maintenance instructions shall include:

a. "Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.

c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed.

d. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements.

e. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.



f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.

g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing frequencies, etc.) shall comply with UFC 3-601-02.

3.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

3.9.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts

Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.

3.9.2 Interchangeable Parts

Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing.

3.9.3 Spare Parts

Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:

a. Four fuses for each fused circuit.

b. Ten percent of each type of of device installed, but not less than two of each device.

3.9.4 Special Tools

Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.




SECTION 31 00 00

EARTHWORK08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria:

a. Surface elevations are as indicated.

b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.

c. Ground water elevations indicated by the boring logs were those existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevations at the time of construction.

d. Material character is indicated by the boring logs.

e. Hard materials and rock will not be encountered.

1.2 REFERENCES



AASHTO T 180 (2015) Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop

AASHTO T 224 (2010) Standard Method of Test for Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test


AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances


ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C33/C33M (2013) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM D1140 (2014) Amount of Material in Soils Finer



than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve

ASTM D1556/D1556M (2015) Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)

ASTM D2434 (1968; R 2006) Permeability of Granular Soils (Constant Head)

ASTM D2487 (2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D422 (1963; R 2007; E 2014; E 2014) Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

ASTM D4318 (2010; E 2014) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D6938 (2015) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D698 (2012; E 2014; E 2015) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600 kN-m/cu. m.))

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 600/4-79/020 (1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes

EPA SW-846.3-3 (1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste: Physical/Chemical Methods

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.3.1 Satisfactory Materials

Satisfactory materials comprise any materials classified by ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SW-SC, SP-SM, and SP-SC.

1.3.2 Unsatisfactory Materials

Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material. Notify the Contracting Officer when encountering any contaminated materials.



1.3.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials

Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Perform testing, required for classifying materials, in accordance with ASTM D4318, ASTM C136/C136M, ASTM D422, and ASTM D1140.

1.3.4 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density. Since ASTM D1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve, express the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve as a percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage of coarse material, use the "remove and replace" procedure as described in NOTE 8 of Paragraph 7.2 in AASHTO T 180.

1.3.5 Topsoil

Material suitable for topsoils obtained from offsite areas and excavations is defined as: Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.

1.3.6 Unstable Material

Unstable materials are too wet to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structure.

1.3.7 Select Granular Material


Select granular material consists of materials classified as SW, or SP by ASTM D2487 where indicated. Provide a minimum coefficient of permeability of 0.02 feet per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM D2434.

1.3.8 Initial Backfill Material

Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory materials free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, free the initial backfill material of stones as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.


Subsurface soil boring logs are appended to the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. These data represent the best subsurface information available; however, variations may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.



1.4.1 Classification of Excavation

No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.

1.4.2 Dewatering Work Plan

Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



Shoring; GDewatering Work Plan; G, EN-GG

SD-03 Product Data

Utilization of Excavated Materials; G

Shoulder Construction

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing

Borrow Site Testing

Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, submit 3 copies of test results, including calibration curves and results of calibration tests.

SD-07 Certificates

Testing

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS

Test offsite soils brought in for use as backfill for Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH), Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and full Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain a maximum of 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and a maximum of 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall pass the TCPL test. Determine TPH concentrations by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. Determine BTEX concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5030/8020. Perform TCLP in accordance with



EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site, with at least one test from each borrow site. Do not bring material onsite until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Provide metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Provide permanent color and printing, unaffected by moisture or soil.

Warning Tape Color Codes

Red Electric

Yellow Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials

Orange Telephone and Other Communications

Blue Water Systems

Green Sewer Systems

White Steam Systems

Gray Compressed Air

2.2.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping

Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.003 inch and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

2.2.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping

Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.004 inch, and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.

2.3 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING

Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12 AWG.

2.4 MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP

Provide bedding material, filter fabric, and rock conforming to DOT for



construction indicated.

2.4.1 Bedding Material

Provide bedding material consisting of sand, gravel, or crushed rock, well graded, or poorly graded with a maximum particle size of 2 inches. Compose material of tough, durable particles. Allow fines passing the No. 200 standard sieve with a plasticity index less than six.

2.4.2 Rock

Provide rock fragments sufficiently durable to ensure permanence in the structure and the environment in which it is to be used. Use rock fragments free from cracks, seams, and other defects that would increase the risk of deterioration from natural causes. Provide fragments sized so that no individual fragment exceeds a weight of 150 pounds and that no more than 10 percent of the mixture, by weight, consists of fragments weighing 2 pounds or less each. Provide rock with a minimum specific gravity of 2.50. Do not permit the inclusion of more than trace 1 percent quantities of dirt, sand, clay, and rock fines.

2.5 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER

Provide capillary water barrier of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below. Conform to ASTM C33/C33M for coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 77.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

Where indicated or directed, strip topsoil to a depth of 6 inches. Spread topsoil on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive application of the topsoil later, or at locations indicated or specified. Keep topsoil separate from other excavated materials, brush, litter, objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, and other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance operations. Reuse or remove from the site any surplus of topsoil from excavations and gradings.

3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION

Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials as directed. Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material ordered as replacement in excavation. Dispose surplus satisfactory excavated material not required for fill or embankment in areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Dispose unsatisfactory excavated material in designated waste or spoil areas. During construction, perform excavation and fill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. Excavate material required



for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits approved.

3.2.1 Ditches, Gutters, and Channel Changes

Finish excavation of ditches, gutters, and channel changes by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown on the drawings. Do not excavate ditches and gutters below grades shown. Backfill the excessive open ditch or gutter excavation with satisfactory, thoroughly compacted, material or with suitable stone or cobble to grades shown. Dispose excavated material as shown or as directed, except in no case allow material be deposited a maximum 4 feet from edge of a ditch. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the work.

3.2.2 Drainage Structures

Make excavations to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as directed. Provide trenches and foundation pits of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or other hard foundation material of loose debris and cut to a firm, level, stepped, or serrated surface. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Do not disturb the bottom of the excavation when concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.

3.2.3 Drainage

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. Construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity or provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed.

3.2.4 Dewatering

Control groundwater flowing toward or into excavations to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. Do not permit French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Take control measures by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, maintain the water level continuously, at least 3 feet below the working level. Operate dewatering system continuously until construction work below existing water levels is complete. Submit performance records weekly.



3.2.5 Trench Excavation Requirements

Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed. Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe, or make vertical, and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's printed installation manual. Provide vertical trench walls where no manufacturer's printed installation manual is available. Shore trench walls more than 3 feet high, cut back to a stable slope, or provide with equivalent means of protection for employees who may be exposed to moving ground or cave in. Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected by weather or moisture content. Do not exceed the trench width below the pipe top of 24 inches plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less than 24 inches inside diameter, and do not exceed 36 inches plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 24 inches inside diameter. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded, provide redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures without any additional cost to the Government.

3.2.5.1 Bottom Preparation

Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Remove stones of 3 inches or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point bearing.

3.2.5.2 Removal of Unyielding Material

Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material 4 inches below the required grade and replaced with suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.

3.2.5.3 Removal of Unstable Material

Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without additional cost to the Government.

3.2.5.4 Excavation for Appurtenances

Provide excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar structures of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as shown or as directed. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Specify removal of unstable material. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, take special care not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.

3.2.6 Underground Utilities

The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and



equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within 2 feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.

3.2.7 Structural Excavation

Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement..

3.3 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL

Select borrow material to meet the requirements and conditions of the particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Obtain borrow material from the borrow areas from approved private sources. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining the right to procure material, pay royalties and other charges involved, and bear the expense of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling from the owners. Borrow material from approved sources on Government-controlled land may be obtained without payment of royalties. Unless specifically provided, do not obtain borrow within the limits of the project site without prior written approval. Consider necessary clearing, grubbing, and satisfactory drainage of borrow pits and the disposal of debris thereon related operations to the borrow excavation.

3.4 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION

Except as otherwise permitted, excavation areas should provide adequate drainage. Transport overburden and other spoil material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed. Ensure that excavation of any area or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on natural environmental conditions.

3.5 SHORING


Submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of excavations. Finish shoring, including sheet piling, and install as necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and utilities. Remove shoring, bracing, and sheeting as excavations are backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.

3.5.2 Geotechnical Engineer

Hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater conditions throughout construction. The Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for performing pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout construction to assess site conditions.



The Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for updating the excavation, sheeting and dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect changing conditions and submit an updated plan if necessary. Submit a monthly written report, informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of the status of the plan and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to the plan addressing any present or potential problems. The Contracting Officer is responsible for arranging meetings with the Geotechnical Engineer at any time throughout the contract duration.

3.6 GRADING AREAS

Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading area to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place and grade stockpiles of satisfactory and wasted materials as specified. Keep stockpiles in a neat and well drained condition, giving due consideration to drainage at all times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment, the ground surface at stockpile locations; separately stockpile excavated satisfactory and unsatisfactory materials. Protect stockpiles of satisfactory materials from contamination which may destroy the quality and fitness of the stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles, and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove and replace such material with satisfactory material from approved sources.

3.7 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE

Do not excavate to final grade until just before concrete is to be placed. Roughen the level surfaces, and cut the sloped surfaces, as indicated, into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Protect all surfaces from erosion resulting from ponding or water flow.

3.8 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION


Remove and replace unsatisfactory material with satisfactory materials, as directed by the Contracting Officer, in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas. Scarify the surface to a depth of 6 inches before the fill is started. Plow, step, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density, break up the ground surface to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverizing, and compacting to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, scarify the excavated or natural ground portion to a depth of 12 inches and compact it as specified for the adjacent fill.

3.9 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

Dispose unsatisfactory materials removed from excavations into designated waste disposal or spoil areas. Use satisfactory material removed from excavations, insofar as practicable, in the construction of fills, embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for similar purposes. Submit procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory material. Submit proposed source of borrow material. Do not waste any satisfactory excavated material without specific written authorization. Dispose of satisfactory material, authorized to be wasted, in designated areas approved for surplus material storage or designated



waste areas as directed. Clear and grub newly designated waste areas on Government-controlled land before disposal of waste material thereon. Stockpile and use coarse rock from excavations for constructing slopes or embankments adjacent to streams, or sides and bottoms of channels and for protecting against erosion. Do not dispose excavated material to obstruct the flow of any stream, endanger a partly finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any structure, or be detrimental to the completed work in any way.

3.10 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE

3.10.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.

3.10.2 Buried Detection Wire

Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over it's entire length. Install wires at manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

3.11 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures, in successive horizontal layers of loose materia not more than 8 inches in depth. Compact to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials, to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure. Backfill material must be within the range of -2 to +2 percent of optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.

Prepare ground surface on which backfill is to be placed and provide compaction requirements for backfill materials in conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.

3.11.1 Trench Backfill

Backfill trenches to the grade shown. Do not backfill the trench until all specified tests are performed.

3.11.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material

Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with select granular material or initial backfill material.

3.11.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material

Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6



inches loose thickness.

3.11.1.3 Bedding and Initial Backfill

Provide bedding of the type and thickness shown. Place initial backfill material and compact it with approved tampers to a height of at least one foot above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up the backfill evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Take care to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Provide plastic piping with bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:

3.11.1.3.1 Class II

Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1.5 inch, including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D2487.

3.11.1.4 Final Backfill

Fill the remainder of the trench with satisfactory material. Place backfill material and compact as follows:

3.11.1.4.1 Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas

Deposit backfill in layers of a maximum of 12 inches loose thickness, and compact it to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent maximum density for cohesionless soils. Do not permit compaction by water flooding or jetting. Apply this requirement to all other areas not specifically designated above.

3.11.2 Backfill for Appurtenances

After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been constructed, place backfill in such a manner that the structure is not be damaged by the shock of falling earth. Deposit the backfill material, compact it as specified for final backfill, and bring up the backfill evenly on all sides of the structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive stress.

3.12 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities are as follows:

3.12.1 Gas Distribution

Excavate trenches to a depth that will provide a minimum 18 inches of cover in rock excavation and a minimum 24 inch of cover in other excavation.

3.12.2 Water Lines

Excavate trenches to a depth that provides a minimum cover of 2 feet from the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe.



3.12.3 Heat Distribution System

Free initial backfill material of stones larger than 1/4 inch in any dimension.

3.12.4 Electrical Distribution System

Provide a minimum cover of 24 inches from the finished grade to direct burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.

3.12.5 Pipeline Casing

Provide new smooth wall steel pipeline casing under new pavement in a trench. Provide each new pipeline casing, where indicated and to the lengths and dimensions shown, complete and suitable for use with the new piped utility as indicated. 3.12.6 Rip-Rap Construction

Construct rip-rap on bedding material in accordance with State Standards. Trim and dress indicated areas to conform to cross sections, lines and grades shown within a tolerance of 0.1 foot.

3.12.6.1 Bedding Placement

Spread bedding material uniformly to a thickness of at least 3 inches on prepared subgrade as indicated. Compaction of bedding is not required. Finish bedding to present even surface free from mounds and windrows.

3.12.6.2 Stone Placement

Place rock for rip-rap on prepared bedding material to produce a well graded mass with the minimum practicable percentage of voids in conformance with lines and grades indicated. Distribute larger rock fragments, with dimensions extending the full depth of the rip-rap throughout the entire mass and eliminate "pockets" of small rock fragments. Rearrange individual pieces by mechanical equipment or by hand as necessary to obtain the distribution of fragment sizes specified above.

3.13 EMBANKMENTS

3.13.1 Earth Embankments

Construct earth embankments from satisfactory materials free of organic or frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. Place the material in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 8 inches in depth. Spread each layer uniformly on a soil surface that has been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise broken up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is placed. After spreading, plow, disk, or otherwise break up each layer; moisten or aerate as necessary; thoroughly mix; and compact to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials. Backfill material must be within the range of -2 to +2 percent of optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.

Compaction requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade for pavements are identical with those requirements specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or



other approved equipment.

3.14 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

3.14.1 Construction

Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as specified. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock encountered in the cut section to a depth of 6 inches below finished grade for the subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material or excavation of rock to required grade with satisfactory materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and cross section and compact as specified. After rolling, the surface of the subgrade for roadways shall not show deviations greater than 1/2 inch when tested with a 12-foot straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles to the centerline of the area. Do not vary the elevation of the finish subgrade more than 0.05 foot from the established grade and cross section.

3.14.2 Compaction

Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.

3.14.2.1 Subgrade for Pavements

Compact subgrade for pavements to at least 95 percentage laboratory maximum density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown. A select granular material, as defined in paragraph 1.3.7.1, should be used for the fill material to bring the parking lot up to design grade.

3.14.2.2 Subgrade for Shoulders

Compact subgrade for shoulders to at least 90 percentage laboratory maximum density for the depth below the surface of shoulder shown.

3.15 SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION

Construct shoulders of satisfactory excavated or borrow material or as otherwise shown or specified. Submit advanced notice on shoulder construction for rigid pavements. Construct shoulders immediately after adjacent paving is complete. In the case of rigid pavements, do not construct shoulders until permission of the Contracting Officer has been obtained. Compact the entire shoulder area to at least the percentage of maximum density as specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION above, for specific ranges of depth below the surface of the shoulder. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment. Finish shoulder construction in proper sequence in such a manner that adjacent ditches will be drained effectively and that no damage of any kind is done to the adjacent completed pavement. Align the completed shoulders true to grade and shaped to drain in conformity with the cross section shown.

3.16 FINISHING

Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded



areas within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in effective drainage. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing materials. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required elevations and slopes.

3.16.1 Subgrade and Embankments

During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained. Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all times. Do not disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory condition until base or pavement is placed. Do not permit the storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade. Do not lay base course or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case place base or pavement on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.

3.16.2 Capillary Water Barrier

Place a capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs grade directly on the subgrade and compact with a minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.

3.16.3 Grading Around Structures

Construct areas within 5 feet outside of each building and structure line true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.

3.17 PLACING TOPSOIL

On areas to receive topsoil, prepare the compacted subgrade soil to a 2 inch depth for bonding of topsoil with subsoil. Spread topsoil evenly and grade to the elevations and slopes shown. Do not spread topsoil when frozen or excessively wet or dry. Obtain material required for topsoil in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from offsite areas.

3.18 TESTING

Perform testing by a Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facility. Submit qualifications of the Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facilities. If the Contractor elects to establish testing facilities, do not permit work requiring testing until the Contractor's facilities have been inspected, Corps validated and approved by the Contracting Officer.

a. Determine field in-place density in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M and ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938 is used, check the calibration curves and adjust using only the sand cone method as described in ASTM D1556/D1556M. ASTM D1557 results in a wet unit weight of soil in determining the moisture content of the soil when using this method.

b. Check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D1557; check the



calibration of both the density and moisture gauges at the beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at intervals as directed by the Contracting Officer. When test results indicate, as determined by the Contracting Officer, that compaction is not as specified, remove the material, replace and recompact to meet specification requirements.

c. Perform tests on recompacted areas to determine conformance with specification requirements. Appoint a registered professional civil engineer to certify inspections and test results. These certifications shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the tests. The following number of tests, if performed at the appropriate time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation.

3.18.1 Fill and Backfill Material Gradation

One test per 500 cubic yards stockpiled or in-place source material. Determine gradation of fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, ASTM D422, and ASTM D2487.

3.18.2 In-Place Densities

a. One test per 5000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines.

b. One test per 5000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.

c. Two random tests on the building subgrade area where the building footings shall be placed.

3.18.3 Check Tests on In-Place Densities

If ASTM D6938 is used, check in-place densities by ASTM D1556/D1556M as follows:

a. One check test per lift for each 50,000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill compacted by other than hand-operated machines.

b. One check test per lift for each 50,000 square feet, of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.

3.18.4 Moisture Contents

In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, perform a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, perform tests as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.18.5 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density

Perform tests for each type material or source of material including borrow material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density



values. One representative test should be performed when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density.

3.18.6 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades

Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades.

3.18.7 Displacement of Sewers

After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill compacted to the finished grade surface, inspect the pipe to determine whether significant displacement has occurred. Conduct this inspection in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Inspect pipe sizes larger than 36 inches, while inspecting smaller diameter pipe by shining a light or laser between manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of television cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other defects that would cause improper functioning of the system, replace or repair the defects as directed at no additional cost to the Government.

3.19 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber from Government property to an approved location.




SECTION 31 11 00

CLEARING AND GRUBBING08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Nonsaleable Materials; G

SD-04 Samples

Tree Wound PaintHerbicide


Deliver materials to store at the site, and handle in a manner which will maintain the materials in their original manufactured or fabricated condition until ready for use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE WOUND PAINT

Submit samples in cans with manufacturer's label of bituminous based paint of standard manufacture specially formulated for tree wounds.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

3.1.1 Roads and Walks

Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.

3.1.2 Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities

Protect trees and vegetation to be left standing from damage incident to clearing, grubbing, and construction operations by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the circumstances require.

3.1.3 Utility Lines

Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage. Notify the Contracting Officer's Representative immediately of damage to or



an encounter with an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor is responsible for the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, notify the Contracting Officer's Representative in ample time to minimize interruption of the service.

3.2 CLEARING

Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Clearing shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon, or otherwise obstruct the work. Items include, but not limited to, concrete pavements, storm drainage structures, curb and gutter and flexible pavement. Trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or below the original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing. Trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas shall be trimmed of dead branches 1-1/2 inches or more in diameter and shall be trimmed of all branches the heights indicated or directed. Limbs and branches to be trimmed shall be neatly cut close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Cuts more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree-wound paint.

3.3 TREE REMOVAL

Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and grubbing. This work shall include the felling of such trees and the removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING. Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS.

3.4 PRUNING

Trim trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas of dead branches 1-1/2 inches or more in diameter; and trim branches to heights and in a manner as indicated. Neatly cut limbs and branches to be trimmed close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Paint cuts more than 1-1/4 inches in diameter with an approved tree wound paint.

3.5 GRUBBING

Grubbing consists of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing areas. Remove material to be grubbed, together with logs and other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, to a depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as construction areas under this contract, such as areas for buildings, and areas to be paved. Fill depressions made by grubbing with suitable material and compact to make the surface conform with the original adjacent surface of the ground.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

3.6.1 Saleable Timber

4. All timber on the project site noted for clearing and grubbing shall



become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the project site and disposed of off stations, except as stated in Specification 01 00 00 ADDITIONAL SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, section Merchantable Timber.

3.6.2 Nonsaleable Materials

Written permission to dispose of such products on private property shall be filed with the Contracting Officer's Representative. Logs, stumps, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations, except for salable timber, shall be disposed of outside the limits of Government-controlled land at the Contractor's responsibility.




SECTION 31 31 16.13

CHEMICAL TERMITE CONTROL08/16

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



DODI 4150.07 DOD Pest Management Program

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Coordinate work related to final grades, landscape plantings, foundations, or any other alterations to finished construction which might alter the condition of treated soils with this specification.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Termiticide Application Plan; G, RO

SD-03 Product Data

Termiticides

SD-05 Design Data

Mixing Formulation

SD-06 Test Reports

Soil Moisture

Calibration Test

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications; G, RO

Foundation Exterior

Utilities and Vents

SECTION 31 31 16.13 Page 1


Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces

List of Equipment


Termiticides


Verification of Measurement

Warranty

Pest Management Report

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL


Comply with DODI 4150.07 for requirements on Contractor's licensing, certification, and record keeping. Maintain daily records using the Pest Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1, or a computer generated equivalent, and submit copies of records when requested by the Contracting Officer's Representative. These forms may be obtained from the main web site: http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/forms/eforms/dd1532-1.pdf


For the application of pesticides, use the services of an applicator whose principal business is pest control. The applicator must be commercially certified in the state where the work is to be performed as required by DODI 4150.07. Termiticide applicators must also be certified in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes structural pest control. Submit a copy of the pest control business license and pesticide applicator certificates.

1.4.3 Safety Requirements

Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in accordance with label directions. Draw water for formulating only from sites designated by the Contracting Officer's Representative, and fit the filling hose with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Perform filling operations under the direct and continuous observation of a contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and related materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of termiticide application. Dispose of used pesticide containers off Government property.


1.5.1 Delivery

Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number, manufacturer's registered uses and in new or otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator.



1.5.2 Inspection

Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label must bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate regulations of the host county. Inspect other materials for conformance with specified requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site.

1.5.3 Storage

Storage of pesticides on the installation will not be permitted unless it is written into the contract.

1.5.4 Handling

Handle and mix termiticides in accordance with the manufacturer's label and SDS, preventing contamination by dirt, water, and organic material. Protect termiticides from weather elements as recommended by the manufacturer's label and SDS. Spill kits must be maintained on pest control vehicles and must be available at the mixing site. Conduct termiticide mixing in an area with adequate spill containment.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

The following site conditions determine the acceptable time of application.

1.6.1 Soil Moisture

Test soils to be treated immediately before application. Test soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 3 inches. The soil moisture must be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer. Application of thetermiticide is not permitted when soil moisture content exceeds manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6.2 Runoff and Wind Drift

Application of termiticide will not be permitted during or immediately following heavy rains, when conditions may allow runoff, or create an environmental hazard or when average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour. Termiticide is not permitted to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals.

1.7 WARRANTY

Provide a 5 year written warranty against infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or building additions constructed under this contract. Include in the warranty annual inspections of the buildings or building additions during the warranty period. If live subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the warranty period, and the soil and building conditions have not been altered in the interim:

a. Retreat the site and perform other treatment as may be necessary for elimination of subterranean termite infestation;

b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and



c. Reinspect the building approximately 180 days after the re-treatment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Chemical termite control uses liquid termiticide treatments applied to the soil to form a continuous chemical barrier in the soil around both sides of the foundation. The application can be surface applied or rodded and trenched. This barrier prevents foraging termites from reaching the foundation and piers. Only the soil adjacent to these foundation elements is treated. For slab construction (including foundations, patios and garages), the entire soil (or gravel) surface is treated before the vapor barrier is installed and the slab poured over it. Soil treatment is coordinated with all building activities from foundation construction through final grading of the soil around the building's exterior. In order for the treatment to be effective, the final phase of the application must be done after final grading and sometimes after landscaping is completed so that the treated soil is not disturbed.

2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Termiticides

Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such use by the appropriate agency of the host county and as approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Select non-repellant termiticides for maximum effectiveness and duration after application. Select a termiticide that is suitable for the soil and climatic conditions at the project site and apply at the highest labeled rate. Submit manufacturer's label and Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for termiticides proposed for use.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Eliminate food sources by removing debris from clearing and grubbing and post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form boards, and scrap lumber from the site, before termiticide application begins.

3.1.1 Verification

Before work starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth grading has been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Finely grade soil and remove particles larger than 1 inch. Compact soil particles to eliminate soil movement.

3.1.2 Foundation Exterior

If the exterior perimeter treatment is applied when the horizontal barrier is applied it will be damaged or removed before construction is completed. The exterior foundation perimeter treatment will have to occur in phases when any pads, porches, aprons, sidewalks, final grading or landscape planting are simultaneously involved adjacent to the building foundation. This treatment area should be coordinated after all major construction but before any pads, porches, or other items requiring special consideration are poured adjacent to the foundation walls. Submit written verification that final grading, landscape planting and other items adjacent to the foundation will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of



foundation walls, grade beams, and similar structures.

3.1.3 Utilities and Vents

Turn off and block HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area prior to application, to protect people and animals from termiticide. Submit written verification that the HVAC ducts and vents, water and sewer lines, and plumbing have been turned off or blocked prior to applying termiticide.

3.1.4 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces

Submit written verification that crawl and plenum air spaces have been located and identified prior to applying termiticide.

3.1.5 Application Plan

Prior to commencing application of termiticide, submit a Termiticide Application Plan addressing the following items:

a. proposed sequence of treatment work including dates and times of application

b. termiticide trade namec. EPA registration numberd. chemical compositione. concentration of original and diluted materialf. formulationg. manufacturer's recommended application ratesh. regional requirementsi. application rate of active ingredientsj. method of applicationk. area or volume to be treatedl. amount to be appliedm. copy of the pest control business licensen. copy of the pesticide applicator certificates

3.2 APPLICATION

For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related products. Make applications to crawl spaces in accordance with label directions. Applications to crawl space areas that are used as plenum air spaces will not be permitted.

3.2.1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement

Submit a list of equipment to be used. Conduct calibration test on the application equipment to be used immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application. Measure the volume and contents of the application tank. Testing must confirm that the application equipment is operating within the manufacturer's specifications and meets the specified requirements. Submit written certification of the equipment calibration test results within 1 week of testing. Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests are unsatisfactory, re-treatment will be required.

3.2.2 Mixing and Application

Perform all work related to formulating, mixing, and application in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Representative and a DOD certified



pesticide applicator, Pest Management QAE/PAR, or Integrated Pest Management Coordinator. Submit mixing formulation:

a. Quantity of pesticide used.

b. Rate of dispersion.

c. Percent of use.

d. Total amount used.

A closed system is recommended as it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with the applicator or other persons. Only use water from designated locations. Fit filling hoses with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Prevent overflow during the filling operation. Spill kits must be maintained on pest control vehicles and must be available at the mixing site. Termiticide mixing must be conducted in an area that has been designated by the Government representative and that has adequate spill containment. Inspect the application equipment for applying termiticides prior to each day of use for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage. Immediately perform repairs on the application equipment to prevent or eliminate leaks and clogging.

3.2.2.1 Application Method

3.2.2.1.1 Surface Application

Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Apply surface applicants as a coarse spray and provide uniform distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide must penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer. If soils are treated to a depth less than specified or approved, repeat work performed to the depth specified at no additional cost to the Government.

3.2.2.1.2 Rodding and Trenching

Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers. Trenching must be to the depth of the foundation footing. Width of trench must be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as indicated. Rodding or other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the trench with termiticide. Backfill the trench immediately after termiticide has reached maximum penetration as recommended by the manufacturer. If maximum penetration is not achieved, as recommended by the manufacturer, repeat work performed to maximum penetration as recommended by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Government. Backfill in 6 inch rises or layers. Treat each rise or layer with termiticide.

3.2.3 Sampling

The Contracting Officer's Representative may draw samples for analysis, at any time and without prior notice, from stocks at the job site to determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is being applied. When analysis, performed by the Government, indicates samples contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, repeat work performed with pesticides conforming to this specification at no additional cost to the Government.



3.2.4 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes

Apply termiticide prior to placement of a vapor barrier or waterproof membrane.

3.2.5 Placement of Concrete

Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has reached maximum penetration into the soil as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.2.6 Clean Up, Disposal, And Protection

Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection of the site without delay.

3.2.6.1 Clean Up

Clean the site of all material associated with the treatment measures, according to label instructions, and as indicated. Remove and dispose of excess and waste material off Government property.

3.2.6.2 Disposal of Termiticide

Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property, and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria.


3.3.1 Verification of Measurement

Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to determine the remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used contents for the application must equal the application rate established in the application plan. Submit written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets the application rate established in the application plan.

3.3.2 Inspection

3.3.2.1 Technical Representative

Provide a technical representative who is a DOD certified pesticide applicator or Pest Management Quality Assurance Evaluator (QAE)/Performance Assessment Representative (PAR). The technical representative must be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for subterranean termites and during treatment application. Contact the Integrated Pest Management Coordinator prior to starting work.

3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

Upon completion of this work, submit the Pest Management Report DD Form 1532, or an equivalent computer product, to the Integrated Pest Management Coordinator. This form identifies the target pest, type of operation, brand name and manufacturer of pesticide, formulation, concentration or rate of application used.



3.5 PROTECTION

3.5.1 Protection of Treated Area

Immediately after the application, protect the area from other use by erecting barricades as required or directed. Provide signage in accordance with Section 10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE. Place signage inside the entrances to crawl spaces and identify the space as treated with termiticide and not safe for children or animals. Cover treated areas with plastic if slab is not to be poured immediately following termiticide application.

3.5.2 Disturbance of Treated Soils

Re-treat soil and fill material disturbed after treatment before placement of slabs or other covering structures.




SECTION 32 01 16.17

COLD MILLING OF BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS08/08

PART 1 GENERAL


Maintain in a satisfactory working condition equipment, tools, and machines used in the performance of the work.

1.1.1 Cold-Milling Machine

Provide a cold-milling machine which is self-propelled, capable of milling the pavement to a specified depth and smoothness and of establishing grade control; with means of controlling transverse slope and dust produced during the pavement milling operation. The machine shall have the ability to windrow the millings or cuttings. The milling machine shall not cause damage to any part of the pavement structure that is not to be removed.

1.1.2 Cleaning Equipment

Provide cleaning equipment suitable for removing and cleaning loose material from the pavement surface.

1.1.3 Straightedge

Furnish and maintain at the site, in good condition, one 12 foot straightedge or other suitable device for each milling machine, for testing the finished surface. Make straightedge available for Government use. Straightedges shall be constructed of aluminum or other lightweight metal, with blades of box or box-girder cross section with flat bottom reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy. Straightedges shall have handles to facilitate movement on the pavement.


1.2.1 Grade

Conform the finished milled surfaces to the lines, grades, and cross sections indicated. The finished milled-pavement surfaces shall vary not more than 1/4 inch from the established plan grade line and elevation. Finished surfaces at a juncture with other pavements shall coincide with the finished surfaces of the abutting pavements. The deviations from the plan grade line and elevation will not be permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned grade and elevation is required for the proper functioning of appurtenant structures involved.

1.2.2 Surface Smoothness

Finished surfaces shall not deviate from the testing edge of a straightedge more than 1/4 inch in the transverse or longitudinal direction.

1.2.3 Traffic Control

Provide all necessary traffic controls during milling operations.




Milling shall not be performed when there is accumulation of snow or ice on the pavement surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MILLING OPERATION

A minimum of seven days notice is required, prior to start work, for the Contracting Officer's Representative to coordinate the milling operation with other activities at the site. Make sufficient passes so that the designated area is milled to the grades and cross sections indicated. The milling shall proceed with care and in depth increments that will not damage the pavement below the designated finished grade. Conduct cold-milling operation to ensure that only bituminous pavement is removed and base course is notdisturbed. Leave in place a layer of butuminous pavement, 6 to 13 mm (1/4to 1/2 inch) thick, over the undisturbed base course. Repair or replace, as directed, items damaged during milling such as manholes, valve boxes, utility lines, pavement that is torn, cracked, gouged, broken, or undercut. The milled material shall be windrowed.

3.2 GRADE AND SURFACE-SMOOTHNESS TESTING

3.2.1 Surface-Smoothness Tests

After completion of the final milling, the finished milled surface will be tested by the Government with a straightedge. Other approved devices may be used, provided that when satisfactorily and properly operated, such devices reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified. Correct surface irregularities that depart from the testing edge by more than 1/4 inch. Skin patching for correcting low areas will not be permitted. Remove and replace the deficient low area. Remove sufficient material to allow at least 1 inch of asphalt concrete to be placed.

3.3 REMOVAL OF MILLED MATERIAL

Material that is removed shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site.




SECTION 32 01 19

SILICONE SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D 5893 (2004) Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements


Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work required by this section shall be approved before the work is started maintained in satisfactory condition at all times.

1.2.1 Joint Cleaning Equipment

1.2.1.1 Concrete Saw

Provide a self-propelled power saw, with water-cooled diamond or abrasive saw blades, for cutting joints to the depths and widths specified or for refacing joints or cleaning sawed joints where sandblasting does not provide a clean joint.

1.2.1.2 Sandblasting Equipment

Include with the sandblasting equipment an air compressor, hose, and long-wearing venturi-type nozzle of proper size, shape and opening. The maximum nozzle opening should not exceed 1/4 inch. The air compressor shall be portable and capable of furnishing not less than 150 cfm and maintaining a line pressure of not less than 90 psi at the nozzle while in use. Demonstrate compressor capability, under job conditions, before approval. The compressor shall be equipped with traps that will maintain the compressed air free of oil and water. The nozzle shall have an adjustable guide that will hold the nozzle aligned with the joint approximately 1 inch above the pavement surface. Adjust the height, angle of inclination and the size of the nozzle as necessary to secure satisfactory results.

1.2.1.3 Waterblasting Equipment

Include with the waterblasting equipment a trailer-mounted water tank, pumps, high-pressure hose, wand with safety release cutoff control, nozzle, and auxiliary water resupply equipment. Provide water tank and auxiliary resupply equipment of sufficient capacity to permit continuous operations. The nozzle shall have an adjustable guide that will hold the nozzle aligned with the joint approximately 1 inch above the pavement surface. Adjust the



height, angle of inclination and the size of the nozzle as necessary to obtain satisfactory results. A pressure gauge mounted at the pump shall show at all times the pressure in psi at which the equipment is operating.

1.2.2 Sealing Equipment

1.2.2.1 Cold-Applied, Single-Component Sealing Equipment

The equipment for installing ASTM D 5893 single component joint sealants shall consist of an extrusion pump, air compressor, following plate, hoses, and nozzle for transferring the sealant from the storage container into the joint opening. The dimension of the nozzle shall be such that the tip of the nozzle will extend into the joint to allow sealing from the bottom of the joint to the top. Maintain the initially approved equipment in good working condition, serviced in accordance with the supplier's instructions, and unaltered in any way without obtaining prior approval. Small hand-held air-powered equipment (i.e., caulking guns) may be used for small applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturer's Recommendations; G, CD

Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer's Representative 60 days prior to use on the project. Installation of the material will not be allowed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnishe these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. Existing joint widths will vary. The manufacturer's recommendations shall include depths for all joint widths encountered to include blocking media.

Equipment

List of proposed equipment to be used in performance of construction work including descriptive data, 30 days prior to use on the project. Each item on the list shall be followed by a statement of whether requirements in paragraph 2.01, EQUIPMENT are met for that type of equipment. Compliance of paragraph 2.01 will also be verified by the Construction Inspector at the project site prior to use.

SD-04 Samples

Materials G, CD

Samples and manufacturer's data for the following materials shall be submitted 60 days prior to and approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative before work is started: Sealant



ASTM D 5893, joint backer rod and separating materials.

SD-06 Test Reports

Certified Laboratory Test Reports

Before delivery of materials, four certified copies of the reports of all tests required in ASTM D 5893 shall be submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative. The testing shall have been performed by an independent and licensed laboratory approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Certified test reports are required for the following:

Sealant ASTM D 5893; G

Sealant Primer (if required by manufacturer); G

Sampling and Test Procedures


1.4.1 Safety

1.4.2 Test Requirements

Joint sealants shall be tested for conformance with the referenced applicable materials specification. The Contracting Officer's Representative shall be notified in writing of the proposed sources of joint sealants at least 21 days prior to the date the materials will be required at the project site. Joint sealants will be sampled and tested by the contractor. No material shall be used at the project prior to receipt by the government of written notice that the material meets the laboratory requirments. If the sample fails to meet specification requirments, the material represented by the sample shall be replaced, and the new material will be tested. Cost of sampling and testing of all material will be borne by the contractor. Testing shall be performed by an approved independent laboratory and certified copies of the test reports shall be submitted and approved prior to the use of the sealant at the job site. If the use of a primer is recommende for the proposed sealing system, the laboratory test for bond shall be conducted using the primer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Conformance with the requirements of laboratory tests specified will not constitute final acceptance of in-place sealant.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall be handled in such a manner that joint sealant materials will not be damaged. Contractor shall provide storage facilities as required. Facility shall be provided to maintaining materials at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANTS

Sealants shall conform to the following requirements>: ASTM D 5893 Dow Corning 888 NS (NON-SAG) for Portland Concrete Cement (PCC) or approved



equal.

2.2 PRIMERS

When primers are recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant, use them in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer.

2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS

Use a flexible, compressible, non-shrinking, nonreastive material which will not absorb moisture, such as polychloroprene rod, foam rubber rod, or soft butyl rubber rods. Hard rubber, paper, and soft fiber rods shall not be used. Backer material shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative before use on any portion of this project. Backer material shall be thick, approximately 25 percent larger tha the width of the crack/joint.

2.4 BOND BREAKING TAPES

The bond breaker tape shall be approximately 1/8 inch wider than the nominal width of the joint and shall not bond to the joint sealant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF JOINTS

Joint shall be prepared for resealing as follows.

3.1.1 Existing Sealant Removal

Cut loose the in-place sealant from both joint faces and to the depth shown on the drawings, using the tractor-mounted routing equipment as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT. Depth shall be sufficient to accommodate any separating or backup material that is required to maintain the depth of new sealant to be installed. Prior to further cleaning operations, remove all loose old sealant remaining in the joint opening by blowing with compressed air. Chipping, spalling, or otherwise damaging the concrete will not be allowed.

3.1.2 Sawing

3.1.2.1 Refacing of Joints

Refacing of joints shall be accomplished using a power-driven concrete saw with diamond or abrasive blades to remove all residual old sealant and a minimum of concrete from the joint faces to provide exposure of newly cleaned concrete and, if required, to widen the joint space to the width and depth shown on the drawings. A sufficient number of used or dummy blades shall be mounted on the same arbor as the cutting blade to assist in straight-line sawing and to provide stiffness to avoid blade distortion. Immediately following the sawing operating, the joint faces and opening shall be thoroughly cleaned using a water jet to remove all saw cuttings or debris remaining on the faces or in the joint opening.

3.1.3 Sandblasting

The newly exposed concrete joint faces and the pavement surfaces extending a minimum of 1/2 inch from the joint edges shall be sandblastedclean. use



a multiple-pass technique until the surfaces are free of dust, dirt, curing compound, filler, old sealant residue, or any foreign debris that might prevent the bonding of the sealant to the concrete. After final cleaning and immediately prior to sealing, blow out the joints with compressed air and leave them completely free of debris and water.

3.1.4 Back-Up Material

When the joint opening is of a greater depth than indicated for the sealant depth, plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified depth. Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation.

3.1.5 Bond Breaking Tape

Where inserts or filler materials contain bitumen, or the depth of the joint opening does not allow for the use of a backup material, insert a bond breaker separating tape to prevent incompatibility with the filler materials and three-sided adhesion of the sealant. Securely bond the tape to the bottom of the joint opening so it will not float up into the new sealant.

3.1.6 Rate of Progress of Joint Preparation

Limit the stages of joint preparation, which include sandblasting, air pressure cleaning and placing of the back-up material to only that lineal footage that can be sealed during the same day.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SEALANT

3.2.1 Single-Component, Cold-Applied Sealants

Inspect the ASTM D 5893 sealant and containers prior to use. Reject any materials that contain water, hard caking of any separated constituents, nonreversible jell, or materials that are otherwise unsatisfactory. Settlement of constituents in a soft mass that can be readily and uniformly remixed in the field with simple tools will not be cause for rejection.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT

3.3.1 Time of Application

Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint walls and following the placement of the separating or backup material. Open joints, that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified, or when rain interrupts sealing operations shall be recleaned and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant.

3.3.2 Sealing Joints

Immediately preceding, but not more than 50 feet ahead of the joint sealing operations, perform a final cleaning with compressed air. Fill the joints from the bottom up to1/4 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch below the pavement surface. Remove and discard excess or spilled sealant from the pavement by approved methods. Install the sealant in such a manner as to prevent the formation of voids and entrapped air. In no case shall gravity methods or pouring pots be used to install the sealant material. Traffic shall not be permitted over newly sealed pavement until authorized by the Contracting



Officer's Representative. When a primer is recommended by the manufacturer, apply it evenly to the joint faces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check the joints frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time specified.

3.4 INSPECTION

3.4.1 Joint Cleaning

Inspect joints during the cleaning process to correct improper equipment and cleaning techniques that damage the concrete pavement in any manner. Cleaned joints will be approved prior to installation of the separating or back-up material and joint sealant.

3.4.2 Joint Sealant Application Equipment

Inspect the application equipment to ensure conformance to temperature requirements, proper proportioning and mixing (if two-component sealant) and proper installation. Evidences of bubbling, improper installation, failure to cure or set will be cause to suspend operations until causes of the deficiencies are determined and corrected.

3.4.3 Joint Sealant

Inspect the joint sealant for proper rate of cure and set, bonding to the joint walls, cohesive separation within the sealant, reversion to liquid, entrapped air and voids. Sealants exhibiting any of these deficiencies at any time prior to the final acceptance of the project shall be removed from the joint, wasted, and replaced as specified herein at no additional cost to the Government.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

Upon completion of the project, remove all unused materials from the site and leave the pavement in a clean condition.




SECTION 32 05 33

LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI Z133.1 (2001) Arboricultural Operations -- Safety Requirements for Pruning, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush

U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Pesticide

Any substance or mixture of substances, including biological control agents, that may pervent, destroy, repel, or mitigate pests and are specifically labeled for use by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Also, any substance used as a plant regulator, defoliant, disinfectant, or biocide. Examples of pesticides include fumigants, herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, nematicides, molluscicides and rodenticides.

1.2.2 Stand of Turf

100 percent ground cover of the established species.

1.2.3 Planter Beds

A planter bed is defined as an area containing one or a combination of the following plant types: shrubs, vines, wildflowers, annuals, perennials, ground cover, and a mulch topdressing excluding turf. Trees may also be found in planter beds.


Section 32 92 23 SODDING applies to this section for installation of seed and sod requirements, with additions and modifications herein.

Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS applies to this section for installation of trees, shrubs, ground cover, and vines, with additions and modifications herein.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Integrated Pest Management Plan; G

SD-03 Product Data

Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)

Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Fertilizer; G

Hose; (LEED)Mulches Topdressing; (LEED)

Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

Inorganic Mulch Materials

Submit documentation indicating type of biobased material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

SD-07 Certificates

Maintenance inspection report

Plant quantities; G


Maintenance


Tree, staking and guying removal

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.5.1 Delivery

Deliver fertilizer to the site in original containers bearing



manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer may be furnished in bulk with a certificate indicating the above information.

1.5.2 Storage

1.5.2.1 Fertilizer and Mulch Storage

Material shall be stored in designated areas. Fertilizer shall be stored in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.

1.5.2.2 Antidessicants Storage

Do not store with fertilizers or other landscape maintenance materials.

1.5.3 Handling

Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.

1.6 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.6.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Landscaping materials may be locally available.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 POST-PLANT FERTILIZER

2.1.1 Granular Fertilizer

Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients:

12 percent available nitrogen8 percent available phosphorus8 percent available potassium2 percent sulfur

2.2 WATER

Source of water shall be approved by the Contracting Officer, and be of suitable quality for irrigation.

2.2.1 Hose

Hoses used for watering shall be a minimum of 60 percent post-consumer rubber or plastic.

2.3 MULCHES TOPDRESSING

Free from noxious weeds, mold, or other deleterious materials.



2.3.1 Recycled Inhert Organic Mulch Materials

Shredded Rubber Mulch - red in color

2.4 PESTICIDES

Submit an Integrated Pest Management Plan, including proposed alternatives to herbicides and pesticides. Use biological pest controls as approved in the Plan.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXTENT OF WORK

Provide landscape construction maintenance to include edging, watering, weeding, pruning, and stake and guy adjusting, for all newly installed landscape areas and existing plant material, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of the construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.

3.1.1 Policing

The Contractor shall police all landscaped areas. Policing includes removal of leaves, branches and limbs regardless of length or diameter, dead vegetation, paper, trash, cigarette butts, garbage, rocks or other debris. Policing shall extend to both sides of fencing or walls. Collected debris shall be promptly removed and disposed of at an approved disposal site.

3.1.2 Drainage System Maintenance

The Contractor shall remove all obstructions from surface and subsurface drain lines to allow water to flow unrestricted in swales, gutters, catch basins, storm drain curb inlets, and yard drains. Remove grates and clear debris in catch basins. Open drainage channels are to be maintained free of all debris and vegetation at all times. Edges of these channels shall be clear of any encroachment by vegetation.

3.2 GROUNDCOVER ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

Groundcover establishment period will commence on the date that inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new turf furnished under this contract has been satisfactorily installed to a 95 percent stand of coverage. The establishment period shall continue for a period of 365 days.

3.2.1 Frequency of Maintenance

Begin maintenance immediately after turf has been installed. Inspect areas once a week during the installation and establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly.

3.2.2 Promotion of Growth

Groundcover shall be maintained in a manner that promotes proper health, growth, natural color.Turf shall have a neat uniform manicured appearance, free of bare areas, ruts, holes, weeds, pests, dead vegetation, debris, and unwanted vegetation that present an unsightly appearance. Mow, remove excess clippings, eradicate weeds, water, fertilize, and perform other



operations necessary to promote growth, as approved by Contracting Officer and consistent with approved Integrated Pest Management Plan. Remove noxious weeds common to the area from planting areas by mechanical means.

3.2.3 Mowing

3.2.3.1 Turf

Turf shall be mowed at a uniform finished height. Mow turfed areas to a minimum average height of 3 inches when average height of grass becomes 3.5 inches for spring/summer maintenance and to a minimum average height of 3.5 inches when the average height of grass reaches 4 inches for fall maintenance. The height of turf is measured from the soil. Mowing of turf shall be performed in a manner that prevents scalping, rutting, bruising, uneven and rough cutting. Prior to mowing, all rubbish, debris, trash, leaves, rocks, paper, and limbs or branches on a turf area shall be picked up and disposed. Adjacent paved areas shall be swept/vacuumed clean.

3.2.4 Turf Edging and Trimming

Perimeter of planter bed edges, sidewalks, driveways, curbs, and other paved surfaces shall be edged. Uniformly edge these areas to prevent encroachment of vegetation onto paved surfaces and to provide a clear cut division line between planter beds, turf, and ground cover. Edging is to be accomplished in a manner that prevents scalping, rutting, bruising, uneven and rough cutting. Edging shall be performed on the same day that turf is mowed. Use of string line trimmers is permitted in "soft" areas such as an edge between turfgrass and a planter bed. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to any plant materials, structures, and other landscape features.

Trimming around trees, fences, poles, walls, and other similar objects is to be accomplished to match the height and appearance of surrounding mowed turf growth. Trimming shall be performed on the same day the turf's mowed. Care shall be exercised to avoid "Girdling" trees located in turf areas. The use of protective tree collars on trees in turf areas may be utilized as a temporary means to avoid injury to tree trunks. At the end of the plant establishment period Contractor will be responsible for removing all protective tree collars.

3.2.5 Post-Fertilizer Application

Apply turf fertilizer in a manner that promotes health, growth, vigor, color and appearance of cultivated turf areas. The method of application, fertilizer type and frequencies shall be determined by the laboratory soil analysis results the requirements of the particular turf species. Organic fertilizer shall be used. In the event that organic fertilizer is not producing the desired effect, the Contractor shall contract the Contracting Officer for approval prior to the use of a synthetic type of fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be applied by approved methods in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2.6 Turf Watering

The Contractor shall perform irrigation in a manner that promotes the health, growth, color and appearance of cultivated vegetation and that complies with all Federal, State, and local water agencies and authorities directives. The Contractor shall be responsible to prevent over watering, water run-off, erosion, and ponding due to excessive quantities or rate of



application. The Contractor shall abide by state, local or other water conservation regulations or restrictions in force during the establishment period.

3.2.7 Turf Clearance Area

Trees located in turf areas shall be maintained with a growth free clearance of 18 inches from the tree trunk base. The use of mechanical weed whips to accomplish the turf growth free bed area is prohibited.

3.2.8 Replanting

Replant in accordance with Section 32 92 23 SEEDING, Section 32 92 23 SODDING and within specified planting dates areas which do not have a satisfactory stand of turf.

3.2.9 Final Inspection and Acceptance

Final inspection will be make upon written request from the Contractor at least 10 days prior to the last day of the turf establishment period. Final turf acceptance will be based upon a satisfactory stand of turf.

3.3 EXTERIOR PLANT ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

The exterior plant establishment period will commence on the date that inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new plants furnished under this contract have been satisfactorily installed and shall continue for a period of 365 days.

3.3.1 Frequency of Maintenance

Begin maintenance immediately after plants have been installed. Inspect exterior plants at least once a week during the installation and establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly.

3.3.2 Promotion of Plant Growth and Vigor

Water, prune, fertilize, mulch, adjust stakes, guys and turnbuckles, eradicate weeds and perform other operations necessary to promote plant growth, and vigor.

3.3.3 Planter Bed Maintenance

Planter beds shall be weeded, fertilized, irrigated, kept pest free, turf free, pruned, and mulch levels maintained. Planter beds will not be allowed to encroach into turf areas. A definite break shall be maintained between turf areas and planter beds.

3.3.3.1 Shrub Selective Maintenance

In addition to the above requirements, shrubs shall be selectively pruned, and shaped for health and safety when the following conditions exist: Remove growth in front of windows, over entrance ways or walks, and any growth which will obstruct vision at street intersections or of security personnel; Remove dead, damaged or diseased branches or limbs; where shrub growth obstructs pedestrian walkways; where shrub growth is found growing against or over structures; where shrub growth permits concealment of unauthorized persons. All pruning debris shall be disposed of in a proper manner.



3.3.3.2 Tree Maintenance

Tree maintenance shall include adjustment of stakes, ties, guy supports and turnbuckles, watering, fertilizing, pest control, mulching, pruning for health and safety and fall leaf cleanup. Stakes, ties, guy supports and turnbuckles shall be inspected and adjusted to avoid girdling and promote natural development. All trees within the project boundaries, regardless of caliper, shall be selectively pruned for safety and health reasons. These include but are not limited to removal of dead and broken branches and correction of structural defects. Prune trees according to their natural growth characteristics leaving trees well shaped and balanced. Pruning of all trees including palm trees shall be accomplished by or in the presence of a certified member of the International Society of Arboriculture and in accordance with ANSI Z133.1. All pruning debris generated shall be disposed of in a proper manner.

3.3.4 Slope Erosion Control Maintenance

The Contractor shall provide slope erosion control maintenance to prevent undermining of all slopes in newly landscaped and natural growth areas. Maintenance tasks include immediate repairs to weak spots in sloped areas, and maintaining clean, clear culverts, and graded berms, and terraces to intercept and direct water flow to prevent development of large gullies and slope erosion and during periods of extended rainfall, irrigation systems shall be secured. Eroded areas shall be filled with amended topsoil and replanted with the same plant species. Erosion control netting blankets damaged due to slope erosion shall be reinstalled.

3.3.5 Removal of Dying or Dead Plants

Remove dead and dying plants and provide new plants immediately upon commencement of the specified planting season, and replace stakes, guys, mulch and eroded earth mound water basins. No additional plant establishment period will be required for replacement plants beyond the original warranty period. A tree shall be considered dying or dead when the main leader has died back, or a minimum of 20 percent of the crown has died. A shrub or ground cover shall be considered dying or dead when a minimum of 20 percent of the plant has died. This condition shall be determined by scraping on a branch an area 1/16 inch square, maximum, to determine the cause for dying plant material and shall provide recommendations for replacement. The Contractor shall determine the cause for dying plant material and provide recommendations for replacement.

3.3.6 Tracking of Unhealthy Plants

Note plants not in healthy growing condition, as determined by the Contracting Officer, and as soon as seasonal conditions permit, remove and replace with plants of the same species and sizes as originally specified. Install replacement plantings in accordance with Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS.

3.3.7 Final Inspection

Final inspection will be made upon written request from the Contractor at least 10 days prior to the last day of the establishment period. Final inspection will be based upon satisfactory health and growth of plants and on the following:



3.3.7.1 Total Plants on Site

Plants have been accepted and required number of replacements have been installed.

3.3.7.2 Mulching and Weeding

Planter beds and earth mound water basins are properly mulched and free of weeds.

3.3.7.3 Tree Supports

Stakes, guys and turnbuckles are in good condition.

3.3.7.4 Remedial Work

Remedial measures directed by the Contracting Officer to ensure plant material survival and promote healthy growth have been completed.


3.4.1 Maintenance Inspection Report

Provide maintenance inspection report to assure that landscape maintenance is being performed in accordance with the specifications and in the best interest of plant growth and survivability. Site observations shall be documented at the start of the establishment period, then quarterly following the start, and at the end of establishment period. Results of site observation visits shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 7 calendar days of each site observation visit.

3.4.2 Plant Quantities

The Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer with the number of plant quantities. In addition, provide total exterior area of hardscape and landscaping such as turf and total number of shrubs.

3.4.3 Tree Staking and Guying Removal

The Contractor shall provide a certified letter that all stakes and guys are removed from all project trees at the end of the establishment period.




SECTION 32 11 23

GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.


AASHTO T 180 (2015) Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop

AASHTO T 224 (2010) Standard Method of Test for Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test


ASTM C 117 (2004) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C 127 (2007) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

ASTM C 128 (2007a) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

ASTM C 131 (2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C 136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C 88 (2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

ASTM D 1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D 1557 (2007) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000



ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)

ASTM D 2167 (1994; R 2001) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method

ASTM D 2487 (2006) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D 422 (1963; R 2007) Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

ASTM D 4318 (2005) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D 6938 (2007a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D 75 (2003) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates

ASTM E 11 (2004) Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes

1.2 DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.

1.2.1 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

Graded-crushed aggregate (GCA) base course is well graded, crushed, durable aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.

1.2.2 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum dry density. Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve are expressed as a percentage of the laboratory maximum dry density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.


All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be subject to approval before the work is started and shall be maintained in satisfactory working condition at all times. Provide adequate equipment having the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting grade controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth herein.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control



approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data

Plant, Equipment, and Tools

List of proposed equipment to be used in performance of construction work, including descriptive data.

Waybills and Delivery Tickets

Copies of waybills and delivery tickets during the progress of the work.

SD-06 Test Reports

Sampling and Testing; GField Density Tests; G

Certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30 days before material is required for the work.

Calibration curves and related test results prior to using the device or equipment being calibrated.

Copies of field test results within 24 hours after the tests are performed.


Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor and performed by a testing laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish compliance with the specified requirements; perform testing at the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer's Representative may specify the time and location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting Officer's Representative within 24 hours of completion of the tests.

1.5.1 Sampling

Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with ASTM D 75. When deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

1.5.2 Tests

Perform the following tests in conformance with the applicable standards listed.

1.5.2.1 Sieve Analysis

Make sieve analysis in conformance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136. Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11. Particle-size analysis of the soils shall also be completed in conformance with ASTM D 422.



1.5.2.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index

Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D 4318.

1.5.2.3 Moisture-Density Determinations

Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.

1.5.2.4 Field Density Tests

Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D 2167 or ASTM D 6938. For the method presented in ASTM D 1556 use the base plate as shown in the drawing. For the method presented in ASTM D 6938 check the calibration curves and adjust them, if necessary, using only the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration, of the ASTM publication. Tests performed in accordance with ASTM D 6938 result in a wet unit weight of soil, and ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall also be checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D 6938. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made by the prepared containers of material method, as described in paragraph Calibration of ASTM D 6938, on each different type of material being tested at the beginning of a job and at intervals as directed.

1.5.2.5 Wear Test

Perform wear tests on GCA course material in conformance with ASTM C 131.

1.5.2.6 Soundness

Perform soundness tests on GCA in accordance with ASTM C 88.

1.5.3 Testing Frequency

1.5.3.1 Initial Tests

Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets all specified requirements when furnished. If materials from more than one source are going to be utilized, this testing shall be completed for each source.

a. Sieve Analysis .

b. Liquid limit and plasticity index.

c. Moisture-density relationship.

d. Wear.

e. Soundness.

1.5.3.2 In Place Tests

Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the place and compacted GCA. Samples shall be taken and tested at the rates indicated.



a. Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one set of tests for every 250 square yards, or portion thereof, of completed area.

b. Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one sieve analysis for every 500 square yards, or portion thereof, of material placed.

c. Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same frequency as the sieve analysis.

d. Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals, in such a manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square yards of base course. Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the base course.

1.5.4 Approval of Material

Select the source of the material 30 days prior to the time the material will be required in the work. Tentative approval of material will be based on initial test results. Final approval of the materials will be based on sieve analysis, liquid limit, and plasticity index tests performed on samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).

1.6 ENVIROMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 35 degrees F. When the temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect all completed areas by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions to meet specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

Provide GCA consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, angular sand, or other approved material. GCA shall be free of silt and clay as defined by ASTM D 2487, organic matter, and other objectionable materials or coatings. The portion retained on the No. 4 sieve is known as coarse aggregate; that portion passing the No. 4 sieve is known as fine aggregate.

2.1.1 Coarse Aggregate

Provide coarse aggregates with angular particles of uniform density. When the coarse aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from each source shall meet the specified requirements and shall be stockpiled separately.

a. Crushed Gravel: Crushed gravel shall be manufactured by crushing gravels, and shall meet all the requirements specified below.

b. Crushed Stone: Provide crushed stone consisting of freshly mined quarry rock, meeting all the requirements specified below.

2.1.1.1 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

GCA coarse aggregate shall not show more than 40 percent loss when



subjected to the Los Angeles abrasion test in accordance with ASTM C 131. GCA coarse aggregate shall not exhibit a loss greater than 18 percent weighted average, at five cycles, when tested for soundness in magnesium sulfate, or 12 percent weighted average, at five cycles, when tested in sodium sulfate in accordance with ASTM C 88. The amount of flat and elongated particles shall not exceed 20 percent for the fraction retained on the 1/2 inch sieve nor 20 percent for the fraction passing the 1/2 inch sieve. A flat particle is one having a ratio of width to thickness greater than 3; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width greater than 3. In the portion retained on each sieve specified, the crushed aggregate shall contain at least 90 percent by weight of crushed pieces having two or more freshly fractured faces with the area of each face being at least equal to 75 percent of the smallest midsectional area of the piece. When two fractures are contiguous, the angle between planes of the fractures must be at least 30 degrees in order to count as two fractured faces. Crushed gravel shall be manufactured from gravel particles 90 percent of which by weight are retained on the maximum size sieve listed in TABLE 1.

2.1.2 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregates shall be angular particles of uniform density. When the fine aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from each source shall meet the specified requirements.

2.1.2.1 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

Provide GCA fine aggregate consisting of angular particles produced by crushing stone or gravel that meets the requirements for wear and soundness specified for GCA coarse aggregate. Fine aggregate shall be produced by crushing only particles larger than No. 4 sieve in size. The fine aggregate shall contain at least 90 percent by weight of particles having two or more freshly fractured faces in the portion passing the No. 4 sieve and retained on the No. 10 sieve, and in the portion passing the No. 10 sieve and retained on the No. 40 sieve.

2.1.3 Gradation Requirements

Apply the specified gradation requirements to the completed base course. The aggregates shall be continuously well graded within the limits specified in TABLE 1. Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11.

TABLE I. GRADATION OF AGGREGATES

Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve

Sieve Designation No. 1 ------------------------

2 inch 100 1-1/2 inch 70-100 1 inch 45-80 1/2 inch 30-60 No. 4 20-50 No. 10 15-40 No. 40 5-25 No. 200 0-8



NOTE 1: Particles having diameters less than No. 635 shall not be in excess of 3 percent by weight of the total sample tested.

NOTE 2: The values are based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity. If materials from different sources are used for the coarse and fine aggregates, they shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 127 and ASTM C 128 to determine their specific gravities. If the specific gravities vary by more than 10 percent, the percentages passing the various sieves shall be corrected as directed by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

2.2 LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX

Apply liquid limit and plasticity index requirements to the completed course and to any component that is blended to meet the required gradation. The portion of any component or of the completed course passing the No. 40 sieve shall be either nonplastic or have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

When the GCA is constructed in more than one layer, clean the previously constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in areas where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage during the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting or standing on the working area. Provide line and grade stakes as necessary for control. Grade stakes shall be in lines parallel to the centerline of the area under construction and suitably spaced for string lining.

3.2 OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES

Clearing, stripping, and excavating are the responsibility of the Contractor. Operate the aggregate sources to produce the quantity and quality of materials meeting the specified requirements in the specified time limit. Aggregate sources on private lands shall be conditioned in agreement with local laws or authorities.

3.3 STOCKPILING MATERIAL

Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling of material. Stockpile all materials, including approved material available from excavation and grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Aggregates shall be stockpiled on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the Contracting Officer's Representative to prevent segregation. Materials obtained from different sources shall be stockpiled separately.

3.4 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE

Prior to constructing the base course(s), the underlying subbase course or subgrade shall be cleaned of all foreign substances. At the time of construction of the base course(s), the underlying course shall contain no frozen material. The surface of the underlying course or subgrade shall meet specified compaction and surface tolerances. The underlying course shall conform to Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Ruts or soft yielding spots in the underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and



deviations of the surface from the requirements set forth herein shall be corrected by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and by adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D 2487, the surface shall be stabilized prior to placement of the base course(s). Stabilization shall be accomplished by mixing GCA into the underlying course and compacting by approved methods. The stabilized material shall be considered as part of the underlying course and shall meet all requirements of the underlying course. The finished underlying course shall not be disturbed by traffic or other operations and shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition until the base course is placed.

3.5 INSTALLATION

3.5.1 Mixing the Materials

Mix the coarse and fine aggregates in a stationary plant, or in a traveling plant or bucket loader on an approved paved working area. Make adjustments in mixing procedures or in equipment, as directed, to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation or degradation, to obtain the required water content, and to insure a satisfactory base course meeting all requirements of this specification. Adjustments to the JMF shall be limited to plus or minus 5 percent on the 1-1/2 inch and coarser sieves; plus or minus 8 percent on the 1 inch to No. 4 sieves; plus or minus 5 percent on the No. 30sieve, and plus or minus 3 percent on the No. 200 sieve. Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be outside the limits shown in Table 2; this is acceptable.

3.5.2 Placing

Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of uniform thickness with an approved spreader. When a compacted layer 6 inches or less in thickness is required, place the material in a single layer. When a compacted layer in excess of 6 inches is required, place the material in layers of equal thickness. No layer shall be thicker than 6 inches or thinner than 3 inches when compacted. The layers shall be so placed that when compacted they will be true to the grades or levels required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base course is placed in more than one layer, the previously constructed layers shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers, power brooms, or hand brooms, as directed. Such adjustments in placing procedures or equipment shall be made as may be directed to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to adjust the water content, and to insure an acceptable base course.

3.5.3 Grade Control

The finished and completed base course shall conform to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown. Underlying material(s) shall be excavated and prepared at sufficient depth for the required base course thickness so that the finished base course and the subsequent surface course will meet the designated grades.

3.5.4 Edges of Base Course

The base course(s) shall be placed so that the completed section will be a minimum of 2 feet wider, on all sides, than the next layer that will be placed above it. Additionally, place approved fill material along the



outer edges of the base course in sufficient quantities to compact to the thickness of the course being constructed, or to the thickness of each layer in a multiple layer course, allowing in each operation at least a 2 foot width of this material to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting of each layer of base course. If this base course material is to be placed adjacent to another pavement section, then the layers for both of these sections shall be placed and compacted along this edge at the same time.

3.5.5 Compaction

Compact each layer of the base course, as specified, with approved compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content determined from laboratory tests as specified in paragraph SAMPLING AND TESTING. Begin rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center, overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different lengths. Speed of the roller shall be such that displacement of the aggregate does not occur. In all places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be compacted with hand-operated power tampers. Continue compaction until each layer has a degree of compaction that is at least 100 percent of laboratory maximum density through the full depth of the layer. Make such adjustments in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base course. Any materials that are found to be unsatisfactory shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material or reworked, as directed, to meet the requirements of this specification.

3.5.6 Thickness

Construct the compacted thickness of the base course as indicated. No individual layer shall be thicker than 6 inches nor be thinner than 3 inches in compacted thickness. The total compacted thickness of the base course(s) shall be within 1/2 inch of the thickness indicated. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch deficient, correct such areas by scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch thicker than indicated, the course shall be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements. Average job thickness shall be the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job, but shall be within 1/4 inch of the thickness indicated. The total thickness of the base course shall be measured at intervals in such a manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square yards of base course. Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the base course.

3.5.7 Proof Rolling

Proof rolling of all new GCA areas shall be in addition to the compaction specified and shall consist of the application of 4 coverages with a fully loaded dump truck. Apply proof rolling to the top of the underlying material on which the base course is laid and to each layer of GCA course. Maintain water content of the underlying material at optimum or at the percentage directed from start of compaction to completion of proof rolling of that layer. Water content of each layer of the base course shall be maintained at the optimum percentage directed from start of compaction to completion of proof rolling. Any base course materials or any underlying materials that produce unsatisfactory results by proof rolling shall be



removed and replaced with satisfactory materials, recompacted and proof rolled to meet these specifications.

3.5.8 Finishing

The surface of the top layer of base course shall be finished after final compaction and proof rolling by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling with a steel-wheeled roller. Thin layers of material shall not be added to the top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer of base course is 1/2 inch or more below grade, then the top layer should be scarified to a depth of at least 3 inches and new material shall be blended in and compacted or compacted and proof rolled to bring to grade. Adjustments to rolling and finishing procedures shall be made as directed to minimize segregation and degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated, uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, the unsatisfactory portion shall be scarified, reworked and recompacted or it shall be replaced as directed.

3.5.9 Smoothness

The surface of the top layer shall show no deviations in excess of 3/8 inch when tested with a 12 foot straightedge. Take measurements in successive positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Measurements shall also be taken perpendicular to the centerline at 50 foot intervals. Deviations exceeding this amount shall be corrected by removing material and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and compacting it to meet these specifications.

3.6 TRAFFIC

Completed portions of the base course may be opened to limited traffic, provided there is no marring or distorting of the surface by the traffic. Heavy equipment shall not be permitted except when necessary to construction, and then the area shall be protected against marring or damage to the completed work.

3.7 MAINTENANCE

Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full pavement section is completed and accepted. Maintenance shall include immediate repairs to any defects and shall be repeated as often as necessary to keep the area intact. Any base course that is not paved over prior to the onset of winter, shall be retested to verify that it still complies with the requirements of this specification. Any area of base course that is damaged shall be reworked or replaced as necessary to comply with this specification.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS

Any unsuitable materials that must be removed shall be disposed of outside the limits of Government-controlled land. No additional payments will be made for materials that must be replaced.




SECTION 32 12 10

BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 81 (1992; R 2004) Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)

AASHTO M 82 (1975; R 2004) Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)

AASHTO T 102 (1983; R 2004) Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials

AASHTO T 40 (2002; R 2006) Sampling Bituminous Materials


ASTM D 140 (2001; R 2007) Sampling Bituminous Materials

ASTM D 2397 (2005) Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt

ASTM D 2995 (1999; R 2004) Determining Application Rate of Bituminous Distributors

ASTM D 977 (2005) Emulsified Asphalt



Plant, equipment, machines and tools used in the work are subject to approval and shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. Calibrated equipment such as asphalt distributors, scales, batching equipment, spreaders and similar equipment, should have been recalibrated by a calibration laboratory within 12 months prior to commencing work and every 12 months thereafter, by such laboratory from the date of recalibration, during the term of the contract.

1.2.2 Bituminous Distributor

Provide a distributor with pneumatic tires of such size and number that the load produced on the base surface does not exceed 650 psi of tire width to



prevent rutting, shoving or otherwise damaging the base surface or other layers in the pavement structure. Design and equip the distributor to spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the specified temperature, at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.05 to 2.0 gallons per square yard, with a pressure range of 25 to 75 psi and with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus 5 percent, and at variable widths. Include with the distributor equipment a separate power unit for the bitumen pump, full-circulation spray bars, tachometer, pressure gauges, volume-measuring devices, adequate heaters for heating of materials to the proper application temperature, a thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents, and a hand hose attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to the distributor. Equip the distributor to circulate and agitate the bituminous material during the heating process.

1.2.3 Heating Equipment for Storage Tanks

The equipment for heating the bituminous material shall be steam, electric, or hot oil heaters. Provide steam heaters consisting of steam coils and equipment for producing steam, so designed that the steam cannot get into the material. Fix an armored thermometer to the tank with a temperature range from 40 to 400 degrees F so that the temperature of the bituminous material may be determined at all times.

1.2.4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers

Use power brooms and power blowers suitable for cleaning the surfaces to which the bituminous coat is to be applied.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

SD-06 Test Reports

Sampling and Testing

Copies of all test results for emulsified asphalt, and bituminous materials, within 24 hours of completion of tests. Certified copies of the manufacturer's test reports indicating temperature viscosity relationship for cutback asphalt, compliance with applicable specified requirements, not less than 30 days before the material is required in the work.


Use Local/Regional Materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Tack and prime coat materials may be locally available.




Inspect the materials delivered to the site for contamination and damage. Unload and store the materials with a minimum of handling.


Apply bituminous coat only when the surface to receive the bituminous coat is dry. Apply bituminous coat only when the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 50 degrees F or above and when the temperature has not been below 35 degrees F for the 12 hours prior to application, unless otherwise directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRIME COAT

Provide asphalt conforming to AASHTO M 81, AASHTO M 82, Grade 85 - 100 and specified in the following two subparagraphs.

2.1.1 Emulsified Asphalt

Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D 977, Type SS-1, SS1h ASTM D 2397, Type CSS-1, CSS-1h.

2.2 TACK COAT

2.2.1 Emulsified Asphalt

Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D 977, Type SS-1, SS1h, ASTM D 2397, Type CSS-1, CSS-1h. Dilute the emulsified asphalt with equal parts of water. The base asphalt used to manufacture the emulsion shall show a negative spot when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 102 using standard naphtha.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

Immediately before applying the bituminous coat, remove all loose material, dirt, clay, or other objectionable material from the surface to be treated by means of a power broom or blower supplemented with hand brooms. The surface shall be dry and clean at the time of treatment.

3.2 APPLICATION RATE

The exact quantities within the range specified, which may be varied to suit field conditions, will be determined by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

3.2.1 Tack Coat

Apply bituminous material for the tack coat in quantities of not less than 0.05 gallon nor more than 0.15 gallon per square yard of pavement surface.



3.2.2 Prime Coat

Apply bituminous material for the prime coat in quantities of not less than 0.18 gallon nor more than 0.35 gallon per square yard of pavement surface.

3.3 APPLICATION TEMPERATURE

3.3.1 Viscosity Relationship

Asphalt application temperature shall provide an application viscosity between 10 and 60 seconds, Saybolt Furol, or between 20 and 120 centistokes, kinematic. Furnish the temperature viscosity relation to the Contracting Officer's Representative.

3.3.2 Temperature Ranges

The viscosity requirements determine the application temperature to be used. The following is a normal range of application temperatures:

Emulsions ------------- SS-1 70-160 degrees F SS-1h 70-160 degrees F CSS-1 70-160 degrees F CSS-1h 70-160 degrees F

These temperature ranges exceed the flash point of the material and care should be taken in their heating.

3.4 APPLICATION

3.4.1 General

Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface, apply the bituminous prime or tack coat with the Bituminous Distributor at the specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be treated. Properly treat all areas and spots missed by the distributor with the hand spray. Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, maintain the surface by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing deficient areas at no additional cost to the Government. If required, spread clean dry sand to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material. No smoking, fires, or flames other than those from the heaters that are a part of the equipment are permitted within 25 feet of heating, distributing, and transferring operations of bituminous material other than bituminous emulsions. Prevent all traffic, except for paving equipment used in constructing the surfacing, from using the underlying material, whether primed or not, until the surfacing is completed. The bituminous coat shall conform to all requirements as described herein.

3.4.2 Prime Coat

Apply a prime coat at locations shown on the Drawings. Apply the bituminous material uniformly over the surface to be treated at a pressure range of 25 to 75 psi; the rate shall be as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE. To obtain uniform application of the prime coat on the surface treated at the junction of previous and subsequent applications,



spread building paper on the surface for a sufficient distance back from the ends of each application to start and stop the prime coat on the paper and to ensure that all sprayers will operate at full force on the surface to be treated. Immediately after application remove and destroy the building paper.

3.4.3 Tack Coat

Apply tack coat at the locations shown on the drawings and between successive lifts of asphalt paving. Apply the tack coat when the surface to be treated is dry. Immediately following the preparation of the surface for treatment, apply the bituminous material by means of the bituminous distributor, within the limits of temperature specified herein and as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained over the entire surface to be treated. Treat lightly coated areas and spots missed by the distributor with the bituminous material. Following the application of bituminous material, allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for period of time necessary to permit setting of the tack coat. Apply the bituminous tack coat only as far in advance of the placing of the overlying layer as required for that day's operation. Maintain and protect the treated surface from damage until the succeeding course of pavement is placed.

3.5 CURING PERIOD

Following application of the bituminous material and prior to application of the succeeding layer of pavement, allow the bituminous coat to cure and to obtain evaporation of any volatiles or moisture. Maintain the coated surface until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing and recoating deficient areas. Allow the prime coat to cure without being disturbed for a period of at least 48 hours or longer, as may be necessary to attain penetration into the treated course. Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up and cure excess bituminous material.


Samples of the bituminous material shall be tested for compliance with the applicable specified requirements. A sample shall be obtained and tested by the Contractor for both the prime coat and the tack coat.

3.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING

Perform sampling and testing by an approved commercial testing laboratory or by facilities furnished by the Contractor. No work requiring testing will be permitted until the facilities have been inspected and approved.

3.7.1 Sampling

The samples of bituminous material, unless otherwise specified, shall be in accordance with ASTM D 140 or AASHTO T 40. Sources from which bituminous materials are to be obtained shall be selected and notification furnished the Contracting Officer's Representative within 15 days after the award of the contract.

3.7.2 Calibration Test

Furnish all equipment, materials, and labor necessary to calibrate the



bituminous distributor. Calibration shall be made with the approved job material and prior to applying the bituminous coat material to the prepared surface. Calibrate the bituminous distributor in accordance with ASTM D 2995.

3.7.3 Trial Applications

Before providing the complete bituminous coat, apply three lengths of at least 100 feet for the full width of the distributor bar to evaluate the amount of bituminous material that can be satisfactorily applied.

3.7.3.1 Tack Coat Trial Application Rate

Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous tack coat materials in the amount of 0.05 gallons per square yard. Other trial applications shall be made using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary.

3.7.3.2 Prime Coat Trial Application Rate

Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous materials in the amount of 0.25 gallon per square yard. Other trial applications shall be made using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary.

3.7.4 Sampling and Testing During Construction

Perform quality control sampling and testing as required in paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.

3.8 TRAFFIC CONTROLS

Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not travel over freshly treated surfaces.




SECTION 32 12 16

HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS08/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 156 (1997: R 2009) Standard Specification for Requirements for Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures

AASHTO M 320 (2010) Standard Specification for Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder

ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)

AI MS-2 (1997 6th Ed) Mix Design Methods

AI MS-22 (2001; 2nd Ed) Construction of Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavements

AI SP-2 (2001; 3rd Ed) Superpave Mix Design


ASTM C117 (2004) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C1252 (2006) Standard Test Methods for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate (as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface Texture, and Grading)

ASTM C127 (2012) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

ASTM C128 (2012) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

ASTM C131 (2006) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine



ASTM C136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C142/C142M (2010) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates

ASTM C29/C29M (2009) Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate

ASTM C566 (2013) Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

ASTM C88 (2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

ASTM D140/D140M (2009) Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials

ASTM D1461 (2011) Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D2172/D2172M (2011) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D2419 (2009) Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

ASTM D242/D242M (2009) Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D2489/D2489M (2008) Estimating Degree of Particle Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures

ASTM D2950/D2950M (2011) Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D3665 (2012) Random Sampling of Construction Materials

ASTM D3666 (2011) Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials

ASTM D4125/D4125M (2010) Asphalt Content of Bituminous Mixtures by the Nuclear Method

ASTM D4791 (2010) Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate

ASTM D4867/D4867M (2009) Effect of Moisture on Asphalt Concrete Paving Mixtures

ASTM D5444 (2008) Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate



ASTM D6307 (2010) Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt by Ignition Method

ASTM D6925 (2009) Standard Test Method for Preparation and Determination of the Relative Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor

ASTM D6926 (2010) Standard Practice for Preparation of Bituminous Specimens Using Marshall Apparatus

ASTM D6927 (2006) Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

COE CRD-C 171 (1995) Standard Test Method for Determining Percentage of Crushed Particles in Aggregate


Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. Construct each course to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and roll, finish, and approve it before the placement of the next course.

1.2.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant

Plants used for the preparation of hot-mix asphalt shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 156 with the following changes:

a. Truck Scales. Weigh the asphalt mixture on approved, certified scales at the Contractor's expense. Inspect and seal scales at least annually by an approved calibration laboratory.

b. Testing Facilities. Provide laboratory facilities at the plant for the use of the Government's acceptance testing and the Contractor's quality control testing.

c. Inspection of Plant. Provide the Contracting Officer's Representative with access at all times, to all areas of the plant for checking adequacy of equipment; inspecting operation of the plant; verifying weights, proportions, and material properties; checking the temperatures maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for taking samples. Provide assistance as requested, for the Government to procure any desired samples.

d. Storage Bins. Use of storage bins for temporary storage of hot-mix asphalt will be permitted as follows:

(1) The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 3 hours.



(2) The asphalt mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 8 hours. The mix drawn from bins shall meet the same requirements as mix loaded directly into trucks.

1.2.2 Hauling Equipment

Provide trucks for hauling hot-mix asphalt having tight, clean, and smooth metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the truck beds shall be lightly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved material. Petroleum based products shall not be used as a release agent. Each truck shall have a suitable cover to protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that the mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature, truck beds shall be insulated or heated and covers (tarps) shall be securely fastened.

1.2.3 Asphalt Pavers

Provide asphalt pavers which are self-propelled, with an activated screed, heated as necessary, and capable of spreading and finishing courses of hot-mix asphalt which will meet the specified thickness, smoothness, and grade. The paver shall have sufficient power to propel itself and the hauling equipment without adversely affecting the finished surface.

1.2.3.1 Receiving Hopper

Provide paver with a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a uniform spreading operation and equipped with a distribution system to place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation. The screed shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture.

1.2.3.2 Automatic Grade Controls

Equip the paver with a control system capable of automatically maintaining the specified screed elevation. The control system shall be automatically actuated from either a reference line and/or through a system of mechanical sensors or sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which will maintain the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain the required surface. The transverse slope controller shall be capable of maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1 percent. A transverse slope controller shall not be used to control grade. Provide controls capable of working in conjunction with any of the following attachments:

a. Ski-type device of not less than 30 feet in length.

b. Taut stringline set to grade.

c. Short ski or shoe for joint matching.

d. Laser control.

1.2.4 Rollers

Rollers shall be in good condition and shall be operated at slow speeds to avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. The number, type, and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density



while it is still in a workable condition. Do not use equipment which causes excessive crushing of the aggregate.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Mix Design; GContractor Quality Control; GMaterial Acceptance; G

SD-04 Samples

Asphalt Cement BinderAggregates

SD-06 Test Reports

Aggregates; GQC Monitoring

SD-07 Certificates

Asphalt Cement Binder; GTesting Laboratory


Do not place the hot-mix asphalt upon a wet surface or when the surface temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 3. The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting Officer's Representative, if requested; however, all other requirements, including compaction, shall be met.

Table 3. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course

Mat Thickness, inches Degrees F

3 or greater 40

Less than 3 45

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag, screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. Submit sufficient materials to produce 200 lb of blended mixture for mix design verification. The portion of material retained on the No. 4 sieve is coarse aggregate. The portion of material passing the No. 4 sieve and retained on the No. 200 sieve is fine aggregate. The portion passing the



No. 200 sieve is defined as mineral filler. Submit all aggregate test results and samples to the Contracting Officer's Representative at least 14 days prior to start of construction.

2.1.1 Coarse Aggregate

Provide coarse aggregate consisting of sound, tough, durable particles, free from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and bonding with the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other deleterious substances. All individual coarse aggregate sources shall meet the following requirements:

a. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 40 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C131.

b. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 18 percent after five cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C88 using magnesium sulfate or 12 percent when using sodium sulfate.

c. At least 75 percent by weight of coarse aggregate shall have at least two or more fractured faces when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 171. Fractured faces shall be produced by crushing.

d. The particle shape shall be essentially cubical and the aggregate shall not contain more than 20 percent percent, by weight, of flat and elongated particles (3:1 ratio of maximum to minimum) when tested in accordance with ASTM D4791.

e. Slag shall be air-cooled, blast furnace slag, with a compacted weight of not less than 75 lb/cu ft when tested in accordance with ASTM C29/C29M.

f. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142/C142M.

2.1.2 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, tough, durable particles free from coatings of clay, silt, or any objectionable material and containing no clay balls.

a. All individual fine aggregate sources shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2419.

b. The fine aggregate portion of the blended aggregate shall have an uncompacted void content not less than 45.0 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C1252 Method A.

c. The quantity of natural sand (noncrushed material) added to the aggregate blend shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of total aggregate.

d. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142/C142M

2.1.3 Mineral Filler

Mineral filler shall be nonplastic material meeting the requirements of ASTM D242/D242M.



2.1.4 Aggregate Gradation

The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in Table 4, when tested in accordance with ASTM C136 and ASTM C117, and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve or vice versa, but grade uniformly from coarse to fine.

Table 4. Aggregate Gradations

Gradation 2 Percent Passing Sieve Size, inch by Mass

1 --- 3/4 100 1/2 76-96 3/8 69-89 No. 4 53-73 No. 8 38-60 No. 16 26-48 No. 30 18-38 No. 50 11-27 No. 100 6-18 No. 200 3-6

2.2 ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER

Submit a 5 gallon sample for mix design verification. Asphalt cement binder shall conform to AASHTO M 320 Performance Grade (PG) 76-22. Test data indicating grade certification shall be provided by the supplier at the time of delivery of each load to the mix plant. Submit copies of these certifications to the Contracting Officer's Representative. The supplier is defined as the last source of any modification to the binder. The Contracting Officer's Representative may sample and test the binder at the mix plant at any time before or during mix production. Obtain samples for this verification testing in accordance with ASTM D140/D140M and in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Representative. Furnish these samples to the Contracting Officer's Representative for the verification testing, which shall be at no cost to the Contractor. Submit samples of the asphalt cement specified for approval not less than 14 days before start of the test section. Submit copies of certified test data, amount, type and description of any modifiers blended into the asphalt cement binder.

2.3 MIX DESIGN

a. Develop the mix design. The asphalt mix shall be composed of a mixture of well-graded aggregate, mineral filler if required, and asphalt material. The aggregate fractions shall be sized, handled in separate size groups, and combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of the job mix formula (JMF). Submit proposed JMF; do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until a JMF has been approved. The hot-mix asphalt shall be designed in accordance with Marshall (MS-02), Superpave (SP-2), or Hveem (MS-02) procedures and the criteria shown in Table 5. Use the hand-held hammer to compact the specimens for Marshall mix design. If the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) of the composite mixture, as determined by



ASTM D4867/D4867M is less than 75, the aggregates shall be rejected or the asphalt mixture treated with an approved anti-stripping agent. The amount of anti-stripping agent added shall be sufficient to produce a TSR of not less than 75. Provide an antistrip agent, if required, at no additional cost. Sufficient materials to produce 200 pound of blended mixture shall be provided to the Contracting Officer's Representative for verification of mix design at least 14 days prior to construction of test section.

b. At the option of the Contractor, a currently used DOT Superpave hot mix may be used in lieu of developing a Marshall hot mix design as described herein. Design the Superpave volumetric mix in accordance with AI SP-2 and ASTM D6925. The nominal maximum aggregate size (NMAS) shall be 3/4 inch. Other DOT hot mix design methods (Hveem, etc.) may be suitable, as determined by the Contracting Officer's Representative. The number of compaction gyrations, Ndes, shall be based on a design traffic of 400,000 equivalent single axle loads (EASLs).

c. Design Superpave mixes with the number of gyrations specified in Table 5, unless the DOT option is chosen.

2.3.1 JMF Requirements

Submit in writing the job mix formula for approval at least 14 days prior to the start of the test section including as a minimum:

a. Percent passing each sieve size.

b. Percent of asphalt cement.

c. Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used.

d. Asphalt viscosity grade, penetration grade, or performance grade.

e. Number of blows of hand-held hammer per side of molded specimen. (NA for Superpave)

f. Number of gyrations of Superpave gyratory compactor, (NA for Marshall mix design)

g. Laboratory mixing temperature.

h. Lab compaction temperature.

i. Temperature-viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement.

j. Plot of the combined gradation on the 0.45 power gradation chart, stating the nominal maximum size.

k. Graphical plots of stability (NA for Superpave), flow (NA for Superpave), air voids, voids in the mineral aggregate, and unit weight versus asphalt content as shown in AI MS-2.

l. Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate.

m. Percent natural sand.

n. Percent particles with 2 or more fractured faces (in coarse aggregate).



o. Fine aggregate angularity.

p. Percent flat or elongated particles (in coarse aggregate).

q. Tensile Strength Ratio(TSR).

r. Antistrip agent (if required) and amount.

s. List of all modifiers and amount.

t. Correlation of hand-held hammer with mechanical hammer (NA for Superpave).

u. Percentage and properties (asphalt content, binder properties, and aggregate properties) of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) in accordance with paragraph RECYCLED HOT-MIX ASPHALT, if RAP is used.

Test Property 50 Blows or 50 Gyrations

Stability, pounds, minimum (NA for Superpave) *1000

Flow, 0.01 inch 8-18 (NA for Superpave)

Air voids, percent 3-5

Percent Voids in mineral aggregate VMA,

(minimum)

Gradation 1 13.0 Gradation 2 14.0 Gradation 3 15.0

TSR, minimum percent 75

* This is a minimum requirement. The average during construction shall be significantly higher than this number to ensure compliance with the specifications.** Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS-2, based on ASTM C127 and ASTM C128 bulk specific gravity for the aggregate.

2.3.2 Adjustments to Field JMF

Keep the Laboratory JMF for each mixture in effect until a new formula is approved in writing by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Should a change in sources of any materials be made, perform a new laboratory jmf design and a new JMF approved before the new material is used. The Contractor will be allowed to adjust the Laboratory JMF within the limits specified below to optimize mix volumetric properties with the approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative. Adjustments to the Laboratory JMF shall be applied to the field (plant) established JMF and limited to



those values as shown. Adjustments shall be targeted to produce or nearly produce 4 percent voids total mix (VTM).

TABLE 6. Field (Plant) Established JMF TolerancesSieves Adjustments (plus or minus), percent

1/2 inch 3 No. 4 3 No. 8 3 No. 200 1 Binder Content 0.40

If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, develop a new mix design. Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be outside the limits shown in Table 4; while not desirable, this is acceptable, except for the No. 200 sieve, which shall remain within the aggregate grading of Table 4.

2.4 RECYCLED HOT MIX ASPHALT

Recycled HMA shall consist of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP), coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt cement to produce a consistent gradation and asphalt content and properties. When RAP is fed into the plant, the maximum RAP chunk size shall not exceed 2 inches. Design the recycled HMA mix using procedures contained in AI MS-2 and AI MS-22. The job mix shall meet the requirements of paragraph MIX DESIGN. The amount of RAP shall not exceed 30 percent.

2.4.1 RAP Aggregates and Asphalt Cement

The blend of aggregates used in the recycled mix shall meet the requirements of paragraph AGGREGATES. Establish the percentage of asphalt in the RAP for the mixture design according to ASTM D2172/D2172M or ASTM D6307 using the appropriate dust correction procedure.

2.4.2 RAP Mix

The blend of new asphalt cement and the RAP asphalt binder shall meet the dynamic shear rheometer at high temperature and bending beam at low temperature requirements in paragraph ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER. The virgin asphalt cement shall not be more than two standard asphalt material grades different than that specified in paragraph ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL

Heat the asphalt cement material avoiding local overheating and providing a continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform temperature. The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no more than 325 degrees F when added to the aggregates. Performance-Graded (PG) asphalts shall be within the temperature range of 285-335 degrees F when added to the aggregate.

3.2 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE

Heat and dry the aggregate for the mixture prior to mixing. No damage shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler shall



not exceed 350 degrees F when the asphalt cement is added. The temperature shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of satisfactory workability.

3.3 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE

The aggregates and the asphalt cement shall be weighed or metered and introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. Mix the combined materials until the aggregate obtains a uniform coating of asphalt binder and is thoroughly distributed throughout the mixture. Wet mixing time shall be the shortest time that will produce a satisfactory mixture, but no less than 25 seconds for batch plants. Establish the wet mixing time for all plants based on the procedure for determining the percentage of coated particles described in ASTM D2489/D2489M, for each individual plant and for each type of aggregate used. The wet mixing time will be set to at least achieve 95 percent of coated particles. The moisture content of all hot-mix asphalt upon discharge from the plant shall not exceed 0.5 percent by total weight of mixture as measured by ASTM D1461.

3.4 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE

Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, clean the underlying course of dust and debris. Apply a prime coatand/ortack coat in accordance with the contract specifications.

3.5 TEST SECTION

Prior to full production, place a test section for each JMF used. Construct a test section 250 - 500 feet long and two paver passes wide placed for two lanes, with a longitudinal cold joint. The test section shall be of the same thickness as the course which it represents. The underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section is to be constructed shall be the same as the remainder of the course represented by the test section. The equipment and personnel used in construction of the test section shall be the same equipment to be used on the remainder of the course represented by the test section. Place the test section as part of the project pavement, as approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

3.5.1 Sampling and Testing for Test Section

Take one random sample at the plant, triplicate specimens compacted, and tested for stability, flow, and laboratory air voids. Test a portion of the same sample for theoretical maximum density (TMD), aggregate gradation and asphalt content. Take four randomly selected cores from the finished pavement mat, and four from the longitudinal joint, and tested for density. Random sampling shall be in accordance with procedures contained in ASTM D3665. The test results shall be within the tolerances shown in Table 7 for work to continue. If all test results meet the specified requirements, the test section shall remain as part of the project pavement. If test results exceed the tolerances shown, the test section shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Government and another test section shall be constructed. The test section shall be paid for with the first lot of paving



Table 7. Test Section Requirements for Material and Mixture Properties

Property Specification Limit

Aggregate Gradation-Percent Passing (Individual Test Result)

No. 4 and larger JMF plus or minus 8

No. 8, No. 16, No. 30, and No. 50 JMF plus or minus 6

No. 100 and No. 200 JMF plus or minus 2.0

Asphalt Content, Percent JMF plus or minus 0.5 (Individual Test Result)

Laboratory Air Voids, Percent (Average of 3 specimens) JMF plus or minus 1.0

VMA, Percent (Average of 3 specimens) 14 minimum

Stability, pounds (Average of 3 specimens) 1000 minimum for 50 blows (NA for superpave)

Flow, 0.01 inches (Average of 3 specimens) 8 - 18 for 50 blows (NA for superpave)

Mat Density, Percent of TMD (Average of 4 Random Cores) 92.0 - 96.0

Joint Density, Percent of TMD (Average of 4 Random Cores) 90.5 - 92.5

3.5.2 Additional Test Sections

If the initial test section should prove to be unacceptable, make the necessary adjustments to the JMF, plant operation, placing procedures, and/or rolling procedures and place a second test section. Additional test sections, as required, shall be constructed and evaluated for conformance to the specifications. Full production shall not begin until an acceptable section has been constructed and accepted.

3.6 TESTING LABORATORY

Submit certification of compliance and Plant Scale Calibration Certification. Use a laboratory to develop the JMF that meets the requirements of ASTM D3666. The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test procedures prior to the start of hot mix operations for conformance to ASTM D3666. The laboratory shall maintain the Corps certification for the duration of the project. A statement signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer's Representative prior to the start of construction. The statement shall contain as a minimum:

a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising technician, and testing technicians.



b. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.

c. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.

d. Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) program.

3.7 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING

3.7.1 Transporting

Transport the hot-mix asphalt from the mixing plant to the site in clean, tight vehicles. Schedule deliveries so that placing and compacting of mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver. Provide adequate artificial lighting for night placements. Hauling over freshly placed material will not be permitted until the material has been compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 140 degrees F.

3.7.2 Placing

Place and compact the mix at a temperature suitable for obtaining density, surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, place the mixture to the full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, it will have the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour indicated. Regulate the speed of the paver to eliminate pulling and tearing of the asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted, placement of the mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned section or on the high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place the mixture in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet. The longitudinal joint in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in the course immediately below by at least 1 foot; however, the joint in the surface course shall be at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse joints in one course shall be offset by at least 10 feet from transverse joints in the previous course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum of 10 feet. On isolated areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.

3.8 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE

After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rolling. Compact the surface as soon as possible without causing displacement, cracking or shoving. The sequence of rolling operations and the type of rollers used shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently slow to avoid displacement of the hot mixture and be effective in compaction. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected at once. Furnish sufficient rollers to handle the output of the plant. Continue rolling until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section, and the required field density is obtained. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened but excessive water will not be permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is in any way defective shall be removed full depth, replaced with fresh hot mixture and immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. This work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Skin patching will not be allowed.



3.9 JOINTS

The formation of joints shall be performed ensuring a continuous bond between the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall have the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the requirements for smoothness and grade.

3.9.1 Transverse Joints

Do not pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to its full depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to placing material at the joint. Remove the cutback material from the project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.

3.9.2 Longitudinal Joints

Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less than 175 degrees F at the time of placing adjacent lanes), or otherwise defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 3 inches from the top of the course with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound vertical surface for the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed from the project. All contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint. The Contractor will be allowed to use an alternate method if it can be demonstrated that density, smoothness, and texture can be met.

3.10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

3.10.1 General Quality Control Requirements

Develop and submit an approved Quality Control Plan. Submit aggregate and QC test results. Do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until the quality control plan has been approved addressing all elements which affect the quality of the pavement including, but not limited to:

a. Mix Design

b. Aggregate Grading

c. Quality of Materials

d. Stockpile Management

e. Proportioning

f. Mixing and Transportation

g. Mixture Volumetrics

h. Moisture Content of Mixtures

i. Placing and Finishing

j. Joints



k. Compaction

l. Surface Smoothness

3.10.2 Testing Laboratory

The Contractor may use a commercially approved asphalt laboratory meeting the pertinent requirements in ASTM D3666. Laboratory facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper working condition. The Contracting Officer's Representative shall be permitted unrestricted access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to witness quality control activities, and to perform any check testing desired. The Contracting Officer's Representative will advise the Contractor in writing of any noted deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment, supplies, or testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are serious enough to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the materials into the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be permitted to resume until the deficiencies are corrected.

3.10.3 Quality Control Testing

Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and as set forth in the Quality Control Program. The testing program shall include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability (NA for Superpave), flow (NA for Superpave), in-place density, grade and smoothness. Develop a Quality Control Testing Plan as part of the Quality Control Program.

3.10.3.1 Asphalt Content

A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per lot (a lot is defined in paragraph MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT PAYMENT) by one of the following methods: the extraction method in accordance with ASTM D2172/D2172M, Method A or B, the ignition method in accordance with ASTM D6307, or the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D4125/D4125M. Calibrate the ignition oven or the nuclear gauge for the specific mix being used. For the extraction method, determine the weight of ash, as described in ASTM D2172/D2172M, as part of the first extraction test performed at the beginning of plant production; and as part of every tenth extraction test performed thereafter, for the duration of plant production. The last weight of ash value obtained shall be used in the calculation of the asphalt content for the mixture.

3.10.3.2 Gradation

Determine aggregate gradations a minimum of twice per lot from mechanical analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D5444. When asphalt content is determined by the ignition oven or nuclear method, aggregate gradation shall be determined from hot bin samples on batch plants, or from the cold feed on drum mix plants. For batch plants, test aggregates in accordance with ASTM C136 using actual batch weights to determine the combined aggregate gradation of the mixture.

3.10.3.3 Temperatures

Check temperatures at least four times per lot, at necessary locations, to determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in the storage



tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture at the job site.

3.10.3.4 Aggregate Moisture

Determine the moisture content of aggregate used for production a minimum of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C566.

3.10.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture

Determine the moisture content of the mixture at least once per lot in accordance with ASTM D1461 or an approved alternate procedure.

3.10.3.6 Laboratory Air Voids, Marshall Stability and Flow

Take mixture samples at least four times per lot compacted into specimens, using 50 blows per side with the hand-held Marshall hammer as described in ASTM D6926. When the Superpave gyratory compactor is used, mixes will be compacted to 50 gyrations in accordance with ASTM D6925. Hot-mix provided under the DOT Superpave option shall be compacted in accordance with the DOT requirements. After compaction, determine the laboratory air voids of each specimen. Stability and flow shall be determined for the Marshall-compacted specimens, in accordance with ASTM D6927.

3.10.3.7 In-Place Density

Conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is achieved. A nuclear gauge may be used to monitor pavement density in accordance with ASTM D2950/D2950M.

3.10.3.8 Grade and Smoothness

Conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness requirements are met in accordance with paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT PAYMENT.

3.10.3.9 Additional Testing

Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control the process, may be performed at the Contractor's option.

3.10.3.10 QC Monitoring

Submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer's Representative on a daily basis as the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer's Representative reserves the right to monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.

3.10.4 Sampling

When directed by the Contracting Officer's Representative, sample and test any material which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard procedures specified.



3.11 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE

Testing for acceptability of work will be performed by an independent laboratory hired by the Contractor. Forward test results and payment calculations daily to the Contracting Officer's Representative. Acceptance of the plant produced mix and in-place requirements will be on a lot to lot basis. A standard lot for all requirements will be equal to 8 hours of production. Where appropriate, adjustment in payment for individual lots of hot-mix asphalt will be made based on in-place density, laboratory air voids, grade and smoothness in accordance with the following paragraphs. Grade and surface smoothness determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Exceptions or adjustments to this will be made in situations where the mix within one lot is placed as part of both the intermediate and surface courses, thus grade and smoothness measurements for the entire lot cannot be made. In order to evaluate laboratory air voids and in-place (field) density, each lot will be divided into four equal sublots.

3.11.1 Sublot Sampling

One random mixture sample for determining laboratory air voids, theoretical maximum density, and for any additional testing the Contracting Officer's Representative desires, will be taken from a loaded truck delivering mixture to each sublot, or other appropriate location for each sublot. All samples will be selected randomly, using commonly recognized methods of assuring randomness conforming to ASTM D3665 and employing tables of random numbers or computer programs. Laboratory air voids will be determined from three laboratory compacted specimens of each sublot sample in accordance with ASTM D6926. The specimens will be compacted within 2 hours of the time the mixture was loaded into trucks at the asphalt plant. Samples will not be reheated prior to compaction and insulated containers will be used as necessary to maintain the temperature.

3.11.2 Additional Sampling and Testing

The Contracting Officer's Representative reserves the right to direct additional samples and tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification requirements. The cost of any additional testing will be paid for by the Government. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the lot testing, and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those for a lot.

3.11.3 Grade

The final wearing surface of pavement shall conform to the elevations and cross sections shown and shall vary not more than 0.05 foot from the plan grade established and approved at site of work. Finished surfaces at juncture with other pavements shall coincide with finished surfaces of abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet, or less, longitudinally and transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement surface. Within 5 working days, after the completion of a particular lot incorporating the final wearing surface, test the final wearing surface of the pavement for conformance with the specified plan grade. Diamond grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements. Skin patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for correcting high areas will not be permitted.



3.11.4 Surface Smoothness

Use one of the following methods to test and evaluate surface smoothness of the pavement. Perform all testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Representative. Keep detailed notes of the results of the testing and furnish a copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Where drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (crowns, drainage inlets, etc.), the surface shall be finished to meet the approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative.

3.11.4.1 Smoothness Requirements

a. Straightedge Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/4 inch or more, and all pavements shall be within the tolerances of 1/4 inch in both the longitudinal and transverse directions, when tested with an approved 12 feet straightedge.3.11.4.2 Testing Method

After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, test the surface of the pavement in each entire lot in such a manner as to reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately after grinding. Test each lot of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines. Set the transverse lines 15 feet or less apart, as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the centerline of each paving lane for lanes less than 20 feet wide and at the third points for lanes 20 feet or wider. Also test other areas having obvious deviations. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across all joints.

a. Straightedge Testing. Hold the straightedge in contact with the surface and move it ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. Determine the amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length, and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface in the area between these two high points.




SECTION 32 13 13.06

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE FACILITIES11/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete

ACI 301 (2010; ERTA 2015) Specifications for Structural Concrete

ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306.1 (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting


AWWA C215 (2010) Extruded Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines


ASTM A184/A184M (2006e1) Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A615/A615M (2014) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A966/A966M (2008) Standard Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings Using Alternating Current

ASTM C1077 (2015) Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C143/C143M (2012) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete



ASTM C150/C150M (2015) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C1602/C1602M (2012) Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

ASTM C171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

ASTM C172/C172M (2014a) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C231/C231M (2014) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C260/C260M (2010a) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C31/C31M (2012) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field


ASTM C494/C494M (2013) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C595/C595M (2014) Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements

ASTM C618 (2012a) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

ASTM C78/C78M (2010) Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)

ASTM C94/C94M (2014b) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C989 (2014) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When



used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-03 Product Data; G

Curing materials

Admixtures

Dowel

Reinforcement

Submit a complete list of materials including type, brand and applicable reference specifications.

SD-04 Samples

Field-Constructed Mockup

Concrete mix design

Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design, with applicable tests, for each strength and type of concrete for approval. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement, fly ash, slag, and admixtures; and applicable reference specifications. Provide mix proportion data using at least three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which will produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required. Submittal shall clearly indicate where each mix design will be used when more than one mix design is submitted. Obtain acknowledgement of approvals prior to concrete placement. Submit a new mix design for each material source change.

SD-06 Test Reports; G

Aggregate tests

Concrete slump tests

Air content tests

Flexural strength tests

Cementitious materials

SD-07 Certificates; G

Ready-mixed concrete plant

Batch tickets

Cementitious materials

SD-11 Closeout Submittals; G




ASTM C94/C94M.


1.4.1 Ready-mixed Concrete Plant Certification

Unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative, ready mixed concrete shall be produced and provided by a National Ready-Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA) certified plant. If a volumetric mobile mixer is used to produce the concrete, rather than ready-mixed concrete, the mixer(s) must conform to the standards of the Volumetric Mixer Manufacturers Bureau (VMMB). Verification shall be made by a current VMMB conformance plate affixed to the volumetric mixer equipment.

1.4.2 Contractor Qualifications

Unless waived by the Contracting Officer's Representative, the Contractor shall meet one of the following criteria:

a. Contractor shall have at least one National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NMRCA) certified concrete craftsman on site, overseeing each placement crew during all concrete placement.

b. Contractor shall have no less than three NRMCA certified concrete

installers, who shall be on site working as members of each placement crew during all concrete placement.

1.4.3 Required Information

Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and that mix will be suitable for the job conditions. The laboratory test reports shall include mill test and all other test for cementitious materials, aggregates, and admixtures. Provide maximum nominal aggregate size, combined aggregate gradation analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage retained verses sieve size. Test reports shall be submitted along with the concrete mix design. Sampling and testing of materials, concrete mix design, sampling and testing in the field shall be performed by a commercial testing laboratory which conforms to ASTM C1077. The laboratory shall be approved in writing by the Government.

1.4.4 Batch Tickets

ASTM C94/C94M. Submit mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready-mixed concrete.

1.4.5 Field-Constructed Mockup

Install a minimum 400 square feet to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, thickness, and standard of workmanship. Test panels shall be placed using the mixture proportions, materials, and equipment as proposed for the project. Test mock up panels in accordance with requirements in FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.



When a test panel is does not meet one or more of the requirements, the test panel shall be rejected, removed, and replaced at the Contractor's expense. If the test panels are acceptable, they may be incorporated into the project with the approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Cementitious Materials

Cementitious materials in concrete mix shall be 20 to 50 percent non-portland cement pozzolanic materials by weight. Provide test data demonstrating compatibility and performance of concrete satisfactory to Contracting Officer's Representative.

2.1.1.1 Cement

ASTM C150/C150M, Type II ASTM C595/C595M .

2.1.1.2 Fly Ash and Pozzolan

ASTM C618, Type C, F, or N. Fly ash certificates shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C618.

2.1.1.2 Slag

ASTM C989, Slag Cement (formerly Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag) Grade 100 or 120. Certificates shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C989.

2.1.2 Water

Water shall conform to ASTM C1602/C1602M. Hot water shall not be used unless approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

2.1.2 Aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone, or a combination thereof. Aggregates, as delivered to the mixers, shall consist of clean, hard, uncoated particles. Coarse aggregate shall be washed. Washing shall be sufficient to remove dust and other coatings. Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of the two, and shall be composed of clean, hard, durable particles. Both coarse and fine aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M.

2.1.2.1 Alkali Reactivity Test

Aggregates to be used in all concrete in projects over 50,000 SF in size shall be evaluated and tested by the Contractor for alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C1260. The types of aggregates shall be evaluated in a combination which matches the contractors' proposed mix design (including Class F fly ash or GGBF slag), utilizing ASTM C1567. Test results of the combination shall have a measured expansion of less than 0.08 percent at 28 days. Should the test data indicate an expansion of greater than 0.08%, the aggregate(s) shall be rejected and the contractor shall submit new aggregate sources for retesting or may submit additional test results incorporating Lithium Nitrate for consideration.



ASTM C1260 shall be modified as follows to include one of the following options:

a. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and Class F fly ash in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement and fly ash.

b. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement and GGBF.

c. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and Class F fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement, fly ash and GGBF.

2.1.2.2 Fine Aggregates

ASTM C33/C33M.

2.1.2.3 Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C33/C33M.

2.1.3 Admixtures

ASTM C494/C494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C, accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E, water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. Where not shown or specified, the use of admixtures is subject to written approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative.

ASTM C260/C260M: Air-entraining.

2.1.4 Reinforcement

2.1.4.1 Dowel Bars

Bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 for plain billet-steel bars of the size and length indicated. Remove all burrs and projections from the bars.

2.1.4.2 Coated Dowel Bars

Bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 for plain billet-steel bars of the size and length indicated. Remove all burrs or projections from the dowel bars. Coating system shall conform to AWWA C215, Type 2. Coat the bars with a double coat system or an epoxy coating system for resistance to penetration of oil and salt solutions. The systems shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation for coatings which are not bondable to concrete. Bond the coating to the dowel bar to resist laps or folds during movement of the joint. Coating thickness shall be 7 mils minimum and 20 mils maximum.

2.1.4.3 Reinforcement

Deformed steel bar mats shall conform to ASTM A184/A184M. Bar



reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A615/A615Mor ASTM A966/A966MGrade 60.

2.1.5 Curing Materials

2.1.5.1 White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet

ASTM C171, 0.004 inch thick white opaque polyethylene bonded to 10 oz/linear yard (40 inch) wide burlap.

2.1.5.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound

ASTM C309, white pigmented, Type 2, Class B, free of paraffin or petroleum.

2.1.6 Joint Fillers and Sealants

Provide as specified in Section 32 01 19 SILICONE MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS

2.2 CONCRETE PAVEMENT

2.2.1 Joint Layout Drawings

If jointing requirements on the project drawings are not compatible with the contractor's placement sequence, the contractor shall submit a joint layout plan shop drawing to the Contracting Officer's Representative for approval. No work shall be allowed to start until the joint layout plan is approved. The joint layout plan shall indicate and describe in the detail the proposed jointing plan for contraction joints, expansion joints, and construction joints, in accordance with the following:

a. Indicate locations of contraction joints, construction joints, and expansion joints. Spacing between contraction joints shall not exceed 15 feet unless noted otherwise or approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

b. The larger dimension of a panel shall not be greater than 125% of the smaller dimension.

c. The minimum angle between two intersecting joints shall be 80 degrees, unless noted otherwise or approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

d. Joints shall intersect pavement-free edges at a 90 degree angle the pavement edge and shall extend straight for a minimum of 1.5 feet from the pavement edge, where possible.

e. Align joints of adjacent panels.

f. Align joints in attached curbs with joints in pavement when possible.

g. Ensure joint depth, widths, and dimensions are specified.

h. Minimum contraction joint depth shall be 1/4 of the pavement thickness. The minimum joint width shall be 1/8 inch.

i. Use expansion joints only where pavement abuts buildings, foundations, manholes, and other fixed objects.



2.3 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED MIX DESIGN

Contractor-furnished mix design concrete shall be designed in accordance with ACI 211.1 except as modified herein, and the mix design shall be as specified herein under paragraph entitled "Submittals." The concrete shall have a minimum flexural strength of 650 pounds per square inch at 28 days. The concrete may be air entrained. If air entrainment is used the air content shall be 5.0 plus or minus 1.5 percent. Maximum size aggregate for slip forming shall be 1.5 inches. The minimum cementitious factor is 564 lbs per cubic yard and slump shall be 1 to 3 inches (or less when slip form is used).

If the cementitious material is not sufficient to produce concrete of the flexural strength required it shall be increased as necessary, without additional compensation under the contract. The cementitious factor shall be calculated using cement, Class F fly ash, and or GGBF slag. The mix shall use a cement replacement (by weight) of 25 percent - 35 percent Class F fly ash, or 40 percent - 50 percent GGBF slag, or a combination of the two. In the combination, each 5 percent of Class F fly ash shall be replaced by 8 percent GGBF slag.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

3.1.1 Construction

Construct forms to be removable without damaging the concrete.

3.1.2 Coating

Before placing the concrete, coat the contact surfaces of forms except existing pavement sections where bonding is required, with a non-staining mineral oil, non-staining form coating compound, or two coats of nitro-cellulose lacquer.

3.1.3 Grade and Alignment

Check and correct grade elevations and alignment of the forms immediately before placing the concrete.

3.2 REINFORCEMENT

3.2.1 Dowel Bars

Install bars accurately aligned, vertically and horizontally, at indicated locations and to the dimensions and tolerances indicated. Before installation thoroughly grease the sliding portion of each dowel. Dowels must remain in position during concrete placement and curing.

3.2.2 Coated Dowel Bars

Install bars, accurately aligned vertically and horizontally, at indicated locations and to the dimensions and tolerances indicated. Reject coatings which are perforated, cracked or otherwise damaged. While handling avoid scuffing or gouging of the coatings.



3.2.3 Setting Slab Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs prior to concrete placement. At expansion, contraction and construction joints, place the reinforcement as indicated. Reinforcement, when placed in concrete, shall be free of mud, oil, scale or other foreign materials. Place reinforcement accurately and wire securely. The laps at splices shall be 12 inches minimum and the distances from ends and sides of slabs and joints shall be as indicated.

3.3 MEASURING, MIXING, CONVEYING, AND PLACING CONCRETE

3.3.1 Measuring

ASTM C94/C94M.

3.3.2 Mixing

ASTM C94/C94M, except as modified herein. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after cement has been added to aggregates. When the air temperature is greater than 85 degrees F, place concrete within 60 minutes. With the approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative, a hydration stabilizer admixture meeting the requirements of ASTM C494/C494M Type D, may be used to extend the placement time to 90 minutes. Additional water may be added to bring slump within required limits as specified in Section 11.7 of ASTM C94/C94M, provided that the specified water-cement ratio is not exceeded.

3.3.3 Conveying

ASTM C94/C94M.

3.3.4 Placing

Follow guidance of ACI 301, except as modified herein. Do not exceed a free vertical drop of 5 feet from the point of discharge. Deposit concrete either directly from the transporting equipment or by conveyor on to the pre-wetted subgrade or subbase, unless otherwise specified. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or subbase. Deposit the concrete between the forms to an approximately uniform height. Place concrete continuously at a uniform rate, with minimum amount of segregation, without damage to the grade and without unscheduled stops except for equipment failure or other emergencies. If this occurs within 10 feet of a previously placed expansion joint, remove concrete back to joint, repair any damage to grade, install a construction joint and continue placing concrete only after cause of the stop has been corrected.

3.3.5 Vibration

Immediately after spreading concrete, consolidate concrete with internal type vibrating equipment along the boundaries of all slabs regardless of slab thickness, and interior of all concrete slabs 6 inches or more in thickness. Limit duration of vibration to that necessary to produce consolidation of concrete. Excessive vibration will not be permitted. Vibrators shall not be operated in concrete at one location for more than 15 seconds. At the option of the Contractor, vibrating equipment of a type approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative may be used to consolidate concrete in unreinforced pavement slabs less than 6 inches thick.



3.3.5.1 Vibrating Equipment

Operate equipment, except hand-manipulated equipment, ahead of the finishing machine. Select the number of vibrating units and power of each unit to properly consolidate the concrete. Mount units on a frame that is capable of vertical movement and, when necessary, radial movement, so vibrators may be operated at any desired depth within the slab or be completely withdrawn from the concrete. Clear distance between frame-mounted vibrating units that have spuds that extend into the slab at intervals across the paving lane shall not exceed 30 inches. Distance between end of vibrating tube and side form shall not exceed 2 inches. For pavements less than 10 inches thick, operate vibrators at mid-depth parallel with or at a slight angle to the subbase. For thicker pavements, angle vibrators toward the vertical, with vibrator tip preferably about 2 inches from subbase, and top of vibrator a few inches below pavement surface. Vibrators may be pneumatic, gas driven, or electric, and shall be operated at frequencies within the concrete of not less than 8,000 vibrations per minute. Amplitude of vibration shall be such that noticeable vibrations occur at 1.5 foot radius when the vibrator is inserted in the concrete to the depth specified.

3.3.6 Cold Weather

Except with authorization, do not place concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. When authorized, when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing within 24 hours after placing, heat concrete materials so that temperature of concrete when deposited is between 65 and 80 degrees F. Methods of heating materials are subject to approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative. Do not heat mixing water above 165 degrees F. Remove lumps of frozen material and ice from aggregates before placing aggregates in mixer. Follow practices found in ACI 306.1.

3.3.7 Hot Weather

Maintain required concrete temperature in accordance with Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305R to prevent evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. After placement, use fog spray, apply monomolecular film, or use other suitable means to reduce the evaporation rate. Start curing when surface of fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Cool underlying material by sprinkling lightly with water before placing concrete. Follow practices found in ACI 305R.

3.4 PAVING

Pavement shall be constructed with paving and finishing equipment utilizing fixed formsorslipforms.

3.4.1 Consolidation

The paver vibrators shall be inserted into the concrete not closer to the underlying material than 2 inches. The vibrators or any tamping units in front of the paver shall be automatically controlled so that they shall be stopped immediately as forward motion ceases. Excessive vibration shall not be permitted. Concrete in small, odd-shaped slabs or in locations



inaccessible to the paver mounted vibration equipment shall be vibrated with a hand-operated immersion vibrator. Vibrators shall not be used to transport or spread the concrete.

3.4.2 Operation

When the paver is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed pavement (fill-in lanes), provisions shall be made to prevent damage to the previously constructed pavement, including keeping the existing pavement surface free of any debris, and placing rubber mats beneath the paver tracks. Transversely oscillating screeds and extrusion plates shall overlap the existing pavement the minimum possible, but in no case more than 8 inches.

3.4.3 Required Results

The paver-finisher shall be operated to produce a thoroughly consolidated slab throughout, true to line and grade within specified tolerances. The paver-finishing operation shall produce a surface finish free of irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities. It shall produce only a very minimum of paste at the surface. Multiple passes of the paver-finisher shall not be permitted. The equipment and its operation shall produce a finished surface requiring no hand finishing, other than the use of cutting straightedges, except in very infrequent instances. No water, other than true fog sprays (mist), shall be applied to the concrete surface during paving and finishing.

3.4.4 Fixed Form Paving

Forms shall be steel, except that wood forms may be used for curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, and for fillets. Forms may be built up with metal or wood, added only to the base, to provide an increase in depth of not more than 25 percent. The base width of the form shall be not less than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except that forms 8 inches or less in vertical height shall have a base width not less than the vertical height of the form. Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be adequate in strength and rigidly braced. Forms shall be set on firm material cut true to grade so that each form section when placed will be firmly in contact with the underlying layer for its entire base. Forms shall not be set on blocks or on built-up spots of underlying material. Forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete.

3.4.5 Slipform Paving

The slipform paver shall shape the concrete to the specified and indicated cross section in one pass, and shall finish the surface and edges so that only a very minimum amount of hand finishing is required. Dowels shall not be installed by dowel inserters attached to the paver or by any other means of inserting the dowels into the plastic concrete. If a keyway is required, a 26 gauge thick metal keyway liner shall be installed as the keyway is extruded. The keyway liner shall be protected and shall remain in place and become part of the joint.

3.4.6 Placing Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs securely fastened to



the subgrade prior to concrete placement. 3.4.7 3.4.7 Placing Dowels

Dowels shall be installed with alignment not greater than 1/8 inch per ft. Except as otherwise specified below, location of dowels shall be within a horizontal tolerance of plus or minus 5/8 inch and a vertical tolerance of plus or minus 3/16 inch. The portion of each dowel intended to move within the concrete or expansion cap shall be painted with one coat of rust inhibiting primer paint, and then oiled just prior to placement. Dowels in joints shall be omitted when the center of the dowel is located within a horizontal distance from an intersecting joint equal to or less than one-fourth of the slab thickness.

3.4.7.1 Contraction Joints

Dowels in longitudinal and transverse contraction joints within the paving lane shall be held securely in place by means of rigid metal basket assemblies. The dowels shall be welded to the assembly or held firmly by mechanical locking arrangements that will prevent them from becoming distorted during paving operations. The basket assemblies shall be held securely in the proper location by means of suitable anchors.

3.4.7.2 Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving

Installation of dowels shall be by the bonded-in-place method, supported by means of devices fastened to the forms. Installation by removing and replacing in preformed holes will not be permitted.

3.4.7.3 Dowels Installed in Hardened Concrete

Installation shall be by bonding the dowels into holes drilled into the hardened concrete. Holes approximately 1/8 inch greater in diameter than the dowels shall be drilled into the hardened concrete. Dowels shall be bonded in the drilled holes using epoxy resin injected at the back of the hole before installing the dowel and extruded to the collar during insertion of the dowel so as to completely fill the void around the dowel. Application by buttering the dowel shall not be permitted. The dowels shall be held in alignment at the collar of the hole, after insertion and before the grout hardens, by means of a suitable metal or plastic collar fitted around the dowel. The vertical alignment of the dowels shall be checked by placing the straightedge on the surface of the pavement over the top of the dowel and measuring the vertical distance between the straightedge and the beginning and ending point of the exposed part of the dowel. Where tie bars are required in longitudinal construction joints of slipform pavement, bent tie bars shall be installed at the paver, in front of the transverse screed or extrusion plate. If tie bars are required, a standard keyway shall be constructed, and the bent tie bars shall be inserted into the plastic concrete through a 26 gauge thick metal keyway liner. Tie bars shall not be installed in preformed holes. The keyway liner shall be protected and shall remain in place and become part of the joint. Before placement of the adjoining paving lane, the tie bars shall be straightened, without spalling the concrete around the bar.

3.4.7.4 Expansion Joints

Dowels in expansion joints shall be installed by the bonded-in-place method or by bonding into holes drilled in hardened concrete, using procedures specified above.



3.5 FINISHING CONCRETE

Start finishing operations immediately after placement of concrete. Use finishing machine, except hand finishing may be used in emergencies and for concrete slabs in inaccessible locations or of such shapes or sizes that machine finishing is impracticable. Finish pavement surface on both sides of a joint to the same grade. Finish formed joints from a securely supported transverse bridge. Provide hand finishing equipment for use at all times. Transverse and longitudinal surface tolerances shall be 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.5.1 Side Form Finishing

Strike off and screed concrete to the required slope and cross-section by a power-driven transverse finishing machine. Transverse rotating tube or pipe shall not be permitted unless approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Elevation of concrete shall be such that, when consolidated and finished, pavement surface will be adequately consolidated and at the required grade. Equip finishing machine with two screeds which are readily and accurately adjustable for changes in pavement slope and compensation for wear and other causes. Make as many passes over each area of pavement and at such intervals as necessary to give proper compaction, retention of coarse aggregate near the finished surface, and a surface of uniform texture, true to grade and slope. Do not permit excessive operation over an area, which will result in an excess of mortar and water being brought to the surface.

3.5.1.1 Equipment Operation

Maintain the travel of machine on the forms without lifting, wobbling, or other variation of the machine which tend to affect the precision of concrete finish. Keep the tops of the forms clean by a device attached to the machine. During the first pass of the finishing machine, maintain a uniform ridge of concrete ahead of the front screed for its entire length.

3.5.1.2 Joint Finish

Before concrete is hardened, correct edge slump of pavement, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of 1/4". Finish concrete surface on each side of construction joints to the same plane, and correct deviations before newly placed concrete has hardened.

3.5.1.3 Hand Finishing

Strike-off and screed surface of concrete to elevations slightly above finish grade so that when concrete is consolidated and finished pavement surface is at the indicated elevation. Vibrate entire surface until required compaction and reduction of surface voids is secured with a strike-off template.

3.5.1.4 Longitudinal Floating

After initial finishing, further smooth and consolidate concrete by means of hand-operated longitudinal floats. Use floats that are not less than 12 feet long and 6 inches wide and stiffened to prevent flexing and warping.

3.5.2 Texturing

Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens,



the surface of the pavement shall be given a texture as described herein. Following initial texturing on the first day of placement, the Placing Foreman, Contracting Officer's Representative and a representative of the Using Agency shall inspect the texturing for compliance with design requirements. After curing is complete, all textured surfaces shall be thoroughly power broomed to remove all debris. The concrete in areas of recesses for tie-down anchors, lighting fixtures, and other outlets in the pavement shall be finished to provide a surface of the same texture as the surrounding area.

3.5.2.1 Burlap Drag Finish

Before concrete becomes non-plastic, finish the surface of the slab by dragging on the surface a strip of clean, wet burlap measuring from 3 to 10 feet long and 2 feet wider than the width of the pavement. Select dimension of burlap drag so that at least 3 feet of the material is in contact with the pavement. Drag the surface so as to produce a finished surface with a fine granular or sandy texture without leaving disfiguring marks.

3.5.3 Edging

At the time the concrete has attained a degree of hardness suitable for edging, carefully finish slab edges, including edges at formed joints, with an edge having a maximum radius of one-eighth inch. Clean by removing loose fragments and soupy mortar from corners or edges of slabs which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing. Refill voids solidly with a mixture of suitable proportions and consistency and refinish. Remove unnecessary tool marks and edges. Remaining edges shall be smooth and true to line.

3.5.4 Repair of Surface Defects

Follow guidance of ACI 301.

3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION

Protect concrete adequately from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks and oil stains, and do not allow it to dry out from the time it is placed until the expiration of the minimum curing periods specified herein. Use White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet or liquid membrane-forming compound, except as specified otherwise herein. Do not use membrane-forming compound on surfaces where its appearance would be objectionable, on surfaces to be painted, where coverings are to be bonded to concrete, or on concrete to which other concrete is to be bonded. Maintain temperature of air next to concrete above 40 degrees F for the full curing periods.

3.6.1 White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet

Wet entire exposed surface thoroughly with a fine spray of water, saturate burlap but do not have excessive water dripping off the burlap and then cover concrete with White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet, burlap side down. Lay sheets directly on concrete surface and overlap 12 inches. Make sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than concrete surface to be cured, and weight down on the edges and over the transverse laps to form closed joints. Repair or replace sheets when damaged during curing. Check daily to assure burlap has not lost all moisture. If moisture evaporates, resaturate burlap and re-place on pavement (re-saturation and re-placing shall take no



longer than 10 minutes per sheet). Leave sheeting on concrete surface to be cured for at least 7 days.

3.6.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound Curing

Apply compound immediately after surface loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance and before joints are sawed. Agitate curing compound thoroughly by mechanical means during use and apply uniformly in a two-coat continuous operation by suitable power-spraying equipment. Total coverage for the two coats shall be at least one gallon of undiluted compound per 200 square feet. Compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Apply an additional coat of compound immediately to areas where film is defective. Respray concrete surfaces that are subject to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied in the same manner.

3.6.2.1 Protection of Treated Surfaces

Keep concrete surfaces to which liquid membrane-forming compounds have been applied free from vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion for not less than 72 hours. Foot traffic is allowed after 24 hours for inspection purposes. Maintain continuity of coating for entire curing period and repair damage to coating immediately.


3.7.1 Sampling

The Contractor's approved laboratory shall collect samples of fresh concrete in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M during each working day as required to perform tests specified herein. Make test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M.

3.7.2 Consistency Tests

The Contractor's approved laboratory shall perform concrete slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M. Take samples for slump determination from concrete during placement. Perform tests at the beginning of a concrete placement operation and and for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete to ensure that specification requirements are met. In addition, perform tests each time test beams and cylinders are made.

3.7.3 Flexural Strength Tests

The Contractor's approved laboratory shall test for flexural strength in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M. Make four test specimens for each set of tests. Test two specimens at 7 days, and the other two at 28 days. Concrete strength will be considered satisfactory when the minimum of the 28-day test results equals or exceeds the specified 28-day flexural strength, and no individual strength test is less than 550 pounds per square inch. If the ratio of the 7-day strength test to the specified 28-day strength is less than 65 percent, make necessary adjustments for conformance. Frequency of flexural tests on concrete beams shall be not less than four test beams for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, placed. Concrete which is determined to be defective, based on the strength acceptance criteria therein, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable concrete.



3.7.4 Air Content Tests

Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests. Determine percentage of air in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M on samples taken during placement of concrete in forms.

3.7.5 Surface Testing

Surface testing for surface smoothness , edge slump and plan grade shall be performed as indicated below by the Testing Laboratory. The measurements shall be properly referenced in accordance with paving lane identification and stationing, and a report given to the Government within 24 hours after measurement is made. A final report of surface testing, signed by a Registered Engineer, containing all surface measurements and a description of all actions taken to correct deficiencies, shall be provided to the Government upon conclusion of surface testing.

3.7.5.1 Surface Smoothness Requirements

The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/8 inch or more, and all pavements shall be within the tolerances specified when checked with a 12 foot straightedge: 1/5 inch longitudinal and 1/4 inch transverse directions for roads and streets and 1/4 inch for both directions for other concrete surfaces, such as parking areas.

3.7.5.2 Surface Smoothness Testing Method

The surface of the pavement shall be tested with the straightedge to identify all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. The entire area of the pavement shall be tested in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines approximately 15 feet apart. The straightedge shall be held in contact with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. The amount of surface irregularity shall be determined by placing the straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface, in the area between these two high points.

3.7.6 Plan Grade Testing and Conformance

The surfaces shall vary not more than 0.06 foot above or below the plan grade line or elevation indicated. Each pavement category shall be checked by the Contractor for conformance with plan grade requirements by running lines of levels at intervals to determine the elevation at each joint intersection.

3.7.7 Test for Pavement Thickness

Measure during concrete placement to determine in-place thickness of concrete pavement.

3.7.8 Reinforcement

Inspect reinforcement prior to installation to assure it is free of loose flaky rust, loose scale, oil, mud, or other objectionable material.



3.7.9 Dowels

Inspect dowel placement prior to placing concrete to assure that dowels are of the size indicated, and are spaced, aligned and painted and oiled as specified. Dowels shall not deviate from vertical or horizontal alignment after concrete has been placed by more than 1/8 inch per foot.

3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT

In accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Protect excess material from contamination and return to manufacturer, or reuse on-site for walkways, patching, ditch beds, speed bumps, or curbs.




SECTION 32 16 13

CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 182 (2005; R 2009) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats


ASTM A185/A185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM A615/A615M (2014) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C143/C143M (2012) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

ASTM C172/C172M (2014a) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C173/C173M (2014) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

ASTM C231/C231M (2014) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C31/C31M (2012) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field


ASTM D1751 (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for



Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM D1752 (2004a; R 2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion

ASTM D5893/D5893M (2010) Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements



Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product, meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer's Representative shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications.

1.2.2 Slip Form Equipment

Slip form paver or curb forming machine, will be approved based on trial use on the job and shall be self-propelled, automatically controlled, crawler mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the plastic concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Concrete

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control


1.4.1 Placing During Cold Weather

Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40 degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F,



placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Mixing water shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.

1.4.2 Placing During Warm Weather

The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed95 degrees F at any time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE

Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE except as otherwise specified. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches. Submit copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction.

2.1.1 Air Content

Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent, based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.

2.1.2 Slump

The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M.

2.1.3 Reinforcement Steel

Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M. Wire mesh reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185/A185M.

2.2 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

2.2.1 Impervious Sheet Materials

Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171, type optional, except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.

2.2.2 Burlap

Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182.

2.2.3 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309,



Type 2.

2.3 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS

Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used, except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable.

2.4 JOINT FILLER STRIPS

2.4.1 Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter

Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed fiberboard.

2.4.2 Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded

Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 JOINT SEALANTS

Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C920 or ASTM D5893/D5893M.

2.6 FORM WORK

Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet. Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.

2.6.1 Sidewalk Forms

Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk.

2.6.2 Curb and Gutter Forms

Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of 10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the



central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing this surface, provided the results are approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in conformance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.1.1 Sidewalk Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.

3.1.2 Curb and Gutter Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the adjacent pavement.

3.1.3 Maintenance of Subgrade

The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.

3.2 FORM SETTING

Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is mandatory.

3.2.1 Sidewalks

Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge. Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicated with the low side adjacent to the roadway. Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed.



3.2.2 Curbs and Gutters

The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction.

3.3 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.3.1 Formed Sidewalks

Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished, the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator, and the surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off.

3.3.2 Concrete Finishing

After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood or magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.

3.3.3 Edge and Joint Finishing

All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finished.

3.3.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch.

3.4 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.4.1 Formed Curb and Gutter

Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift. Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators. Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule".

3.4.2 Curb and Gutter Finishing

Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand placement.



3.4.3 Concrete Finishing

Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes. The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float.

3.4.4 Joint Finishing

Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.

3.4.5 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch.

3.5 SIDEWALK JOINTS

Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers, whichever is less, and shall be continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk longitudinally.

3.5.1 Sidewalk Contraction Joints

The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing operations.

3.5.2 Sidewalk Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D1752 or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and



finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. Joints shall be sealed as specified in Section 32 01 19 SILICONE SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.

3.5.3 Reinforcement Steel Placement

Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.

3.6 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS

Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curb and gutter.

3.6.1 Contraction Joints

Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor greater than 15 feet in length.

a. Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed by means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to the cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing.

b. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in the top portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous cut across the curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of cut shall be at least one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 1/8 inch in width.

3.6.2 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30 feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit. Joints shall be sealed as specified in Section 32 01 19 SILICONE SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION


Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect



unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period.

3.7.1.1 Mat Method

The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.2 Impervious Sheeting Method

The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.3 Membrane Curing Method

A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface. Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct



application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane.

3.7.2 Backfilling

After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.

3.7.3 Protection

Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed.

3.7.4 Protective Coating

Protective coating, of linseed oil mixture, shall be applied to the exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period, if concrete will be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement. Concrete to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured.

3.7.4.1 Application

Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two coats of protective coating. Concrete shall be surface dry and clean before each application. Coverage shall be by spray application at not more than 50 square yards/gallon for first application and not more than 70 square yards/gallon for second application, except that the number of applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until dry.

3.7.4.2 Precautions

Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame, sparks, and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators. Material shall not be applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50 degrees F.


Submit copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test.


Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the



requirements of these specifications are met.

3.8.2 Concrete Testing

3.8.2.1 Strength Testing

Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Cylinders for acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C31/C31M by an approved testing laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.

3.8.2.2 Air Content

Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M. ASTM C231/C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars made with relatively dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified.

3.8.2.3 Slump Test

Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete placed during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete.

3.8.3 Thickness Evaluation

The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, the subgrade shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the thickness will be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab.

3.8.4 Surface Evaluation

The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.



3.9 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS

3.9.1 Thickness Deficiency

When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.

3.9.2 High Areas

In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch. Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced.

3.9.3 Appearance

Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and replaced.




SECTION 32 17 24.00 10

PAVEMENT MARKINGS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 247 (2008) Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints

U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

FS TT-B-1325 (Rev C) Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective (Metric)

FS TT-P-1952 (Rev D) Paint, Traffic and Airfield Markings, Waterborne


All machines, tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Equipment operating on roads and runways shall display low speed traffic markings and traffic warning lights.

1.2.1 Paint Application Equipment

1.2.1.1 Self-Propelled or Mobile-Drawn Pneumatic Spraying Machines

The equipment to apply paint to pavements shall be a self-propelled or mobile-drawn pneumatic spraying machine with suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the specified results. The machine shall have a speed during application not less than 5 mph, and shall be capable of applying the stripe widths indicated, at the paint coverage rate specified in paragraph APPLICATION, and of even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges. The equipment used to apply the paint binder to airfield pavements shall be a self-propelled or mobile-drawn pneumatic spraying machine with an arrangement of atomizing nozzles capable of applying a line width at any one time in multiples of 6 inches, from 6 inches to 36 inches. The paint applicator shall have paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity and suitable gauges to apply paint in accordance with requirements specified. Tanks shall be equipped with suitable air-driven mechanical agitators. The spray mechanism shall be equipped with quick-action valves conveniently located, and shall include necessary pressure regulators and gauges in full view and reach of the operator. Paint strainers shall be installed in paint supply lines to ensure freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the spray guns. The paint applicator shall be readily adaptable for attachment of an air-actuated dispenser for the reflective media approved

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 1


for use. Pneumatic spray guns shall be provided for hand application of paint in areas where the mobile paint applicator cannot be used.

1.2.1.2 Hand-Operated, Push-Type Machines

All machines, tools, and equipment used in performance of the work shall be approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Hand-operated push-type machines of a type commonly used for application of paint to pavement surfaces will be acceptable for marking small streets and parking areas. Applicator machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks and spraying nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage specified. Sandblasting equipment shall be provided as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. Hand-operated spray guns shall be provided for use in areas where push-type machines cannot be used.

1.2.2 Reflective Media Dispenser

The dispenser for applying the reflective media shall be attached to the paint dispenser and shall operate automatically and simultaneously with the applicator through the same control mechanism. The dispenser shall be capable of adjustment and designed to provide uniform flow of reflective media over the full length and width of the stripe at the rate of coverage specified in paragraph APPLICATION, at all operating speeds of the applicator to which it is attached.

1.2.3 Surface Preparation Equipment

1.2.3.1 Waterblast Equipment

The water pressure shall be specified at 2600 psi at 140 degrees F in order to adequately clean the surfaces to be marked.

1.2.4 Marking Removal Equipment

Equipment shall be mounted on rubber tires and shall be capable of removing markings from the pavement without damaging the pavement surface or joint sealant. Waterblasting equipment shall be capable of producing an adjustable, pressurized stream of water. Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses, and nozzles. The compressor shall be equipped with traps to maintain the air free of oil and water.

1.2.4.1 Chemical Equipment

Chemical equipment shall be capable of application and removal of chemicals from the pavement surface, and shall leave only non-toxic biodegradeable residue.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Equipment; G, RO Lists of proposed equipment, including descriptive data, and

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 2


notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this section. List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range, tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the equipment operation.

Composition Requirements

Manufacturer's current printed product description and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each type paint/color proposed for use.

Qualifications

Documentation on personnel qualifications, as specified.

SD-06 Test Reports

Sampling and Testing

Certified copies of the test reports, prior to the use of the materials at the jobsite. Testing shall be performed in an approved independent laboratory.

SD-07 Certificates

Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

Certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint meets the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located.



Submit documentation certifying that pertinent personnel are qualified for equipment operation and handling of chemicals.

1.4.2 Traffic Controls

Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers. Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating slow-moving painting equipment in operation.

1.4.3 Maintenance of Traffic

1.4.3.1 Roads, Streets, and Parking Areas

When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, the necessary warning signs, flagpersons, and related equipment for the safe passage of vehicles shall be provided.

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 3



All materials shall be delivered and stored in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's name, and directions, all of which shall be plainly legible at time of use.


Pavement surface shall be free of snow, ice, or slush. Surface temperature shall be at least 40 degrees F and rising at the beginning of operations, except those involving shot or sand blasting. Operation shall cease during thunderstorms. Operation shall cease during rainfall, except for waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals. Waterblasting shall cease where surface water accumulation alters the effectiveness of material removal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT

The paint shall be homogeneous, easily stirred to smooth consistency, and shall show no hard settlement or other objectionable characteristics during a storage period of 6 months. Paints for roads, parking areas, and streets shall conform to FS TT-P-1952, color as indicated. Pavement marking paints shall comply with applicable state and local laws enacted to ensure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution Control District.

2.2 REFLECTIVE MEDIA

Reflective media for airfields shall conform to FS TT-B-1325, Type I, Gradation A. Reflective media for roads and streets shall conform to FS TT-B-1325, Type I, Gradation A or AASHTO M 247, Type I.

2.3 SAMPLING AND TESTING

Materials proposed for use shall be stored on the project site in sealed and labeled containers, or segregated at source of supply, sufficiently in advance of needs to allow 60 days for testing. Upon notification by the Contractor that the material is at the site or source of supply, a sample shall be taken by random selection from sealed containers in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Representative. Samples shall be clearly identified by designated name, specification number, batch number, manufacturer's formulation number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved. Testing shall be performed in an approved independent laboratory. If materials are approved based on reports furnished by the Contractor, samples will be retained by the Government for possible future testing should the material appear defective during or after application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

Thoroughly clean surfaces to be marked before application of the pavement marking material. Dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be removed by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water or a combination of these methods as required. Rubber deposits, surface

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 4


laitance, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to the pavement shall be completely removed with scrapers, wire brushes, sandblasting, approved chemicals, or mechanical abrasion as directed. Areas of old pavement affected with oil or grease shall be scrubbed with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinsed thoroughly after each application. After cleaning, oil-soaked areas shall be sealed with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. Pavement surfaces shall be allowed to dry, when water is used for cleaning, prior to striping or marking. Surfaces shall be recleaned, when work has been stopped due to rain.

3.1.1 Pretreatment for Early Painting

Where early painting is required on rigid pavements, approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative, apply a pretreatment with an aqueous solution, containing 3 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent zinc chloride, to prepared pavement areas prior to painting.

3.1.2 Cleaning Existing Pavement Markings

In general, markings shall not be placed over existing pavement marking patterns. Remove existing pavement markings, which are in good condition but interfere or conflict with the newly applied marking patterns. Deteriorated or obscured markings that are not misleading or confusing or interfere with the adhesion of the new marking material do not require removal. New preformed and thermoplastic pavement markings shall not be applied over existing preformed or thermoplastic markings. Whenever grinding, scraping, sandblasting or other operations are performed the work must be conducted in such a manner that the finished pavement surface is not damaged or left in a pattern that is misleading or confusing. When these operations are completed the pavement surface shall be blown off with compressed air to remove residue and debris resulting from the cleaning work.

3.1.3 Cleaning Concrete Curing Compounds

On new portland cement concrete pavements, cleaning operations shall not begin until a minimum of 30 days after the placement of concrete. All new concrete pavements shall be cleaned by either sandblasting or water blasting. When water blasting is performed, thermoplastic and preformed markings shall be applied no sooner than 24 hours after the blasting has been completed. The extent of the blasting work shall be to clean and prepare the concrete surface as follows:

a. There is no visible evidence of curing compound on the peaks of the textured concrete surface.

b. There are no heavy puddled deposits of curing compound in the valleys of the textured concrete surface.

c. All remaining curing compound is intact; all loose and flaking material is removed.

d. The peaks of the textured pavement surface are rounded in profile and free of sharp edges and irregularities.

e. The surface to be marked is dry.

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 5


3.2 APPLICATION

All pavement markings and patterns shall be placed as shown on the plans.

3.2.1 Paint

Paint shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, and only when air and pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F and less than 95 degrees F. Paint temperature shall be maintained within these same limits. New asphalt pavement surfaces and new Portland concrete cement shall be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 30 days before applications of paint. Paint shall be applied pneumatically with approved equipment at rate of coverage specified. Provide guide lines and templates as necessary to control paint application. Special precautions shall be taken in marking numbers, letters, and symbols. Edges of markings shall be sharply outlined.

3.2.1.1 Rate of Application

a. Reflective Markings: Pigmented binder shall be applied evenly to the pavement area to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet/gallon. Glass spheres shall be applied uniformly to the wet paint on airfield pavement at a rate of 8 on road and street pavement at a rate of 6 plus or minus 0.5 pounds of glass spheres per gallon of paint.

b. Nonreflective Markings: Paint shall be applied evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet/gallon.

3.2.1.2 Drying

The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic. If there is a delay in drying of the markings, painting operations shall be discontinued until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected.

3.2.2 Reflective Media

Application of reflective media shall immediately follow application of pigmented binder. Drop-on application of glass spheres shall be accomplished to insure that reflective media is evenly distributed at the specified rate of coverage. Should there be malfunction of either paint applicator or reflective media dispenser, operations shall be discontinued immediately until deficiency is corrected.

3.3 MARKING REMOVAL

Pavement marking shall be removed in the areas shown on the drawings. Removal of marking shall be as complete as possible without damage to the surface. Aggregate shall not be exposed by the removal process. After the markings are removed, the cleaned pavement surfaces shall exhibit adequate texture for remarking as specified in paragraph SURFACE PREPARATION. Demonstrate removal of pavement marking in an area designated by the Contracting Officer's Representative. The demonstration area will become the standard for the remainder of the work.

3.3.1 Equipment Operation

Equipment shall be controlled and operated to remove markings from the

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 6


pavement surface, prevent dilution or removal of binder from underlying pavement, and prevent emission of blue smoke from asphalt or tar surfaces.

3.3.2 Cleanup and Waste Disposal

The worksite shall be kept clean of debris and waste from the removal operations. Cleanup shall immediately follow removal operations in areas subject to air traffic. Debris shall be disposed of at approved sites.


SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 7


SECTION 32 31 13.53

HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A116 (2011) Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric


ASTM A392 (2011a) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

ASTM A491 (2011) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

ASTM A702 (1989; R 2006) Standard Specification for Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot Wrought

ASTM A780/A780M (2009; R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A824 (2001; R 2012) Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use With Chain Link Fence


ASTM F1043 (2012) Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain-Link Fence Framework

ASTM F1083 (2010) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures

ASTM F1184 (2005; R 2010) Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates

ASTM F567 (2011a) Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence



ASTM F626 (2008) Standard Specification for Fence Fittings

ASTM F900 (2011) Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fence InstallationInstallation DrawingsLocation of gate, corner, end, and pull postsGate AssemblyTurnstilesGate Hardware and Accessories

SD-03 Product Data

Fence InstallationGate AssemblyGate Hardware and Accessories

SD-04 Samples

FabricPostsPost CapsBracesLine PostsSleevesTop RailBottom RailTension WireStretcher BarsGate PostsGate Hardware and AccessoriesWire Ties

SD-06 Test Reports

zinc coatingPVC coatingaluminum alloy coating

SD-07 Certificates

Chain Link FenceReportsZinc CoatingPVC coatingaluminum alloy coating



FabricStretcher BarsGate Hardware and AccessoriesConcrete


Fence InstallationGate AssemblyHardware AssemblyAccessories


1.3.1 Required Report Data

Submit reports, signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturer, of chain-link fencing listing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for zinc coating, thickness of PVC coating, and chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating.

1.3.2 Assembly and Installation Drawings

Submit Manufacturer's instructions and complete Fence Installation Drawings for review and approval by the Contracting Officer's Representative prior to shipment. Drawing details shall include, but are not limited to: Fence Installation, Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts, Gate Assembly, and Gate Hardware and Accessories.


Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FENCE FABRIC

2.1.1 General

Provide ASTM A392, Class 2, zinc-coated steel wire with minimum coating weight of 1.2 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface, ASTM A491, Type I, aluminum-coated steel wire. Fabricate fence fabric of 9 gauge wire woven in 2 inch mesh conforming to ASTM A116. Secure fabric to posts using stretcher bars or ties spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally weaving to integral fastening loops of end, corner, pull, and gate posts for full length of each post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured.

2.2 POSTS

2.2.1 Metal Posts for Chain Link Fence

Provide posts conforming to ASTM F1083, zinc-coated. Group IA, with external coating Type A steel pipe. Group IC steel pipe, zinc-coated with external coating Type A or Type B and Group II , roll-formed steel sections, meeting the strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1043 and ASTM A702. Group III, ASTM F1043 steel H-section may be used for line posts in lieu of line post shapes specified for the other classes.



Provide sizes as shown on the drawings. Line posts and terminal (corner, gate, and pull) posts selected shall be of the same designation throughout the fence. Provide gate post for the gate type specified subject to the limitation specified in ASTM F900 and/or ASTM F1184. Post spacing shall conform to the recommended guidelines as set forth in the CLFMI "Wind Load Guide for the Selection of Line Post Spacing and Size" unless specified to exceed those guidelines.

2.2.2 Accessories

a. Provide accessories conforming to ASTM F626. Ferrous accessories shall be zinc or aluminum coated.

b. Furnish truss rods for each terminal post. Provide truss rods with turnbuckles or other equivalent provisions for adjustment.

c. Furnish post caps in accordance with manufacturer's standard accessories.

d. Provide 9 gauge steel tie wire for attaching fabric to rails, braces, and posts and match the coating of the fence fabric. Tie wires for attaching fabric to tension wire on high security fences shall be 16 gage stainless steel. Provide double loop tie wires 6.5 inches in length. Miscellaneous hardware coatings shall conform to ASTM A153/A153M unless modified.

2.3 BRACES AND RAILS

ASTM F1083, zinc-coated, Group IA, steel pipe, size NPS 1-1/4. Group IC steel pipe, zinc-coated, shall meet the strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1043. Group II, formed steel sections, size 1-21/32 inch, conforming to ASTM F1043, may be used as braces and rails if Group II line posts are furnished.

2.4 WIRE

2.4.1 Wire Ties

Submit samples as specified. Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.

2.4.2 Tension Wire

Provide Type I or Type II tension wire, Class 4 coating, in accordance with ASTM A824.

2.5 CONCRETE

ASTM C94/C94M, using 3/4 inch maximum size aggregate, and having minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Grout shall consist of one part portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand and the minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.



2.6 GATES

2.6.1 Gate Assembly

Provide gate assembly conforming to ASTM F900 and/or ASTM F1184 of the type shown. Provide gate frames conforming to strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1083 for Group IA, steel pipe, with external coating Type A, nominal pipe size (NPS) 1-1/2. Provide gate frames conforming to strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1043, for Group IC, steel pipe with external coating Type A or Type B, nominal pipe size (NPS) 1-1/2. Gate fabric shall be as specified for chain link fabric.

2.6.2 Gate Leaves

For gate leaves, more than 8 feet wide, provide either intermediate members and diagonal truss rods or tubular members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach fabric to the gate frame by method standard with the manufacturer except that welding will not be permitted.

2.6.3 Gate Hardware and Accessories

Submit manufacturer's catalog data. Furnish and install latches, hinges, stops, keepers, rollers, and other hardware items as required for the operation of the gate. Arrange latches for padlocking so that the padlock will be accessible from both sides of the gate. Provide stops for holding the gates in the open position.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FENCE INSTALLATION

Perform complete installation conforming to ASTM F567.

3.1.1 Line and Grade

Install fence to the lines and grades indicated. Clear the area on either side of the fence line to the extent indicated. Space line posts equidistant at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Terminal (corner, gate, and pull) posts shall be set at abrupt changes in vertical and horizontal alignment. Provide fabric continuous between terminal posts; however, runs between terminal posts shall not exceed 500 feet. Repair any damage to galvanized surfaces, including welding, with paint containing zinc dust in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.1.2 Excavation

Clear all post holes of loose material. Spread waste material where directed. Eliminate ground surface irregularities along the fence line to the extent necessary to maintain a 1 inch clearance between the bottom of the fabric and finish grade.

3.2 POST INSTALLATION

Set posts as detailed in plan drawings. Test fence post rigidity by applying a 50 pound force on the post, perpendicular to the fabric, at 5 feet above ground. Post movement measured at the point where the force is applied shall be less than or equal to 3/4 inch from the relaxed position.



Test every tenth post for rigidity. When a post fails this test, make further tests on the next four posts on either side of the failed post. All failed posts shall be removed, replaced, and retested at the Contractor's expense.

3.3 FABRIC INSTALLATION

a. Install chain link fabric on the side of the post indicated. Attach fabric to terminal posts with stretcher bars and tension bands. Space bands at approximately 15 inch intervals. Install fabric and pull taut to provide a smooth and uniform appearance free from sag, without permanently distorting the fabric diamond or reducing the fabric height. Fasten fabric to line posts at approximately 15 inch intervals and fastened to all rails and tension wires at approximately 12 inch intervals.

b. Cut fabric by untwisting and removing pickets. Accomplish splicing by weaving a single picket into the ends of the rolls to be joined. The bottom of the installed fabric shall be 1 plus or minus 1/2 inch above the ground.

c. After the fabric installation is complete, exercise the fabric by applying a 50 pound push-pull force at the center of the fabric between posts; the use of a 30 pound pull at the center of the panel shall cause fabric deflection of not more than 2.5 inches when pulling fabric from the post side of the fence; every second fence panel shall meet this requirement; resecure and retest all failed panels at the Contractor's expense.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

a. Install gates at the locations shown. Mount gates to swing as indicated. Install latches, stops, and keepers as required. Install gates as recommended by the manufacturer.

b. Weld or otherwise secure hinge pins, and hardware assembly to prevent removal.

3.5 GROUNDING

a. Ground fencing as indicated on drawingsandspecified by electrical.

b. Ground fences crossed by overhead powerlines in excess of 600 volts. Electrical equipment attached to the fence shall be grounded.

c. Ground fences on each side of all gates, at each corner, at the closest approach to each building located within 50 feet of the fence, and where the fence alignment changes more than 15 degrees. Grounding locations shall not exceed 650 feet. Bond each gate panel with a flexible bond strap to its gate post. Ground fences crossed by powerlines of 600 volts or more at or near the point of crossing and at distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of crossing.

d. Provide ground conductor consisting of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Grounding electrodes shall be 3/4 inch by 10 foot long copper-clad steel rod. Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the



electrode is at least 6 inches below the grade. Where driving is impracticable, electrodes shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches deep and radially from the fence. The top of the electrode shall not be less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the fence. Clamp ground conductor to the fence and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps to create electrical continuity between fence posts, fence fabric, and ground rods. Total resistance of the fence to ground shall not be greater than 25 ohms.

3.6 CLEANUP

Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the work site each workday.




SECTION 32 92 23

SODDING04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 602 (1995a; R 2001) Agricultural Liming Materials

ASTM D 4427 (1992; R 2002e1) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing

ASTM D 4972 (2001) pH of Soils

TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL (TPI)

TPI GSS (1995) Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual, Version 3.0

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Stand of Turf

100 percent ground cover of the established species.


Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements, with additions and modifications herein.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Fertilizer



Include physical characteristics, and recommendations.

SD-06 Test Reports

Topsoil composition tests (reports and recommendations).

SD-07 Certificates

Sod farm certification for sod. Indicate type of sod in accordance with TPI GSS.


1.5.1 Delivery

1.5.1.1 Sod Protection

Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site storage, and handling.

1.5.1.2 Fertilizer and Lime Delivery

Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information.

1.5.2 Storage

1.5.2.1 Sod Storage

Lightly sprinkle with water, cover with moist burlap, straw, or other approved covering; and protect from exposure to wind and direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to circulate so that internal heat will not develop. Do not store sod longer than 24 hours. Do not store directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces.

1.5.2.2 Topsoil

Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil.

1.5.2.3 Handling

Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.

1.6 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS

1.6.1 Restrictions

Do not plant when the ground is frozen, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit.



1.7 TIME LIMITATIONS

1.7.1 Sod

Place sod a maximum of thirty six hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOD

2.1.1 Classification

Nursery grown, certified as classified in the TPI GSS. Furnish sod machine stripped in 30" wide, thick-cut rolls with clean cut edges. Sod shall be at a uniform thickness of 3/4 inch within a tolerance of 1/4 inch, excluding top growth and thatch. Broken pads, irregularly shaped pieces, and torn or uneven ends will be rejected. Mow sod before stripping.

2.1.2 Purity

Sod species shall be genetically pure, free of weeds, pests, and disease.

2.1.3 Planting Dates

Lay sod from March to September for warm season spring planting and from October to February for cool season fall planting.

2.1.4 Composition

2.1.4.1 Proportion

Proportion grass species as follows.

Botanical Name Common Name Percent:

Eremochloa ophiuroides Centipede 98

2.2 TOPSOIL

2.2.1 On-Site Topsoil

Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled "Composition." When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

2.2.2 Off-Site Topsoil

Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor. Topsoil shall be as defined in ASTM D 5268. When additional topsoil is required beyond the available topsoil from the stripping operation, topsoil shall be delivered and amended as recommended by the soil test for the seed specified. Topsoil shall be free from slag, cinders, stones, lumps of soil, sticks, roots, trash or other material over a minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. Topsoil shall be free from vaiable plants and plant parts



2.2.3 Composition

Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, and other debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform to the following limits:

Silt 7 to 17 percentClay 10 to 30 percentSand 70 to 82 percentpH 5.5 to 7.0Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum

2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS

Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with "composition" standard for topsoil as specified herein.

2.3.1 Lime

Commercial grade hydrate limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C 602 of not less than 100 percent.

2.3.2 Aluminum Sulfate

Commercial grade.

2.3.3 Sulfur

100 percent elemental

2.3.4 Iron


2.3.5 Peat

Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427. Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation.

2.3.6 Sand

Clean and free of materials harmful to plants.

2.3.7 Perlite

Horticultural grade.

2.3.8 Composted Derivatives

Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus or other green wood waste material free of stones, sticks, and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties:



2.3.8.1 Particle Size

Minimum percent by weight passing:

No. 4 mesh screen 95No. 8 mesh screen 80

2.3.8.2 Nitrogen Content

Minimum percent based on dry weight:

Fir Sawdust 0.7Fir or Pine Bark 1.0

2.3.9 Gypsum

Coarsely ground gypsum comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17 percent; minimum 96 percent passing through 20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing thru 16 mesh screen.

2.3.10 Calcined Clay

Calcined clay shall be granular particles produced from montmorillonite clay calcined to a minimum temperature of 1200 degrees F. Gradation: A minimum 90 percent shall pass a No. 8 sieve; a minimum 99 percent shall be retained on a No. 60 sieve; and a maximum 2 percent shall pass a No. 100 sieve. Bulk density: A maximum 40 pounds per cubic foot.

2.4 FERTILIZER




2.5 WATER

Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no element toxic to plant life.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 EXTENT OF WORK

Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners), fertilizing, and sodding of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.

3.1.2 Soil Preparation

Provide 4 inches of off-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After



areas have been brought to indicated finish grade, incorporate fertilizer, pH adjusters, and soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer. Remove debris and stones larger than 3/4 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading. Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

3.1.2.1 Soil Conditioner Application Rates

Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:

Nutri-Green Compost, Nature's Finest or equal at a rate of 3 cubic yards per 1000 square feet and roto-till to a minimum depth of 4 inches into existing soil

Lime 50 pounds per 1000 square feet.

3.1.2.2 Fertilizer Application Rates

Apply 12-8-8 commercial fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:

Organic Granular Fertilizer 1 pound per 1000 square feet or 65 pounds per acre.

3.2 SODDING

3.2.1 Finished Grade and Topsoil

Prior to the commencement of the sodding operation, the Contractor shall verify that finished grades are as indicated on drawings; the placing of topsoil, smooth grading, and compaction requirements have been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

The prepared surface shall be a maximum 1 inch below the adjoining grade of any surfaced area. New surfaces shall be blended to existing areas. The prepared surface shall be completed with a light raking to remove from the surface debris and stones over a minimum 5/8 inch in any dimension.

3.2.2 Placing

Place sod a maximum of 36 hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein.

3.2.3 Sodding Slopes and Ditches

For slopes 2:1 and greater, lay sod with long edge perpendicular to the contour. For V-ditches and flat bottomed ditches, lay sod with long edge perpendicular to flow of water. Anchor each piece of sod with wood pegs or wire staples maximum 2 feet on center.



3.2.4 Finishing

After completing sodding, blend edges of sodded area smoothly into surrounding area. Air pockets shall be eliminated and a true and even surface shall be provided. Frayed edges shall be trimmed and holes and missing corners shall be patched with sod.

3.2.5 Rolling

Immediately after sodding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width.

3.2.6 Watering

Start watering areas sodded as required by daily temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to minimum depth of 6 inches. Run-off, puddling, and wilting shall be prevented. Unless otherwise directed, watering trucks shall not be driven over turf areas. Watering of other adjacent areas or plant material shall be prevented.

3.3 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS

Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use.

3.4 RESTORATION

Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during turf installation operations. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work in adjacent areas is complete.

3.5 SOD ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

3.5.1 Turf Maintenance

Maintain and establish sod by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and sod damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

Apply treatments as required to keep sod and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use IPM (Integrated Pest Management) practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

Mow sod as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

Mow sodded areas to a height of 2 to 3 inches.



3.5.2 Satisfactory Turf

Sod installation shall meet the following criteria as determined by the Contracting Officer:

Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of 365 days maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf shall be established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

Use specified materials to re-establish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.




SECTION 32 93 00

EXTERIOR PLANTS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI A300 (1995) Tree Care Operations - Trees, Shrubs and Other Woody Plant Maintenance

ANSI Z133.1 (2001) Arboricultural Operations -- Safety Requirements for Pruning, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush

ANSI Z60.1 (1996) Nursery Stock


ASTM A 580/A 580M (1998; R 2004) Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM C 602 (1995a; R 2001) Agricultural Liming Materials

ASTM D 1972 (1991; R 2001) Generic Marking of Plastic Products

ASTM D 4427 (1992; R 2002e1) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing

ASTM D 4972 (2001) pH of Soils

ASTM D 5203 (1991; R 2002) Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials from Recycled Post-Consumer (HDPE) Sources

ASTM D 5268 (2002) Topsoil Used for Landscaping

Purposes

ASTM D 5852 (1995; R 2000) Erodibility Determination of Soil in the Field or in the Laboratory by the Jet Index Method

ASTM D 6629 (2001) Selection of Methods for Estimating Soil Loss by Erosion

FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC)

FSC STD 01 001 (2000) Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship



L.H. BAILEY HORTORIUM (LHBH)

LHBH (1976) Hortus Third

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual, Version 3.0

U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)


Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, , Section 32 92 23 SODDING, and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements, with additions and modifications herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



State Landscape Contractor's License; G

Time Restrictions and Planting Conditions; G

Indicate anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting.

SD-03 Product Data

Geotextile; GChemical Treatment Material; G

Manufacturer's literature including physical characteristics, application, and installation instructions for geotextile and chemical treatment material.

Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)

Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Peat



Composted DerivativesRotted ManureInorganic Mulch Materials

Submit documentation indicating type of biobased material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

Gypsum; (LEED)Drainage Pipe; (LEED)Mulch; G, Ground StakesRecycled Plastic Edging; (LEED)Hose; (LEED)

Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

Fertilizer

Weed control fabric; G,

Staking MaterialGround Stakes

Submit documentation certifying products are from salvaged/recovered lumber sources and indicating percentage of salvaged/recovered content per unit of product.

Metal anchors

Antidesiccants

SD-04 Samples

Mulch; G,

Submit one pint of mulch.

SD-06 Test Reports

Topsoil composition tests; Soil Test of proposed area; Soil Test location map

Percolation Test; Percolation Test of proposed area

SD-07 Certificates

Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification; (LEED)

Nursery certifications

Indicate names of plants in accordance with the LHBH, including type,



quality, and size.


Plastic Identification

When not labeled, identify types in Operation and Maintenance Manual.


1.4.1 Topsoil Composition Tests

Commercial test from an independent testing laboratory including basic soil groups (moisture and saturation percentages, Nitrogen-Phosphorus-Potassium (N-P-K) ratio, pH (ASTM D 4972), soil salinity), secondary nutrient groups (calcium, magnesium, sodium, Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR)), micronutrients (zinc, manganese, iron, copper), toxic soil elements (boron, chloride, sulfate), cation exchange and base saturation percentages, and soil amendment and fertilizer recommendations with quantities for plant material being transplanted. Soil required for each test shall include a maximum depth of 18 inches of approximately 1 quart volume for each test. Areas sampled should not be larger than 1 acre and should contain at least 6-8 cores for each sample area and be thoroughly mixed. Problem areas should be sampled separately and compared with samples taken from adjacent non-problem areas. The location of the sample areas should be noted and marked on a parcel or planting map for future reference.

1.4.2 Nursery Certifications

a. Indicate on nursery letterhead the name of plants in accordance with the LHBH, including botanical common names, quality, and size.

b. All plant materials shall comply with all requirements of FLORIDA NO. 1 GRADE or better, as graded by the Florida Department of Agriculture, Division of Plant Industry, "Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants", latest edition.

c. Inspection certificate.

d. Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum for plant material treated

1.4.3 State Landscape Contractor's License

Construction company shall hold a landscape contractors license in the state where the work is performed and have a minimum of five years landscape construction experience. Submit copy of license and three references for similar work completed in the last five years.

1.4.4 Percolation Test

Immediately following rough grading operation, identify a typical location for one of the largest trees and or shrubs and excavate a pit per the project details. Fill the pit with water to a depth of 12 inches. The length of time required for the water to percolate into the soil, leaving the pit empty, shall be measured by the project Landscape Architect and verified by the Contracting Officer. Within six hours of the time the water has drained from the pit, the Contractor, with the Contracting



Officer and project Landscape Architect present, shall again fill the pit with water to a depth of 12 inches. If the water does not completely percolate into the soil within 9 hours, a determination shall be made whether a drainage system or a soil penetrant will be required for each tree and or shrub being transplanted.

1.4.5 Erosion Assessment

Assess potential effects of soil management practices on soil loss in accordance with ASTM D 6629. Assess erodibility of soil with dominant soil structure less than 2.8 to 3.1 inches in accordance with ASTM D 5852.

1.4.6 Pre-Installation Meeting

Convene a pre-installation meeting a minimum of one week prior to commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related work. Agenda shall include the following:

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of planting materials.

b. Review planting schedule and maintenance.

c. Review required inspections.

d. Review environmental procedures.


1.5.1 Delivery

1.5.1.1 Branched Plant Delivery

Deliver with branches tied and exposed branches covered with material which allows air circulation. Prevent damage to branches, trunks, root systems, and root balls and desiccation of leaves.

1.5.1.2 Soil Amendment Delivery

Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer and lime may be furnished in bulk with a certificate indicating the above information. Store in dry locations away from contaminates.

1.5.1.3 Plant Labels

Deliver plants with durable waterproof labels in weather-resistant ink. Provide labels stating the correct botanical and common plant name and variety as applicable and size as specified in the list of required plants. Attach to plants, bundles, and containers of plants. Groups of plants may be labeled by tagging one plant. Labels shall be legible for a minimum of 60 days after delivery to the planting site.



1.5.2 Storage

1.5.2.1 Plant Storage and Protection

Store and protect plants not planted on the day of arrival at the site as follows:

a. Shade and protect plants in outside storage areas from the wind and direct sunlight until planted.

b. Heel-in bare root plants.

c. Protect balled and burlapped plants from freezing or drying out by covering the balls or roots with moist burlap, sawdust, wood chips, shredded bark, peat moss, or other approved material. Provide covering which allows air circulation.

d. Keep plants in a moist condition until planted by watering with a fine mist spray.

e. Do not store plant material directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces.

1.5.2.2 Fertilizer and Mulch Storage

Store in dry locations away from contaminants.

1.5.2.3 Topsoil

Prior to stockpiling topsoil, eradicate on site undesirable growing vegetation. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling existing topsoil.

1.5.2.4 Root Control Barrier and Weed Control Fabric

Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering in dry location. Store under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on ground.

1.5.3 Handling

Do not drop or dump plants from vehicles. Avoid damaging plants being moved from nursery or storage area to planting site. Handle balled and burlapped, bare root, and container plants carefully to avoid damaging or breaking the earth ball or root structure. Do not handle plants by the trunk or stem. Puddle bare-root plants after removal from the heeling-in bed to protect roots from drying out. Remove damaged plants from the site.

1.5.4 TIME LIMITATION

Except for container-grown plant material, the time limitation from digging to installing plant material shall be a maximum of 90 days. The time limitation between installing the plant material and placing the mulch shall be a maximum of 24 hours.

1.6 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS

Coordinate installation of planting materials during optimal planting seasons for each type of plant material required.



1.6.1 Planting Dates

Plant all plants from March to October.

1.6.2 Restrictions

Do not plant when ground is frozen, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit

1.7 GUARANTEE

All plants shall be guaranteed for one year beginning on the date of inspection by the Contracting Officer to commence the plant establishment period, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by the Government or by weather conditions unusual for the warranty period. Transplanted plants require no guarantee.

Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. At end of warranty period, replace planting materials that die or have 25 percent or more of their branches that die during the construction operations or the guarantee period.

1.8 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.8.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within an 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Landscaping materials may be locally available.

1.8.2 Plastic Identification

Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are labeled in accordance with ASTM D 1972. Where products are not labeled, provide product data indicating polymeric information in Operation and Maintenance Manual.Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).Type 5: Polypropylene (PP).Type 6: Polystyrene (PS).Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.

1.8.3 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification

Use FSC-certified wood where specified. Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC STD 01 001 and identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item basis. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANTS

2.1.1 Regulations and Varieties

Existing trees and shrubs to remain shall be protected and a planting plan be arranged around them. Furnish nursery stock in accordance with ANSI Z60.1, except as otherwise specified or indicated. Each plant or group of planting shall have a "key" number indicated on the nursery certifications of the plant schedule. Furnish plants, including turf grass, grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project. Plants specified shall be indigenous, low maintenance varieties, tolerant of site's existing soils and climate without supplemental irrigation or fertilization once established. Spray plants budding into leaf or having soft growth with an antidesiccant before digging. Plants of the same specified size shall be of uniform size and character of growth. Plants shall be chosen with their mature size and growth habit in mind to avoid over-planting and conflict with other plants, structures or underground utility lines. All plants shall comply with all Federal and State Laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestation.

2.1.2 Shape and Condition

Well-branched, well-formed, sound, vigorous, healthy planting stock free from disease, sunscald, windburn, abrasion, and harmful insects or insect eggs and having a healthy, normal, and undamaged root system.

2.1.2.1 Deciduous Trees and Shrubs

Symmetrically developed and of uniform habit of growth, with straight boles or stems, and free from objectionable disfigurements.

2.1.2.2 Evergreen Trees and Shrubs

Well developed symmetrical tops with typical spread of branches for each particular species or variety.

2.1.2.3 Ground Covers and Vines

Number and length of runners and clump sizes indicated, and of the proper age for the grade of plants indicated, furnished in removable containers, integral containers, or formed homogeneous soil section.

2.1.3 Plant Size

Minimum sizes measured after pruning and with branches in normal position, shall conform to measurements indicated, based on the average width or height of the plant for the species as specified in ANSI Z60.1. Plants larger in size than specified may be provided with approval of the Contracting Officer. When larger plants are provided, increase the ball of earth or spread of roots in accordance with ANSI Z60.1.

2.1.4 Root Ball Size

All box-grown, field potted, field boxed, collected, plantation grown, bare root, balled and burlapped, container grown, and processed-balled shall



conform to ANSI Z60.1. All wrappings and ties shall be biodegradable. Root growth in container grown plants shall be sufficient to hold earth intact when removed from containers. Root bound plants will not be accepted.

2.1.4.1 Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum

Before shipment, root systems shall contain mycorrhizal fungi inoculum.

2.1.5 Growth of Trunk and Crown

2.1.5.1 Deciduous Trees

A height to caliper relationship shall be provided in accordance with ANSI Z60.1. Height of branching shall bear a relationship to the size and species of tree specified and with the crown in good balance with the trunk. The trees shall not be "poled" or the leader removed.

a. Single stem: The trunk shall be reasonably straight and symmetrical with crown and have a persistent main leader.

b. Multi-stem: All countable stems, in aggregate, shall average the size specified. To be considered a stem, there shall be no division of the trunk which branches more than 6 inches from ground level.

2.1.5.2 Palms

Palms shall have the specified height as measured from the base of the trunk to the base of the fronds or foliage in accordance with ANSI Z60.1. The palm shall have straight trunk and healthy fronds or foliage as typical for the variety grown in the region of the project. Palms trimmed or pruned for delivery shall retain a minimum of 6 inches of foliage at the crown as a means of determining plant health.

2.1.5.3 Deciduous Shrubs

Deciduous shrubs shall have the height and number of primary stems recommended by ANSI Z60.1. Acceptable plant material shall be well shaped, with sufficient well-spaced side branches, and recognized by the trade as typical for the species grown in the region of the project.

2.1.5.4 Coniferous Evergreen Plant Material

Coniferous Evergreen plant material shall have the height-to-spread ratio recommended by ANSI Z60.1. The coniferous evergreen trees shall not be "poled" or the leader removed. Acceptable plant material shall be exceptionally heavy, well shaped and trimmed to form a symmetrical and tightly knit plant. The form of growth desired shall be as indicated.

2.1.5.5 Broadleaf Evergreen Plant Material

Broadleaf evergreen plant material shall have the height-to-spread ratio recommended by ANSI Z60.1. Acceptable plant material shall be well shaped and recognized by the trade as typical for the variety grown in the region of the project.



2.1.5.6 Ground Cover and Vine Plant Material

Ground cover and vine plant material shall have the minimum number of runners and length of runner recommended by ANSI Z60.1. Plant material shall have heavy, well developed and balanced crown with vigorous, well developed root system and shall be furnished in containers.

2.2 TOPSOIL

2.2.1 Off-Site Topsoil

Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor. Topsoil shall be as defined in ASTM D 5268. When additional topsoil is required beyond the available topsoil from the stripping operation, topsoil shall be delivered and amended as recommended by the soil test for the seed specified. Topsoil shall be free from slag, cinders, stones, lumps of soil, sticks, roots, trash or other material over a minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. Topsoil shall be free from vaiable plants and plant parts.

2.2.2 Composition

Evaluate soil for use as topsoil in accordance with ASTM D 5268. From 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, plants, and other debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform to the following limits:

Silt 7 to 17 percentClay 10 to 30 percentSand 70 to 82 percentpH 5.5 to 7.0Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum

2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS

Provide singly or in combination as required to meet specified requirements for topsoil. Soil conditioners shall be nontoxic to plants.

2.3.1 Lime

Commercial grade hydrated limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C 602 of not less than 80 percent.

2.3.2 Aluminum Sulfate

Commercial grade.

2.3.3 Sulfur


2.3.4 Iron




2.3.5 Peat

Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427 as modified herein. Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation. Biobased content shall be a minimum of 100 percent. Peat shall not contain invasive species, including seeds.

2.3.6 Sand

Clean and free of materials harmful to plants.

2.3.7 Perlite

Horticultural grade.

2.3.8 Composted Derivatives

Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus or other green wood waste material free of stones, sticks, invasive species, including seeds, and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties:

2.3.8.1 Particle Size

Minimum percent by weight passing:

No. 4 mesh screen 95No. 8 mesh screen 80

2.3.8.2 Nitrogen Content

Minimum percent based on dry weight:

Fir Sawdust 0.7Fir or Pine Bark 1.0

2.3.8.3 Biobased Content

Minimum 100 percent.

2.3.9 Gypsum

Coarsely ground gypsum from recycled scrap gypsum board comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17 percent; minimum 96 percent passing through 20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing thru 16 mesh screen.

2.3.10 Vermiculite

Horticultural grade for planters.

2.3.11 Rotted Manure

Well rotted horse or cattle manure containing maximum 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of seeds, stones, sticks, soil, and other invasive species.



2.4 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURES

Three parts topsoil and one part Peat moss or other approved organic material. Thoroughly mix all parts of planting soil mixture to a uniform blend throughout.

Sandy topsoil: one part topsoil to one part peat or other approved organic material; clay topsoil: two parts topsoil to one part peat or other approved organic material. Thoroughly mix all parts of planting soil mixture to a uniform blend throughout.

2.5 FERTILIZER

Fertilizer for groundcover, wildflowers and grasses is not permitted.Fertilizer for trees, plants, and shrubs shall be as recommended by plant supplier, except synthetic chemical fertilizers are not permitted. Fertilizers containing petrochemical additives or that have been treated with pesticides or herbicides are not permitted.




2.5.2 Fertilizer Tablets

Organic, plant tablets composed of tightly compressed fertilizer chips forming a tablet that is insoluble in water, is designed to provide a continuous release of nutrients for at least 24 months and contains the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients:

20 percent available nitrogen20 percent available phosphorus5 percent available potassium

2.6 WEED CONTROL FABRIC

2.6.1 Roll Type Polypropylene or Polyester Mats

Fabric shall be woven, needle punched or non-woven and treated for protection against deterioration due to ultraviolet radiation. Fabric shall be minimum 99 percent opaque to prevent photosynthesis and seed germination from occurring, yet allowing air, water and nutrients to pass thru to the roots. Minimum weight shall be 5 ounces per square yard with a minimum thickness of 20 mils with a 20 year (minimum) guarantee.

2.7 DRAINAGE PIPE FOR PLANT PITS AND BEDS

Plastic HDPE pipe, 4 inches in diameter, perforated conforming to ASTM D 5203. Minimum 100 percent post-consumer recycled content.

2.8 MULCH

Free from noxious weeds, mold, pesticides, or other deleterious materials.



2.8.1 Inert Mulch Material

Recycled shredded rubber mulch - red in color - approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.9 STAKING AND GUYING MATERIAL

2.9.1 Staking Material

2.9.1.1 Tree Support Stakes

Rough sawn FSC-certified or salvaged hard wood free of knots, rot, cross grain, bark, long slivers, or other defects that impair strength. Stakes shall be minimum 2 inches square or 2 1/2 inch diameter by 8 feet long, pointed at one end.

2.9.1.2 Ground Stakes

FSC-certified or salvaged wood or 100 percent post-consumer recycled content plastic, 2 inches square are by 3 feet long, pointed at one end.

2.9.2 Guying Material

2.9.2.1 Guying Wire

12 gauge annealed galvanized steel, ASTM A 580/A 580M.

2.9.2.2 Guying Cable

Minimum five-strand, 3/16 inch diameter galvanized steel cable.

2.9.3 Hose Chafing Guards

New or used 2 ply 3/4 inch diameter reinforced rubber or plastic hose, black or dark green, all of same color.

2.9.4 Flags

White surveyor's plastic tape, 6 inches long, fastened to guying wires or cables.

2.9.5 Turnbuckles

Galvanized or cadmium-plated steel with minimum 3 inch long openings fitted with screw eyes. Eye bolts shall be galvanized or cadmium-plated steel with one inch diameter eyes and screw length 1 1/2 inches, minimum.

2.9.6 Deadmen

4 by 8 inch rectangular or 8 inch diameter by36 inch long, pine wood material.

2.9.7 Metal Anchors

2.9.7.1 Driven Anchors

Malleable iron, arrow shaped, galvanized, sized as follows:



Tree Caliper Anchor Size

2 inches and under 3 inches 3 to 6 inches 4 inches 6 to 8 inches 6 inches 8 to 10 inches 8 inches 10 to 12 inches 10 inches

2.9.7.2 Screw Anchors

Steel, screw type with welded-on 3 inch round helical steel plate, minimum 3/8 inch diameter, 15 inches long.

2.10 EDGING MATERIAL

2.10.1 Metal Edging

Galvanized steel with slots for stakes, 3/16 inch thick by 4 inch deep in 16 foot lengths. Treat steel edging with rust preventative and factory finish in color black. Anchoring stakes shall be tapered galvanized steel with same finish as metal edging, 16 to 18 inches long.

2.11 ANTIDESICCANTS

Sprayable, water insoluble vinyl-vinledine complex which produce a moisture retarding barrier not removable by rain or snow. Film shall form at temperatures commonly encountered out of doors during planting season and have a moisture vapor transmission rate (MVT) of the resultant film of maximum 10 grams per 24 hours at 70 percent humidity.

2.12 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS

Erosion control material shall conform to the following:

2.12.1 Erosion Control Fabric

Fabric shall be knitted construction of polypropylene yarn with uniform mesh openings 3/4 to 1 inch square with strips of biodegradable paper. Filler paper strips shall have a minimum life of 6 months.

2.12.2 Erosion Control Material Anchors

Erosion control anchors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.13 WATER

Source of water to be approved by Contracting Officer and suitable quality for irrigation and shall not contain elements toxic to plant life, including acids, alkalis, salts, chemical pollutants, and organic matter. Use collected storm water or graywater when available.

2.13.1 Hose

Hoses used for watering shall be a minimum of 60 percent post-consumer rubber or plastic.



2.14 MYCORRHIZAL FUNGI INOCULUM

Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum shall be composed of multiple-fungus inoculum as recommended by the manufacturer for the plant material specified.

2.15 GEOTEXTILE

Geotextile shall be woven or nonwoven; black polyethylene weed barrier mat in accordance with ASTM D 5034 or ASTM D 5035 and shall be installed in all planting beds. It shall be made specifically for use as a fabric around plant material. Nominal weight shall be a minimum 4 ounces per square yard. Permeability rate shall be a minimum 0.04 inch per second.


The Contracting Officer will inspect plant materials at the project site and approve them. Tag plant materials for size and quality.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXTENT OF WORK

Provide soil preparation, fertilizing, tree, shrub, vine, groundcover, and planting, edging, staking and guying, weed control fabric, installation and a mulch topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.

3.2 ALTERNATIVE HERBICIDE TREATMENT (SOLARIZING SOIL)

Within 48 hours of subsoil preparation, saturate soil with water to a depth of 3 feet. Immediately stake polyethylene sheeting over area to be planted. Stake tightly to surface of soil. Maintain sheeting in place for a minimum of 6 weeks. Immediately after removing sheeting, cover area to be planted with topsoil. Do not till soil prior to applying topsoil.

3.3 PREPARATION 3.3.1 Protection

Protect existing and proposed landscape features, elements, and sites from damage or contamination. Protect trees, vegetation, and other designated features by erecting high-visibility, reusable construction fencing. Locate fence no closer to trees than the drip line. Plan equipment and vehicle access to minimize and confine soil disturbance and compaction to areas indicated on Drawings.

3.3.2 Layout

Stake out approved plant material locations and planter bed outlines on the project site before digging plant pits or beds. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to adjust plant material locations to meet field conditions. Do not plant closer than 12 inches to a building wall, pavement edge, fence or wall edge and other similar structures. Provide on-site locations for excavated rock, soil, and vegetation.

3.3.3 Erosion Control

Provide erosion control and seeding with native plant species to protect



slopes.

3.3.4 Soil Preparation

3.3.4.1 pH Adjuster Application Rates

Apply pH adjuster at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site.

3.3.4.2 Fertilizer Application Rates

Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site.

3.3.5 Subsoil Drainage for Plant Pits and Beds

Lay perforated drain pipe with perforations down. Backfill trenches as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.4 PLANT BED PREPARATION

Verify location of underground utilities prior to excavation. Protect existing adjacent turf before excavations are made. Do not disturb topsoil and vegetation in areas outside those indicated on Drawings. Where planting beds occur in existing turf areas, remove turf to a depth that will ensure removal of entire root system. Measure depth of plant pits from finished grade. Depth of plant pit excavation shall be as indicated and provide proper relation between top of root ball and finished grade. Install plant material as specified in paragraph entitled "Plant Installation." Do not install trees within 10 feet of any utility lines or building walls.

3.5 PLANT INSTALLATION

3.5.1 Individual Plant Pit Excavation

Excavate pits at least twice as large in diameter as the size of ball or container to depth shown.

3.5.2 Plant Beds with Multiple Plants

Excavate plant beds continuously throughout entire bed as outlined to depth shown.

3.5.3 Handling and Setting

Move plant materials only by supporting the root ball or container. Set plants on hand compacted layer of prepared backfill soil mixture 4 inches thick and hold plumb in the center of the pit until soil has been tamped firmly around root ball. Set plant materials, in relation to surrounding finish grade, one to 2 inches above depth at which they were grown in the nursery, collecting field or container. Replace plant material whose root balls are cracked or damaged either before or during the planting process.



Plant material shall be set in plant beds according to the drawings. Backfill soil mixture shall be placed on previously scarified subsoil to completely surround the root balls, and shall be brought to a smooth and even surface, blending to existing areas.

3.5.3.1 Balled and Burlapped Stock

Backfill with prepared soil mixture to approximately half the depth of ball and then tamp and water. Carefully remove or fold back excess burlap and tying materials from the top a minimum 1/3 depth from the top of the rootball. Tamp and complete backfill, place mulch topdressing, and water. Remove wires and non-biodegradable materials from plant pit prior to backfill operations.

3.5.3.2 Bare-Root Stock

Plant so roots are arranged in a natural position. Place roots in water a minimum of 30 minutes prior to planting. Carefully work prepared soil mixture among roots. Tamp remainder of backfill, place mulch topdressing and water.

3.5.3.3 Container Grown Stock

Remove from container and prevent damage to plant or root system.

3.5.3.4 Ground Covers and Vines

Do not remove plant materials from flats or containers until immediately before planting. Space at intervals indicated. Plant at a depth to sufficiently cover all roots. Start watering areas planted as required by temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 4 inches without run off or puddling. Smooth planting areas after planting to provide even, smooth finish. Mulch as indicated.

3.5.4 Earth Mounded Watering Basin for Individual Plant Pits

Form with topsoil around each plant by replacing a mound of topsoil around the edge of each plant pit. Watering basins shall be 6 inches deep for trees and 4 inches deep for shrubs. Eliminate basins around plants in plant beds containing multiple plants.

3.5.5 Placing Geotextile

Prior to placing mulch, geotextile shall be placed as indicated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5.6 Weed Control Fabric Installation

Remove grass and weed vegetation, including roots, from within the area enclosed by edging. Completely cover areas enclosed by edging with specified weed control fabric prior to placing mulch layer. Overlap cut edges 4 inches.

3.5.7 Mulch Topdressing

Provide mulch topdressing over entire planter bed surfaces and individual



plant surfaces including earth mound watering basin around plants to a depth of 3 inches after completion of plant installation and before watering. Keep mulch out of the crowns of shrubs. Place mulch a minimum 2 to 3 inches away from trunk of shrub or tree. Place on top of any weed control fabric.

3.5.8 Installation of Edging

Uniformly edge beds of plants to provide a clear cut division line between planted area and adjacent lawn. Construct bed shapes as indicated. Install edging material as indicated and as per manufacturer's instructions. Install edging material in a perfect 4 foot diameter circle inside the 4 1/2 foot watering basin, around individual specimen trees and shrubs not planted in a close group. Install edging with minimum one inch left above ground level.

3.5.9 Fertilization

3.5.9.1 Fertilizer Tablets

Place fertilizer planting tablets evenly spaced around the plant pits to the manufacturer's recommended depth.

3.5.9.2 Granular Fertilizer

Apply granular fertilizer as a top coat prior to placing mulch layer and water thoroughly.

3.5.10 Watering

Start watering areas planted as required by temperature and wind conditions. Slow deep watering shall be used. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 12 inches without run off or puddling. Watering of other plant material or adjacent areas shall be prevented.

3.5.11 Staking and Guying

3.5.11.1 Staking

Stake plants with the number of stakes indicated complete with double strand of 12 gage guy wire as detailed. Attach guy wire half the tree height but not more than 5 feet high. Drive stakes to a depth of 2 1/2 to 3 feet into the ground outside the plant pit. Do not injure the root ball. Use hose chafer guards where guy wire comes in contact with tree trunk.

3.5.11.2 Guying

Guy plants as indicated. Attach two strands of guying wire around the tree trunk at an angle of 45 degrees at approximately 1/2 of the trunk height. Protect tree trunks with chafing guards where guying wire contacts the tree trunk. Anchor guys to wood ground stakes, malleable iron anchors and steel screw anchors. Fasten flags to each guying wire approximately 2/3 of the distance up from ground level. Provide turnbuckles as indicated.

3.5.11.3 Chafing Guards

Use hose chafing guards, as specified where guy wire will contact the plant.



3.5.11.4 Wood Ground Stakes

Drive wood ground stakes into firm ground outside of plant pit with top of stake flush with ground. Place equal distance from tree trunk and around the plant pit.

3.5.11.5 Iron Anchors

Drive malleable iron anchors into firm ground outside of plant pit a minimum 30 inches below finish grade. Place equal distance from tree trunk and around the plant pit.

3.5.11.6 Steel Screw Anchors

Insert steel screw anchors as recommended in manufacturer's data. Place equal distance from tree trunk and around the plant pit.

3.5.11.7 Flags

Securely fasten flags on each guy wire approximately two-thirds of the distance up from ground level.

3.5.12 Pruning

Prune in accordance with safety requirement of ANSI Z133.1.

3.5.12.1 Trees and Shrubs

Remove dead and broken branches. Prune to correct structural defects only. Retain typical growth shape of individual plants with as much height and spread as practical. Do not cut central leader on trees. Make cuts with sharp instruments. Do not flush cut with trunk or adjacent branches. Collars shall remain in place. Pruning shall be accomplished by trained and experienced personnel and shall be accordance with ANSI A300.

3.5.12.2 Wound Dressing

Do not apply tree wound dressing to cuts.

3.6 RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP

3.6.1 Restoration

Turf areas, pavements and facilities that have been damaged from the planting operation shall be restored to original condition at the Contractor's expense.

3.6.2 Clean Up

Excess and waste material shall be removed from the installed area and shall be disposed offsite at an approved landfill, recycling center, or composting center. Separate and recycle or reuse the following landscape waste materials: nylon straps, wire, ball wrap, burlap, and wood stakes,. Adjacent paved areas shall be cleared.




SECTION 33 11 00

WATER DISTRIBUTION02/11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2010) Liquid Chlorine




AWWA C115/A21.15 (2011) Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges



AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C502 (2005) Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants

AWWA C509 (2009) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C515 (2009) Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service


AWWA C550 (2011) Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings Valves and Hydrants

AWWA C605 (2005) Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water



AWWA C651 (2014) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA C700 (2015) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case

AWWA C900 (2007; Errata 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution

AWWA C905 (2010) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings 14 In. Through 48 In. (350 mm through 1,200 mm) for Water Transmission and Distribution

AWWA M23 (2002; 2nd Ed) Manual: PVC Pipe - Design and Installation


ASME B18.2.2 (2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts

ASME B18.5.2.1M (2006; R 2011) Metric Round Head Short Square Neck Bolts

ASME B18.5.2.2M (1982; R 2010) Metric Round Head Square Neck Bolts


ASTM A307 (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength



ASTM A563 (2015) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM B61 (2008) Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

ASTM B62 (2015) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings


ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2241 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated



Pipe (SDR Series)

ASTM D2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D2466 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D2467 (2013) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D2657 (2007) Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2774 (2012) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping

ASTM D2855 (2015) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D3139 (1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM F402 (2005; R 2012) Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F477 (2010) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe




NFPA 704 (2012) Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response


UL 246 (2011; Reprint Feb 2013) Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service

UL 262 (2004; Reprint Oct 2011) Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service



UL 789 (2004; Reprint Feb 2013) Standard for Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service

UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)

UBPPA UNI-B-3 (1992) Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (Nominal Diameters 4-36 Inch)

UBPPA UNI-B-8 (2000) Recommended Practice for the Direct Tapping of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Water Pipe (Nominal Diameters 6-12 Inch)

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS1.2.1 Water Distribution Mains

Provide water distribution mains indicated. Provide water main accessories, gate valves and check valves as specified and where indicated. Submit design calculations of water piping.

1.2.2 Water Service Lines

Provide water service lines indicated, from water distribution main to building service at the points indicated. Water service lines shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Ductile-iron pipe appurtenances, and valves as specified for water mains may also be used for service lines. Provide water service line appurtenances as specified and where indicated. Submit design calculations of water piping.1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Piping Materials

Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Hydrants

Indicator posts

Corporation stops

Valve boxes

Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except submit both drawings and cuts for push-on and rubber-gasketed bell-and-spigot joints. Include information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and couplings.

SD-05 Design Data



Design calculations of water piping

SD-06 Test Reports

Bacteriological Disinfection; G.

Test results from commercial laboratory verifying disinfection

SD-07 Certificates

Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Shop-applied lining and coating

Lining

Fire hydrants

Displacement Type Meters

Compound Type Meters

Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable referenced publication have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be mandatory or otherwise and that production control tests have been performed at the intervals or frequency specified in the publication. Other tests shall have been performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being provided for the project.


Delivery, storage, and handling

Installation procedures for water piping


1.4.1 Delivery and Storage

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping, jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris.

1.4.2 Handling

Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Do not place any other material or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench. Use of pinch bars and



tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the bare ends of the pipe. The interior of pipe and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operations by plugging or other approved method. Before installation, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Material found to be defective before or after laying shall be replaced with sound material without additional expense to the Government. Store rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct sunlight.

1.4.2.1 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe and Fittings

Handle Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), pipe and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Store plastic piping and jointing materials that are not to be installed immediately under cover out of direct sunlight.

Storage facilities shall be classified and marked in accordance with NFPA 704.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION MAIN MATERIALS

2.1.1 Piping Materials

2.1.1.1 Ductile-Iron Piping

a. Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, AWWA C151/A21.51. Flanged pipe, AWWA C115/A21.15. Fittings, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53. Fittings shall have pressure rating at least equivalent to that of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be suitable for the specified joints. Pipe and fittings shall have cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness.

b. Joints and Jointing Material:

(1) Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be mechanical jointsunless otherwise indicated. Provide mechanical joints where indicated.(3) Mechanical Joints: Dimensional and material requirements for pipe ends, glands, bolts and nuts, and gaskets, AWWA C111/A21.11.

2.1.1.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping

a. Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, AWWA C900, shall be plain end or gasket bell end, Pressure Class 150 (DR 18) with cast-iron-pipe-equivalent OD. b. Pipe 14 through 36 diameter: AWWA C905.

b. Fittings for PVC pipe: Fittings shall be gray iron or ductile iron, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53, and have cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness. Fittings with push-on joint ends shall conform to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except that bell design shall be modified, as approved, for push-on joint suitable for use with PVC plastic pipe specified in this paragraph. Iron fittings and specials shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. d. Joints and Jointing Material: Joints for pipe shall be push-on joints, ASTM D3139. Joints between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories



shall be push-on joints ASTM D3139, or compression-type joints/mechanical joints, ASTM D3139 and AWWA C111/A21.11. Provide each joint connection with an elastomeric gasket suitable for the bell or coupling with which it is to be used. Gaskets for push-on joints for pipe, ASTM F477. Gaskets for push-on joints and compression-type joints/mechanical joints for joint connections between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, AWWA C111/A21.11, respectively, for push-on joints and mechanical joints. Mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling, as specified in paragraph entitled "Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings," may be used as an optional jointing method in lieu of push-on joints on plain-end PVC plastic pipe, subject to the limitations specified for mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling and to the use of internal stiffeners as specified for compression-type joints in ASTM D3139.

2.1.2 Valves, Hydrants, and Other Water Main Accessories

2.1.2.1 Gate Valves on Buried Piping

AWWA C500, AWWA C509, AWWA C515,or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to: (1) AWWA C500 shall be nonrising stem type with double-disc gates and mechanical-joint ends as appropriate for the adjoining pipe, (2) AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 shall be nonrising stem type with mechanical-joint ends or resilient-seated gate valves 3 to 12 inches in size, and (3) UL 262 shall be inside-screw type with operating nut, double-disc or split-wedge type gate, designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 175 psi, and shall have mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the pipe to which it is joined. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall have 0-ring stem seals Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Valves shall be of one manufacturer.

2.1.2.2 Fire Hydrants

Dry-barrel type or wet-barrel type , except that flush-type hydrants shall be provided where indicated. Paint hydrants with at least one coat of primer and two coats of yellow enamel paint, except use red enamel paint for tops of hydrants in non-potable water systems. Stencil hydrant number and main size on the hydrant barrel using black stencil paint.

a. Dry-Barrel Type Fire Hydrants: Dry-barrel type hydrants, AWWA C502 or UL 246, "Base Valve" design, shall have 6 inch inlet, 5 1/4 inch valve opening, one 4 1/2 inch pumper connection, and two 2 1/2 inch hose connections. end shall conform to the applicable requirements as specified for the joint. Size and shape of operating nut, cap nuts, and threads on hose and pumper connections shall be as specified in AWWA C502. Hydrants indicated as "traffic type," shall have frangible sections as mentioned in AWWA C502. The traffic type hydrant shall have special couplings joining upper and lower sections of hydrant barrel and upper and lower sections of hydrant stem and shall be designed to have the special couplings break from a force not less than that which would be imposed by a moving vehicle; hydrant shall operate properly under normal conditions.



2.1.2.3 Indicator Posts

UL 789. Provide for gate valves where indicated.

2.1.2.4 Valve Boxes

Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping , except where indicator post is shown. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Cast-iron boxes shall have a minimum cover and wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. as indicated. Cast-iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2.1.2.5 Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings

Couplings shall be designed to couple plain-end piping by compression of a ring gasket at each end of the adjoining pipe sections. The coupling shall consist of one middle ring flared or beveled at each end to provide a gasket seat; two follower rings; two resilient tapered rubber gaskets; and bolts and nuts to draw the follower rings toward each other to compress the gaskets. The middle ring and the follower rings shall be true circular sections free from irregularities, flat spots, and surface defects; the design shall provide for confinement and compression of the gaskets. For ductile ironandPVC plastic pipe, the middle ring shall be of cast-iron or steel; and the follower rings shall be of malleable or ductile iron. Malleable and ductile iron shall, conform to ASTM A47/A47M and ASTM A536, respectively. Gaskets shall be designed for resistance to set after installation and shall meet the applicable requirements specified for gaskets for mechanical joint in AWWA C111/A21.11. Bolts shall be track-head type, ASTM A307, Grade A, with nuts, ASTM A563, Grade A; or round-head square-neck type bolts, ASME B18.5.2.1M and ASME B18.5.2.2M with hex nuts, ASME B18.2.2. Bolts shall be 5/8 inch in diameter; minimum number of bolts for each coupling shall be as indicated. Bolt holes in follower rings shall be of a shape to hold fast the necks of the bolts used. Mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling shall not be used as an optional method of jointing except where pipeline is adequately anchored to resist tension pull across the joint. Mechanical couplings shall provide a tight flexible joint under all reasonable conditions, such as pipe movements caused by expansion, contraction, slight setting or shifting in the ground, minor variations in trench gradients, and traffic vibrations. Couplings shall be of strength not less than the adjoining pipeline.

2.1.2.6 Tracer Wire for Nonmetallic Piping

Provide bare copper or aluminum wire not less than 0.10 inch in diameter in sufficient length to be continuous over each separate run of nonmetallic pipe.

2.2 WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS

2.2.1 Piping Materials

2.2.1.1 Plastic Piping

Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for potable water service. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.



a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Screw Joints: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40; or ASTM D2241, with SDR as necessary to provide 150 psi minimum pressure rating. Fittings, ASTM D2466 or ASTM D2467. Pipe and fittings shall be of the same PVC plastic material and shall be one of the following pipe/fitting combinations, as marked on the pipe and fitting, respectively: PVC 2120/PVC II; PVC 2116/PVC II. Solvent cement for jointing, ASTM D2564. Pipe couplings, when used shall be tested as required by ASTM D2464.

b. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Elastomeric-Gasket Joints:

Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D1785 Schedule 40, with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified.

c. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Solvent Cement Joints:

Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D1785 or ASTM D2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure.2.2.1.2

Insulating Joints

Joints between pipe of dissimilar metals shall have a rubber-gasketed or other suitable approved type of insulating joint or dielectric coupling which will effectively prevent metal-to-metal contact between adjacent sections of piping.

2.2.2 Water Service Line Appurtenances

2.2.2.1 Corporation Stops

Ground key type; bronze, ASTM B61 or ASTM B62; and suitable for the working pressure of the system. Ends shall be as appropriate for connection to the service piping. 2.2.2.2 Curb or Service Stops

Ground key, round way, inverted key type; made of bronze, ASTM B61 or ASTM B62; and suitable for the working pressure of the system. Ends shall be as appropriate for connection to the service piping. Arrow shall be cast into body of the curb or service stop indicating direction of flow.

2.2.2.3 Service Clamps

Service clamps used for repairing damaged cast-iron, steel, PVC or asbestos-cement pipe shall have a pressure rating not less than that of the pipe to be connected and shall be either the single or double flattened strap type. Clamps shall have a galvanized malleable-iron body with cadmium plated straps and nuts. Clamps shall have a rubber gasket cemented to the body.

2.2.2.4 Dielectric Fittings

Dielectric fittings shall be installed between threaded ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe, fittings and valves, except where corporation stops join mains. Dielectric fittings shall prevent metal-to-metal contact of dissimilar metallic piping elements and shall be suitable for the required working pressure.



2.2.2.5 Check Valves

Check valves shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or as indicated. Valves shall have a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the valve. Valves shall open to permit flow when inlet pressure is greater than the discharge pressure, and shall close tightly to prevent return flow when discharge pressure exceeds inlet pressure. The size of the valve, working pressure, manufacturer's name, initials, or trademark shall be cast on the body of each valve. Valves 2 inches and larger shall be outside lever and springValves 2 inches and smaller shall be all bronze designed for screwed fittings, and shall conform to MSS SP-80, Class 150, Types 3 and 4 as suitable for the application.

2.2.2.6 Gate Valves 3 Inch Size and Larger on Buried PipingGate valves 3 inch size and larger on buried piping AWWA C500 or UL 262 and of one manufacturer. Valves, AWWA C500, nonrising stem type with double-disc gates. Valves, UL 262, inside-screw type with operating nut, split wedge or double disc type gate, and designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 175 psi. Materials for UL 262 valves conforming to the reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall have 0-ring stem seals and shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Valves shall have a protective epoxy interior coating conforming to AWWA C550. 2.2.2.7 Gate Valves Smaller than 3 Inch

in Size on Buried Piping

Gate valves smaller than 3 inch size on Buried Piping MSS SP-80, Class 150, solid wedge, nonrising stem. Valves shall have flanged or threaded end connections, with a union on one side of the valve. Provide handwheel operators.

2.2.2.8 Gate Valve 3 Inch Size and Larger

Gate valves 3 inch size and larger in aboveground locations, AWWA C500 or UL 262 and of one make. Valves conforming to: (1) AWWA C500 shall be outside-screw-and-yoke rising-stem type with flanged ends and double-disc and (2) UL 262 shall be outside-screw-and-yoke type, shall be designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 175 psi, and shall have flanged ends and double-disc or split-wedge.. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Provide valves with handwheels that open by a counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Valves shall have a protective epoxy interior coating conforming to AWWA C550.

2.2.2.9 Gate Valves Smaller Than 3 Inch Size in Valve Pits

MSS SP-80, Class 150, solid wedge, inside screw, rising stem. Valves shall have flanged or threaded end connections, with a union on one side of the valve and a handwheel operator.

2.2.2.10 Curb Boxes

Provide a curb box for each curb or service stop. Curb boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the stop on which it is to be used. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. Each box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.



2.2.2.11 Valve Boxes

Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches Cast-iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2.2.2.12 Tapping Sleeves

Tapping sleeves of the sizes indicated for connection to existing main shall be the cast gray, ductile, or malleable iron, split-sleeve type with flanged or grooved outlet, and with bolts, follower rings and gaskets on each end of the sleeve. Construction shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 175 psi. Bolts shall have square heads and hexagonal nuts. Longitudinal gaskets and mechanical joints with gaskets shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the sleeve. When using grooved mechanical tee, it shall consist of an upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning which engages a machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing an elastomeric gasket which conforms to the pipe outside diameter around the hole and a lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly by nuts and bolts as specified, pretorqued to 50 foot-pound.

2.2.2.13 Displacement Type Meters

Displacement type meters shall conform to AWWA C700. Registers shall be straight-reading and shall read in U.S. gallons. Connections shall be suitable to the type of pipe and conditions encountered.

WATER METER

A. Meters shall comply with the accuracy and capacity requirements of AWWA C700 and meet the following criteria:

1. Positive displacement, oscillating piston, or oscillating disc type. 2. Magnetic drive with magnetic shielding. 3. Straight reading sealed register graduated in gallons. 4. All bronze split case. 5. Integral strainer. 6. Threaded ends. 7. With pulse switch initiator. 8. Water meter shall be located in the mechanical room. If conditions require alternate location, the location shall be approved prior to installation by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

B. Water meters must be capable of accurately measuring and handling water at pressure, temperatures and flow rates encountered. The pulse initiator will provide the maximum number of pulses, up to 500 per minute, obtainable from the manufacturer; and not less than 1 pulse per 100 gallons.

C. Water meters shal be capable of providing pulse or digital signals for remote readout. Water metewrs shall be compatible with the exising wireless Sensus FlexNet Advanced Metering Infrastructure (FlexNet) system to include the exising FlexNet tower gateway base station, regional network interface system components ans set to the approved system operating frequency provided by base personnel. Contractor shall be responsible for programming the meter and ensuring it is communicating with the FlexNet system.



2.2.2.14 Meter Boxes

Meter boxes shall be of cast iron, concrete, or plastic. The boxes shall be of sufficient size to completely enclose the meter and shutoff valve or service stop. Meter boxes set in paved areas subject to vehicular traffic shall be cast iron, or concrete with cast iron lid and cast iron meter reader lid. Boxes set in sidewalks, not subject to vehicular traffic, shall be concrete with cast iron lid and cast iron meter reader lid. Plastic boxes and lids may be used in unpaved areas or grass areas not subject to vehicular traffic. Box height shall extend from invert of the meter to final grade at the meter location. The lid shall have the word "WATER" cast in it.

2.2.2.15 Disinfection

Chlorinating materials shall conform to the following:

Chlorine, Liquid: AWWA B301.

Hypochlorite, Calcium and Sodium: AWWA B300.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES

3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines

These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where specific exception is made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs.

3.1.1.1 Location of Water Lines

Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building , unless otherwise indicated. Where the location of the water line is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not lay water line closer horizontally than 10 feet from any sewer line and 6 feet from any non-potable water line. Where water lines cross under gravity sewer lines, encase sewer line fully in concrete for a distance of at least 10 feet on each side of the crossing, unless sewer line is made of pressure pipe with rubber-gasketed joints and no joint is located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Lay water lines which cross sewer force mains and inverted siphons at least 2 feet above these sewer lines; when joints in the sewer line are closer than 3 feet horizontally from the water line, encase these joints in concrete. Do not lay water lines in the same trench with gas lines, fuel lines or electric wiring. Where water piping is required to be installed within 3 feet of existing structures, the water pipe shall be sleeved. Provide ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel sleeves. Annular space between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic. The Contractor shall install the water pipe and sleeve ensuring that there will be no damage to the structures and no settlement or movement of foundations or footings.

3.1.1.2 Earthwork

Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00.



3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing

Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories, and maintain in a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, fittings, valves, or any other water line material into trenches. Cut pipe in a neat workmanlike manner accurately to length established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Grade the pipeline in straight lines; avoid the formation of dips and low points. Support pipe at proper elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Provide anchors and supports where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of water until joints have been properly made. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation. Depth of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 2 1/2 feet.

3.1.1.4 Installation of Tracer Wire

Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction operations.

3.1.1.5 Connections to Existing Water Lines

Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under pressure in accordance with the recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped.

3.1.1.6 Penetrations

Pipe passing through walls of valve pits and structures shall be provided with ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel wall sleeves. Annular space between walls and sleeves shall be filled with rich cement mortar. Annular space between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic.

3.1.1.7 Flanged Pipe

Flanged pipe shall only be installed above ground or with the flanges in valve pits.

3.1.2 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Mains

3.1.2.1 Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe

Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe and Associated Fittings: Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines"; with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying of pipe, joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, and setting of hydrants, valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance



installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation."

a. Jointing: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type joint, using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to-pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made bevel; for push-on joint connections to metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a bevel approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use an approved lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying the pipe and the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation," for pipe joint assembly. Assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings, valves, and other accessories in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories and with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make compression-type joints/mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, nuts, and internal stiffeners previously specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and with the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off spigot end of pipe for compression-type joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel. Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance with the recommendations of the coupling manufacturer using internal stiffeners as previously specified for compression-type joints.

b. Offset: Maximum offset in alignment between adjacent pipe joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative, but shall not exceed 5 degrees.

c. Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing)for pipe anchorage , except where metal harness is indicated. Thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for reaction or thrust blocking and plugging of dead ends, except that size and positioning of thrust blocks shall be as indicated. Use concrete, ASTM C94/C94M, having a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement, 2 1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressive strength.d. Fittings: Install in accordance with AWWA C605.

3.1.2.2 Installation of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping

a. General Installation:

PE pipes shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2774.

b. Jointing:

Jointing shall comply with ASTM D2657, Technique I-Socket Fusion or Technique II-Butt Fusion.

c. Offsets:

Maximum offset in alignment between adjacent pipe joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Contracting



Officer's Representative, but shall not exceed 5 degrees.

3.1.2.3 Installation of Valves and Hydrants

a. Installation of Valves: Install gate valves, AWWA C500 and UL 262, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C500. Install gate valves, AWWA C509 or AWWA C515, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C509 or AWWA C515. Install gate valves on PVC water mains in accordance with the recommendations for appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation." Install check valves in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation. Make and assemble joints to gate valves and check valves as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings.

b. Installation of Hydrants: Install hydrants in accordance with AWWA C600 for hydrant installation and as indicated. Make and assemble joints as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Provide metal harness as specified under pipe anchorage requirements for the respective pipeline material to which hydrant is attached. Install hydrants with the 4 1/2 inch connections facing the adjacent paved surface. If there are two paved adjacent surfaces, contact the Contracting Officer's Representative for further instructions.

3.1.3 Installation of Water Service Piping

3.1.3.1 Location

Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been installed. Where building service has not been installed, terminate water service lines approximately 5 feet from the building line at the points indicated; such water service lines shall be closed with plugs or caps.

3.1.3.2 Service Line Connections to Water Mains

Connect service lines 2 inch and less in size to the main by a corporation stop and install a service stop below the frostlineConnect service lines to ductile-iron water mains in accordance with AWWA C600 for service taps.Connect service lines to PVC plastic water mains in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-8 and the recommendations of AWWA M23, Chapter 9, "Service Connections."3.1.4 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Service

Piping

3.1.4.1 Installation of Plastic Piping

Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the applicable requirements of ASTM D2774 and ASTM D2855, unless otherwise specified. Handle solvent cements used to join plastic piping in accordance with ASTM F402.

a. Jointing: Make solvent-cemented joints for PVC plastic piping using the solvent cement previously specified for this material; assemble



joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. Make plastic pipe joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

b. Plastic Pipe Connections to Appurtenances: Connect plastic pipe service lines to corporation stops and gate valves in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

3.1.5 Disinfection

Prior to disinfection, obtain Contracting Officer's Representative approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from disinfection procedures. Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 and 0.5 parts per million, or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit the results prior to the new water piping being placed into service. Disinfection of systems supplying nonpotable water is not required.


3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections

Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain Contracting Officer's Representative approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing. The Contracting Officer's Representative will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. Do not begin testing on any section of a pipeline where concrete thrust blocks have been provided until at least 5 days after placing of the concrete.

3.2.2 Testing Procedure

Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable specified standard, except for the special testing requirements given in paragraph entitled "Special Testing Requirements." The amount of leakage on ductile-iron pipelines with mechanical-joints shall not exceed the amounts given in AWWA C600; no leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other method. Test PVC plastic water mains and water service lines made with PVC plastic water main pipe in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for pressure and leakage tests. The amount of leakage on pipelines made of PVC plastic water main pipe shall not exceed the amounts given in UBPPA UNI-B-3, except that at joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings, no leakage will be allowed. Test water service lines in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing. No leakage will be allowed at plastic pipe joints,flanged jointsandscrewed joints.

3.2.3 Special Testing Requirements

For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the



maximum working pressure of the system, except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter, hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi. Hold this pressure for not less than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.

3.3 CLEANUP

Upon completion of the installation of water lines, and appurtenances, all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed.




SECTION 33 30 00

SANITARY SEWERS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES








AWWA C605 (2005) Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C900 (2007; Errata 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution

AWWA M23 (2002; 2nd Ed) Manual: PVC Pipe - Design and Installation





ASTM C150/C150M (2015) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C270 (2014) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry




ASTM C443 (2011) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets

ASTM C478 (2009) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

ASTM C923 (2008) Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals


ASTM C969 (2002; R 2009) Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines

ASTM C972 (2000; R 2011) Compression-Recovery of Tape Sealant

ASTM C990 (2009) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

ASTM D 1784 (2011) Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D 1785 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D 2241 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

ASTM D 2321 (2011) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D 2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D 2466 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D 2467 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe



Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D 2680 (2001; R 2009) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping

ASTM D 3034 (2008) Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3139 (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D 3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D 3753 (2005e1) Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells

ASTM D 4101 (2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials

ASTM D 412 (2006ae2) Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

ASTM D 624 (2000; R 2007) Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers

ASTM F 477 (2010) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

ASTM F 949 (2010) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings

U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

CID A-A-60005 (Basic; Notice 2) Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump And Catch Basin, Manhole


29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders


1.2.1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline

Provide mains and laterals 6 - 8 inch lines of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Provide building connections 3 - 4_inch lines of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Provide new and modify existing exterior sanitary gravity sewer piping and appurtenances. Provide each system



complete and ready for operation. The exterior sanitary gravity sewer system includes equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship as specified herein more than 5 feet outside of building walls.

1.2.2 Sanitary Sewer Pressure Lines

Provide pressure lines of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pressure pipe.

1.2.3 USACE Project

The construction required herein shall include appurtenant structures and building sewers to points of connection with the building drains 5 feet outside the building to which the sewer system is to be connected. Replace damaged material and redo unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Government. Backfilling shall be accomplished after inspection by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and shall follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install the plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:


Existing Conditions

SD-02 Shop Drawings

DrawingsPrecast concrete manholeMetal itemsFrames, covers, and gratings

SD-03 Product Data

Pipeline materials

SD-06 Test Reports

Reports

SD-07 Certificates

Portland CementGaskets




1.4.1 Installer Qualifications

Install specified materials by a licensed underground utility Contractor licensed for such work in the state where the work is to be performed. Installing Contractor's License shall be current and be state certified or state registered.

1.4.2 Drawings

a. Submit Installation Drawings showing complete detail, both plan and side view details with proper layout and elevations.

b. Submit As-Built Drawings for the complete sanitary sewer system showing complete detail with all dimensions, both above and below grade, including invert elevation.

c. Sign and seal As-Built Drawings by a Professional Surveyor and Mapper. Include the following statement: "All potable water lines crossed by sanitary hazard mains are in accordance with the permitted utility separation requirements."



1.5.1.1 Piping

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.

1.5.1.2 Metal Items

Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials.

1.5.1.3 Cement, Aggregate, and Reinforcement

As specified in Section 30 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

1.5.2 Handling

Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care not to damage linings of pipe and fittings; if lining is damaged, make satisfactory repairs. Carry, do not drag, pipe to trench.


Submit drawings of existing conditions, after a thorough inspection of the area in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Representative. Details shall include the environmental conditions of the site and adjacent areas. Submit copies of the records for verification before starting work.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPELINE MATERIALS

Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below. Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts.

2.1.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Sewer Piping

2.1.1.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, or ASTM F 949 with ends suitable for elastomeric gasket joints.2.1.1.2 PVC Plastic Gravity Joints and Jointing Material

Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477.

2.1.2 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Associated Fittings

2.1.2.1 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings

a. Pipe and Fittings Less Than 4 inch Diameter: Pipe, couplings and fittings shall be manufactured of materials conforming to ASTM D 1784, Class 12454B.

(1) Screw-Joint: Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80, with joints meeting requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified. Fittings for threaded pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM D 2464, threaded to conform to the requirements of ASME B1.20.1 for use with Schedule 80 pipe and fittings. Pipe couplings when used, shall be tested as required by ASTM D 2464.

(2) Push-On Joint: ASTM D 3139, with ASTM F 477 gaskets. Fittings for push-on joints shall be iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C111/A21.11. Iron fittings and specials shall shall be cement-mortar lined (standard thickness) in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4.

(3) Solvent Cement Joint: Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 or ASTM D 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure. Fittings for solvent cement jointing shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467.

b. Pipe and Fittings 4 inch Diameter to 12 inch: Pipe shall conform to AWWA C900 and shall be plain end or gasket bell end, Pressure Class 150 (DR 18), with cast-iron-pipe-equivalent OD. Fittings shall be gray-iron or ductile-iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53 and shall have cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness. Fittings with push-on joint ends shall conform to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except that bell design shall be modified, as approved, for push-on joint suitable for use with the PVC plastic pressure pipe specified in this paragraph.



2.1.2.2 PVC Plastic Pressure Joints and Jointing Material

Joints for pipe, 4 inch to 12 inch diameter, shall be push-on joints as specified in ASTM D 3139. Joints between pipe and fittings shall be push-on joints as specified in ASTM D 3139 or shall be compression-type joints/mechanical-joints as respectively specified in ASTM D 3139 and AWWA C111/A21.11. Each joint connection shall be provided with an elastomeric gasket suitable for the bell or coupling with which it is to be used. Gaskets for push-on joints for pipe shall conform to ASTM F 477. Gaskets for push-on joints and compression-type joints/mechanical-joints for joint connections between pipe and fittings shall be as specified in AWWA C111/A21.11, respectively, for push-on joints and mechanical-joints.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

2.2.1 Cement Mortar

Cement mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M with Type II cement.

2.2.2 Portland Cement

Submit certificates of compliance stating the type of cement used in manufacture of concrete pipe, fittings and precast manholes. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150/C150M, Type II for concrete used in concrete pipe, concrete pipe fittings, and manholes and type optional with the Contractor for cement used in concrete cradle, concrete encasement, and thrust blocking. Where aggregates are alkali reactive, as determined by Appendix XI of ASTM C33/C33M, a cement containing less than 0.60 percent alkalies shall be used.

2.2.3 Portland Cement Concrete

Portland cement concrete shall conform to ASTM C94/C94M, compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days, except for concrete cradle and encasement or concrete blocks for manholes. Concrete used for cradle and encasement shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi minimum at 28 days. Concrete in place shall be protected from freezing and moisture loss for 7 days.


2.3.1 Precast Concrete Manholes & Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes

Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops shall conform to ASTM C478. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes shall conform to ASTM D 3753.

2.3.2 Gaskets and Connectors

Gaskets for joints between manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C443. Resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and pipes entering manhole shall conform to ASTM C923 or ASTM C990.

2.3.3 External Preformed Rubber Joint Seals

An external preformed rubber joint seal shall be an accepted method of sealing cast iron covers to precast concrete sections to prevent ground water infiltration into sewer systems. All finished and sealed manholes constructed in accordance with paragraph entitled "Manhole Construction" shall be tested for leakage in the same manner as pipelines as described in



paragraph entitled "Leakage Tests." The seal shall be multi-section with a neoprene rubber top section and all lower sections made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) rubber with a minimum thickness of 60 mils. Each unit shall consist of a top and bottom section and shall have mastic on the bottom of the bottom section and mastic on the top and bottom of the top section. The mastic shall be a non-hardening butyl rubber sealant and shall seal to the cone/top slab of the manhole/catch basin and over the lip of the casting. Extension sections shall cover up to two more adjusting rings. Properties and values are listed in the following tables:

Properties, Test Methods and Minimum Values forRubber used in Preformed Joint Seals

Physical Properties Test Methods EPDM Neoprene Butyl mastic

Tensile, psi ASTM D 412 1840 2195 -

Elongation percent ASTM D 412 553 295 350

Tear Resistance, ppi ASTM D 624 280 160 - (Die B)

Rebound, percent, ASTM C972 - - 11 5 minutes (mod.)

Rebound, percent, ASTM C972 - - 12 2 hours

2.3.4 Metal Items

2.3.4.1 Frames, Covers, and Gratings for Manholes

CID A-A-60005, cast iron; figure numbers shall be as follows:

a. Traffic manhole: Provide in paved areas.

Frame: Figure 1, Size 22ACover: Figure 8, Size 22ASteps: Figure 19

b. Non-traffic manhole:

Frame: Figure 4, Size 22Cover: Figure 12, Size 22Steps: Figure 19

Frames and covers shall be cast iron, ductile iron or reinforced concrete. Cast iron frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall be of type suitable for the application, circular, without vent holes. The frames and covers shall have a combined weight of not less than 400 pounds. Reinforced concrete frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall conform to ASTM C478. The word "Sanitary Sewer" shall be stamped or cast into covers so that it is plainly visible.

2.3.4.2 Manhole Steps

Zinc-coated steel conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27. As an option, plastic or rubber coating pressure-molded to the steel may be used. Plastic coating shall conform to ASTM D 4101, copolymer polypropylene. Rubber shall



conform to ASTM C443, except shore A durometer hardness shall be 70 plus or minus 5.Aluminum steps or rungs will not be permitted. Steps are not required in manholes less than 4 feet deep.

2.3.4.3 Manhole Ladders

A steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of a manhole exceeds 12 feet. The ladder shall not be less than 16 inches in width, with 3/4 inch diameter rungs spaced 12 inches apart. The two stringers shall be a minimum 3/8 inch thick and 2 inches wide. Ladders and inserts shall be galvanized after fabrication in conformance with ASTM A123/A123M.

2.4 REPORTS

Submit Test Reports. Compaction and density test shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Submit Inspection Reports for daily activities during the installation of the sanitary system. Information in the report shall be detailed enough to describe location of work and amount of pipe laid in place, measured in linear feet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION

3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines

These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made in the following paragraphs entitled "Special Requirements."

3.1.1.1 Earthwork

Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.1.1.2 Pipe Laying and Jointing

Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those found defective and remove from site. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay nonpressure pipe with the bell ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe or fittings that do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Provide batterboards not more than 25 feet apart in trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batterboards for the same purpose. Branch connections shall be made by use of regular fittings or solvent cemented saddles as approved. Saddles for PVC composite pipe shall conform to Figure 2 of ASTM D 2680; saddles for PVC pipe shall conform to Table 4 of ASTM D 3034.

3.1.2 Special Requirements

3.1.2.1 Installation of PVC Plastic Piping

Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for laying and joining pipe and fittings. Make joints with the gaskets specified for joints with this piping and assemble



in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for assembly of joints. Make joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

3.1.2.2 Installation of PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings

Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section; with the requirements of AWWA C605 for laying of pipe, joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, and setting of hydrants, valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation."

a. Pipe Less Than 4 Inch Diameter:

(1) Threaded joints shall be made by wrapping the male threads with joint tape or by applying an approved thread lubricant, then threading the joining members together. The joints shall be tightened with strap wrenches which will not damage the pipe and fittings. The joint shall be tightened no more than 2 threads past hand-tight.

(2) Push-On Joints: The ends of pipe for push-on joints shall be beveled to facilitate assembly. Pipe shall be marked to indicate when the pipe is fully seated. The gasket shall be lubricated to prevent displacement. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the gasket remains in proper position in the bell or coupling while making the joint.

(3) Solvent-weld joints shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions.

b. Pipe 4 Inch Diameter Joints: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type joint, using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to-pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made bevel; for push-on joint connections to fittings, cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a bevel approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use an approved lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for laying the pipe and the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation," for pipe joint assembly. Assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories and with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make compression-type joints/mechanical-joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, nuts, and internal stiffeners specified for this type joint and assemble in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and with the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off spigot end of pipe for compression-type joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel.

c. Pipe anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage. Size and position thrust blocks as indicated. Use concrete conforming to ASTM C94/C94M having a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner



than one part cement, 2 1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressive strength.

3.1.3 Concrete Work

Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. The pipe shall be supported on a concrete cradle, or encased in concrete where indicated or directed.

3.1.4 Manhole Construction

Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base sections. Make inverts in cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete bases with a smooth-surfaced semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour of the adjacent sewer sections. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert of as large a radius as manhole size will permit. For cast-in-place concrete construction, either pour bottom slabs and walls integrally or key and bond walls to bottom slab. No parging will be permitted on interior manhole walls. For precast concrete construction, make joints between manhole sections with the gaskets specified for this purpose; install in the manner specified for installing joints in concrete piping. Parging will not be required for precast concrete manholes. Cast-in-place concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Concrete Work" of this section. Make joints between concrete manholes and pipes entering manholes with the resilient connectors specified for this purpose; install in accordance with the recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Where a new manhole is constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe as necessary to construct the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends are approximately flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not protruding into the manhole. Use resilient connectors as previously specified for pipe connectors to concrete manholes.


3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections

The Contracting Officer's Representative will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. Perform field tests and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be able to produce evidence, when required, that each item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

3.2.2 Tests for Nonpressure Lines

Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line. When pressure piping is used in a nonpressure line for nonpressure use, test this piping as specified for nonpressure pipe.

3.2.2.1 Leakage Tests

Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests, or by low-pressure air tests. Prior to testing for leakage, backfill trench up to at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to prevent pipeline movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe sufficient to prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit



inspection. When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the allowable amount specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the same manner. Correct visible leaks regardless of leakage test results.

a. Infiltration tests and exfiltration tests: Perform these tests for sewer lines made of the specified materials, not only concrete, in accordance with ASTM C969. Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C969.

b. Low-pressure air tests: Perform tests as follows:3.2.3 Tests for Pressure Lines

Test pressure lines in accordance with the applicable standard specified in this paragraph, except for test pressures. For hydrostatic pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi in excess of the maximum working pressure of the system, but not less than 100 psi, holding the pressure for a period of not less than one hour. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test. Test PVC plastic pressure lines in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for pressure and leakage tests, using the allowable leakage given therein.

3.2.4 Field Tests for Concrete

Field testing requirements are covered in Section 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.




SECTION 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES02/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1.2 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 198 (2010) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE-OF-WAY ASSOCIATION (AREMA)

AREMA Eng Man (2010) Manual for Railway Engineering





ASTM B26/B26M (2014; E 2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM C1103 (2003; R 2009) Standard Practice for Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines

ASTM C139 (2011) Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes

ASTM C1433 (2010) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers

ASTM C231/C231M (2014) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the



Pressure Method

ASTM C270 (2014) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C32 (2011) Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale)

ASTM C425 (2004; R 2009) Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings

ASTM C443 (2011) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets

ASTM C478 (2009) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

ASTM C55 (2011) Concrete Brick

ASTM C62 (2010) Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)

ASTM C76 (2011) Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

ASTM C828 (2011) Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines

ASTM C877 (2008) External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections

ASTM C923 (2008) Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals

ASTM C924 (2002; R 2009) Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method

ASTM D1056 (2014) Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber

ASTM D1171 (1999; R 2007) Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking Outdoors or Chamber (Triangular Specimens)

ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)

ASTM D1751 (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient



Bituminous Types)

ASTM D1752 (2004a; R 2013) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion

ASTM D1784 (2011) Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D2167 (2008) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method

ASTM D2321 (2011) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D3350 (2010a) Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials

ASTM D6938 (2015) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM F1417 (2011a) Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low Pressure Air

ASTM F679 (2008) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F714 (2010) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Placing Pipe

SD-04 Samples

Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains

SD-07 Certificates



Resin CertificationPipeline TestingHydrostatic Test on Watertight JointsDetermination of DensityFrame and Cover for Gratings



Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.

1.4.2 Handling

Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not dragged.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS

Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and shall conform to the requirements specified.

2.1.1 Concrete Pipe

Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C76, Class III as specified.

2.1.2 PVC Pipe

Submit the pipe manufacturer's resin certification, indicating the cell classification of PVC used to manufacture the pipe, prior to installation of the pipe.

2.1.2.1 Smooth Wall PVC Pipe

ASTM F679 produced from PVC certified by the compounder as meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, minimum cell class 12454-B.

2.1.11 PE Pipe

Submit the pipe manufacturer's resin certification, indicating the cell classification of PE used to manufacture the pipe, prior to installation of the pipe. The minimum cell classification for polyethylene plastic shall



apply to each of the seven primary properties of the cell classification limits in accordance with ASTM D3350.

2.1.3 Smooth Wall PE Pipe

ASTM F714, maximum DR of 21 for pipes 3 to 24 inches in diameter and maximum DR of 26 for pipes 26 to 48 inches in diameter. Pipe shall be produced from PE certified by the resin producer as meeting the requirements of ASTM D3350, minimum cell class 335434C.

2.2 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

2.2.1 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box

Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C1433.


2.3.1 Concrete

Unless otherwise specified, concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform to the requirements for 3000 psi concrete under Section 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONRETE. The concrete mixture shall have air content by volume of concrete, based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer, of 5 to 7 percent when maximum size of coarse aggregate exceeds 1-1/2 inches. Air content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M. The concrete covering over steel reinforcing shall not be less than 1 inch thick for covers and not less than 1-1/2 inches thick for walls and flooring. Concrete covering deposited directly against the ground shall have a thickness of at least 3 inches between steel and ground. Expansion-joint filler material shall conform to ASTM D1751, or ASTM D1752, or shall be resin-impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D1752.

2.3.2 Mortar

Mortar for pipe joints, connections to other drainage structures, and brick or block construction shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M, except that the maximum placement time shall be 1 hour. The quantity of water in the mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar but in no case shall exceed the maximum gallons of water per sack of cement recommended by the manufacturers. Water shall be clean and free of harmful acids, alkalies, and organic impurities. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the ingredients are mixed with water. The inside of the joint shall be wiped clean and finished smooth. The mortar head on the outside shall be protected from air and sun with a proper covering until satisfactorily cured.

2.3.3 Precast Concrete Segmental Blocks

Precast concrete segmental block shall conform to ASTM C139, not more than 8 inches thick, not less than 8 inches long, and of such shape that joints can be sealed effectively and bonded with cement mortar.

2.3.4 Brick

Brick shall conform to ASTM C62, Grade SW; ASTM C55, Grade S-I or S-II; or ASTM C32, Grade MS. Mortar for jointing and plastering shall consist of one part portland cement and two parts fine sand. Lime may be added to the



mortar in a quantity not more than 25 percent of the volume of cement. The joints shall be filled completely and shall be smooth and free from surplus mortar on the inside of the structure. Brick structures shall be plastered with 1/2 inch of mortar over the entire outside surface of the walls. For square or rectangular structures, brick shall be laid in stretcher courses with a header course every sixth course. For round structures, brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course a stretcher course.

2.3.5 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes

Conform to ASTM C478. Joints between precast concrete risers and tops shall be full-bedded in cement mortar and shall be smoothed to a uniform surface on both interior and exterior of the structure.

2.3.6 Frame and Cover for Gratings

Submit certification on the ability of frame and cover or gratings to carry the imposed live load. Frame and cover for gratings shall be cast gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35B; cast ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12; or cast aluminum, ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 356.OT6. Weight, shape, size, and waterway openings for grates and curb inlets shall be as indicated on the plans. The word "Storm Sewer" shall be stamped or cast into covers so that it is plainly visible.

2.3.7 Joints

2.3.7.1 Flexible Watertight Joints

a. Materials: Flexible watertight joints shall be made with plastic or rubber-type gaskets for concrete pipe. The design of joints and the physical requirements for plastic gaskets shall conform to AASHTO M 198, and rubber-type gaskets shall conform to ASTM C443. Factory-fabricated resilient joint materials shall conform to ASTM C425. Gaskets shall have not more than one factory-fabricated splice, except that two factory-fabricated splices of the rubber-type gasket are permitted if the nominal diameter of the pipe being gasketed exceeds 54 inches.

b. Test Requirements: Watertight joints shall be tested and shall meet test requirements of paragraph HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS. Rubber gaskets shall comply with the oil resistant gasket requirements of ASTM C443. Certified copies of test results shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer's Representative before gaskets or jointing materials are installed. Alternate types of watertight joint may be furnished, if specifically approved.

2.3.7.2 External Sealing Bands

Requirements for external sealing bands shall conform to ASTM C877.

2.3.7.3 Flexible Watertight, Gasketed Joints

a. Gaskets: When infiltration or exfiltration is a concern for pipe lines, the couplings may be required to have gaskets. The closed-cell expanded rubber gaskets shall be a continuous band approximately 7 inches wide and approximately 3/8 inch thick, meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056, Type 2, A1, and shall have a quality retention rating of not less than 70 percent when tested for weather resistance by ozone chamber exposure, Method B of ASTM D1171. Rubber O-ring gaskets shall be 13/16 inch in diameter for pipe diameters of 36 inches or smaller and



7/8 inch in diameter for larger pipe having 1/2 inch deep end corrugation. Rubber O-ring gaskets shall be 1-3/8 inches in diameter for pipe having 1 inch deep end corrugations. O-rings shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 198 or ASTM C443. Flexible plastic gaskets shall conform to requirements of AASHTO M 198, Type B.

b. Connecting Bands: Connecting bands shall be of the type, size and sheet thickness of band, and the size of angles, bolts, rods and lugs as indicated or where not indicated as specified in the applicable standards or specifications for the pipe. Exterior rivet heads in the longitudinal seam under the connecting band shall be countersunk or the rivets shall be omitted and the seam welded. Watertight joints shall be tested and shall meet the test requirements of paragraph HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS.

2.3.7.4 PVC Plastic Pipes

Joints shall be solvent cement or elastomeric gasket type in accordance with the specification for the pipe and as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

2.3.7.5 Smooth Wall PE Plastic Pipe

Pipe shall be joined using butt fusion method as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

2.4 STEEL LADDER

Steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of the storm drainage structure exceeds 12 feet. These ladders shall be not less than 16 inches in width, with 3/4 inch diameter rungs spaced 12 inches apart. The two stringers shall be a minimum 3/8 inch thick and 2-1/2 inches wide. Ladders and inserts shall be galvanized after fabrication in conformance with ASTM A123/A123M.

2.5 DOWNSPOUT BOOTS

Boots used to connect exterior downspouts to the storm-drainage system shall be of gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30B or 35B. Shape and size shall be as indicated.

2.6 RESILIENT CONNECTORS

Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets shall conform to ASTM C923.

2.7 HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS

2.7.1 Concrete, PVC and PE Pipe

A hydrostatic test shall be made on the watertight joint types as proposed. Only one sample joint of each type needs testing; however, if the sample joint fails because of faulty design or workmanship, an additional sample joint may be tested. During the test period, gaskets or other jointing material shall be protected from extreme temperatures which might adversely affect the performance of such materials. Performance requirements for joints in reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to AASHTO M 198 or ASTM C443. Test requirements for joints in PVC and PE plastic pipe shall conform to ASTM D3212.



2.8 EROSION CONTROL RIPRAP

Provide nonerodible rock not exceeding 15 inches in its greatest dimension and choked with sufficient small rocks to provide a dense mass with a minimum thickness as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION FOR PIPE CULVERTS, STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and the requirements specified below.

3.1.1 Trenching

The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus one-half the pipe diameter on each side to permit satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed within the trench width as specified, without any overexcavation. Where trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of stronger pipe or special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or installation shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

3.1.2 Removal of Rock

Rock in either ledge or boulder formation shall be replaced with suitable materials to provide a compacted earth cushion having a thickness between unremoved rock and the pipe of at least 8 inches or 1/2 inch for each foot of fill over the top of the pipe, whichever is greater, but not more than three-fourths the nominal diameter of the pipe. Where bell-and-spigot pipe is used, the cushion shall be maintained under the bell as well as under the straight portion of the pipe. Rock excavation shall be as specified and defined in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.1.3 Removal of Unstable Material

Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer's Representative, is unexpectedly encountered in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material, compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of unstable material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while performing shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to the Government.

3.2 BEDDING

The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of the pipe.

3.2.1 Concrete Pipe Requirements

When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the drawings, concrete



pipe shall be bedded in granular material minimum 4 inch in depth in trenches with soil foundation. Depth of granular bedding in trenches with rock foundation shall be 1/2 inch in depth per foot of depth of fill, minimum depth of bedding shall be 8 inch up to maximum depth of 24 inches. The middle third of the granular bedding shall be loosely placed. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be removed and formed so entire barrel of pipe is uniformly supported. The bell hole and depressions for the joints shall be not more than the length, depth, and width required for properly making the particular type of joint.

3.2.2 Plastic Pipe

Bedding for PVC and PE pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321. Bedding, haunching, and initial backfill shall be either Class IB or II material.

3.3 PLACING PIPE

Submit printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for installation procedures of the material being placed, prior to installation.

Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or damaged pipe shall not be used. Plastic pipe shall be protected from exposure to direct sunlight prior to laying, if necessary to maintain adequate pipe stiffness and meet installation deflection requirements. Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lifting lugs in vertically elongated metal pipe shall be placed in the same vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as necessary. Deflection of installed flexible pipe shall not exceed the following limits:

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE TYPE OF PIPE DEFLECTION (%)

Plastic (PVC & HDPE) 5

Note post installation requirements of paragraph 'Deflection Testing' in PART 3 of this specification for all pipe products including deflection testing requirements.

3.3.1 Concrete and PVC Pipe

Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow.

3.3.2 Elliptical and Elliptical Reinforced Concrete Pipe

The manufacturer's reference lines, designating the top of the pipe, shall be within 5 degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe, during placement. Damage to or misalignment of the pipe shall be prevented in all backfilling operations.

3.3.3 Multiple Culverts

Where multiple lines of pipe are installed, adjacent sides of pipe shall be at least half the nominal pipe diameter apart.



3.3.4 Jacking Pipe Through Fills

Methods of operation and installation for jacking pipe through fills shall conform to requirements specified in Volume 1, Chapter 1, Part 4 of AREMA Eng Man.

3.4 JOINTING

3.4.1 Concrete Pipe

3.4.1.1 Flexible Watertight Joints

Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the particular manufacturer in regard to use of lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other special installation requirements. Surfaces to receive lubricants, cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe, and shall be protected from the sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be inspected before installing the pipe; any loose or improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe, and the joint pushed home. If, while the joint is being made the gasket becomes visibly dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade.

3.4.1.2 External Sealing Band Joint for Noncircular Pipe

Surfaces to receive sealing bands shall be dry and clean. Bands shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

3.5.1 Manholes and Inlets

Construction shall be of reinforced concrete, plain concrete, brick, precast reinforced concrete, precast concrete segmental blocks, prefabricated corrugated metal; complete with frames and covers or gratings; and with fixed galvanized steel ladders where indicated.

3.5.2 Walls and Headwalls

Construction shall be as indicated.

3.6 STEEL LADDER INSTALLATION

Ladder shall be adequately anchored to the wall by means of steel inserts spaced not more than 6 feet vertically, and shall be installed to provide at least 6 inches of space between the wall and the rungs. The wall along the line of the ladder shall be vertical for its entire length.

3.7 BACKFILLING

3.7.1 Backfilling Pipe in Trenches

After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of



pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation equal to the midpoint (spring line) of RCP or has reached an elevation of at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe for flexible pipe. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 8 inches. Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer's Representative, that sheeting or portions of bracing used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly. Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or pavements.

3.7.2 Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections

For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material shall be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a height of 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or 12 feet, whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 8 inches. Use select granular material for this entire region of backfill for flexible pipe installations.

3.7.3 Movement of Construction Machinery

When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be repaired or replaced.

3.7.4 Compaction


Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels, gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays, silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and cohesive soils will show normal moisture-density curves.

3.7.4.2 Minimum Density

Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to the following applicable minimum density, which will be determined as specified below.

a. Under airfield and heliport pavements, paved roads, streets, parking



areas, and similar-use pavements including adjacent shoulder areas, the density shall be not less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material, up to the elevation where requirements for pavement subgrade materials and compaction shall control.

b. Under unpaved or turfed traffic areas, density shall not be less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material.

c. Under nontraffic areas, density shall be not less than that of the surrounding material.

3.7.5 Determination of Density

Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and performed at no additional cost to the Government. Testing shall be performed by an approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to approval. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for moisture-density relations shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1557 except that mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are correlated with those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field density tests shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2167 or ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted, if necessary, using the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration of the referenced publications. ASTM D6938 results in a wet unit weight of soil and ASTM D6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall be checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D6938. Test results shall be furnished the Contracting Officer's Representative. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at intervals as directed.

3.8 PIPELINE TESTING

3.8.1 Leakage Tests

Lines shall be tested for leakage by low pressure air or water testing or exfiltration tests, as appropriate. Low pressure air testing for concrete pipes shall conform to ASTM C924. Low pressure air testing for plastic pipe shall conform to ASTM F1417. Low pressure air testing procedures for other pipe materials shall use the pressures and testing times prescribed in ASTM C828 or ASTM C924, after consultation with the pipe manufacturer. Testing of individual joints for leakage by low pressure air or water shall conform to ASTM C1103. Prior to exfiltration tests, the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. When the water table is 2 feet or more above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline section to be tested, infiltration shall be measured using a suitable weir or other device acceptable to the Contracting Officer's Representative. An exfiltration test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 2 feet is provided above both the water table and the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less



than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be reestablished. The amount of water required to maintain this water level during a 2-hour test period shall be measured. Leakage as measured by the exfiltration test shall not exceed 250 gallons per inch in diameter per mile of pipeline per day When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished.

3.8.2 Post-Installation Inspection

One hundred percent of all reinforced concrete pipe installations shall be checked for joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks greater than 0.01 inches, settlement and alignment. One hundred percent of all flexible pipes (HDPE, PVC) shall be checked for rips, tears, joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks, localized bucking, bulges, settlement and alignment.

a. Replace pipes having cracks greater than 0.1 inches in width or deflection greater than 5 percent deflection. An engineer shall evaluate all pipes with cracks greater than 0.01 inches but less than 0.10 inches to determine if any remediation or repair is required. RCP with crack width less than 0.10 inches and located in a non-corrosive environment (pH 5.5) are generally acceptable. Repair or replace any pipe with crack exhibiting displacement across the crack, exhibiting bulges, creases, tears, spalls, or delamination.

b. Reports: The deflection results and finial post installation inspection report shall include: a copy of all video taken, pipe location identification, equipment used for inspection, inspector name, deviation from design, grade, deviation from line, deflection and deformation of flexible pipe systems, inspector notes, condition of joints, condition of pipe wall (e.g. distress, cracking, wall damage dents, bulges, creases, tears, holes, etc.).

3.9 FIELD PAINTING

After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not buried in masonry or concrete to bare metal, free of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint.




SECTION 33 70 02.00 10

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS)

ATIS ANSI O5.1 (2008) Wood Poles -- Specifications & Dimensions

ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)

AEIC C8 (2000) Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV

AEIC CS8 (2000) Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV





ASTM B3 (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM B496 (2004e1; R 2010) Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors

ASTM B8 (2011) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments


IEEE 242 (2001; Errata 2003) Recommended Practice

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 1


for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - Buff Book

IEEE 386 (2006; INT 1 2011) Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V

IEEE 399 (1997) Brown Book IEEE Recommended Practice for Power Systems Analysis

IEEE 404 (2006) Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500,000 V

IEEE 48 (2009) Standard for Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV



IEEE C57.12.00 (2010) Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers

IEEE C57.12.21 (1992) Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type Self-Cooled, Single-Phase Distribution Transformers With High Voltage Bushings; High-voltage, 34,500 GRYD/19,920 Volts

IEEE C57.12.26 (1992) Pad-Mounted Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers for Use with Separable Insulated High-Voltage Connectors

IEEE C62.11 (2005; Amd 1 2008) Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits (>1kV)


ANSI C119.1 (2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts

ANSI C80.1 (2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA FB 1 (2012) Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 2


NEMA LA 1 (2009) Standard for Surge Arresters




UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel


UL 486A-486B (2013) Wire Connectors

UL 514A (2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes


UL 651 (2011; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings


Items provided under this section shall be specifically suitable for the following service conditions.

b. Altitude 1500 feet.

c. Ambient Temperature 110 degrees F.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



SD-02 Shop DrawingsPad Mounted Transformer; GPrimary Junction Cabinet; GAs-Built Drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Fault Current Analysis, Coordination Study and Arc Fault Analysis; GProtective Device; GNameplates; G

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 3


Material and Equipment; GInstallation Requirements; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Factory Tests; GField Testing; G

SD-07 Certificates

Material and Equipment; GCable Joints; G





Submit detail drawings consisting of equipment drawings, illustrations, schedules, instructions, diagrams manufacturers standard installation drawings and other information necessary to define the installation and enable the Government to check conformity with the requirements of the contract drawings.

a. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, complete details of such departures shall be included with the detail drawings. Approved departures shall be made at no additional cost to the Government.

b. Detail drawings shall show how components are assembled, function together and how they will be installed on the project. Data and drawings for component parts of an item or system shall be coordinated and submitted as a unit. Data and drawings shall be coordinated and included in a single submission. Multiple submissions for the same equipment or system are not acceptable except where prior approval has been obtained from the Contracting Officer. In such cases, a list of data to be submitted later shall be included with the first submission. Detail drawings shall consist of the following:

(1) Detail drawings showing physical arrangement, construction details, connections, finishes, materials used in fabrication, provisions for conduit or busway entrance, access requirements for installation and maintenance, physical size, electrical characteristics, foundation and support details, and equipment weight. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and/or dimensioned. All optional items shall be clearly identified as included or excluded.

(2) Internal wiring diagrams of equipment showing wiring as actually provided for this project. External wiring connections shall be clearly identified.

(3) Detail drawings shall as a minimum depict the installation of the following items:

(a) Transformer.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 4


(b) Primary Junction Cabinet.

1.4.1 As-Built Drawings

The as-built drawings shall be a record of the construction as installed. The drawings shall include the information shown on the contract drawings as well as deviations, modifications, and changes from the contract drawings, however minor. The as-built drawings shall be a full sized set of prints marked to reflect deviations, modifications, and changes. The as-built drawings shall be complete and show the location, size, dimensions, part identification, and other information. Additional sheets may be added. The as-built drawings shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by the Contractor's quality control representative and by the Contracting Officer prior to the submission of each monthly pay estimate. Upon completion of the work, provide three full sized sets of the marked prints to the Contracting Officer for approval. If upon review, the as-built drawings are found to contain errors and/or omissions, they will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Correct and return the as-built drawings to the Contracting Officer for approval within 10 calendar days from the time the drawings are returned to the Contractor.


Visually inspect devices and equipment when received and prior to acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged items shall be replaced. Store oil filled transformers and switches in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Wood poles held in storage for more than 2 weeks shall be stored in accordance with ATIS ANSI O5.1. Handle wood poles in accordance with ATIS ANSI O5.1, except that pointed tools capable of producing indentations more than 1 inch in depth shall not be used. Metal poles shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

One additional spare fuse or fuse element for each furnished fuse or fuse element shall be delivered to the contracting officer when the electrical system is accepted. Two complete sets of all special tools required for maintenance shall be provided, complete with a suitable tool box. Special tools are those that only the manufacturer provides, for special purposes (to access compartments, or operate, adjust, or maintain special parts).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCT

Provide material and equipment which are the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Items of the same classification shall be identical including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.

a. Submit a complete itemized listing of equipment and materials proposed for incorporation into the work. Each entry shall include an item number, the quantity of items proposed, and the name of the manufacturer of each such item.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 5


b. Where materials or equipment are specified to conform to the standards of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or to be constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), or the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), submit proof that the items provided conform to such requirements. The label of, or listing by, UL will be acceptable as evidence that the items conform. Either a certification or a published catalog specification data statement, to the effect that the item is in accordance with the referenced ANSI or IEEE standard, will be acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. A similar certification or published catalog specification data statement to the effect that the item is in accordance with the referenced NEMA standard, by a company listed as a member company of NEMA, will be acceptable as evidence that the item conforms.

c. In lieu of such certification or published data, the Contractor may submit a certificate from a recognized testing agency equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and that they conform to the requirements listed, including methods of testing of the specified agencies. Compliance with above-named requirements does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with any other requirements of the specifications.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

Submit catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications, product data, and printed information in sufficient detail and scope to verify compliance with the requirements of the contract documents.

2.2.1 General

Each major component of this specification shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be made of noncorrosive metal. Equipment containing liquid dielectrics shall have the type of dielectric on the nameplate. Sectionalizer switch nameplates shall have a schematic with all switch positions shown and labeled. As a minimum, nameplates shall be provided for transformers, circuit breakers, meters, switches, and switchgear.

2.2.2 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates

Power transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00. Nameplates shall indicate the number of gallons and composition of liquid-dielectric, and shall be permanently marked with a statement that the transformer dielectric to be supplied is non-polychlorinated biphenyl. If transformer nameplate is not so marked, furnish manufacturer's certification for each transformer that the dielectric is non-PCB classified, with less than 2ppm PCB content in accordance with paragraph LIQUID DIELECTRICS. Certifications shall be related to serial numbers on transformer nameplates. Transformer dielectric exceeding the 2ppm PCB content or transformers without certification will be considered as PCB insulated and will not be accepted.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 6


2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

2.3.1 Aluminum Materials

2.3.2 Ferrous Metal Materials

2.3.2.1 Hardware

Ferrous metal hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M and ASTM A123/A123M.

2.3.2.2 Equipment

Equipment and component items, including but not limited to transformer stations and ferrous metal luminaries not hot-dip galvanized or porcelain enamel finished, shall be provided with corrosion-resistant finishes which shall withstand 120 hours of exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 without loss of paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer coat to the metal surface in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. The scribed test mark and test evaluation shall be in accordance with ASTM D1654 with a rating of not less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1, (procedure A). Cut edges or otherwise damaged surfaces of hot-dip galvanized sheet steel or mill galvanized sheet steel shall be coated with a zinc rich paint conforming to the manufacturer's standard.

2.3.3 Finishing

Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified and finish painting of items only primed at the factory shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

2.4 CABLES

Cables shall be single conductor type unless otherwise indicated.

2.4.1 Medium-Voltage Cables

2.4.1.1 General

Cable construction shall be 15KV single copper conductor 133% insulated (EPR)with 1/3 concetric neutral and with semiconducting shield cable conforming to AEIC C8.

2.4.1.2 Ratings

Cables shall be rated for a circuit voltage 15 kV.

2.4.1.3 Conductor Material

Underground cables shall be soft drawn copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 for regular concentric and compressed stranding or ASTM B496 for compact stranding.

2.4.1.4 Insulation

Cable insulation shall be ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR) insulation conforming to the requirements of AEIC CS8. A 133 percent insulation level shall be used on 15 kV rated cables. Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 54 00 GREEN PROCUREMENT. Cables shall have a 1/3

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 7


concentric neutral.

2.4.1.5 Shielding

Cables shall have a semiconducting conductor shield, a semiconducting insulation shield, and an overall copper wire shield for each phase. The shield wire shall be sized to meet IEEE C2 requirements for a ground fault availability of 8000 amperes.

2.4.1.6 Jackets

Cables shall be provided with a polyethylene jacket.

2.4.2 Low-Voltage Cables

Cables shall be rated 600 volts and shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, and must be UL listed for the application or meet the applicable section of either ICEA or NEMA standards.

2.4.2.1 Conductor Material

Underground cables shall be annealed copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8.

2.4.2.2 Insulation

Insulation must be in accordance with NFPA 70, and must be UL listed for the application or meet the applicable sections of either ICEA, or NEMA standards.

2.4.2.2 In Duct

Cables shall be single-conductor cable, in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.5 CABLE JOINTS, TERMINATIONS, AND CONNECTORS

2.5.1 Medium-Voltage Cable Joints

Medium-voltage cable joints shall comply with IEEE 404. Medium-voltage cable terminations shall comply with IEEE 48. Joints shall be the standard products of a manufacturer and shall be either of the factory preformed type or of the kit type containing tapes and other required parts. Joints shall have ratings not less than the ratings of the cables on which they are installed. Splice kits may be of the heat-shrinkable type for voltages up to 15 kV, of the premolded splice and connector type, the conventional taped type, or the resin pressure-filled overcast taped type for voltages up to 35 kV; except that for voltages of 7.5 kV or less a resin pressure-filled type utilizing a plastic-tape mold is acceptable.

2.5.2 Medium-Voltage Separable Insulated Connectors

Separable insulated connectors shall comply with IEEE 386 and shall be of suitable construction or standard splice kits shall be used. Separable insulated connectors are acceptable for voltages up to 35 kV. Connectors shall be of the loadbreak type as indicated, of suitable construction for the application and the type of cable connected, and shall include cable shield adaptors. Separable insulated connectors shall not be used as substitutes for conventional permanent splices. External clamping points and test points shall be provided.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 8


2.5.3 Low-Voltage Cable Splices

Low-voltage cable splices and terminations shall be rated at not less than 600 Volts. Splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be made with an insulated, solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be made with noninsulated, solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices shall then be covered with an insulation and jacket material equivalent to the conductor insulation and jacket. Splices below grade or in wet locations shall be sealed type conforming to ANSI C119.1 or shall be waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that surrounds the joined conductors.

2.5.4 Terminations

Terminations shall be in accordance with IEEE 48, Class 1 or Class 2; of the molded elastomer, wet-process porcelain, prestretched elastomer, heat-shrinkable elastomer, or taped type. Acceptable elastomers are track-resistant silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene compounds, such as ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer. Separable insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations, when such apparatus is provided with suitable bushings. Terminations shall be of the outdoor type, except that where installed inside outdoor equipment housings which are sealed against normal infiltration of moisture and outside air, indoor, Class 2 terminations are acceptable. Class 3 terminations are not acceptable. Terminations, where required, shall be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable shielding, metallic sheath, and armor.

2.5.4.1 Factory Preformed Type

Molded elastomer, wet-process porcelain, prestretched, and heat-shrinkable terminations shall utilize factory preformed components to the maximum extent practicable rather than tape build-up. Terminations shall have basic impulse levels as required for the system voltage level. Leakage distances shall comply with wet withstand voltage test requirements of IEEE 48 for the next higher Basic Insulation Level (BIL) level.

2.5.4.2 Taped Terminations

Taped terminations shall use standard termination kits providing terminal connectors, field-fabricated stress cones, and rain hoods. Terminations shall be at least 20 inches long from the end of the tapered cable jacket to the start of the terminal connector, or not less than the kit manufacturer's recommendations, whichever is greater.

2.6 CONDUIT AND DUCTS

Duct lines shall be concrete-encased, schedule 40 PVC for medium voltage , low voltage and communications lines shall be non encased schedule 40 PVC.

2.6 Metallic Conduit

Intermediate metal conduit shall comply with UL 1242. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with UL 6 and ANSI C80.1. Metallic conduit

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 9


fittings and outlets shall comply with UL 514A and NEMA FB 1.

2.7 Nonmetallic Ducts

2.7.1 Concrete Encased Ducts

UL 651 Schedule 40.

2.7.2 Direct Burial

UL 651 Schedule 40 or Schedule 80.

2.6.3 Conduit Sealing Compound

Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit shall have a putty-like consistency workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, shall neither slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, nor harden materially when exposed to the air. Compounds shall adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or plastic ducts; metallic conduits or conduit coatings; concrete, masonry, or lead; any cable sheaths, jackets, covers, or insulation materials; and the common metals. Compounds shall form a seal without dissolving, noticeably changing characteristics, or removing any of the ingredients. Compounds shall have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials.

2.9 PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

Transformers shall be of the outdoor type having the ratings and arrangements indicated. Medium-voltage ratings of cable terminations shall be 15kV between phases for 133 percent insulation level.

2.9.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer

Pad-mounted transformers shall comply with IEEE C57.12.26 and shall be of the loop feed type. Pad-mounted transformer station shall be assembled and coordinated by one manufacturer and each transformer station shall be shipped as a complete unit so that field installation requirements are limited to mounting each unit on a concrete pad and connecting it to primary and secondary lines. Stainless steel pins and hinges shall be provided. Barriers shall be provided between high- and low-voltage compartments. High-voltage compartment doors shall be interlocked with low-voltage compartment doors to prevent access to any high-voltage section unless its associated low-voltage section door has first been opened. Compartments shall be sized to meet the specific dimensional requirements of IEEE C57.12.26. Pentahead locking bolts shall be provided with provisions for a padlock. Transformer coils shall be copper.

2.8 High-Voltage Compartments

The high-voltage compartment shall be dead-front construction. Primary switching and protective devices shall include loadbreak switching, oil-immersed, bayonet-type, overload fuse in series with a partial range current-limiting fuse, medium-voltage separable loadbreak connectors, universal bushing wells and inserts or integral one piece bushings and surge arresters. The switch shall be mounted inside transformer tank with switch operating handle located in high-voltage compartment and equipped with metal loop for hook stick operation. Fuses shall be interlocked with switches so that fuses can be removed only when the associated switch is in the "OPEN" position. Adjacent to medium-voltage cable connections, a nameplate or equivalent stenciled inscription shall be provided inscribed

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 10


"DO NOT OPEN CABLE CONNECTORS UNLESS SWITCH IS OPEN." Surge arresters shall be fully insulated and configured to terminate on a second set of high voltage bushings. The contractor shall verify that the transformer switch position is such that the arrestors are connected to the system.

2.9 Load-Break Switch

b. Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position, oil-immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and sectionalizing. Each switch shall be rated at 15kV, 95kV BIL, with a continuous current rating and load-break rating of 200 amperes, and a make-and-latch rating of 10,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handle in the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches shall be as follows:

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW LINE B SW XFMR SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

1 Line A connected to Line B and both lines connected to transformer

X X X

2 Transformer connected to Line A only

X X X

3 Transformer connected to Line B only

X X X

4 Transformer open and loop closed

X X X

5 Transformer open and loop open X X X

2.10 Transformer Tank Sections

Transformers shall comply with IEEE C57.12.00 and IEEE C57.12.21 and shall be of the high molecular weight hydrocarbon. Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor use and shall have 2 separate windings per phase. Standard NEMA primary taps shall be provided. Where primary taps are not specified, 4, 2-1/2 percent rated kVA high-voltage taps shall be provided 2 above and 2 below below rated, primary voltage. Operating handles for primary tap changers for de-energized operation shall be located within high-voltage compartments, externally to transformer tanks. Adjacent to the tap changer operating handle, a nameplate or equivalent stenciled inscription shall be provided and inscribed "DO NOT OPERATE UNDER LOAD." Transformer ratings at 60 Hz shall be as follows:

Three-phase capacity 750 kVA

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 11


Impedance (Minimum) 5.0

Temperature Rise 149 degrees F

High-voltage winding 12470 volts

High-voltage winding connections Delta

Low-voltage winding 480/277 volts

Low-voltage winding connections WYE

2.11 Low-Voltage Cable Compartments

Neutrals shall be provided with fully-insulated bushings. Clamp type cable terminations, suitable for copper conductors entering from below, shall be provided as necessary.

2.9.2.5 Accessories

High-voltage warning signs shall be permanently attached to each side of transformer stations. Voltage warning signs shall comply with IEEE C2. Copper-faced steel or stainless steel ground connection pads shall be provided in both the high- and low-voltage compartments. Dial-type thermometer, liquid-level gauge, and drain valve with built-in sampling device shall be provided for each transformer station. Insulated-bushing-type parking stands shall be provided adjacent to each separable load-break elbow to provide for cable isolation during sectionalizing operations.

2.12 Primary Junction Cabinet

See drawings for primary junction cabinet requirements.

2.13 Metering

Provide a socket-mounted electronic programmable outdoor watt-hour meter, suraface mounted flush against the side of the low-voltage compartment of the transformer as indicated. Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field. When field programming is performed, turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Meter shall be coordinated to system requirements.

Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phse, 4-wire, 480Y/277 volt system with 3 current transformers. Electric meters shall be compatible with the existing wireless Sensus FlexNet Advanced Metering Infrastructure (FlexNet) system to include the existing FlexNet tower gateway base station, regional network interface system components and set to the approved system operating frequency provided by base personnel. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for future connection to Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).

Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current transformers and transformer secondary voltage.

Class: 20; Form: 9S; Accuracy: +/-1.0 percent; Finish: Class II

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 12


Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and unauthorized removal.

Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type.

Demand Register:Provide solid stateMeter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter faceDemand interval length: shall be programmed for 60 minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval

Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the secondary compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to the watt-hour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

Socket: ANSI C12.7. Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket having automatic ciruit-closing bypass and having jaws compatible with requirements of the meter. Cover unused hub openings with blank hub plates. Paint box to match the pad-mounted transformer to which the box-mounted socket is attached.

Current transformers: IEEE C57.13. Provide butyl-molded window type current transformers with 600-volt insulation, 10 kV BIL and mount on the low-voltage bushings. Route current transformer leads in a location as remote as possible from the power transformer secondary cables to permit current measurements to be taken with hook-on-ammeters. Provide three current transformers per power transformer.

2.14 SURGE ARRESTERS

Surge arresters shall comply with NEMA LA 1, and IEEE C62.11 and shall be provided where indicated. Arresters shall be distribution class, rated as shown. Arresters for use at elevations in excess of 6000 feet above mean sea level shall be specifically rated for that purpose. Arresters shall be equipped with mounting brackets suitable for the indicated installations. Arresters shall be of the valve or metal-oxide varistor or combination valve-metal-oxide varistor type.

2.15 GROUNDING AND BONDING

2.15.1 Driven Ground Rods

Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467 not less than 3/4 inch in diameter by 60 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be used.

2.15.2 Grounding Conductors

Grounding conductors shall be bare, except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors. Insulated conductors shall be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except that conductors shall be rated no more than 600 volts. Bare conductors shall be ASTM B8 soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Aluminum is not acceptable.

2.16 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT

Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 13


2.15 PADLOCKS

Padlocks shall comply with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.

2.17 LIQUID DIELECTRICS

Liquid dielectrics for transformers, shall be non-polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) Type FR-3 or equal.

2.17 FACTORY TESTS

Submit certified factory test reports when the manufacturer performs routine factory tests, including tests required by standards listed in paragraph REFERENCES. Results of factory tests performed shall be certified by the manufacturer, or an approved testing laboratory, and submitted within 7 days following successful completion of the tests. The manufacturer's pass-fail criteria for tests specified in paragraph FIELD TESTING shall be included. Factory tests shall be performed, as follows, in accordance with the applicable publications and with other requirements of these specifications. The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 10 days before the equipment is ready for testing. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to witness the tests.

a. Transformers: Manufacturer's standard tests in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00.

g. Factory Preformed Terminations: Wet withstand voltage tests in accordance with IEEE 48 for the next higher BIL level.


Analyses shall be prepared to demonstrate that the equipment selected and system constructed meet the contract requirements for equipment ratings, coordination, and protection. They shall include a fault current analysis, and a protective device coordination study and arc fault analysis. The studies shall be performed by a registered professional engineer with demonstrated experience in power system coordination in the last three years. The analysis shall be performed with easy power software (latest suite). If software other than easy power is utilized it must be fully compatible with easy power (latest suite). The contractor shall certify compatibility with the submittal.

2.18.1 Scope of Analyses

The fault current analysis and protective device coordination study shall begin at the existing upstream 12470 overcurrent device serving the source bus and through all switchboard and panelboard overcurrent device.

2.18.2 Determination of Facts

The time-current characteristics, features, and nameplate data for each existing protective device shall be determined and documented. Assume infinite source current for study purposes.

2.18.3 Single Line Diagram

A single line diagram shall be prepared to show the electrical system buses, devices, transformation points, and all sources of fault current (including generator and motor contributions). A fault-impedance diagram

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 14


or a computer analysis diagram may be provided. Each bus, device or transformation point shall have a unique identifier. If a fault-impedance diagram is provided, impedance data shall be shown. Locations of switches, breakers, and circuit interrupting devices shall be shown on the diagram together with available fault data, and the device interrupting rating.

2.18.4 Fault Current Analysis

2.18.4.1 Method

The fault current analysis shall be performed in accordance with methods described in IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.

2.18.4.2 Data

Actual data shall be utilized in fault calculations. Bus characteristics and transformer impedances shall be those proposed. Data shall be documented in the report.

2.18.5 Coordination Study

Submit the study with protective device equipment submittals. No time extension or similar contract modifications will be granted for work arising out of the requirements for this study. Approval of protective devices proposed shall be based on recommendations of this study. The Government will not be responsible for any changes to equipment, device ratings, settings, or additional labor for installation of equipment or devices ordered and/or procured prior to approval of the study. The study shall demonstrate that the maximum possible degree of selectively has been obtained between devices specified, consistent with protection of equipment and conductors from damage from overloads and fault conditions. The study shall include a description of the coordination of the protective devices in this project. Provide a written narrative that describes: which devices may operate in the event of a fault at each bus; the logic used to arrive at device ratings and settings; situations where system coordination is not achievable due to device limitations (an analysis of any device curves which overlap); coordination between upstream and downstream devices; and any relay settings. Recommendations to improve or enhance system reliability, and detail where such changes would involve additions or modifications to the contract and cost changes (addition or reduction) shall be provided. Composite coordination plots shall be provided on log-log graph paper.

2.18.6 Arc Fault Analysis

Provide arc fault analysis per NFPA 70E. Provide arc flash labels for all equipment per NFPA 70E.

2.18.6 Study Report

a. The report shall include a narrative describing: the analyses performed; the bases and methods used; and the desired method of coordinated protection of the power system.

b. The study shall include descriptive and technical data for existing devices and new protective devices proposed. The data shall include manufacturers published data, nameplate data, and definition of the fixed or adjustable features of the existing or new protective devices.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 15


c. The report shall document power system data including time-current characteristic curves and protective device ratings and settings.

d. The report shall contain fully coordinated composite time-current characteristic curves for each bus in the system, as required to ensure coordinated power system protection between protective devices or equipment. The report shall include recommended ratings and settings of all protective devices in tabulated form.

e. The report shall provide the calculation performed for the analyses, including computer analysis programs utilized. The name of the software package, developer, and version number shall be provided.

f. The report shall provide a tabulation of arc fault recommendations and labels. Apply labels on all equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

As a minimum, submit installation procedures for transformers, and splices. Procedures shall include cable pulling plans, diagrams, instructions, and precautions required to install, adjust, calibrate, and test the devices and equipment. Equipment and devices shall be installed and energized in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Steel conduits installed underground shall be installed and protected from corrosion in conformance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Except as covered herein, excavation, trenching, and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.2.1 Conformance to Codes

The installation shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable.

3.2.2 Disposal of Liquid Dielectrics

PCB-contaminated dielectrics must be marked as PCB and transported to and incinerated by an approved EPA waste disposal facility. Furnish certification of proper disposal. Contaminated dielectrics shall not be diluted to lower the contamination level.

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions which addresses such aspects as cable construction, insulation type, cable diameter, bending radius, cable temperature, lubricants, coefficient of friction, conduit cleaning, storage procedures, moisture seals, testing for and purging moisture, etc. And then prepare a checklist of significant requirements.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 16


3.3.1 Cable Installation Plan and Procedure

Cable shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations. Each circuit shall be identified by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box, and each terminal. Each tag shall contain the following information; cable type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination and phase identification.

3.3.1.1 Cable Inspection

The cable reel shall be inspected for correct storage positions, signs of physical damage, and broken end seals. If end seal is broken, moisture shall be removed from cable in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.1.2 Duct Cleaning

Duct shall be cleaned with an assembly that consists of a flexible mandrel (manufacturers standard product in lengths recommended for the specific size and type of duct) that is 1/4 inch less than inside diameter of duct, 2 wire brushes, and a rag. The cleaning assembly shall be pulled through conduit a minimum of 2 times or until less than a volume of 8 cubic inches of debris is expelled from the duct.

3.3.1.3 Duct Lubrication

The cable lubricant shall be compatible with the cable jacket for cable that is being installed. Application of lubricant shall be in accordance with lubricant manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.1.4 Cable Installation

Provide a cable feeding truck and a cable pulling winch as required. Provide a pulling grip or pulling eye in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations. The pulling grip or pulling eye apparatus shall be attached to polypropylene or manila rope followed by lubricant front end packs and then by power cables. A dynamometer shall be used to monitor pulling tension. Pulling tension shall not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow cables to cross over while cables are being fed into duct. For cable installation in cold weather, cables shall be kept at 50 degrees F temperature for at least 24 hours before installation. Submit 6 copies of the information described below in 8-1/2 by 11 inch binders having a minimum of three rings from which material may readily be removed and replaced, including a separate section for each cable pull. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs, with all data sheets signed and dated by the person supervising the pull.

a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified.

b. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications. The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull.

c. The cable manufacturer and type of cable.

d. The dates of cable pulls, time of day, and ambient temperature.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 17


e. The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling tensions.

f. The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull.

3.3.1.5 Cable Installation Plan

Submit a cable installation plan for all cable pulls in accordance with the detail drawings portion of paragraph SUBMITTALS. Cable installation plan shall include:

a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls identified in numeric order of expected pulling sequence and direction of cable pull.

b. List of cable installation equipment.

c. Lubricant manufacturer's application instructions.

d. Procedure for resealing cable ends to prevent moisture from entering cable.

e. Cable pulling tension calculations of all cable pulls.

f. Cable percentage conduit fill.

g. Cable sidewall thrust pressure.

h. Cable minimum bend radius and minimum diameter of pulling wheels used.

i. Cable jam ratio.

j. Maximum allowable pulling tension on each different type and size of conductor.

k. Maximum allowable pulling tension on pulling device.

3.3.2 Duct Line

Low-voltage cables shall be installed in duct lines where indicated. Neutral and grounding conductors shall be installed in the same duct with their associated phase conductors.

3.4 CABLE JOINTS

Medium-voltage cable joints shall be made by qualified cable splicers only. Qualifications of cable splicers shall be submitted with a certification that contains the names of people recommended to perform the splicing and termination of medium-voltage cables approved for installation under this contract. The certification shall indicate that any person recommended to perform actual splicing and terminations has been adequately trained in the proper techniques and have had at least three recent years of experience in splicing and terminating the same or similar types of cables approved for installation. In addition, any person recommended by the Contractor may be required to perform a practice splice and termination, in the presence of the Contracting Officer, before being approved as a qualified installer of medium-voltage cables. If that additional requirement is imposed, provide short sections of the approved types of cables along with the approved type of splice and termination kits, and detailed manufacturer's instruction for the proper splicing and termination of the approved cable types.. Shields shall be applied as

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 18


required to continue the shielding system through each entire cable joint. Shields may be integrally molded parts of preformed joints. Shields shall be grounded at each joint or in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practice. Cable joints shall provide insulation and jacket equivalent to that of the associated cable. Armored cable joints shall be enclosed in compound-filled, cast-iron or alloy, splice boxes equipped with stuffing boxes and armor clamps of a suitable type and size for the cable being installed.

3.4 DUCT LINES

3.4.1 Requirements

Numbers and sizes of ducts shall be as indicated. Duct lines shall be laid with a minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet. Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high-point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a handhole, or between manholes or handholes. Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable. The minimum manufactured bend radius shall be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch diameter, and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter. Otherwise, long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet shall be used for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically. Both curved and straight sections may be used to form long sweep bends, but the maximum curve used shall be 30 degrees and manufactured bends shall be used. Ducts shall be provided with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in manholes or handholes.

3.4.2 Treatment

Ducts shall be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during construction. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with proper tools and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape. Ducts shall be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned before being laid. Plastic ducts shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun.

3.4.3 Concrete Encasement

Ducts requiring concrete encasements shall comply with NFPA 70, except that electrical duct bank configurations for ducts 6 inches in diameter shall be determined by calculation and as shown on the drawings. The separation between adjacent electric power and communication ducts shall conform to IEEE C2. Duct line encasements shall be monolithic construction. Where a connection is made to a previously poured encasement, the new encasement shall be well bonded or doweled to the existing encasement. Submit proposed bonding method for approval in accordance with the detail drawing portion of paragraph SUBMITTALS. At any point, except railroad and airfield crossings, tops of concrete encasements shall be not less than the cover requirements listed in NFPA 70. Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement, rigid steel conduit will be installed because of its strength. To protect the corrosion-resistant conduit coating, predrilling or installing conduit inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required. For crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet in length, the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be used. Separators or spacing blocks shall be

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 19


made of steel, concrete, plastic, or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than 4 feet on centers. Ducts shall be securely anchored to prevent movement during the placement of concrete and joints shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically.

3.4.4 Nonencased Direct-Burial

Top of duct lines shall be at depth indicated.

3.6.5 Installation of Couplings

Joints in each type of duct shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the particular type of duct and coupling selected and as approved.

3.6.5.2 Plastic Duct

Duct joints shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement on insides of plastic coupling fittings and on outsides of duct ends. Each duct and fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick 1/4-turn twist to set the joint tightly.

3.5 MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND PULLBOXES

3.5.1 Ground Rods

A ground rod shall be installed at the handholes. Ground rods shall be driven into the earth before the manhole floor is poured so that approximately 4 inches of the ground rod will extend above the manhole floor. When precast concrete manholes are used, the top of the ground rod may be below the manhole floor and a No. 1/0 AWG ground conductor brought into the manhole through a watertight sleeve in the manhole wall.

3.6 PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

Pad-mounted equipment, shall be installed on concrete pads in accordance with the manufacturer's published, standard installation drawings and procedures, except that they shall be modified to meet the requirements of this document. Units shall be installed so that they do not damage equipment or scratch painted or coated surfaces. After installation, surfaces shall be inspected and scratches touched up with a paint or coating provided by the manufacturer especially for this purpose.

3.8.1 Concrete Pads

3.6.1 Construction

Concrete pads for pad-mounted electrical equipment shall be poured-in-place. Pads shall be constructed as indicated, except that exact pad dimensions and mounting details are equipment specific and are the responsibility of the Contractor. Tops of concrete pads shall be level and shall project 4 inches above finished grade and sloped to drain. Edges of concrete pads shall have a 3/4 inch chamfer as indicated. Conduits for primary, secondary, and grounding conductors shall be set in place prior to placement of concrete pads. Where grounding electrode conductors are installed through concrete pads, PVC conduit sleeves shall be installed through the concrete to provide physical protection. To facilitate cable installation and termination, the concrete pad shall be provided with a rectangular hole below the primary and secondary compartments, sized in

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 20


accordance with the manufacturer's recommended dimensions. Upon completion of equipment installation the rectangular hole shall be filled with masonry grout.

3.6.2 Concrete and Reinforcement

Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.8.1.3 Sealing

When the installation is complete, seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound. Seals shall be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.

3.7 CONNECTIONS TO BUILDINGS

Cables shall be extended into the various buildings as indicated, and shall be connected to the first applicable termination point in each building. Interfacing with building interior conduit systems shall be at conduit stubouts terminating 5 feet outside of a building. After installation of cables, conduits shall be sealed with caulking compound to prevent entrance of moisture or gases into buildings.

3.8 GROUNDING

A ground ring consisting of the indicated configuration of bare copper conductors and driven ground rods shall be installed around pad-mounted equipment as shown. Equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment, and other noncurrent-carrying metal parts, such as cable shields, cable sheaths and armor, and metallic conduit shall be grounded. At least 2 connections shall be provided from a transformer to the ground mat.


Grounding electrodes shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as follows:

a. Driven rod electrodes - Unless otherwise indicated, ground rods shall be driven into the earth until the tops of the rods are approximately 1 foot below finished grade.

c. Ground ring - A ground ring shall be installed as shown consisting of bare copper conductors installed not less than 30 inches below finished top of soil grade. Ground ring conductors shall be as shown on the drawings.

3.8.2 Grounding and Bonding Connections

Connections above grade shall be made by the fusion-welding process or with bolted solderless connectors, in compliance with UL 467, and those below grade shall be made by a fusion-welding process. Where grounding conductors are connected to aluminum-composition conductors, specially treated or lined copper-to-aluminum connectors suitable for this purpose shall be used.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 21


3.8.3 Grounding and Bonding Conductors

Grounding and bonding conductors include conductors used to bond transformer enclosures and equipment frames to the grounding electrode system. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be sized as shown, and located to provide maximum physical protection. Bends greater than 45 degrees in ground conductors are not permitted. Routing of ground conductors through concrete shall be avoided. When concrete penetration is necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of concrete entrance and exit so as to provide an opening for the ground conductor, and the opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after installation.

3.11.4 Surge Arrester Grounding

Surge arresters and neutrals shall be bonded directly to the transformer enclosure and then to the grounding electrode system with a bare copper conductor, sized as shown. Lead lengths shall be kept as short as practicable with no kinks or sharp bends.

3.8.4 Riser Pole Grounding

A single continuous vertical grounding electrode conductor shall be installed on each riser pole and connected directly to the grounding electrodes indicated on the drawings or required by these specifications. All equipment, neutrals, surge arresters, and items required to be grounded shall be connected directly to this vertical conductor. The grounding electrode conductor shall be sized as shown. Grounding electrode conductors shall be stapled to wood poles at intervals not exceeding 2 feet.

3.12 FIELD TESTING

Submit a proposed field test plan, 20 days prior to testing the installed system. No field test shall be performed until the test plan is approved. The test plan shall consist of complete field test procedures including tests to be performed, test equipment required, and tolerance limits.

3.9 General

Field testing shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer 5 days prior to conducting tests. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. Perform all tests and inspections recommended by the manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Contracting Officer. Maintain a written record of all tests which includes date, test performed, personnel involved, devices tested, serial number and name of test equipment, and test results. Field test reports shall be signed and dated by the Contractor.

3.10 Safety

Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers, and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity. Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test procedures or handling.

3.11 Ground-Resistance Tests

The resistance of the ground ring shall be measured using the

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 22


fall-of-potential method defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

a. Single rod electrode - 25 ohms.

b. Multiple rod electrodes - 10 ohms.

d. Ground ring - 10 ohms.

3.12 Medium-Voltage Cable Test

After installation and before the operating test or connection to an existing system, the medium-voltage cable system shall be given a high potential test. Direct-current voltage shall be applied on each phase conductor of the system by connecting conductors as one terminal and connecting grounds or metallic shieldings or sheaths of the cable as the other terminal for each test. Prior to making the test, the cables shall be isolated by opening applicable protective devices and disconnecting equipment. The test shall be conducted with all splices, connectors, and terminations in place. The method, voltage, length of time, and other characteristics of the test for initial installation shall be for the particular type of cable installed, except that 28 kV and 35 kV insulation test voltages shall be in accordance with either AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8 as applicable, and shall not exceed the recommendations of IEEE 404 for cable joints and IEEE 48 for cable terminations unless the cable and accessory manufacturers indicate higher voltages are acceptable for testing. Should any cable fail due to a weakness of conductor insulation or due to defects or injuries incidental to the installation or because of improper installation of cable, cable joints, terminations, or other connections, make necessary repairs or replace cables as directed. Repaired or replaced cables shall be retested.

3.13 Low-Voltage Cable Test

Low-voltage cable, complete with splices, shall be tested for insulation resistance after the cables are installed, in their final configuration, ready for connection to the equipment, and prior to energization. The test voltage shall be 500 volts dc, applied for one minute between each conductor and ground and between all possible combinations conductors in the same trench, duct, or cable, with all other conductors in the same trench, duct, or conduit. The minimum value of insulation shall be:

R in megohms = (rated voltage in kV + 1) x 1000/(length of cable in feet

Each cable failing this test shall be repaired or replaced. The repaired cable shall be retested until failures have been eliminated.

3.12.7 Liquid-Filled Transformer Tests

The following field tests shall be performed. Pass-fail criteria shall be in accordance with transformer manufacturer's specifications.

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 23


c. Correct phase sequence.

d. Correct operation of tap changer.

3.12.13 Operating Tests

After the installation is completed, and at such times as the Contracting Officer may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements herein. Submit 6 copies of the tests report in 8-1/2 by 11 inch binders having a minimum of three rings, including a separate section for each test. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs. The operating test report shall include the following:

a. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.b. A copy of measurements taken.c. The dates of testing.d. The equipment and values to be verified.e. The condition specified for the test.f. The test results, signed and dated.g. A description of adjustments made.

3.14 ACCEPTANCE

Final acceptance of the facility will not be given until the Contractor has successfully completed all tests and after all defects in installation, material or operation have been corrected.


SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 24

VOLUME 3 OF 4 - Green-Simmons · VOLUME 3 OF 4 DIVISION 14 ... ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM...

Documents

Transcript of VOLUME 3 OF 4 - Green-Simmons · VOLUME 3 OF 4 DIVISION 14 ... ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM...